Fresh X - CH CH Hyper Supermarkets Specification - May 2019-Cvm

CHECKERS HYPER
FRESH “X”
CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER
&
SUPERMARKETS
SPECIFICATION
FRESH “X” CHECKERS
2019
EDITION
© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION
GENERAL CONTENTS
(REVISION – A)
SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION 1-5
2 GENERAL SPECIFICATION 6 - 19
3 CONCRETOR 20 - 31
4 BRICKLAYER 32 - 37
5 PLASTERER 38 - 46
6 TILER & PAVER 47 - 62
7 CARPENTER 63 - 65
8 IRONMONGER 66 - 67
9 FOUNDER & SMITH 68 - 70
10 PLUMBER & DRAINLAYER 71 - 78
11 PAINTER 79 - 81
12 GLAZIER 82 - 83
13 WATERPROOFER 84 - 85
14 SITE WORKS 86 - 88
15 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 89 - 171
16 MECHANICAL 172 - 181
17 REFRIGERATION & INSULATION 182 - 187
18 FIRE 188 - 190
19 SIGNAGE 191
20 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES 192 - 218
21 GENERAL DETAILS DET01 - R24
22 TYPICAL LAYOUTS T01 - T31
© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD

FRESH ”X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER
A
DETAILED CONTENTS
FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER (REVISION – A)
SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION PAGE
1.1 NOTES 1
1.2 SPECIALIST CONSULTANTS 2
1.2.1 Architect 2
1.2.2 Electrical Consultant 2
1.2.3 Structural/Civil Engineer 2
1.2.4 Insulation Consultant 2
1.2.5 Mechanical Consultant 3
1.2.6 Fire Consultant 3
1.2.7 Acoustic Consultant 3
1.2.8 Plumbing Consultant 3
1.2.9 Refrigeration Consultant 3
1.3 SPECIALIST CONTRACTORS 3
1.3.1 Refrigeration Contractor 3
1.3.2 IT Contractor 3
1.3.3 Security Contractor 4
1.3.4 Service Department Equipment 4
1.4 SUPERVISION 4
1.5 PLANS 4
1.6 PROGRAMME 4
1.7 BENEFICIAL OCCUPATION 4
SECTION 2: GENERAL
2.1 NAME BOARDS AND PERMANENT SIGNS 6
2.2 PARKING AREAS 6
2.2.1 Lighting in Parking Area 6
2.2.2 Ramps 6
2.2.3 Bollards 6

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER
B
2.2.4 Trolley Bay 6

2.3 WALKWAYS AND COMMON AREAS 7
2.4 ENTRANCE TO SUPERMARKET 7
2.5 PERIMETER WALLS 7
2.6 ROOF 7
2.6.1 Roof Covering 7
2.6.2 Roof Insulation 8
2.6.3 Steel Roof Structure 8
2.6.3.1 Trading Area 8
2.6.3.2 Bulk Store 8
2.6.4 Concrete Roof Structure 9
2.6.4.1 Trading Area 9
2.6.4.2 Bulk Store 9
2.6.4.3 External Canopies 10
2.7 FLOORS 10
2.7.1 Trading Floor Surface Bed 10
2.7.2 Trading Floor on a Suspended Slab 11
2.7.3 Bulk Store Surface Bed, Receiving, Goods Handling and Services Passages 11
2.7.4 Bulk Store, Receiving Areas and Goods Handling on Suspended Slab 13
2.7.5 Core Drills 13
2.7.6 Existing Floors 13
2.8 VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION 13
2.8.1 Goods Lifts 13
2.8.2 Conveyer 14
2.8.3 Dock Leveller 14
2.8.4 Passenger Lifts 14
2.8.5 Maintenance to Vertical Transportation 14
2.9 SUPERMARKET AREAS 15
2.9.1 Entrance Area 15
2.9.2 Money Market 15

C
2.9.3 Kiosk 15
2.9.4 Manager Office 16
2.9.5 Admin Office 16
2.9.6 Scanning Office 16
2.9.7 Camera Room 16
2.9.8 Cash Offices 16
2.9.9 Customer Service (Fresh “X” Checkers Hyper only) 16
2.9.10 Checkout Arcade 16
2.9.11 Dispensary 16
2.9.12 Health and Beauty 17
2.9.13 Trading Area 17
2.9.14 Hot Deli 17
2.9.15 Cold Deli 17
2.9.16 Back-Up Deli 17
2.9.17 Fish Area 17
2.9.18 Bakery Area 17
2.9.19 Butchery Area 17
2.9.20 Fruit and Veg Prep 18
2.9.21 Back of House Deli Prep 18
2.9.22 Wine Area 18
2.9.23 Receiving Office 18
2.9.24 Wet Refuse Room 18
2.9.25 Carton Store (Dry Refuse Room) 18
2.9.26 Receiving Yard 18
2.9.27 Crate Store 19
2.9.28 Yard Toilet and Shower 19
2.9.29 Gate House 19
2.9.30 Trolley Wash Bay 19
2.9.31 Returns and Returns Sorting Room 19
2.10 GALVANIZED BUMPER RAIL 19

D
2.11 STAINLESS STEEL BUMPER RAIL 19

2.12 BULKHEADS 19
SECTION 3: CONCRETOR
3.1 GENERAL 20
3.2 MATERIALS 20
3.2.1 Cement 20
3.2.1.1 General 20
3.2.1.2 Common Cements 20
(i) Composition 21
(ii) Strength Performance 22
3.2.1.3 Masonry Cements 22
(i) Composition 23
(ii) Strength Performance 23
3.2.1.4 Selecting Cements 23
3.2.1.5 Storage 24
3.2.2 Sand (Fine Aggregate) and Stone (Coarse Aggregate) 24
3.2.3 Admixtures 25
3.2.4 Water 25
3.2.5 Coarse Aggregate (Stone) 25
3.3 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION 25
3.3.1 Mixing 26
3.3.2 Placing 26
3.3.3 Curing 26
3.3.4 Removal of Formwork and Props 26
3.3.5 Ready-Mix Concrete 27
3.3.6 Yard Paving 27
3.3.7 Surface Beds 27
3.3.8 Floor Trenches 27
3.3.9 Concrete Steps 27

E
3.3.10 Polyethylene Film 27

3.3.11 Loading of Slabs 27
3.3.12 Pipes, Sleeves, etc. in Concrete 28
3.3.13 Floors in Loading Areas 28
3.3.14 Power Floating 28
3.3.15 Jointing 28
3.3.16 Reinforcement 28
3.3.16.1 Material 28
(i) Bending of Bars 29
(ii) Fixing of Bars 29
(iii) Tolerances 29
(iv) General Rules 29
3.4 HARDENED CONCRETE 30
3.4.1 Quality 30
3.4.2 Strength 30
3.4.3 Tolerances 30
SECTION 4: BRICKLAYER
4.1 MASONRY WALLS 32
4.2 SAND/CEMENT MORTAR 32
4.2.1 General 32
4.2.2 Materials 32
4.2.2.1 Fine Aggregate (Sand) 33
4.2.2.2 Admixtures 33
4.2.3 Mix Proportions 33
4.2.4 Construction: Consistency and Time Limits 33
4.2.5 Hardened Mortar or Plaster: Quality of Mortar 34
4.3 BURNT CLAY MASONRY UNITS 34
4.3.1 Strength 34
4.3.2 Tolerances 34

F
4.3.3 Water-Absorption 35
4.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 35
4.4.1 Strength 35
4.4.2 Tolerances 36
4.5 DAMP-PROOF COURSE 36
4.6 POINTING 37
4.7 BAGGED FINISH TO BRICKWORK 37
4.8 AIR BRICKS 37
4.9 CLEANING OFF 37
4.10 FLOOR TRENCHES 37
4.11 SEALER 37
SECTION 5: PLASTERER
5.1 SAND/CEMENT SCREEDS 38
5.1.1 General 38
5.1.2 Bonded Screeds 38
5.1.3 Monolithic Screeds 39
5.1.4 Materials 39
5.1.6 Construction 40
5.1.6.1 Consistency and Time Limits 40
5.1.6.2 Application of Screeds 40
5.1.6.3 Finishing 41
5.1.6.4 Curing of Screeds 41
5.1.7 Hardened Screeds 42
5.1.7.1 Quality of Screeds 42
5.1.7.2 Deviation from Datum Level and Surface Regularity 42
5.1.7.3 Screed Strength 42

G
5.1.7.4 Adhesion of the Screed to Base Concrete 42

5.2 FINISH OF CEMENT PAVINGS, ETC. 43
5.3 GRANOLITHIC STAIRS 43
5.4 SAND/CEMENT PLASTER 43
5.4.1 General 43
5.4.2 Materials 43
(i) External Plaster 44
(ii) Internal Plaster 44
(iii) Roughcast Plaster 45
5.4.4.1 Consistency and Time Limits 45
5.4.4.2 Application of Plaster 45
5.4.4.3 Curing of Plaster 45
5.4.5 Hardened Plaster: Quality 45
5.5 FLOORS TO COLD ROOMS/FREEZER ROOMS 46
SECTION 6: TILER & PAVER

6.1 BACKGROUND PREPARATION (CERAMIC TILES) 47
6.2 ADHESIVE SYSTEM 47
6.2.1 General Areas 47
6.2.2 Oven and Stove Surrounds 47
6.2.3 General 47
6.3 GROUTING 48
6.3.1 Application 48
6.3.3 Food Preparation Areas (Bakery, Butchery, Deli, Fishery) 49
6.4 MOVEMENT JOINTS 50

H
6.5 BACKGROUND PREPARATION (PORCELAIN TILES) 50

6.6.2 Oven and Stove Surrounds 51
6.6.3 General 51
6.7 GROUTING 52
6.7.1 Application Process 52
6.9 BACKGROUND PREPARATION (SURFACE BEDS) 54
6.11 GROUTING 55
6.11.1 Application Process 55
6.11.2 Trading Areas 55
6.13 BACKGROUND PREPARATION (SUSPENDED SLABS) 58
6.14 WATERPROOFING (FOOD PREP AREAS, WHERE REQUIRED) 58
6.15 COVING AREAS & INTERNAL CORNERS 59
6.16 FLOOR WASTE/FULL BORE DRAINS 59
6.17 MAIN AREA APPLICATION 59
6.19 GROUTING 60
6.20 FOOD PREPARATION AREAS (BAKERY, BUTCHERY, DELI, FISHERY) 61
SECTION 7: CARPENTER
7.1 HARDWOOD 63
7.2 TIMBER GENERALLY 63

I
7.3 JOINERY PRIMING 63

7.4 WOOD PRESERVATIVE 63
7.5 SKIMMED/PLASTERED CEILINGS 63
7.6 SUSPENDED CEILINGS 64
7.7 INSULATION TO CEILINGS 64
7.8 CEILING VOIDS/FIRE COMPARTMENTS 64
7.9 FRAMED, LEDGED AND BATTENED DOORS 64
7.10 FLUSH DOORS 64
7.11 DOOR STOPS 65
7.12 WEATHER BOARDS 65
7.13 TRAP DOORS 65
7.14 BUMP RAILS 65
7.14.1 Galvanised Pipe Bump Rail 65
7.14.2 Stainless Steel Bump Rail 65
SECTION 8: IRONMONGER
8.1 GENERAL 66
8.2 SCREWS 66
8.3 KEYS 66
8.4 STAMPING 66
8.5 KEY LABELS 66
8.6 DOOR FURNITURE AND IRONMONGERY 66
8.7 LOCKS 66
8.8 INDICATOR BOLTS 66
8.9 NAME PLATES 66
8.10 KICKING PLATES 66
8.11 BARREL BOLTS 66
8.12 TOWEL RAILS 67
8.13 TOILET ROLL HOLDERS 67
8.14 LOCK CHANGE AT BENEFICIAL HANDOVER 67

J
8.15 LOCK TO STRONG ROOMS 67
SECTION 9: FOUNDER & SMITH

9.1 PRESSED STEEL DOOR FRAMES 68
9.2 CORNER PROTECTORS 68
9.3 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS 68
9.4 BULKHEADS 68
9.5 STRONG ROOM DOOR 68
9.6 IMPACT TRAFFIC DOORS 68
9.7 ALUMINIUM DOORS AND SHOP FRONTS 69
9.7.1 Anodizing 69
9.7.2 Powder Coating 69
9.7.4 Fittings 69
9.7.5 Glazing 70
9.8 ROLLER SHUTTERS 70
9.8.1 General 70
9.8.2 Receiving 70
SECTION 10: PLUMBER & DRAINLAYER

10.1 LOCAL AUTHORITIES 71
10.2 PVC SEWER PIPES 71
10.3 CAST IRON PIPES 71
10.4 MILD STEEL PIPING 71
10.5 COPPER PIPES 71
10.6 PLASTIC WASTE TRAPS 71
10.7 STONEWARE 71
10.8 GRATINGS 71
10.9 GENERAL INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE AND WATER 71
10.10 GEYSERS EMERGENCY DRAINS 71

K
10.11 POLYETHYLENE AND UPVC PIPES 71

10.12 MAIN PIPE CONNECTIONS 71
10.13 STANDARD FITTINGS 71
10.14 SANITARY FITTINGS 72
10.15 WATER CONNECTION AND METER 72
10.16 COLD WATER SUPPLY 72
10.17 HOT WATER SUPPLY 72
10.18 WATER TAPS AND VALVES 73
10.19 STOP COCKS 73
10.20 SINKS 73
10.21 HAND WASH BASINS 74
10.22 URINALS 74
10.23 PEDESTAL WATER CLOSET PANS 74
10.24 CISTERNS 74
10.25 GREASE TRAPS 74
10.26 FLOOR TRAPS 75
10.27 SUMP PUMPS AND PIPE WORK 75
10.28 WATER SUPPLY TO REFRIGERATION CABINETS 75
10.29 WATER SUPPLY TO BAKERY OVENS AND PROOVER 75
10.30 OVERHEAD SPRAY UNIT FOR FRUIT & VEG AND FISHERY 75
10.31 CONDENSATION DRAINS IN FLOOR TRENCHES 75
10.32 UNDER SLAB FIXING 75
10.33 ICE MACHINES 76
10.34 CONVECTION OVEN 76
10.35 DRAIN TO PROOVER AND OVEN 76
10.36 EXCAVATION AND FILLING 76
10.37 GULLEYS 76
10.38 HOLES & CHASES FOR PIPES 76
10.39 SURFACE MOUNTED PIPING 76
10.40 DRAINS TO COLD ROOMS 76

L
10.41 SUSPENDED PIPING IN TENANTED AREAS 76

10.42 UNDER COUNTER GEYSERS 77
10.43 HEAT PUMPS 77
10.44 TRENCHING 77
10.45 BEDDING AND SIDEFILLING 77
10.46 MATERIAL FOR BEDDING SIDEFILLING 78
10.47 COMPACTION 78
10.48 CONNECTIONS TO EXTERNAL SERVICES 78
10.49 WATER TANK 78
10.50 FLOOR DRAINS TO PREP AREA 78
10.51 FLOOR DRAINS IN COLDROOMS 78
SECTION 11: PAINTER

11.1 GENERAL 79
11.2 PREPARATORY WORK 80
11.3 APPLICATION OF PAINTS, ETC. 80
11.4 PAINTING TO WOODWORK 81
11.5 OILING AND WAXING TO HARDWOOD 81
11.6 PAINTING TO METALWORK 81
11.7 PAINTING TO CEILINGS 81
11.8 PAINTING TO INTERNAL WALLS 81
11.9 LEAVE PERFECT 81
SECTION 12: GLAZIER

12.1 GLASS 82
12.2 GLAZING 82
12.3 MIRRORS 83
12.4 WINDOWS 83

M
SECTION 13: WATERPROOFER

13.1 GENERAL 84
13.2 WATERPROOFING OF FLAT ROOFS 84
13.3 SPECIALISTS 84
13.4 SURFACE-BEDS 84
13.5 WATER-TIGHTNESS 84
13.6 ON SUSPENDED CONCRETE SLABS 85
13.6.1 Cold & Freezer Rooms 85
13.6.2 Food Prep Areas, Service Departments, Cleaners Room,
Toilet Areas, Staff Canteen Prep and Wet Returns Room 85
SECTION 14: SITE WORKS

14.1 GENERAL 86
14.2 DEMARCATION 86
14.3 TROLLEY BAYS 86
14.4 BOLLARDS 86
14.5 SIGNAGE 87
14.6 TRAFFICABLE KERBS 87
14.7 PAVED AREAS, FILLING AND SOIL TESTS 87
14.7.1 General 87
14.7.2 Specification for Parking Areas 87
14.7.3 Specification for Loading Areas 87
14.7.4 Filling 88
14.7.5 Soil Tests 88
SECTION 15: ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

SECTION 15.1: DETAILED SPECIFICATION
15.1.1 General 89
15.1.2 Landlord Infrastructure 89
15.1.2.1 Existing System (Local Supply Authority) 89

N
15.1.2.2 New Mains Power Supply System 89

15.1.2.3 Mall and Walkways 90
15.1.2.4 Supermarket 90
15.1.2.5 Line Shops 90
15.1.2.6 Power and Site Lighting 91
15.1.3 Supermarket Infrastructure 91
15.1.3.1 Permanent Power 91
15.1.3.2 Services Co-Ordination 92
15.1.4 Mains Supply & Distribution Boards 92
15.1.4.1 New Mains Power Supply 92
15.1.4.2 Main Distribution Board : MDB and DB1 92
15.1.4.3 Power Factor Correction 95
15.1.4.4 Refrigeration Switch Board (by Refrigeration Contractor) 95
15.1.4.5 Air-Conditioning, Ventilation and Smoke Extraction
(Distribution Board by Air-Conditioning Contractor) 95
15.1.5 Emergency & Essential Power Supply 96
15.1.5.1 Standby Generator 96
15.1.5.2 Equipment to be Supplied with Emergency Power 97
15.1.5.3 Generator Specification 97
15.1.5.4 Maintenance to Generator/s 99
15.1.5.5 Un-interruptible Power Supply (UPS) 99
15.1.6 Area Description 101
15.1.6.1 Main Entrance 101
15.1.6.2 Money Market 101
15.1.6.3 Kiosk 102
15.1.6.4 Manager’s Office 102
15.1.6.5 Administration Office 103
15.1.6.6 Scanning Room 104
15.1.6.7 Dark Room 104
15.1.6.8 Cash Office 105

O
15.1.6.9 Cash-Up Room 106

15.1.6.10 Camera Room 107
15.1.6.11 Check Out Arcade 107
15.1.6.12 Trade Floor 108
15.1.6.13 Dispensary 110
15.1.6.14 Deli 111
15.1.6.15 Bakery 113
15.1.6.16 Fish 114
15.1.6.17 Butchery 116
15.1.6.18 Wine Section 117
15.1.6.19 Cheese Section 117
15.1.6.20 Fruit & Vegetable Boats 117
15.1.7 Facilities Area Description 118
15.1.7.1 Staff Facilities 118
15.1.7.2 Training Room 118
15.1.7.3 Receiving Office 119
15.1.7.4 Receiving Cages 119
15.1.7.5 Bulk Store 120
15.1.7.6 Staff Entrance 121
15.1.7.7 Cold Rooms & Freezer Rooms 121
15.1.7.8 Fruit & Veg Prep Facility 122
15.1.7.9 Wet Refuse 122
15.1.7.10 Receiving Yard 123
15.1.8 Circuitry and Switching 123
15.1.9 Signage 124
15.1.10 Telephone and Computer Wire-Way Networks 124
15.1.11 Auxiliary Services Conduit Systems 124
15.1.11.1 Smoke Detection System 125
15.1.11.2 Access Control to Cash Office 125
15.1.11.3 Public Address System 125

P
15.1.11.4 Intruder Alarm System 125

15.1.11.5 CCTV Surveillance & Monitoring 125
15.1.11.6 EAS System 125
15.1.12 Landlord Provision (Checkers Development) 125
15.1.12.1 Landlord’s Power Provision and Site Lighting 125
15.1.12.2 Line Shops and Sub-Distribution Circuits 126
15.1.12.3 Main Distribution Board: MDB-LS 126
15.1.12.4 Sub-Distribution Boards 126
15.1.12.5 Sub-Circuits 126
15.1.13 Provisional Sum Items 126
15.1.13.1 Smoke Detection System 127
SECTION 15.2: STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

15.2.1 General 127
15.2.2 Regulations 127
15.2.3 Materials and Workmanship 128
15.2.4 Arrangements with the Supply Authority 128
15.2.5 Testing the Installation 129
15.2.6 Conduit 129
15.2.6.1 Plain-End Conduit 129
15.2.6.2 PVC Conduit 129
15.2.6.3 Flexible Conduit 129
15.2.6.4 Conduit Accessories 129
(i) Metal Circular Type Boxes 129
(ii) Metal Switch Boxes and Socket Outlet Boxes 129
(iii) Non-Metallic Conduit Accessories 130
15.2.7 Installation of Conduits 130
15.2.7.1 Installation in Concrete Slabs 130
15.2.7.2 Surface Mounted Conduit 131
15.2.7.3 Conduit in Roof Spaces 132

Q
15.2.7.4 Conduits in Brickwork 132

15.2.7.5. Conduit Termination 132
15.2.7.6 Installation of PVC Conduit 133
15.2.7.7 Painting of Conduits 134
15.2.7.8 Installation of Flexible Conduits 134
15.2.7.9 General Requirements for the Installation of Conduits and Outlet Boxes 134
15.2.7.10 Expansion Joints 135
15.2.8 Cable Trunking, Ducting and Power Skirting 135
15.2.8.1 Cable Trunking 135
15.2.9 Wiring of Conduit 137
15.2.10 Wiring of Cable Trunking 138
15.2.11 Armoured Cables 138
15.2.12 Installation of Armoured Cables 138
15.2.12.1 Termination of Cables 138
15.2.12.2 Termination of PVC Insulated Cables 139
15.2.12.3 Connection of Cable Conductors 139
15.2.12.4 Testing of Cables 139
15.2.13 Cable Trays and Ladders 140
15.2.13.1 Metal Cable Trays 140
15.2.13.2 Cable Ladders 140
15.2.13.3 Accessories 141
15.2.13.4 Supports 141
15.2.13.5 Fixing to Structure 141
15.2.14 Wall Sockets and Fixing 142
15.2.15 Light Switches 142
15.2.15.1 Flush and Surface Mounted Switches 142
15.2.15.2 Watertight Switches 143
15.2.15.3 Ceiling Switches 143
15.2.16 Sockets Outlets 143
15.2.16.1 Flush and Surface Mounted Switched Sockets 143

R
15.2.16.2 Watertight-Switched Sockets 144

15.2.16.3 Un-Switched Socket Outlets 144
15.2.17 Installation of Light Switches and Socket Outlets 144
15.2.18 Automatic Switching Devices 145
15.2.18.1 Time Switches 145
15.2.18.2 Photo-Electronic Daylight Sensitive Switch 145
15.2.19 Distribution Boards 146
15.2.19.1 Flush Mounted Distribution Boards 146
(i) Bonding Tray 146
(ii) Architrave Frame 146
(iii) Doors 146
(iv) Chassis 147
(v) Gland Plate 147
(vi) Front Panels 147
(vii) Busbars 147
(viii) Wiring 148
(ix) Expanded Metal 149
15.2.19.2 Surface Mounted Distribution Boards 149
15.2.19.3 Distribution Boards: General 149
(i) Mounting of Circuit Breakers 149
(ii) Instrumentation 149
(iii) Busbars 149
(iv) Finish 150
(v) Labelling 150
(vi) Drawings of Approval 151
15.2.20 Kilowatt-Hour Meters 152
15.2.21 Instantaneous and Maximum Demand Ammeters 152
15.2.22 Voltmeters 152
15.2.23 Current Transformers 153
15.2.24 Isolators 153

S
15.2.25 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers 153

15.2.26 Earth Leakage Relays 154
15.2.27 Contactors 154
15.2.28 Mounting Heights of Switches, Socket Outlets, Distribution Boards, etc 155
15.2.29 Light Fittings 155
15.2.29.1 Fluorescent Light Fittings 155
15.2.29.2 Bulkhead Compact Fluorescent Fittings 156
15.2.30 Installation of Light Fittings 156
15.2.31 Connections to Equipment 158
15.2.31.1 Connections to Outlets 158
15.2.31.2 Connections to Hot Water Cylinders 158
15.2.31.3 Connections to Cooking Appliances 158
15.2.32 Balancing of Load 159
15.2.33 Earthing 159
15.2.33.1 General 159
15.2.33.2 Main Earth 160
15.2.33.3 Low Tension System 160
15.2.33.4 Buildings 161
15.2.34 Power Factor Correction Equipment 161
15.2.35 Telephone/Data Installation 161
15.2.35.1 General Requirements 161
15.2.35.2 Main Telephone Distribution Board 161
15.2.35.3 Telephone Outlets 162
15.2.36 Painting and Finishes 162
15.2.37 Inspection 162
15.2.38 Guarantee 163
15.2.39 Documented Records 163
SECTION 15.3: STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION : TABLES

Table 1 164

T
Table 2 165
Table 5 166
Method 1 - 5 167
Table 6 168
Table 7 168
Table 8 169
Table 9 170
Table 10 170
Table 11 171
Table 12 171
Table 13 171
Table 14 171
SECTION 16: MECHANICAL

16.1 DESIGN CONDITIONS 172
16.1.1 Altitude 172
16.1.2 Ambient Design Conditions 172
16.1.3 Noise Levels 172
16.2 AIR-CONDITIONING 173
16.2.1 Trading Area and Checkout Arcade 173
16.2.2 Scanning Offices 173
16.2.3 Cash & Cash-Up Offices 173
16.2.4 Receiving Office 173
16.2.5 Admin Manager’s Office 174
16.2.6 Staff Canteen & Training Rooms 174
16.2.7 Dispensary 174
16.2.8 Bulk Store 174
16.3 VENTILATION 175
16.3.1 Back-Up Service Area 175
16.3.2 Bulk Store 175

U
16.3.3 Exhaust Canopy Systems 175

16.3.4 Air Curtains 177
16.3.5 Fire Smoke Extract Ventilation Systems 177
16.4 ELECTRICAL WORK AND CONTROL 178
16.5 COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE 178
16.6 WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT BY OTHERS 179
16.6.1 Builder’s Work 179
16.6.2 Electrical Work 179
16.7 GENERAL INFORMATION 180
16.7.1 Supermarkets with no Ceilings over the Trading and the Checkout Arcade 180
16.7.2 General Conditions 180
SECTION 17: REFRIGERATION & INSULATION: Builders Work

SECTION 17.1: REFRIGERATION 182
17.1.1 Description of Work 182
17.1.2 Plant Room Layout Requirements 182
17.1.3 Plant Room 183
17.1.4 Penetrations 184
17.1.5 Pipe Risers 184
17.1.6 Condensate Drains 184
17.1.7 Core Drills 185
17.1.8 Trenches 185
17.1.9 General 185
17.1.10 Electrical Work 186
SECTION 17.2: INSULATION INSTALLATION
17.2.1 Description of Work 186
SECTION 18: FIRE

18.1 GENERAL 188
18.2 RATIONAL FIRE DESIGN 188

V
18.3 HYDRANTS, HOSE REELS AND PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 188

18.4 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER INSTALLATION 189
18.5 FIRE WATER SUPPLY 189
18.6 FIRE DETECTION AND MANUALLY ACTIVATED ALARM SYSTEM 189
18.7 SMOKE VENTILATION 189
18.8 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 190
18.9 STATUTORY SAFETY SIGNAGE 190
18.10 VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM 190
18.11 FIRE BLANKETS 190
18.12 GAS INSTALLATION 190
18.13 STANDBY GENERATOR 190
18.14 GAS SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS AT COOKING EXTRACT CANOPIES 190
SECTION 19: SIGNAGE

19.1 SIGNAGE 191
SECTION 20: SCHEDULE OF FINISHES

20.1 FLOORING 192-194
20.2 SKIRTING 195
20.3 WALLS 196-199
20.4 PAINT 200-202
20.5 CEILING 203-205
20.6 SANITARYWARE 206-217
20.7 LIGHT FITTINGS 218
SECTION 21: DETAILS

21.1 GENERAL DETAILS DET01~DET66
21.2 DOOR DETAILS D01~D20
ROLLER SHUTTERS RS1~RS3
MAIN ENTRANCE SF1A~SF1C

W
DOOR STACKING CUBCILE SF2

FHR CUBICLE DOOR IN ARCADE SF3
ADMIN OFFICE, SCANNING OFFICE ENTRANCE, BUTCHERY OFFICE,
ENTRANCE TO MEDIRITE, CAMERA ROOM (IF IN ARCADE) SF4
DARK ROOM SF5
ROLLER SHUTTER CORNER PROTECTOR & EXTERNAL DOOR DETAIL
21.3 WINDOW DETAILS VP01~VP05
21.4 SANITARY DETAILS SA01~SA10
21.5 WIRE SCREEN DETAILS WS01~WS19
21.6 REFRIGERATION DETAILS R01~R24
SECTION 22: TYPICAL LAYOUTS

22.1 MONEY MARKET T01
22.2 KIOSK T02
22.3 MANAGERS AND ADMIN OFFICE T03
22.4 CUSTOMER SERVICES T04
22.5 SCANNING OFFICE T05
22.6 CASH OFFICE T06
22.7 SAFE T07
22.8 CAFÉ T08
22.9 COLD ISLAND DELI T09
22.10 HOT DELI AND CHEESE T10
22.11 BACK DELI PREP T11
22.12 WINE SHOP T12
22.13 BAKERY AREA T13
22.14 FISH AREA T14
22.15 BUTCHERY AREA AND OFFICE / STORE T15
22.16 TECH X T16
22.17 PERSONAL CARE AND BABY T17
22.18 DISPENSARY T18

X
22.19 DISABLED TOILET T19

22.20 STAFF FACILITAIES T20
22.21 TRAINING ROOM T21
22.22 CLEANING ROOM T22
22.23 CAMERA ROOM T23
22.24 RETURNS T24
22.25 RECEIVING OFFICE T25
22.26 FRUIT AND VEG PREP T26
22.27 REFUSE ROOM T27
22.28 RECEIVING YARD T28
22.29 SECURITY BOOTH, YARD TOILET AND SHOWER T29
22.30 TROLLEY WASH BAY T30
22.31 GENERATOR ROOM T31

PAGE
1
SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION (REVISION – A)

1.1 NOTES
The abbreviation “SABS” - used hereinafter refers to the appropriate South African
Bureau of Standards Specification
This specification must be read together with the finishing schedule and other
schedules attached hereto for further description and specification of all
material and workmanship for each section.
All materials etc. specified hereinafter under a trade name, catalogue number or
reference, to be either exactly as described or, in the opinion of the Shoprite Checkers
Architect, of equal quality specification in all respects.
The proposed Supermarket is to be erected in a workmanlike and expeditious

manner, and where Standard Codes of Practice exist the work is to be carried out in
accordance with them.
All materials used in the construction of the proposed Supermarket to be the best of
their respective kinds.
Only new materials may be used. No second hand materials will be permitted.
All work done as specified hereunder is to be in accordance with the Local Authorities
Regulations. All structural work is to be in accordance with the National Building
Regulations SANS 10400:1990 (as revised November 2011 ISBN 978-0-626-26805-3),
SANS 10400 XA, and South African Bureau of Standards, at the discretion and to the
approval of the Local Authority.
These Specifications, Drawings and Schedules are submitted as an outline of Shoprite

Checkers’ general requirements and SRC Specialist Consultants. The Shoprite
Checkers Consultants work drawings will deem to be the final specification
details and will supersede this specification should there be contradictions
between the two. No additional cost arising out of any discrepancy will be
entertained by Shoprite Checkers unless it has been identified and agreed to by
an authorised SRC representative and the cost calculated by the
Landlord/Developer’s Quantity Surveyor prior to the work being carried out.
These documents do not supersede standards of good building practice, which are at
all times to be adhered to.
All plans, sections and elevations depicting the true intent of the overall development,
including the area allocated to the supermarket premises, must be available for
PAGE
2
inspection by the Shoprite Checkers Architect. Shoprite Checkers will not assume
responsibility for any abortive costs associated with early planning and
construction prior to their approval of a final store layout issued for
construction.
This Specification refers to Fresh “X” Checkers and Checkers Hyper stores with
differences in colour schemes and finishes. In some instances both elements of
finishes schedule will apply, and will be confirmed by the SRC Architect.
1.2 SPECIALIST CONSULTANTS

The following Specialist Consultants must be appointed by the
Landlord/Developer at his cost to design and oversee the construction and
delivery of the supermarket in accordance with the SRC specification, as well as
the standard codes of practice of their respective disciplines.
1.2.1 Architect
The Landlord/Developer is to appoint Shoprite Checkers’ nominated Architect
for that portion of the works contained within this Specification. The Architect
will be paid by Shoprite Checkers and Shoprite Checkers will recover the
relevant fees from the developer as per the lease agreement.
1.2.2 Electrical Consultant

The Landlord/Developer is to appoint Shoprite Checkers ‘nominated Electrical
Consultant for that portion of the works contained within this Specification.
The Electrical Consultant will be paid by Shoprite Checkers and Shoprite
Checkers will recover the relevant fees from the developer as per the lease
agreement.
Shoprite Checkers’ nominated Electrical Consultant will provide the design of

the electrical installation.
1.2.3 Structural/Civil Engineer

The design and supervision of the structural/civil works is to be in accordance
with Standard Codes of Practice. The Landlord/Developer is to appoint
Structural/Civil Engineers where require at his cost.
1.2.4 Insulation Consultant

A Specialist Refrigeration Consultant will be appointed by the
Landlord/Developer at his cost to oversee the insulation installation i.e. Cold
rooms, Freezer rooms. Drop temp facilities. Meat rails and walk-in cold room
shelving to be included.
The plumbing, drainage and electrical installations applicable to the

refrigeration contract are to be undertaken by contractors appointed by the
Developer, but in accordance with SRC specification.

PAGE
3
1.2.5 Mechanical Consultant

A Mechanical Consultant will be appointed by the Landlord/Developer at his
cost. The Mechanical Consultant must be approved by SRC before
appointment, to design and oversee the mechanical installation in accordance
with SRC specification and as per the Standard Codes of Practice. SRC
reserves the right to appoint its own mechanical consultant at the developers
cost in the event that the developers mechanical consultant has not been
approved.
1.2.6 Fire Consultant

A Fire Consultant will be appointed by the Landlord at his cost to design and
oversee the fire requirements in accordance with SRC specification and
National Building Regulations.
1.2.7 Acoustic Consultant

An Acoustic Consultant will be appointed by the Landlord/Developer at his
cost when required.
1.2.8 Plumbing Consultant

A specialist Plumbing Consultant will be appointed at the cost of the
Landlord/Developer. The Plumbing Consultant will design and oversee the
plumbing installation in accordance with the SRC specification and National
Building Regulations.
1.2.9 Refrigeration Consultant

A Specialist Refrigeration consultant will be appointed by SRC at their own
cost to oversee the refrigeration installation.
1.3 SPECIALIST CONTRACTORS

The following installations will be carried out by a Specialist Contractors
appointed by SRC at their cost. The Landlord/Developer will be responsible to
provide certain infrastructure for these installations at his cost.
1.3.1 Refrigeration Contractor

Shoprite Checkers will appoint a Refrigeration Contractor who will be
responsible for the installation of cabinetry and other refrigeration equipment.
The Landlord/Developer will provide and install certain infrastructure for the
reticulation of these services as his cost.
1.3.2 IT Contractor
Shoprite Checkers will appoint an IT Contractor who will be responsible for the
installation of IT related materials and equipment. The Landlord/Developer will
provide and install certain infrastructure for the reticulation of these services
as his cost.

PAGE
4
1.3.3 Security Contractor

Shoprite Checkers will appoint specialist Alarm and Security Contractors who
may commence installation prior to Beneficial Occupation. The
Landlord/Developer will provide and install certain infrastructure for the
reticulation of these services as his cost.
1.3.4 Service Department Equipment

Shoprite Checkers will be responsible for the installation of all Service
department equipment. Once installed the landlords/Developers contractor
will do electrical and plumbing connections to the equipment where required.
1.4 SUPERVISION
A schedule of dates upon which site meetings are due to be held is to be circulated to
Shoprite Checkers’ Representatives, Consultants and Contractors, who shall be
entitled to attend these meetings.
The disciplines of Consultants and Specialist Contractors will be co-ordinated by the

Shoprite Checkers Architect, and all Consultants are to attend site meetings to review
progress and quality control.
1.5 PLANS
It is the responsibility of the Landlord/Developer to submit all building plans to the
Local Authority for approval. The date of approval is to be advised in order that
Shoprite Checkers may make the necessary application for a trading license well in
advance of the opening date of the store. Plan approval fees shall be paid by the
Landlord/Developer. If any plans are submitted by the Shoprite Checkers Architect
the Landlord/Developer will still be liable for the plan approval fees.
1.6 PROGRAMME
The Landlord/Developer must submit to Shoprite Checkers a construction
programme. Shoprite Checkers is to be advised of and agree with any changes in
programme dates.
1.7 BENEFICIAL OCCUPATION

Shoprite Checkers shall, with effect from the Beneficial Occupation Date for a
period of 60 days for Fresh “X” Checkers supermarkets, and 90 days for Fresh
“X” Checkers Hyper, have rent free Beneficial Occupation (which includes free
municipal services) of the premises to enable it to do fixturing and stocking with
the understanding that SRC shall be entitled to commence trading during the
Beneficial Occupation Period which shall however not accelerate the
commencement date. Shoprite Checkers will not be obliged to take Beneficial
Occupation during the period 30th September to 15th February.
The Shoprite Checkers Architect will in his/her sole discretion certify whether
the premise is suitable for Beneficial Occupation at the agreed date. Should the

PAGE
5
Beneficial Occupation Date change during the course of the contract, Shoprite
Checkers must be given notice.
At the appointed time of Beneficial Occupation the premises must be lockable

and totally secure. All toilets and sanitary appliances to be operative,
permanent electrical power and permanent water supplied, all light fittings
installed, and all builders’ and sub-contractors’ work completed.
The receiving yard and doors shall be unobstructed and the road access thereto
completed. Access to the premises must be possible via the main entrance to the
trading floor for delivery of refrigeration cabinets and bakery ovens. The
landlord/Developer must provide adequate protection to mall floor finishes
when the delivery take place as no claims for damages will be accepted.
Only work related to the commissioning of SRC installations in conjunction with

Shoprite Checkers' Specialist Contractors will be permitted after Beneficial
Occupation has been taken.
The A/C plant and Backup Generator must be completed and working.
Construction of the refrigeration plant room shall be complete and secured. The
Refrigeration Contractor must have access to the premises a minimum of two
weeks prior to Beneficial Occupation. The premises must be secure to prevent
theft of refrigeration materials and equipment.

PAGE
6
SECTION 2: GENERAL (REVISION – A)

2.1 NAME BOARDS AND PERMANENT SIGNS
Shoprite Checkers’ Signage Contractor will design, supply and erect permanent
supermarket signs to be mounted externally on the face of the building and internally
in the Supermarket premises and in public spaces.
Where external signs are to be illuminated, the electrical points and power thereto are
to be supplied by the Electrical Contractor to the required electrical loading.
All exterior space for signage whether on the building or on pylons will be made
available free of charge to Shoprite Checkers. Provision must be made for signs on
the building in positions that will provide maximum exposure in contexts of the
development, surrounding areas and approaches. The Landlord will provide all
structures required for external signage at his cost. Refer to Signage Section 19 for
details.
2.2 PARKING AREAS

All civil work is to be done according to the latest edition of the prevailing National
2.2.1 Lighting in Parking Area

Lighting in the parking area is to be approved by the SRC Architect and
Electrical Consultant. Refer to Electrical Specification Section 15 for additional
details.
2.2.2 Ramps
Ramps are to be provided for the manoeuvring of trolleys and disabled
persons as per Architect details and or National Building Regulations.
2.2.3 Bollards
Bollards may be required at the discretion of the SRC Architect to all
Supermarket entrances for security reasons.
2.2.4 Trolley Bay

Bulk covered storage bays for Supermarket trolleys must be provided outside
the leased premises adjacent to Mall entrances. Depending on the
supermarket size the amount of trolleys will vary between 500 and 1,500. The
centre design must make provision for level differences to and from parking
areas and walkways by means of ramps for the manoeuvring of trolleys.
Trolley collection bays are to be constructed in the customer parking area as
detailed.

PAGE
7
A temporary storage bay/holding area for Supermarket trolleys must be

provided directly outside the entrance to the leased premises. Depending on
the supermarket size the amount of trolleys will vary between 100 and 150.
2.3 WALKWAYS AND COMMON AREAS

The floor covering in walkways and common areas is to be of a smooth texture (not
cobble, or texture) to prevent trolley noise and damage, and of a non-slip surface. A
smooth transition between the common areas and the supermarket entrance is
required.
2.4 ENTRANCE TO SUPERMARKET

An entrance is required with a minimum dimension of 10m wide x 3,5m high for a
Fresh “X” Checkers Hyper and a minimum of 8m wide x 3,5m high for Fresh “X”
Checkers stores.
Escalators and passenger lifts are to be positioned in such a way as not to obscure
sight lines to the supermarket entrances
2.5 PERIMETER WALLS

All perimeter walls shall be taken to the underside of the near horizontal plane of the
roof sheeting. Columns shall be flush with the inside of all perimeter walls. This also
applies to any party walls between tenancies. Perimeter walls to comply with fire
requirements (Refer to Fire Section 18).
No side cladding or dry walling will be permitted.
2.6 ROOF
Falls to the roof must be according to the roof sheet manufacturer's specifications,
but not less than 2,5˚.
2.6.1 Roof Covering

Buildings 5km or less from the sea
 Roof sheeting is to be 0,53mm thick Zincalume Klip-Lok 700 (Clean
Colourbond-Ultra) with metallic coating AZ200 (minimum 200g/m2 coating
mass) super polyester system with 25 microns top side and 10 microns
bottom side. Steel is to be Grade 550 (minimum yield strength of 550MPa).
Fasteners to be Klip-Lok (KL700 clips).
 Materials guarantee is to be 15 years and workmanship 10 years. Water

tightness guarantee is to be 10 years.
 All flashings and ridge cappings are to be made from the same sheeting
material as the roof sheeting.
 Roof sheeting with “oil canning”, scratches, kinks or other visible damage
to the finish will be rejected.

PAGE
8
Building more than 5km from sea

 Roof sheeting is to be 0,53mm thick Zincalume Klip-Lok 700 (Clean
Colourbond) with metallic coating AZ150 (minimum 150g/m2 coating
mass) super polyester system with 25 microns top side and 10 microns
bottom side. Steel is to be Grade 550 (minimum yield strength of 550MPa).
Fasteners are to be Klip-Lok (KL700 clips).
 Materials guarantee to be 15 years and workmanship 10 years. Water

tightness guarantee to be 10 years.
 All flashings and ridge cappings are to be made from the same sheeting
material as the roof sheeting.
 Roof sheeting with “oil canning”, scratches, kinks or other visible damage
to the finish will be rejected.
2.6.2 Roof Insulation

Roof insulation is to be provided by the Developer as per Shoprite Checkers’
Consultant’s specific details. (Refer to Schedule of Finishes C6, C7, C8 Section
20).
2.6.3 Steel Roof Structure

2.6.3.1 Trading Area
The structure of the roof is to allow for a maximum amount of
columns on the trading floor as per the table below.
Maximum Columns Gross supermarket area up to
2 on trading floor 2,400m²
Purlins are to be painted when not galvanised. Purlin spacing is to be

a maximum of 1,5m to allow for roof insulation installation. Underside
of truss is to be 4,5m above finished floor level. The height to
underside of roof sheeting on trading floor is not to exceed 8m. Roof
structure must be able to support/accommodate bulkhead support
structure, lights, A/C ducts, A/C equipment, services pipes, etc.
Truss design must allow for all air-conditioning ducts, service pipes,
etc. to be located above the tie beam.
2.6.3.2 Bulk Store

The height of the bulk store between finished floor level and the
underside of the truss steelwork at the lowest point or ceiling is to be
6,5m. Finish, accuracy and waterproofing as per 2.6.4.1.
PAGE
9
No services including air-conditioning ductwork, ventilation pipes

refrigeration pipes or sprinkler systems are to be installed below these
minimum levels.
2.6.4 Concrete Roof Structure

2.6.4.1 Trading Area
A minimum height above finished floor level to the underside of soffit
of slab and beams is to be 6m. Underside of slab is to be painted with
undercoat and two coats of acrylic paint. The off-shutter formwork
finish to suspended concrete slab soffits shall be “Smooth” as
described in SABS 1200G. All imperfections such as small fins, bulges,
irregularities, surface honeycombing and slight surface discolorations
shall be made good and repaired by approved methods. The finish of
the concrete shall be accurate to FM2 as defined in T34.
The specified accuracy shall be achieved without any treatment

except the rubbing down of the soffit surface with a Carborundum
stone block. No penetration of tenant services above will be allowed.
Slab to be waterproofed and insulated (Refer to detail DET05), and to
conform to the SANS 10400 and SANS 10400 XA where exposed to
weather.
2.6.4.2 Bulk Store

Bulk store clear height is to be 6,5m from finished floor level. No
service penetration from tenants above. Underside of slab is to be

PAGE
10
painted with undercoat and two coats of acrylic paint. Racking to be

full height with steel mezzanine (by Checkers) at mid-level.
2.6.4.3 External Canopies

A canopy of as shown on architect’s drawings is to be provided above
all the Main Goods Receiving Doors. A minimum projection of 3,5m at
a height of minimum 4,8m above finished floor level of the receiving
yard is required. (Refer to detail DET25).
A canopy of minimum dimension 1,5m deep x 2m wide as shown on

drawings is to be provided above the Staff Entrance and Butchery
Receiving. (Refer to detail DET23).
2.7 FLOORS
2.7.1 Trading Floor Surface Bed
Surface beds are to have a compressive strength of 30MPA and a thickness of
150mm. Allowance must be made for trenches to accommodate refrigeration
and other services. Recesses in the floor must be allowed for Freezer Rooms
(Refer to detail DET03).
Saw-cut surface bed is to be at a maximum spacing of 4,5 x 4,5m in both

directions. Care is to be exercised to ensure that the saw-cut joints correspond
with tile joints (exact tile size to be determined beforehand). Cut 3mm max.
wide 50mm deep joints as indicated, within 24 hours after casting the
concrete. Place “Ethacord” backing strip into joint, as per detail, then apply
“Sika primer-3” before sealing the joints with “Sikaflex pro 2HP” or similar
approved product.

PAGE
11
2.7.2 Trading Floor on a Suspended Slab

Allow waterproofing for all service department areas (Refer to detail DET05)
and cold and freezer rooms (Refer to detail DET02). Sleeves for refrigeration
and drainage must be allowed for on trading floor with drip trays below slab
for services. Allow recess for cold and freezer rooms with allowance for
flexibility for future changes (Refer to DET02 Freezer Room Installation on a
Slab).
2.7.3 Bulk Store Surface Bed, Receiving, Goods Handling and Service Passages
Surface beds to have a compressive strength of 40MPA and a thickness of
180mm. Recess in floor must be allowed for freezer rooms (Refer to detail
DET03 & 04). Smooth steel floated surface finishes as per engineer’s details.
Saw-cut surface bed at a maximum spacing of 5 x 5m in both directions. Cut

3mm max. wide 50mm deep joints as indicated, within 24 hours after casting
the concrete. Place “Ethacord” backing strip into joint, as per detail, then apply
“Sika primer-3” before sealing the joints with “Sikaflex pro 2HP” or similar
approved product.

PAGE
12

PAGE
13
2.7.4 Bulk store, receiving areas and goods handling area on suspended slab
Suspended slabs for bulk stores, receiving areas and goods handling areas
must be designed to accommodate a 12,5kN/m² live load. This also applies
where inter rack walkway systems are used. In the case where a mezzanine
floor is supported by independent columns, the engineer must make special
provision for the additional point loads. In this instance the engineer is to use
7,5kN/m² live load on the suspended slab and 5kN/m² live load on the
mezzanine floor above to determine the relevant point loads.
Allow waterproofing below cold and freezer rooms on suspended slab. Sleeves
for refrigeration and drainage must be allowed for on bulk store slabs with
drip trays below slab for services. Allow recess for cold and freezer rooms with
allowance for flexibility for future changes (Refer to detail DET02). See
engineers' details on thickness of slab. The height to underside of mezzanine
slab is to be minimum 3m from finished floor level.
2.7.5 Core Drills

An extra allowance must be made for 50 additional core drills to those
specified per project.
2.7.6 Existing Floors

In the event that an existing floor does not comply with the SRC specification
the following engineering solution must be considered:
 A 75mm concrete overlay (40MPa;) or
 Rigorous grinding or
 Epoxy cements patching.
2.8 VERTICAL TRANSPORTATION

2.8.1 Goods Lifts
The Owner/Developer is to supply and install such vertical transportation as
specified and shown on Shoprite Checkers ‘Architect’ drawings.
In the instances where the receiving and/ or bulk store are on different levels
to the trading floor, allowance must be made for a minimum of two goods lifts
(minimum internal dimension of cart size 2,7m deep x 2m wide or visa verse).
In the event that butchery deliveries have to be transported in hoists the
internal finishes of at least one lift has to be stainless steel.

PAGE
14
All mechanical equipment installations are to be issued with a compliance

certificate by the relevant authority and to be installed by a specialist
contractor. (Refer to detail DET52 specifications on Hoist.)
2.8.2 Conveyer
The Owner/Developer is to supply and install such vertical transportation
equipment, as specified and shown on Shoprite Checkers' ‘Architect’ drawings.
(Refer to detail DET26.)
2.8.3 Dock Leveller

In the event that a 1,350mm high loading platform which has to be level with
the supermarket receiving cages cannot be provided due to site constraints
the SRC Architect/Representative must indicate if a dock leveller/scissors lift
must be provided. It is of the upmost importance that the loading platform
must be provided and can only be omitted by agreement with a designated
Shoprite Checkers Representative. Dock levellers should only be a last resort.
2.8.4 Passenger Lifts

Passenger lifts servicing SRC customers must be a minimum car size of
2,500mm in width x 1,800mm in depth with a minimum door opening of
1,500mm. A Full width opening is however the preferred option. The
passenger lift doors are to be transparent glass doors (scenic lifts). The
preferred option is scenic lift in totality.
Lift speed to be at a minimum of 2m/s.
2.8.5 Maintenance to Vertical Transportation

All Vertical Transportation installations shall be guaranteed for a period of
twelve months. The twelve-month cost-free (for Shoprite Checkers)
maintenance and guarantee period on all the systems, equipment, materials
and workmanship shall commence on completion (at Beneficial Occupation
Handover). The supplier of such equipment shall execute regular services
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications during this period.
The Developer or Landlord is liable for and/or to hand over the following:
a) Three copies of the operating and maintenance (O & M) manuals, as well

as a CD containing all the information in the O & M manuals, on
completion of the installation as well as at completion of the guarantee
maintenance period. The manuals and CD are to be complete with the
following:
b) The description of all the systems.
c) The operating instructions, maintenance instructions, fault-finding
instructions and maintenance schedules for all the systems.
d) The equipment brochures and manuals.
e) All the testing and commissioning recordings and data. This section shall

PAGE
15
be complete with the design and the actual recorded data.

f) The electrical and control wiring diagrams and the electrical compliance
certificate.
g) The installation drawings.
h) A list of all the equipment and the major material suppliers complete with
contact details.
i) A list with the contact names and numbers (for breakdowns and
emergency call outs).
2.9 SUPERMARKET AREAS

The following areas must be read in conjunction with all Specialist Consultants’ details
and Section 20 Schedule of Finishes (See typical layouts in Section 22).
2.9.1 Entrance Area

Entrance doors will be detailed by SRC Architect which will be, (depending on
location of the store) one or a combination of the following:
Sliding stacking aluminium doors, sliding folding aluminium doors, automatic

sliding aluminium doors, aluminium swing doors, electric perforated roller
shutter doors. Dimensions will depend on development and determined on
merit in each instance. Allowance must be made for an entrance recess floor
mat to be determined by the SRC Architect. Also allow for an appropriate
support structure for the door.
In Fresh “X” Checkers and Checkers Hyper stores there will be a skimmed
plaster board ceiling/bulkhead of which the extent and height will be
determined by the SRC Architect.
A wind lobby with electric operated self-closing sensor doors might be

required and will be determined by the SRC Architect.
2.9.2 Money Market

Dividing walls between Money market, Kiosk, manager’s office and customer’s
service will be constructed out of Glass partitioning. Refer to detail T01 – T03.
Skimmed joint ceiling bulkhead of which extent and height will be determined
by the SRC Architect. Bump rail to be provided as per detail in front of
counter. (Refer to Typical Detail T02A, B, C Money Market.)
2.9.3 Kiosk
by the SRC Architect. Bump rail to be provided as per detail in front of
counter. (Refer to Typical Detail T03A, B Kiosk).

PAGE
16
2.9.4 Manager Office

by the SRC Architect. Worktops to be provided by Landlord. (Refer to Typical
Detail T03 on Managers Office).
2.9.5 Admin Office

Refer to Typical Detail T04 on Admin Office. Worktops to be provided by
Landlord.
2.9.6 Scanning Office

Refer to Typical Detail T05 on Scanning Office. Worktops to be provided by
Landlord.
2.9.7 Camera Room

Refer to Typical Detail T26 on Camera Room.
2.9.8 Cash Offices

A concrete slab must be constructed over Cash Offices and Strong Room as
per Architects' detail. Refer to details on ID, Cash-up, Cash Office, and Strong
Room. Strong Room/Safe Room walls to have a 115mm cavity filled solid with
30MPa concrete between 115mm solid skin brick walls and reinforced with
Y12 bars on a 200 x 200mm grid to Engineer’s specs. Strong Room to have a
30 MPa solid concrete slab over of at least 150mm thick to Engineer’s design.
Shoprite Checkers will supply a safe for the cash float to be stored in the Cash
Office. The weight of this safe will be approximately 1,250kg. Loose standing
safes may also be positioned inside the Strong Room at the Cash Offices.
Refer to Typical Detail T06 & T07.
Worktops to be provided by Landlord.
2.9.9 Customer Service (Fresh “X” Checkers Hyper only)

by the SRC Architect. Worktops to be provided by Landlord. (Refer to Typical
Detail T08.)
2.9.10 Checkout Arcade

Refer to detail for dividing wall between Checkout Arcade and trading floor. In
some instances a skimmed plasterboard or suspended ceiling or combination
of both will be required. Refer to the SRC Architect for detail.
2.9.11 Dispensary
Refer to Dispensary Typical Detail T09-A and T09-B.

PAGE
17
2.9.12 Health and Beauty

A skimmed plasterboard or suspended ceiling or combination of both may be
required over the Health and Beauty. Refer to the SRC Architect details T10.
2.9.13 Trading Area

Refer to the SRC Architect drawings. The trading floor may include an outdoor
mezzanine area of approximately 300m² in a Fresh “X” Checkers Hyper only.
2.9.14 Hot Deli

Refer to the SRC Architect drawings and Typical Detail T11 on Hot Deli. See
consultant’s details of Cold and Freezer Rooms. These are typical layouts and
will vary. There can also be more than one hot deli/hot food service area per
supermarket and is layout and customer profile dependent. Floor to be
waterproofed when on suspended slab.
2.9.15 Cold Deli

Refer to the SRC Architect drawings and Typical Detail T12 on Cold Deli. See
consultant’s details on Cold and Freezer rooms. These are typical layouts and
will vary. There can also be more than one cold deli/cold food service area per
2.9.16 Back-Up Deli

Refer to the SRC Architect drawings and Typical Detail T13 on Cold Deli. See
consultant’s details on Cold and Freezer rooms. These are typical layouts and
will vary. There can also be more than one cold deli/cold food service area per
2.9.17 Fish Area

Refer to the SRC Architect drawings and Typical Detail T14 on Fish Area. See
consultant’s details on Cold and Freezer Rooms. These are typical layouts and
will vary. There can also be more than one fish department/fish service area
per supermarket and is layout and customer profile dependent. Floor to be
2.9.18 Bakery Area

Refer to the SRC Architect drawings and Typical Detail T15 on Bakery Area. See
consultant’s details on Cold and Freezer Rooms. These are typical layouts and
will vary. There can also be more than one bakery/bakery product service area
per supermarket and is layout and customer profile dependent. Floor to be
2.9.19 Butchery Area

Refer to the SRC Architect drawings and Typical Detail T16 on Butchery Area.
See consultant’s details on Cold and Freezer Rooms. Landlord to provide

PAGE
18
worktops in butchery manager’s office. These are typical layouts and will vary.
There can also be more than one butchery/fresh meat service area per
2.9.20 Fruit and Veg Prep

Refer to the SRC Architect drawings and Typical Detail T15 on Fruit and Veg
Prep. See consultant’s details on Cold Rooms. Floor to be waterproofed when
on suspended slab.
2.9.21 Back of House Deli Prep

Refer to the SRC Architect drawings and Typical Detail T13 on back Deli Prep
See consultant’s details on Cold and Freezer Rooms. Floor to be waterproofed
when on suspended slab.
2.9.22 Wine Area

Refer to the SRC Architect drawings. In certain provinces it is required by law
to physically close and lock wine departments outside liquor trading hours.
Sliding stacking doors must be installed as per Architect’s detail at the
developers cost.
2.9.23 Receiving Office

Refer to the SRC Architect drawings and Typical Detail T19 on Receiving Office.
Worktops to be provided by Landlord.
2.9.24 Wet Refuse Room

A Wet Refuse Room is to be constructed outside in the yard area in
accordance with the Schedule of Finishes Section 20 and the Local Authority
requirements. Sealed watertight mobile refuse bins shall be provided in
accordance with the requirements of the Local Authority. (Refer to Typical
Detail T21).
2.9.25 Carton Store (Dry Refuse Room)

The Carton Store will be accommodated within the supermarket box. Refer to
the SRC Architect drawings.
2.9.26 Receiving Yard

The Supermarket must be provided with a dedicated and secure receiving
yard, fenced in with a maintenance-free brick wall to minimum height of 2.4m
and fitted with security measure as specified by an SRC Architect. It must be
provided with an entrance gate(s) with a minimum entrance width of 7m,
fitted with locking pads, heavy-duty bullet hinges and sturdy corner protectors
on all exposed corners. Allowance must be made within the yard for the
maneuvering of 22m long interlink truck or 18m WB-50 horse-and-trailer truck
in order to facilitate back-loading.

PAGE
19
The receiving yard has to be 1,350m lower than the level of the receiving
cages and stockroom to facilitate a docking platform 1,350m above finished
floor level. The retaining wall of the receiving platform must be constructed
out of concrete as per the SRC Architect drawings. Refer to Typical Detail T21.
2.9.27 Crate Store

A Crate Store is to be constructed outside in the yard area in accordance with
the Typical Detail T23.
2.9.28 Yard Toilet and Shower

A Yard Toilet and Shower are to be constructed outside in the yard area in
accordance with Typical Detail T22. Refer to SRC architect whether or not is
required.
2.9.29 Gate House

A Gate House is to be constructed outside in the yard area in accordance with
Typical Detail T22. Refer to SRC architect whether or not is required.
2.9.30 Trolley Wash Bay

A Trolley Wash Bay complete with water, drainage and electrical supply is to
be constructed within the receiving yard to the approval of the SRC Architect.
(Refer to Typical Detail T23.)
2.9.31 Returns and Returns Sorting Room

A Returns and Returns Sorting Room is to be constructed in accordance with
the SRC Architect drawings. (Refer to Typical Detail T24).
2.10 GALVANIZED BUMPER RAIL

Constructed with 75mm diameter galvanised pipe with baseplate to Engineer Detail
DET 56. See installation on drawing.
2.11 STAINLESS STEEL BUMPER RAIL

Constructed with 75mm diameter stainless steel pipe with baseplate to Engineer
Detail DET 56. See installation on drawing.
2.12 BULKHEADS
All bulkheads are to be supported by an independent steel substructure which are
secured to the roof structure above. This substructure is to be designed by a
structural engineer.

PAGE
20
SECTION 3: CONCRETOR (REVISION – A)

3.1 GENERAL
All concrete and concrete work shall be done according to the latest edition of the
prevailing Codes of Practice applicable in the country.
The type and origin of the cement, water, stone and sand shall be submitted to the
Engineer prior to construction.
The Engineer shall specify the characteristic 28-day concrete strength (grade) and the
nominal size of the coarse aggregate for all structural elements.
Concrete mix designs with laboratory test results for the different concrete grades
shall be forwarded to the Engineer prior to the commencement of the project.
All casting procedures, construction methods and positions of construction joints

shall be submitted to the engineer prior to the commencement of the project.
3.2 MATERIALS
3.2.1 Cement
3.2.1.1 General
Portland based cements used in building and construction are divided
into two broad categories: “common” cements intended for use in
concrete (although many are suitable for mortar and plaster mixes)
and “masonry” cements intended for bedding mortars and plasters.
The main raw materials used in the manufacture of Portland cement

are limestone and shale which are blended in specific proportions and
fired at high temperatures to form cement clinker to which a small
quantity of gypsum is added before it is ground down to a fine powder
– Portland cement.
3.2.1.2 Common Cements

These are cements formulated primarily for use in concrete, although
some may be suitable for sand-cement mixes. Common cements
consist of Portland cement only, or a blend of Portland cement and
extender filler.

PAGE
21
(i) Composition
The composition of common cements is to comply with the
proportions of the constituents, i.e. Portland cement, extenders
and fillers, as shown in Table 1.
Table 1: Common cement types and composition (proportions by mass)

Cement Type
Blast-furnace
Constituents
Additions &
Description
Silica Fume
Lime-stone
Granulated
Notation
Clinker
Fly ash
Minor
Slag
D3
S
L
I Portland
I 95-100 - - - - - 0-5
cement
Portland II/A-S 80-94 6-20 - - - - 0-5
slag cement
II/B-S 65-79 21-35 - - - - 0-5
Portland
silica fume II/A-D 90-94 - 6-10 - - - 0-5
cement
II II/A-V 80-94 - - 6-20 - - 0-5
Portland fly II/B-V 65-79 - - 21-35 - - 0-5
ash cement II/A-W 80-94 - - - 6-20 - 0-5
II/B-W 65-79 - - - 21-35 - 0-5
Portland II/A-L 80-94 - - - - 6-20 0-5
limestone
cement II/B-L 65-79 - - - - 21-35 0-5
Portland II/A-M 80-94 6-204
composite
cement II/B-M 65-79 21-354
Blastfurnace III/A 35-64 36-65 - - - - 0-5
III cement
III/B 20-34 66-80 - - - - 0-5
III/C 5-19 81-95 - - - - 0-5

IV Pozzolanic
IV/A 65-89 - 11-35 - - 0-5
cement
IV/B 45-64 - 36-55 - - 0-5
V Composite V/A 40-64 18-30 - 18-30 - - 0-5
cement V/B 20-39 31-50 - 31-50 - - 0-5

PAGE
22
Notes:
(1) The values in the table refer to the cement nucleus, excluding
calcium sulphate and any additives.
(2) Minor additional constituents may be filler or may be one or more
of the main constituents unless these are included as main
constituents in the cement.
(3) The proportion of silica fume is limited to 10%.
(4) The proportion of filler is limited to 5%.
(ii) Strength Performance

The mortar prism compressive strengths (using a water: cement
ratio of 0,5) for common cements are to be in accordance with
Table 2. Note that strengths must clear an early-age “hurdle” and
fall within a “window” at 28 days.
Table 2: Common cement compressive strength requirements
Compressive strength (MPa)

Strength Early strength Standard strength
Class
2 days 7 days 28 days
32,5 - 16 min
32,5 min 52,5 max
32,5 R 10 min -
42,5 10 min -
42,5 min 62,5 max
42,5 R 20 min -
52,5 20 min -
52,5 min -
52,5 R 30 min -
3.2.1.3 Masonry Cements

These cements are formulated primarily to impart good workability to
mixes for rendering, plastering and masonry work. Masonry cements
are a blend of Portland cement and finely ground limestone or
hydrated lime (some masonry cements include an air-entraining agent).
(i) Composition
Masonry cements are to consist of Portland cement clinker,
inorganic material, and, where appropriate, organic material as
shown in Table 3.

PAGE
23
Table 3: Masonry cement types and composition
Content (%)
Type
Portland cement clinker Organic material
MC 5 25 min 1 min
MC 12,5
MC 12,5X 40 min 1 min
MC 22,5X
(ii) Strength Performance

Masonry cements are to comply with the mortar prism
compressive strengths (using a cement: water ratio of 0,5) as given
in Table 4. Note that strengths must clear an early-age “hurdle”
and fall within a “window” at 28 days.
Table 4: Masonry cement compressive strength requirements
Compressive strength (MPa) Air entraining

Cement type
7 days 28 days agent
MC 5 - 5 min 15 max Required

MC 12,5 Required
7 min 12,5 min 32,5 max
MC 12,5X Not permitted
MC 22,5X 10 min 22,5 min 42,5 max Not permitted
3.2.1.4 Selecting Cements

Cements for different applications are to be selected in strict
accordance with the guidelines given in Table 5. The type, standard and
specification of the cements available in a country are to be submitted
to the Engineer for his approval. Note that masonry cements may not
be used in concrete without the Engineer’s consent and approval.

PAGE
24

Table 5: Selecting cements for different applications
Application Strength
Cement type Comment
class
Conventional structural
32,5 or
concrete in a non-aggressive As available -
higher
environment
Due consideration to be
As available,
Reinforced concrete in a 32,5 or taken of exposure
subject to
marine environment higher conditions. Specialist
comment
advice essential.
Total alkali content of
As available,
Concrete made with alkali 32,5 or concrete to be limited.
subject to
reactive aggregates higher Specialist advice
comment
essential.
CEM I
Floors, roads and paving with 32,5 or Specialist advice
CEM II/A
sawn joints higher recommended.
CEM II/B (slag)
Large placements where CEM III
Specialist advice
temperature rise due to heat As available CEM II/B (fly
essential.
reaction is to be controlled ash)
42,5 or
High-strength concrete As available -
higher
Concrete exposed to sulphate CEM II/B (fly Specialist advice
As available
attack ash) essential.
CEM I
Other cements should
12,5 or CEM II/A
Mortars and plasters only be used with
higher MC 12,5 X
specialist advice.
MC 22,5 X
Other cements should
32,5 or CEM I
Floor screeds only be used with
higher CEM II/A
specialist advice.
3.2.1.5 Storage
Bulk storage silos are to be inspected on a regular basis to ensure that
the inspection hatch is watertight and filters are clean and unblocked.
Cement bags are not weatherproof and must be stored under cover,
off the ground to a maximum height of 12 bags (50kg).
3.2.2 Sand (Fine Aggregate) and Stone (Coarse Aggregate)

The fine and coarse aggregates are to comply with the requirements of SANS
1083: 1994 and be to the approval of the appointed Engineer. The material to

PAGE
25
be used as sand in the concrete mix is to be free of organic impurities, sugar

and soluble deleterious impurities. The sand is to be properly graded and to
comply with the following:
Sieve size % passing the sieve (by mass)

(um) Maximum Minimum
75 7.5% 0%
150 15% 5%
300 35% 10%
600 60% 25%
1180 85% 50%
2360 100% 80%
4750 100% 95%
The fineness modules (FM) of the sand will fall in the range 1.6 to 3.5.
3.2.3 Admixtures
Admixtures in the concrete mix will only be allowed if approved by the
Engineer.
3.2.4 Water
Water is to be clean and free from injurious amounts of acids, alkalis, organic
matter and other substances that may impair the strength and/or durability of
concrete. In general, the criterion for water to be used in the concrete mix is
that it should be fit to drink.
3.2.5 Coarse Aggregate (Stone)

Stone to be used in concrete mixes is to be single-sized and not graded. The
nominal size of the aggregate is to be 13mm, 19mm or 26mm and to be
specified by the Engineer for different applications. The minimum size of the
smallest stone particle in any mix is 5mm. Aggregates must consist of clean,
hard, strong and durable particles, free from clay coatings or materials
(especially organic materials). Weak, friable or laminated particles are
unacceptable. Aggregates containing excessive amounts of soft shale, chalky
or porous particles, or clay lumps are also unacceptable. The aggregate used
must not contain reactive silica.
3.3 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

All concreting work is to be carried out in strict accordance with the specification of
the appointed Engineer and to his approval.

PAGE
26
3.3.1 Mixing
In mixing concrete, the aim is to obtain a uniform and intimate mixture of all
the ingredients. The mixture must be such that the various sizes of aggregates
are uniformly distributed throughout the mass, each particle of aggregate
being adequately coated with cement paste of uniform consistency.
For a 19mm coarse aggregate, the minimum cement: water ratio in the mix
and minimum kilogram cement for every cubic meter of concrete for different
grades of concrete is as follows:
Grade Cement : Water Minimum Cement (kg/m³)

MPa ratio Hand compaction Vibration compacted
10 1.2: 1 240 230

15 1.4: 1 280 265
20 1.6: 1 315 300
25 1.8: 1 355 340
30 2.0: 1 400 380
3.3.2 Placing
The slump of the concrete must suit the placing and compaction method
(hand or vibration) adopted and should be between 30mm and 80mm. The
concrete is to be of such workability that it can be readily compacted into the
corners of formwork and around reinforcement without segregation of the
materials or excessive bleeding of free water to the surface. The concrete is to
be free from honeycombing and planes of weakness. Successive layers of the
same lift are to be thoroughly worked together.
3.3.3 Curing
All concrete is to be properly and continuously cured for a period of 5 days
after it has been placed. Flat surfaces of concrete are to be covered with clean
wet sand and all other surfaces are to be covered with wet sacks, mats or
other moisture-retaining material, and be kept wet.
3.3.4 Removal of Formwork and Props

Formwork and props are not to be removed before the concrete has attained
sufficient strength to support its own weight and any loads that may be
imposed on it. The timing for the removal of formwork also depends on the
concrete grade, type of cement used and the weather. Consult the Engineer
for instructions. The normal time (in days) before removing formwork or
props is as follows:

PAGE
27
Item Hot weather Cold weather

Sides to beams, walls and unloaded columns 1 2
Slab soffits, but props still in place 4 7
Beam soffits, but props still in place 7 12
Props to slabs 10 17
Props to beams 14 21
3.3.5 Ready-Mix Concrete

Ready-mix concrete is to comply with the requirements of SANS 878.
3.3.6 Yard Paving

80mm Yard Paving is to be laid with falls as shown or directed on the
Engineer’s plans and instructions and in panels not exceeding 6m2 in area with
10mm opening joints.
3.3.7 Surface Beds

Surface beds are to be cast in panels or to have construction and
expansion/shrinkage saw cuts properly treated and filled with suitable joint
filling compound capable of carrying the traffic of Unitainers with Duthane
wheels. Surface beds are to be stepped to accommodate varying floor finishes
as shown on drawings. Surface beds placed on fill of more than 800mm to be
reinforced with MESH REF 193
3.3.8 Floor Trenches

Floor Trenches as per the SRC Architect and Engineer's Drawings.
3.3.9 Concrete Steps

Where the floor level at door openings is more than 200mm above the ground
surface, the contractor is to provide steps with treads of 300mm and risers of
175mm and long enough to overlap 150mm on both sides of the door
openings.
Steps are to be neatly finished off in granolithic with a steel trowel and
provided with insets near the fronts of the treads. A steel angle nosing to
protect the edge of the step must be cast-in.
3.3.10 Polyethylene Film

Before concrete surface beds are laid, a 250-micron density polyethylene
continuous film is to be laid over the filling and internal foundation walls.
Joints must overlap by 100mm and be taped with double-sided tape.
3.3.11 Loading of Slabs

Surface beds and suspended concrete slabs are to be designed to safely carry
the following live loads (un-factorised):

PAGE
28
Office areas (including dry wall partitioning) 3.5 kN/m²

Supermarket and prep areas 4.0 kN/m²
Storage and receiving areas 12.5 kN/m²
Plant rooms 6.0kN/m²
Mezzanine floors above primary storage areas 7.5kN/m²
(Max stacking height 3m)
3.3.12 Pipes, Sleeves, etc. in Concrete

All sleeves, pipes, etc. in concrete are to be correctly positioned to suit outlet
points of individual services.
Where the supermarket is on a suspended slab, allowance must be made for

core drilling as required.
3.3.13 Floors in Loading Areas

Floors in loading areas are to be reinforced with mesh reinforcement or to the
Engineer’s design and specification.
Floors are to be laid to fall to drains.
Junctions of external floors with internal floors at entranceways are to be flush

to permit passage of Unitainers, trolleys, etc.
3.3.14 Power Floating

Care is to be exercised when power floating, particularly in respect of applied
finishes such as porcelain tiles. Floor areas to receive porcelain tiles are to
have a wood floated surface finish.
3.3.15 Jointing
Care is to be exercised in construction and saw-cut joints to floors that are to
receive applied porcelain tile finish so that joints in concrete correspond with
joints between tiles. It is important to determine the exact tile size (calibration)
from the tile supplier beforehand.
3.3.16 Reinforcement
3.3.16.1 Material
The type, standard and specification of reinforcement commonly
available in the country are to be passed on to the Engineer for
approval. Bars marked “Y” refer to high yield bars that have yield
strength of 450Mpa, whereas those marked “R” are mild steel bars
which have yield strength of 250Mpa. Thus a bar Y12 means that the
bar has a minimum diameter of 12mm and is of the high yield type.

PAGE
29
(i) Bending of Bars

Reinforcing bars are to be bent to the dimensions shown on
the Engineer's drawings. All bars shall be bent cold and
bending shall be done by slow, steady and even pressure being
used without jerk or impact.
(ii) Fixing of Bars

All reinforcing bars are to be free of loose or powdery rust,
scale, oil and other coatings that may reduce the bond between
steel and surrounding concrete, affect the durability of the
concrete, or initiate corrosion of the reinforcement. Cover to
reinforcement is to be as specified and the reinforcement is to
be positioned as shown on the drawings and schedules and
maintained in those positions within the tolerances specified
hereunder. It is to be secured against displacement by tying at
reinforcing bar intersections with annealed wires of normal
diameter 1,25mm to 1,6mm.
Reinforcement is to be supported in its correct position by

means of hangers or saddles, and aligned by means of chairs
and spacers of approved design. If left exposed for future
bonding of extensions to the works, reinforcement shall be
protected from corrosion.
(iii) Tolerances
The permissible deviation for the positioning of and the cover
to reinforcement is as follows:
Item Permissible deviation of

the reinforcement (mm)
Spacing between two adjacent bars ± 20
Longitudinal location of bends and ends of bars ± 30
Cover to reinforcement -0 +20
i.e. no deviation from the
minimum cover
(Cover is measured from the face of the concrete to the outside of the
reinforcing nearest to the face of the concrete).
(iv) General Rules

No heating, flame cutting or welding of reinforcement is
allowed. Bend-out bars at construction joints are to be bent out
with a suitable pipe so that no kink is formed in the bars. The
minimum lap length to all reinforcing is 50 x bar diameter.

PAGE
30
3.4 HARDENED CONCRETE

3.4.1 Quality
Finished concrete is to be in the specified position and shape and to have a
neat, smooth, even and uniform finish. It is also to have abrasion resistance
and be durable, dense, watertight, homogeneous and free from cracks,
honeycombing or planes of weakness. It is also to have no drying out or
shrinkage cracks. If the quality or finish of any formed or floated concrete is,
in the sole opinion of the Engineer/Architect, unsatisfactory, the Contractor
will be required to correct the problem at his own expense. This may include
the complete re-construction of the concrete element.
3.4.2 Strength
The 28-day strength of the hardened concrete is to meet the grade specified
by the Engineer. The Contractor is responsible for acquiring cube samples of
the concrete for testing. The cubes should be kept submerged in water at a
temperature of between 22 to 25 degrees Celsius until they are taken to an
independent testing laboratory. The Contractor is to pass on the laboratory
cube strength results to the Engineer. At least one set of cubes is to be taken
from each day's casting and from at least every 50m³ of concrete of each
grade placed. One set of cubes is to consist of three cubes of 150 x 150 x
150mm in size.
3.4.3 Tolerances
Prior to installing floor finishes the flatness and levelness of the floor must be
surveyed and verified by a reputable surveyor and the data made available to
the Shoprite Checkers Architect.
The Contractor is to follow the Engineer's drawings, details and schedules and
to construct each of the various parts of the works within the limits of the
applicable permissible deviation as follows:

the reinforcing (mm)
FOUNDATIONS
Position on plan of any edge or surface measured
from the nearest grid line ±35
Linear plan dimension ±20
Level of underside of concrete -30+15
Top surface level -20+10

PAGE
31

the reinforcing (mm)
ELEMENTS ABOVE FOUNDATIONS
Position on plan of any edge or surface measured
from the nearest grid line ±15
Linear dimensions ±20
Cross-section dimensions -5+15
Levels to the nearest transferred datum -15+5
Vertically, per meter height 5
- Subject to a maximum of 50
Exposed concrete surfaces:
Flatness of plane surface 5
Abrupt changes in a continuous surface 5
Exposed concrete surface to be plastered:
Flatness of plane surface 10
Abrupt changes in a continuous surface 5

PAGE
32
SECTION 4: BRICKLAYER (REVISION – A)

4.1 MASONRY WALLS
The construction of all masonry walls is to be done according to the latest edition of
the prevailing Codes of Practice applicable in the country.
The masonry walls are to be constructed of units of regular shape, either solid or
hollow, that are in compliance with the requirements outlined below.
The definition of a hollow masonry unit is that:

(a) it is a unit that contains at least one large hole or cavity of such size that the
solid material in the unit constitutes between 50% and 75% of the total
volume of the unit calculated from its overall dimensions; and
(b) when it is used in a wall (or in a leaf of a cavity wall) forms internal cavities that
have a total area, in the horizontal plane, of more than 25% of the horizontal
cross-sectional area of the wall (or leaf of the cavity wall).
The dimensions of a hollow masonry unit are to be in compliance with the following:
Length between 300mm and 650mm
Width between 130mm and 300mm
Height between 120mm and 300mm
The definition of a solid masonry unit is:

a unit that either contains no cores or contains cores not exceeding 25% of the gross
volume of the unit.
The dimensions of a solid masonry unit are to be in compliance with the following:
Length not exceeding 300mm
Width not exceeding 130mm
Height not exceeding 120mm
4.2 SAND/CEMENT MORTAR

4.2.1 General
Refer to the notes under General in the Concreter Section 2.1.
Mortar is a mixture of fine aggregate and one or more cementitious binders
and water.
4.2.2 Materials
For cement and water, refer to the notes under Materials in the Concreter
Section 2.2.
Incorporating lime or using masonry cement instead of ordinary cement will

improve the properties of the fresh mortar or plaster.

PAGE
33
4.2.2.1 Fine Aggregate (Sand)

Material to be used as sand is to be free form organic impurities,
sugar and soluble deleterious impurities. The sand for mortars is to be
such that the water requirement does not exceed 350l/m³. The sand is
to be of a good quality and properly graded and is to comply with the
following:
Sieve size Percentage passing the sieve (by mass)

(µm) Maximum Minimum
5 (Clay content) 2,0 % 0%

75 (Dust content) 12,5 % 0%
150 35 % 5%
300 85 % 5%
600 100 % 40 %
1180 100 % 70 %
2360 100 % 90 %
4750 100 % 100 %
The maximum drying shrinkage of the mortar mix is not to be more than
0,12%.
4.2.2.2 Admixtures
Admixtures will only be allowed if approved by the Engineer.
4.2.3 Mix Proportions

Mix proportions for mortar shall be:
50kg common cement: 0-40 litres lime (optional): 200 litres (maximum)
loose damp sand
(1 Bag) (3 standard 65L wheelbarrows)
OR
50kg masonry cement: (no lime to be added): 170 litres (maximum)

loose damp sand
(1 Bag) (2,5 standard 65L wheelbarrows)
4.2.4 Construction: Consistency and Time Limits

Mortar is to be mixed, on a surface free of contaminants, by a method and for
a period of time that ensures that all ingredients are uniformly and evenly
distributed throughout the mixture. Mixing must continue until the desired
consistency is achieved. Mortar in its fresh state must be workable and have
water retention and cohesive properties.

PAGE
34
Mortar in which initial set has occurred (i.e. thumbprint hard) is not to be used.
Any material that is not used or applied within two hours of mixing is to be
discarded.
4.2.5 Hardened Mortar or Plaster: Quality of Mortar

The minimum compressive strength of mortar is to be 5MPa. The wall is to
have no cracks between the mortar bed and the building unit. Excessive
suction in clay brick must be controlled by wetting the bricks before laying.
Concrete building units are not to be wet when used.
4.3 BURNT CLAY MASONRY UNITS

Burnt clay masonry units, made basically from clay or shale (with or without an
admixture of other materials), moulded or extruded into rectangular form, hardened
by firing, and with or without frogs, perforations or cavities, may be used in the
construction of various structural and non-structural building elements.
4.3.1 Strength
The strength of the concrete masonry unit and its utilization must be in
accordance with the table below.
Table 6: Solid burnt clay masonry units

Nominal
minimum
Compressive Use
Average
Strength (MPa) Individual units
(for 5 Units)
 Non-structural walls
 Structural walls for single storey
buildings
7 8 5,5  Infill panels for multi-storey
framed buildings
 Balustrade and parapet walls
 Structural walls for double

storey buildings
14 15,5 11  Retaining walls
 Free-standing walls
4.3.2 Tolerances
Only masonry units that are not warped, cracked or damaged may be used.
The allowable dimensions of solid and hollow masonry units have been
outlined above.
The tolerances on each individual clay masonry unit must be in strict

accordance with the table below.
PAGE
35
Table 7
Overall sizes Tolerances, mm
Length +/-7
Width +/-4
Height +/-4
4.3.3 Water-Absorption
The water-absorption of face bricks must not exceed 13%.
The water-absorption of non-face bricks must not exceed 11%.
The water-absorption for bricks in a sea-spray zone (within 30m of the sea)
must not exceed 7%.
4.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

Masonry units of regular shape, either solid or hollow, formed from concrete, may be
used in the construction of various structural and non-structural building elements.
4.4.1 Strength
The strength of the concrete masonry unit and its utilization must be in
accordance with the tables below.
Table 8: Hollow concrete masonry units

Nominal
minimum
Compressive Use
Average
(For 5 Units)
buildings
 Infill panels for multi-storey
3,5 4 3
framed buildings

storey buildings
7 8 5,5
 Retaining walls

PAGE
36
Table 9: Solid concrete masonry units

Nominal
minimum
Compressive Use
Average
(for 5 Units)
buildings
 Infill panels for multi-storey
7 8 5,5
framed buildings

storey buildings
14 15,5 11  Retaining walls
4.4.2 Tolerances
Only masonry units that are not warped, cracked or damaged may be used.
The allowable dimensions of solid and hollow masonry units have been
outlined above.
The tolerances on each individual concrete unit must be in strict accordance

with the table below.
Table 10
Overall sizes Tolerances, mm
Length +2
-4
Width +/-3
Height +/-3
4.5 DAMP-PROOF COURSE

Damp-proof courses are to be Gunplas Brickgrip type B complying with the
requirements of SABS 952 laid without longitudinal joints. Damp-proof course is to
correspond with width of various walls.

PAGE
37
4.6 POINTING
Face brick and semi-face brick to be pointed with a square recessed joint both
horizontally and vertically.
4.7 BAGGED FINISH TO BRICKWORK

Bag brickwork, where specified, must be done to an even surface finish. Bagging is to
be applied to walls as brickwork progresses to ensure proper bonding.
4.8 AIR BRICKS

Airbricks are to be vermin proof to municipal requirements.
4.9 CLEANING OFF

Clean down face brickwork, and fair face work with spirits of salts or a surface mortar
lift at completion.
4.10 FLOOR TRENCHES

Floor trenches for refrigeration services are to be constructed in accordance with the
Shoprite Checkers standard details in the floor slab of surface beds to the positions
indicated on the Shoprite Checkers Architect’s plans. (Refer to Detail DET14.)
4.11 SEALER
Apply a brick sealant to completed face brick internal walls as specified. Apply only
after brick work is confirmed properly cleaned from excess mortar and mortar stains.

PAGE
38
SECTION 5: PLASTERER (REVISION – A)

5.1 SAND/CEMENT SCREEDS

5.1.1 General
Screed is a mixture of fine aggregate, cementitious binder and water.
Sand-cement screeds are essentially light-duty flooring elements and are

suitable for:
(a) Wearing surfaces of floors of utility rooms in domestic premises (e.g. store
rooms, garages); and
(b) Floors covered with carpets, plastic tiles or linoleum, etc. and subjected to
relatively light traffic such as in offices and hospitals.
Sand-cement screeds are not suitable for heavy traffic or industrial premises.
Preferred methods of floor construction for such premises are full-thickness
trowelled concrete or concrete topping on the concrete base. A sand-cement
screed is to be specified only where placing and finishing the concrete floor to
acceptable standards are impracticable.
Also refer to the notes under General in the Concreter Section 2.1.
5.1.2 Bonded Screeds

Bonded screeds are applied to hardened concrete floors (also known as the
base concrete). The concrete on which the screed is to be laid is to be hard
and strong (i.e. characteristic strength of at least 20MPa). The base concrete is
to be free of random cracking. The surface of the concrete is to be reasonably
accurate to the required level so that it is possible to place the screed to a
uniform thickness of about 25mm. Screed thickness is not to be less than
20mm or more than 40mm.
The base concrete is to be prepared in such a way that it is left with a surface
that is uniformly hard, clean, and free of dust, oil or other contamination. Any
screeds applied previously to the base are to be removed completely. The
whole of the surface of the base must be chipped and/or scabbled with
appropriate, preferably power-operated, tools. All debris is then to be
removed and the surface finally cleaned of dust with an industrial vacuum
cleaner. The surface is to be kept clean and free of dust pending further
operations on it.
The surface of the base to receive the screed is to be keyed with a sand-
cement grout to ensure a proper bond. The grout is to consist of equal
volumes of fine, clean sand and loose cement mixed thoroughly with sufficient
PAGE
39
water to achieve a consistency similar to PVA-paint. It must be stirred

continuously, and used within 30 minutes of making. If a proprietary bonding
agent is used, it is to be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. Base concrete, which is water absorptive, is to be wetted to
achieve a saturated surface dry condition before the key-coat is applied. The
grout must then be worked thoroughly into the surface of the concrete and
then brushed out to leave only a thin coating on the concrete without pools of
grout in depressions. The screed is to be applied while the grout is still visibly
wet. (Note: dried grout will impair bonding).
5.1.3 Monolithic Screeds

These are screeds that are applied at the time when the underlying concrete
floor is placed. Screed thickness is to be approximately 25mm (not less than
20mm or more than 40mm). In attempting to achieve good adhesion
between screed and base concrete, it is important to take cognisance of the
phenomenon of bleeding of fresh concrete. Bleeding causes water to
accumulate on the top surface of the fresh concrete and the presence of this
water layer may impair adhesion unless suitably dealt with.
The screed should therefore be laid at one of two stages:

(a) either immediately the concrete has been compacted and levelled off and
before bleed water appears on the surface (“immediate placing”); or
(b) After bleeding of the concrete has ceased and bleeds water has
evaporated or has been removed completely by mopping up (“delayed
placing”).
Immediate placing requires careful timing but has the advantage that no
preparation of the concrete surface is required.
Timing of delayed placing is not as critical but the surface of the concrete does
require some preparation. Laitance is to be loosened by light brushing and
thoroughly removed by sweeping, or preferably, by vacuum cleaning. Delayed
placing is to be done within an hour or two after the end of the bleeding
period.
5.1.4 Materials
Section 2.2.1.

The material to be used as sand in the screed mix is to be free of
organic impurities, sugar and soluble deleterious impurities. The sand
for mortar is to be such that the water requirement does not exceed
320l/m3. The sand is to be properly graded and is to comply with the
following:

PAGE
40

75 7,5% 0%
150 15% 5%
300 35% 10%
600 60% 25%
1180 85% 50%
2360 100% 85%
4750 100% 100%
The fineness modules (FM) of the sand is to fall in the range 1,6 to 3,5.
5.1.4.2 Admixtures

Mix proportions for screed are to be:
50kg masonry cement : 130 litres (maximum) loose damp sand

(1 Bag) (2 standard wheelbarrows)
Water is to be sufficient to achieve a plastic, workable mix. The maximum dry

shrinkage for the screed mix is not to be more than 0,10%.
Note: The standard wheelbarrow size is 65 litres.
5.1.6 Construction
5.1.6.1 Consistency and Time Limits
Screeds are to be mixed on a surface free of contaminants by a
method and for a period of time that ensures that all ingredients are
uniformly and evenly distributed throughout the mixture. Mixing is to
continue until the desired consistency is achieved (slump
approximately 40mm). Screed in its fresh state must be workable and
have water retention and cohesive properties.
The time that elapses between the start of mixing a batch and when
that batch is placed and compacted should not exceed 45 minutes,
and during that time the mix should be protected from drying out.
Batches not placed and compacted within this time, or which have
stiffened to a degree that their workability (consistency) cannot be
restored fully by turning them over a couple of times with spades, are
to be discarded.
5.1.6.2 Application of Screeds

Screeds are to be laid in areas as large as possible in one operation,
consistent with achieving acceptable surface regularity and the levels
PAGE
41
required, to minimise the number of joints. Although screeds laid in

large areas may crack at random intervals as they dry and shrink,
these cracks are more acceptable than the curling which may occur at
vertical butt joints if screeds are laid in small panels. Where joints are
present in the base concrete, they are to be continued through the
screed so that joints in screed and base line up exactly. Edges at
these joints are to be rounded to a 3mm radius.
The fresh screed mix is to be compacted fully during the placing

operation. Spreading and compacting can be done with timber
screed boards or power-operated equipment (such as vibrating
screed boards). Semi-dry mixes are only to be compacted with
power-operated equipment. Extra compaction with hand tampers is
recommended along the edges of panels.
5.1.6.3 Finishing
At no stage during laying or finishing may cement or mixtures of
cement and sand, to be applied to the surface to soak up bleed water.
Ordinary non-slip: The surface is finished with wooden floats, except

if it is too open or too coarse, in which case it may be given a few
passes with either Perspex or aluminium floats to close the surface
without smoothing it. Over-working should be avoided.
Steel-trowelled: The surface is finished with steel trowels until it has

attained an even, fine, matt finish. Several trowels spread over a
period of up to two hours may be required. Steel-trowel finishing
must not start until:
(a) bleeding of the mix has ceased;
(b) all bleed water on the surface has evaporated or been
removed; and
(c) the surface has started to stiffen.
Hard non-slip: The surface is to be steel-trowelled, as above, and

subsequently lightly textured with carpet-faced floats or soft brushes.
5.1.6.4 Curing of Screeds

Immediately after the completion of surface finishing, the work is to
be covered with plastic sheeting, which is kept in place for not less
than seven days. To avoid the (temporary) variations in colour which
tend to occur when plastic sheeting is laid direct on a wet screed, the
sheeting may be supported clear of the surface by timber battens for
the first 24 hours of curing. Wind must not be allowed to blow under
the sheeting.

PAGE
42
Light foot traffic may be allowed over new work 24 hours after
finishing, provided that the plastic sheeting is not damaged or
displaced.
5.1.7 Hardened Screeds

5.1.7.1 Quality of Screeds
The screeded floors are to have a neat, even, uniform and hard finish
(non-slip or steel-trowelled). In its hardened state, the screed must
be durable, have sufficient strength to hold floor finishes (paint, vinyl,
tiles, etc.) and to withstand local impact and abrasion, have no loose
or hollow patches and show no signs of popping, blowing, flaking,
peeling or efflorescence. It must also adhere to the base concrete on
which it was placed. If the quality or finish of the screed is, in the sole
opinion of the Engineer/Architect, unsatisfactory, the Contractor will
be required to correct the problem at his own expense. This may
include the removal of the defective screed and the complete re-
screeding of the floor.
5.1.7.2 Deviation from Datum Level and Surface Regularity

The maximum permissible deviation from the datum level is ±12mm.
For surface regularity the maximum permissible deviation from a 3m
long straight line between any two points on the surface is ±5mm. A
3m long straightedge is to be used to check surface regularity.
Abrupt departures from the plane surface such as ridges, steps,
grooves, dents, etc. will not be permitted.
5.1.7.3 Screed Strength

The BRE screed tester is to be used to assess strength once screeds
are at least 14 days old and have dried out. No less than three tests
are to be carried out in each area less than 20m2 and on each 25m2 of
screed laid in larger areas. Corridors are to be tested at 5m intervals.
Test positions may be selected at random, but vulnerable areas
adjacent to panel joints and shrinkage cracks and in doorways are to
be tested.
The maximum permissible indentation in the screed is 3mm after

dropping the mass of the “BRE screed tester” four times. Where test
indentations exceed this limit, additional tests are to be carried out to
determine the zone of non-compliance.
5.1.7.4 Adhesion of Screed to Base Concrete

Adhesion of the screed to the base concrete is to be checked by
tapping the surface with the end of a light steel rod – hollow sounds
indicate lack of adhesion. Tests to check the adhesion of a screed to
its base should be made as late as possible in the construction

PAGE
43
program when the maximum effect of drying shrinkage has taken

place.
Those areas of screed that are rejected are to be isolated by sawing,

removed and re-laid.
5.2 FINISH OF CEMENT PAVINGS, ETC.

Un-tinted finished surfaces shall be repeatedly scrubbed with clean water and spirits
of salts until all discolorations are removed, and finally washed and polished with two
coats of approved floor polish well rubbed in upon completion.
5.3 GRANOLITHIC STAIRS

Finish stairs with 25mm granolithic carried over treads and risers of steps. Turn
granolithic up against walls to an average of 230mm high as skirting, flush and V-
jointed to plaster face above, and hollow rounded to steps. In each tread of stairs and
thresholds, form a set of stopped sunk reedings 100mm wide and 150mm shorter
than width of opening. Slightly round off all salient angles, form fair edges as required
at exposed edges and against flooring, and form all miters, etc. Finished stair top to
be flush with floor finish level. Riser heights and tread depths to remain accurate
according to drawings.
5.4 SAND/CEMENT PLASTER

5.4.1 General
Refer to the notes under General in the Concreter Section 2.1.
Plaster is a mixture of fine aggregate and one or more cementitious binders

and water.
5.4.2 Materials
Section 2.2.
Incorporating lime or using masonry cement instead of ordinary cement will

improve the properties of the fresh plaster.

Material to be used as sand is to be free form organic impurities,
sugar and soluble deleterious impurities. The sand for mortars and
plasters is to be such that the water requirement does not exceed
350l/m³. The sand is to be of a good quality and properly graded,
and is to comply with the following:

PAGE
44

5 (Clay content) 2,0% 0%

75 (Dust content) 7,5% 0%
150 20% 5%
300 65% 5%
600 90% 40%
1180 100% 70%
2360 100% 90%
4750 100% 100%
The maximum drying shrinkage of the plaster mix is not to be more

than 0,10%
5.4.2.2 Admixtures

Mix proportions for plaster shall be:
(i) External Plaster

loose damp sand
OR
50kg masonry cement: (no Lime to be added): 120 litres (maximum)

loose damp sand
(ii) Internal Plaster

loose damp sand
OR
50kg masonry cement: (no Lime to be added): 150 litres (maximum)

loose damp sand
Note: The standard wheelbarrow size is 65 litres.

PAGE
45
(iii) Roughcast Plaster

Roughcast Plaster shall be composed of one part cement and three parts
coarse aggregate.
5.4.4 Construction
5.4.4.1 Consistency and Time Limits
Plasters are to be mixed on a surface free of contaminants by a
method and for a period of time that ensures that all ingredients are
uniformly and evenly distributed throughout the mixture.
Mixing is to continue until the desired consistency is achieved. Plaster

in its fresh state is to be workable and to have water retention and
cohesive properties.
Plaster in which initial set has occurred (i.e. thumbprint hard) are not
to be used. Any material which is not used or applied within two
hours of mixing is to be discarded.
5.4.4.2 Application of Plaster

Joints between the building units are to be raked out to a depth of
about 10mm when the mortar is still soft. Before plastering, the wall
is to be free from dust, oil or dirt. Smooth surfaces or concrete are to
be given a bush-hammering or to receive a spatter dash layer with
nodules approximately 5mm high. Should the substrate exhibit
excessive suction, the whole wall is to be damped with a fine spray
and allowed to surface dry prior to applying the plaster. Plaster is to
be applied in two coats at most, each coat having the same mix
proportions and strength. The first coat is to be between 10 and
15mm thick, the surface is then to be combed in criss-cross diagonal
lines 3mm deep and 25mm apart to receive the second coat with a
thickness between 5 and 7mm. The surface must be wood-floated
since steel trowelling increases the likelihood that the surface will
develop crazing.
5.4.4.3 Curing of Plaster

Newly laid plaster must be prevented from rapid drying out,
especially during hot weather and in drying winds, by the use of a fine
spray applied several times a day.
5.4.5 Hardened Plaster: Quality

Plastered walls are to have a neat, smooth, even, uniform and hard finish. In
its hardened state, the plaster is to be durable, have sufficient strength to hold
paint and withstand local impact and abrasion, have no loose or hollow
patches and not show any signs of popping, blowing, flaking, peeling or
efflorescence. It is also to adhere to the wall or concrete surface there under,

PAGE
46
have no differential movement between the applied coats, and have no

crazing or cracks. If the quality or finish of the plaster is, in the sole opinion of
the Engineer/Architect, unsatisfactory, the Contractor will be required to
correct the problem at his own expense. This may include the removal of the
defective plaster and the complete re-plastering of the wall.
5.5 FLOORS TO COLD ROOMS/FREEZER ROOMS

The surface bed to Cold rooms/ Deep freeze rooms are to be smooth and level and
recessed below the surrounding floor level by approximately 200mm.
The Insulation Specialist Contractor will lay an insulation layer only, on top of which
shall be laid a 250 micron Gunplas membrane, on top of which shall be laid a 100mm
thick reinforced 30MPa concrete steel trowelled floated floor by the Main Contractor.
An 8mm wide joint is to be provided between the floor and the walls of the
prefabricated cold rooms/ deep freeze rooms and filled with soft board and sealed
with a polysulphide sealant finished flush with the floor surface.
Polysulphide sealant is to be applied around the floor drainage outlet where this
penetrates the floor.
All cold and freezer room floors are finished with a 10mm thick layer of Polyscreed
applied in strict accordance with the manufacturers specifications. The floor is to be
recessed across all door openings to accommodate the Polyscreed to be thickened to
20mm x 300mm wide at all thresholds. The Polyscreed is to have a smooth steel
trowel finish upon completion. Also see applicable cold and freezer room details.

PAGE
47
SECTION 6: TILER & PAVER (REVISION – A)

6.1 BACKGROUND PREPARATION (CERAMIC TILES)
WALL TILING: SPECIFICATION FOR FIXING CERAMIC WALL TILES ONTO INTERIOR
RENDERED WALLS
6.1.1 Allow all new wall-rendering to cure for at least 14 days. The rendering must
be firmly attached to the substrate, must be integrally sound (no crumbling,
cracking, etc) and must be of a quality and consistency suitable for tiling. The
background must be clean, dry, firm and sound and free from dust, loose
particles and surface contaminants before proceeding. Renders should be left
with a wood-float finish and must not be skim coated with gypsum plaster.
6.1.2 If the surface has been wood-floated it is possible to commence tiling.

However, if the surface has been steel-floated it will be necessary to first key
the surface with a slurry consisting of 1 part TAL KEYCOAT to 2 parts ordinary
Portland cement (by volume), which is applied by block brush. Allow this slurry
coat to dry for 4 – 6 hours before applying the adhesive.
6.2 ADHESIVE SYSTEM

6.2.1 General Areas
6.2.1.1 Apply TAL PROFESSIONAL adhesive to the background.
6.2.1.2 Use a notched WALL TROWEL to ensure optimum adhesive contact as

well as maximum coverage per unit of adhesive.
6.2.2 Oven and Stove Surrounds

6.2.2.1 Apply TAL PROFESSIONAL mixed 20kg with 5 litres of TAL BOND
(replacing the water in the mix) to the background using a notched
trowel.
6.2.2.2 In this tiling situation it is imperative that there is a solid bed of

adhesive at least 5mm thick beneath each tile. Use a notched FLOOR
TROWEL.
6.2.3 General
6.2.3.1 At no time spread more adhesive than can be tiled onto in 10 – 15
minutes. Depending on atmospheric conditions, this will normally be
around 1 square meter. This prevents the adhesive from drying or
“skinning” before the tiles is applied.

PAGE
48
6.2.3.2 Bed dry tiles (do not soak) firmly into the wet adhesive with a twisting
action to ensure full contact between the background, tiles and
adhesive. Tiles should be well tapped home with a rubber mallet or
the wooden handle of a trowel. It is sound practice to remove the
occasional tile to ensure that good contact has been achieved.
6.2.3.3 Clean off any surplus adhesive remaining on the face of tiles and
between the joints with a damp sponge before the adhesive dries.
6.2.3.4 Never butt joint tiles. Joints are required to allow the individual tiles
to move with respect to each other and thus avoid a compressive
stress build-up. They are also required as vents for the tile adhesive
to cure. The joints between ceramic wall tiles must be a minimum of
2mm wide. The joints between brick-tiles must be a minimum of
5mm wide.
NOTE: The joints between the ceramic tiles must be a minimum of 3mm wide
in areas where TAL Fine Epoxy Grout is to be used.
6.2.3.5 Pot life of the adhesive will vary with climatic conditions. Under no
circumstances should adhesive which has been left standing for too
long be reconstituted by adding more liquid.
6.2.3.6 Do not tile over structural, expansion or cold joints in the background.
These joints must be extended through the various layers to the
surface.
6.3 GROUTING
Scrape out/clean joints and vacuum prior to grouting.
6.3.1 Application
Grouting must not be carried out until sufficient bond has developed between
the bedding mix and the tiles to preclude disturbance of the tiles during the
grouting operation. Grouting should therefore not be carried out for 1 – 3
DAYS after completion of laying, depending on atmospheric conditions and
different tiling situations.
6.3.2 General Areas

6.3.2.1 Use Super White or coloured TAL WALL & FLOOR GROUT mixed
20kg with 8 litres of TAL BOND (Super White Grout)(replacing the
water in the mix) or 6 litres of TAL BOND (all other colours)(replacing
the water in the mix) for filling wall tile joints up to 8mm wide.
* NOTE: TAL Super White Grout is only suitable for wall tile joints up
to 3mm wide.

PAGE
49
6.3.2.2 WARNING:
 Particular care must be taken to clean the grout off the tile face
before it hardens completely. This is especially important when a
latex additive such as TAL BOND has been used.
 A sample of the tiles to be used should be tested beforehand to
ensure that no grout is absorbed through the glaze, or into the
tile body, causing permanent staining of the tiles.
 It is important to use the stipulated amount of liquid in the TAL
Grout mixture. When cleaning, a damp, not wet, sponge must be
used. Over hydration (too much water) of the mix, or in cleaning,
causes colour variations in the grout joints, and also affects the
integrity of the grout.
6.3.3 Food Preparation Areas (Bakery, Butchery, Deli, Fishery)

6.3.3.1 Grout with TAL FINE EPOXY GROUT, an epoxy compound used where
total imperviousness, chemical resistance or sterile conditions are
required, i.e. hospitals, dairies, laboratories, breweries, abattoirs, etc.
6.3.3.2 Add ALL the Hardener to ALL the Resin in the bucket and mix
thoroughly, scraping down the sides, until the mix assumes a uniform
colour. A MECHANICAL MIXER IS ESSENTIAL FOR GOOD MIXING.
6.3.3.3 NOTE: Never attempt to use part portions of the components.
6.3.3.4 Apply TAL FINE EPOXY GROUT with a squeegee or palette knife.
6.3.3.5 Scrape the excess off immediately and wipe the installation with a
damp (not wet) sponge, cleaning the sponge regularly in a bucket of
clean water.
6.3.3.6 Do not use excessive water and do not wet the joints before grouting.
6.3.3.7 A mix is useable for approximately 1 hour at 20ºC, after which time
any portion unused must be discarded. In hot conditions the pot life
may be shorter.
6.3.3.8 The installation should not be subjected to normal service conditions

until the epoxy is fully cured (24 – 48 hours for light service
conditions, and 7 days for optimum chemical resistance). Should the
grout be exposed to water, cleaning agents, etc before full cure has
taken place the integrity and performance of the product will be
compromised.
6.3.3.9 NOTE:
 If any epoxy is inadvertently spilled onto the tile face, it must be
removed using a damp cloth or sponge before it hardens.
PAGE
50
Spillage should be avoided as far as possible at it causes

unnecessary waste of material and time. Cured epoxy is very
difficult to remove, so the area must be cleaned as soon as
possible after grouting.
 Any faint haze left on the tiles after completion of grouting may
be removed using TAL EPOXY CLEANING FLUID.
ensure that no grout is absorbed through the glaze, or into the
tile body, causing permanent staining of the tiles.
6.4 MOVEMENT JOINTS

6.4.1 It should be noted that the lack of movement joints in a tile panel is a major
cause of tile failure. They should be specified at the design stage to avoid
placing them in heavy traffic areas and spoiling the visual effect of the tiles.
6.4.2 Movement joints should be located in both directions at maximum 5 meter

centres for interior applications. Movement joints should be located at
maximum 3 metre centres in areas where thermal expansion and contraction is
expected.
6.4.3 Movement joints should also be located in all horizontal and vertical corners,
against obstructions fixed to the structural background and over all
discontinuities in building materials, e.g. at interfaces of concrete and
brickwork. In addition, movement joints should be located around any fixtures
protruding through the tiled surface.
6.4.4 The joints should be at least 5mm wide and extend through the tile and
adhesive layers. All structural expansion joints in the background must be
extended through the tiles to the surface. The full width of the structural
joints must be extended through the tiles to the surface.
6.4.5 Where practical, the bulk of the depth of the movement joint can be filled with
TAL SEALMASTER CORD.
6.4.6 Seal the joint using TAL GOLD STAR SEALMASTER 1000 polyurethane joint
sealant in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. It is important that
the joint sealant bonds only to the sides of the movement joint.
6.4.7 For the key requirements common to all tiling situations, please refer to SABS
0107-1996 - Code of Practice.
6.5 BACKGROUND PREPARATION (PORCELAIN TILES)
SPECIFICATION FOR FIXING FULL BODIED PORCELAIN TILES ONTO INTERIOR

RENDERED WALLS

PAGE
51
6.5.1 Allow all new wall rendering to cure for at least 14 days. The rendering must
be firmly attached to the substrate, must be integrally sound (no crumbling,
cracking, etc) and must be of a quality and consistency suitable for tiling. The
background must be clean, dry, firm and sound and free from dust, loose
particles and surface contaminants before proceeding. Renders should be left
with a wood-float finish and should not be skim-coated with gypsum plaster.

However, if the surface has been steel-floated it will be necessary to first key
the surface with a slurry consisting of 1 part TAL KEYCOAT to 2 parts ordinary
Portland cement (by volume), which is applied by block brush. Allow this slurry
coat to dry for 4 – 6 hours before applying the adhesive.
6.6 ADHESIVE SYSTEM

6.6.1 General Areas
Apply TAL GOLD STAR 6 rapid setting adhesive to the background using a TAL
notched trowel.
6.6.2 Oven and Stove Surrounds

Apply TAL GOLD STAR 6 rapid setting adhesive mixed 20kg with 5 litres of TAL
BOND (replacing the water in the mix) to the background using a TAL notched
trowel.
6.6.3 General
6.6.3.1 In this tiling situation it is imperative that there is a solid bed of
adhesive at least 5mm thick beneath each tile. Use a notched FLOOR
TROWEL.
6.6.3.2 At no time spread more adhesive than can be tiled onto in 10 – 15

minutes. Depending on atmospheric conditions, this will normally be
around 1 square metre. This prevents the adhesive from drying or
“skinning” before tiles is applied.
6.6.3.3 Bed dry tiles (do not soak) firmly into the wet adhesive with a twisting
action to ensure full contact between the background, tiles and
adhesive. Tiles should be well tapped home with a rubber mallet or
the wooden handle of a trowel. It is sound practice to remove the
occasional tile to ensure that good contact has been achieved.
6.6.3.4 Clean off any surplus adhesive remaining on the face of tiles and
between the joints with a damp sponge before the adhesive dries.
6.6.3.5 Never butt joint tiles. Joints are required to allow the individual tiles
to move with respect to each other and thus avoid a compressive
stress build-up. They are also required as vents for the tile adhesive

PAGE
52
to cure. The joints between porcelain tiles must be a minimum of

3mm wide.
6.6.3.6 Pot life of the adhesive will vary with climatic conditions. Under no
circumstances should adhesive which has been left standing for too
long be reconstituted by adding more liquid.
6.6.3.7 Do not tile over structural, expansion or cold joints in the background.
These joints must be extended through the various layers to the
surface.
6.6.3.8 NOTE: Ensure that heavy and/or large format tiles are well supported
by means of a batten or some type of mechanical device until such
time that the adhesive has fully cured. In this situation it will be 6
hours.
6.7 GROUTING
6.7.1 Application Process
grouting operation. Allow a minimum of 4 hours before grouting.
6.7.2 General Areas

6.7.2.1 Use white or coloured TAL WALL & FLOOR GROUT mixed 20kg with 6
litres of TAL BOND (replacing Grouting the water in the mix) for filling
wall tile joints up to 8mm wide.
6.7.2.2 WARNING :
 Particular care must be taken to clean the grout off the tile face
ensure that no grout is absorbed into the tile body, causing
permanent staining of the tiles.
 It is important to use the stipulated amount of liquid in the TAL
Grout mixture. When cleaning, a damp, not wet, sponge must be
integrity of the grout, resulting in a friable product.


PAGE
53
clean water.
may be shorter.

compromised.
6.7.3.9 NOTE:
6.8 MOVEMENT JOINTS

6.8.2 Movement joints should be located in both directions at maximum 5 metre

centres for interior applications. Movement joints should be located at

PAGE
54
maximum 3 metre centres in areas where thermal expansion and contraction is

expected.
6.8.3 Movement joints should also be made in all horizontal and vertical corners,
against obstructions fixed to the structural background and over all
discontinuities in building materials, e.g. at interfaces of concrete and
brickwork. In addition, movement joints must be located around any fixtures
protruding through the tiled surface.
6.9 BACKGROUND PREPARATION (SURFACE BEDS)
FLOOR TILING SPECIFICATION FOR FIXING FULL BODIED PORCELAIN TILES ONTO
INTERIOR SURFACE BEDS
6.9.1 Allow all new concrete work and screeds to cure for at least 28 days before
proceeding. All new concrete work and screeds must have a moisture content
of 5% or less before tiling can commence. When tiling directly onto concrete,
ensure that the surfaces are clean and free of all traces of curing agents,
laitance and any other surface contaminants, preferably by scarifying.
6.9.2 Any screed must be firmly attached to the underlying concrete, must be
integrally sound (no crumbling, cracking, etc) and must be of a quality and
consistency suitable for tiling. All defective areas must be removed and the
floor made good before proceeding, using TAL RAPIDFIX or TALCEM. The
surface must be clean and dry and free of all traces of dust, debris, loose
particles and surface contaminants.
6.9.3 If the surface has been wood floated it is possible to commence tiling.
However, if the surface has been power floated or steel floated it will be
necessary to first key the surface with a slurry consisting of 1 part TAL
KEYCOAT to 2 parts ordinary Portland cement (by volume), which is applied by
PAGE
55
block brush. Allow this slurry coat to dry for 4 – 6 hours before applying the
adhesive.
6.10 ADHESIVE SYSTEM

6.10.1 Apply TAL GOLD STAR 6 rapid setting adhesive to the background using a TAL
notched trowel.
6.10.2 In this tiling situation it is imperative that there is a solid bed of adhesive at
least 6mm thick beneath each tile. We would recommend the use of a
notched TAL FLOOR TROWEL.
6.10.3 At no time spread more adhesive than can be tiled onto in 10 – 15 minutes.
Depending on atmospheric conditions, this will normally be around 1 square
metre. This prevents the adhesive from drying or “skinning” before the tiles
are applied.
6.10.4 Bed dry tiles (do not soak) firmly into the wet adhesive with a twisting action
to ensure full contact between the background, tiles and adhesive. Tiles
should be well tapped home with a rubber mallet or the wooden handle of a
trowel. It is sound practice to remove the occasional tile to ensure that good
contact has been achieved.
6.10.5 Clean off any surplus adhesive remaining on the face of tiles and between the
joints with a damp sponge before the adhesive dries.
6.10.6 Never butt joint tiles. Joints are required to allow the individual tiles to move
with respect to each other and thus avoid a compressive stress build-up. They
are also required as vents for the tile adhesive to cure. The joints between
porcelain tiles must be a minimum of 3mm wide.
6.10.7 Pot life of the adhesive will vary with climatic conditions. Under no
circumstances should adhesive which has been left standing for too long be
reconstituted by adding more liquid.
6.10.8 Do not tile over structural, expansion or cold joints in the background. These
joints must be extended through the various layers to the surface.
6.11 GROUTING
6.11.1 Application Process
6.11.2 Trading Areas

6.11.2.1 Use grey or coloured TAL WALL & FLOOR GROUT mixed 20kg with 6

PAGE
56
litres of TAL BOND (replacing the water in the mix) for filling tile joints
up to 8mm wide.
6.11.2.2 WARNING :
 Particular care must be taken to clean the grout off the tile face
 A sample of the tiles to be used should be tested beforehand to
 It is important to use the stipulated amount of liquid in the TAL
grout mixture. When cleaning, a damp, not wet, sponge must be
integrity of the grout, resulting in a friable product.

clean water.
may be shorter.

compromised.

PAGE
57
6.11.3.9 NOTE:
6.12 MOVEMENT JOINTS


centres for interior surface bed applications.
6.12.3 Movement joints should also be located around the perimeter of all floors, in
all vertical corners, against obstructions fixed to the structural background and
over all discontinuities in building materials, e.g. at interfaces of concrete and
protruding through the tiled surface such as columns or stairs.
6.12.4 Movement joints should also be created on either side of all sliding door
tracks.

PAGE
58
6.13 BACKGROUND PREPARATION (SUSPENDED SLABS)
SPECIFICATION FOR FIXING FULL BODIED PORCELAIN TILES ONTO INTERIOR

SUSPENDED SLABS
Note: Tiling onto SUSPENDED concrete slabs require special precautions to be taken
as the installation is prone to increased movement caused by slab deflection, loading,
etc. TAL BOND needs to be incorporated in the adhesive mix or a single part flexible
adhesive such as TAL GOLDFLEX needs to be used to allow for the increased
movement.
As tiling is onto a suspended slab we have incorporated waterproofing of the

substrate prior to tiling in the food preparation areas to ensure there is no water
penetration or permeation into the level below.
6.13.1 Allow all new concrete work and screeds to cure for at least 28 days before
proceeding. All new concrete work and screeds must have a moisture content
of 5% or less before tiling can commence. When tiling directly onto concrete,
ensure that the surfaces are clean and free of all traces of curing agents,
laitance and any other surface contaminants, preferably by scarifying.
6.13.2 Any screed must be firmly attached to the underlying concrete, must be
integrally sound (no crumbling, cracking, etc.) and must be of a quality and
consistency suitable for tiling. All defective areas must be removed and the
floor made good before proceeding, using TAL RAPIDFIX or TALCEM. The
surface must be clean and dry and free of all traces of dust, debris, loose
particles and surface contaminants.

However, if the surface has been power-floated or steel-floated it will be
necessary to first key the surface with a slurry consisting of 1 part TAL
KEYCOAT to 2 parts ordinary Portland cement (by volume), which is applied by
block brush. Allow this slurry coat to dry for 4 – 6 hours before applying the
adhesive.
6.14 WATERPROOFING (FOOD PREPARATION AREAS, WHERE REQUIRED)

The substrate must have a moisture content of 5% or less before the waterproofing
can be applied.
6.14.1 Waterproof the substrate using TAL SUREPROOF, a cementitious

waterproofing system, as follows :
6.14.2 All areas to be waterproofed must be primed prior to the waterproofing

application. Wood-floated surfaces must be primed with a coat of neat TAL
FLOOR PRIMER, and power-floated or steel-floated surfaces must be primed
with a slurry consisting of 1 part TAL FLOORKEY mixed with 2 parts ordinary
PAGE
59
Portland cement (by volume), which is applied by block brush. Allow the
priming coat to dry before TAL SUREPROOF is applied.
6.14.3 The TAL SUREPROOF waterproofing system comprises of 2 components, one

containing a cementitious polymer and one containing a liquid-applied
waterproofing membrane. The two parts are mechanically mixed together by
adding the powder to the liquid, and mixing until a creamy, lump-free
consistency is obtained. Let the mix stand for 3 – 5 minutes before stirring
again. Apply TAL SUREPROOF to the clean substrate using a block brush, red
enamel paint roller, etc.
6.15 COVING AREAS & INTERNAL CORNERS

6.15.1 To allow for movement, apply a 10mm bead of flexible silicone sealant into
the interface between the wall and floor and between internal vertical corners
prior to the SUREPROOF application. (Due care must be taken to ensure that
the silicone bead is not flattened out.)
6.15.2 Apply a coat of TAL SUREPROOF by block brush or red enamel paint roller to
these interfaces. Immediately roll out the SUREPROOF MEMBRANE (200mm
wide) into the wet SUREPROOF with the membrane extending 100mm equally
on either side of the interface, ensuring that there are no wrinkles or air
bubbles trapped beneath the membrane. The membrane must be pushed into
the corners, ensuring that the entire interface is covered with SUREPROOF
MEMBRANE. Apply a heavy topcoat of SUREPROOF to completely saturate the
membrane before the first coat of SUREPROOF dries.
6.16 FLOOR WASTE/FULL BORE DRAINS

Apply a coat of TAL SUREPROOF up the pipes and immediately position the strip of
SUREPROOF MEMBRANE into the wet TAL SUREPROOF. Apply a second coat of TAL
SUREPROOF to completely saturate the membrane. For wastes that are flush with the
floor, take the application down into and around the waste.
6.17 MAIN AREA APPLICATION

6.17.1 Two coats of TAL SUREPROOF must be applied to ensure a minimum 1.2mm
thickness is achieved. Apply the first coat of TAL SUREPROOF to the dry,
primed surface with a block brush or red enamel paint roller and allow drying
(approximately 1 – 2 hours). Apply the second coat of TAL SUREPROOF in a
different direction to ensure complete coverage with no air entrapment or
pinholes.
6.17.2 It is essential to ensure that the main SUREPROOF application overlaps the
corner joints/interfaces, i.e. the interface application must be completely
covered by the main area application.

PAGE
60
6.17.3 Allow the membrane to dry completely (approximately 24 - 36 hours,

depending on weather conditions) before being subjected to light foot traffic
or applying the tiles.
(For more detailed information, please contact TAL for a Technical Data Sheet
on the product.)
6.18 ADHESIVE SYSTEM

6.18.1 Apply TAL GOLD STAR 6 rapid setting adhesive mixed 20kg with 5 litres of TAL
BOND (replacing the water in the mix) to the background using a TAL notched
trowel. Alternatively, apply TAL GOLDFLEX rapid setting flexible adhesive to the
background using a TAL notched trowel. No additives are required; simply mix
with water, alleviating possible errors on site.
6.18.2 In this tiling situation it is imperative that there is a solid bed of adhesive at
least 6mm thick beneath each tile. Use a notched FLOOR TROWEL.
6.18.3 At no time spread more adhesive than can be tiled onto in 10 – 15 minutes.
Depending on atmospheric conditions, this will normally be around 1 square
metre. This prevents the adhesive from drying or “skinning” before tiles is
applied.
6.18.4 Bed dry tiles (do not soak) firmly into the wet adhesive with a twisting action
to ensure full contact between the background, tiles and adhesive. Tiles
should be well tapped home with a rubber mallet or the wooden handle of a
trowel. It is sound practice to remove the occasional tile to ensure that good
contact has been achieved.
6.18.5 Clean off any surplus adhesive remaining on the face of tiles and between the
joints with a damp sponge before the adhesive dries.
6.18.6 Never butt joint tiles. Joints are required to allow the individual tiles to move
with respect to each other and thus avoid a compressive stress build-up. They
are also required as vents for the tile adhesive to cure. The joints between
porcelain tiles must be a minimum of 3mm wide.
6.18.7 Pot life of the adhesive will vary with climatic conditions. Under no
circumstances should adhesive which has been left standing for too long be
reconstituted by adding more liquid.
6.18.8 Do not tile over structural, expansion or cold joints in the background. These
joints must be extended through the various layers to the surface.
6.19 GROUTING
6.19.1 Grouting must not be carried out until sufficient bond has developed between
PAGE
61
6.19.2 Trading Areas.
6.19.3 Use grey or coloured TAL WALL & FLOOR GROUT mixed 20kg with 6 litres of
TAL BOND (replacing the water in the mix) for filling tile joints up to 8mm
wide.
6.19.4 WARNING :
 Particular care must be taken to clean the grout off the tile face before it
hardens completely. This is especially important when a latex additive
such as TAL BOND has been used.
 A sample of the tiles to be used should be tested beforehand to ensure
that no grout is absorbed into the tile body, causing permanent staining
of the tiles.
 It is important to use the stipulated amount of liquid in the TAL Grout
mixture. When cleaning, a damp, not wet, sponge must be used. Over
hydration (too much water) of the mix, or in cleaning, causes colour
variations in the grout joints, and also affects the integrity of the grout,
resulting in a friable product.
6.20 FOOD PREPARATION AREAS (BAKERY, BUTCHERY, DELI, FISHERY)

6.20.1 Grout with TAL FINE EPOXY GROUT, an epoxy compound used where total
imperviousness, chemical resistance or sterile conditions are required, i.e.
hospitals, dairies, laboratories, breweries, abattoirs, etc.
6.20.2 Add ALL the Hardener to ALL the Resin in the bucket and mix thoroughly,
scraping down the sides, until the mix assumes a uniform colour. A
MECHANICAL MIXER IS ESSENTIAL FOR GOOD MIXING.
6.20.3 NOTE: Never attempt to use part portions of the components.
6.20.4 Apply TAL FINE EPOXY GROUT with a squeegee or palette knife.
6.20.5 Scrape the excess off immediately and wipe the installation with a damp (not
wet) sponge, cleaning the sponge regularly in a bucket of clean water.
6.20.6 Do not use excessive water and do not wet the joints before grouting.
6.20.7 A mix is useable for approximately 1 hour at 20ºC, after which time any portion
unused must be discarded. In hot conditions the pot life may be shorter.
6.20.8 The installation should not be subjected to normal service conditions until the
epoxy is fully cured (24 – 48 hours for light service conditions, and 7 days for
optimum chemical resistance). Should the grout be exposed to water, cleaning
agents, etc before full cure has taken place the integrity and performance of
the product will be compromised.

PAGE
62
6.20.9 NOTE:
 If any epoxy is inadvertently spilled onto the tile face, it must remove
using a damp cloth or sponge before it hardens. Spillage should be
avoided as far as possible at it causes unnecessary waste of material and
time. Cured epoxy is very difficult to remove, so the area must be cleaned
as soon as possible after grouting.
 Any faint haze left on the tiles after completion of grouting may be
removed using TAL EPOXY CLEANING FLUID.
 A sample of the tiles to be used should be tested beforehand to ensure
that no grout is absorbed into the tile body, causing permanent staining
of the tiles.
6.21 MOVEMENT JOINTS


centres for suspended applications.
6.21.3 Movement joints should also be located around the perimeter of all floors, in
all vertical corners, against obstructions fixed to the structural background and
over all discontinuities in building materials, e.g. at interfaces of concrete and
protruding through the tiled surface such as columns or stairs.
6.21.4 Movement joints should also be created on either side of all sliding door
tracks.
extended through the tiles to the surface. The full width of the structural joints
must be extended through the tiles to the surface.

PAGE
63
SECTION 7: CARPENTER (REVISIION – A)

7.1 HARDWOOD
Hardwood is to be the best-selected quality, well-seasoned, and kiln dried.
7.2 TIMBER GENERALLY

Timber is to comply with requirements of SANS 1783-3: 1997.
7.3 JOINERY PRIMING

Prime timber before building in.
Season in accordance with SANS 1097: 1976.
Tolerance is to be as SANS 1783 1-2: 1997.
All joinery is to be protected.
7.4 WOOD PRESERVATIVE

Treat against infestation by insect pests with two good brush coats of
Pentachlorophenol (SANS 42) before being fixed in position.
7.5 SKIMMED/PLASTERED CEILINGS

Nailed up ceilings are to comply with the requirements of SANS 266 and bear the
standardisation mark of the SABS.
Brandering at 450mm centres is to be size 38mm x 38mm softwood complying with

the requirements of SANS 1783-4: 1997.
Joints between boards are to be covered with scrim wire and the joints are to be
plaster skimmed.
Cornice is to be 50mm x 25mm hardwood, nailed to ceiling brandering at 300mm

centres.
See Schedule of Finishes Section 20 a full specification of the material and

workmanship for ceilings.
Skimmed ceilings may be required to highlight or define certain areas on the trading
floor and entrances. Refer to the Shoprite Checkers Architect for detailed drawings.

PAGE
64
7.6 SUSPENDED CEILINGS

The ceiling boards are to be 600 x 1,200 Vivid White vinyl clad lay in panels
suspended in Donn system according to specification. A 600 x 600 Vivid vinyl clad in
ceiling grid to be installed as per layout on the Shoprite Checkers Architect's ceiling
plan.
7.7 INSULATION TO CEILINGS

50mm Isoboard is to be used for roof insulation or other alternative to be approved
by Shoprite Checker’s Representative. Roof insulation is to comply with SANS 10400.
Roof insulation is to be 100mm centre groove 50mm thick ISOBOARD, 50mm smooth
board over purlin installation and 50mm in between purlin installation with a top hat
fixing detail. The 50mm in between purlin must have the 100mm centre groove finish
facing the trading floor.
Fixing and roof guarantee must be provided to the Shoprite Checkers Architect.
135mm thick factorylite or other approved is to be used at back of house area as an

over purlin application. To comply with SANS 10400 XA.
See Schedule of Finishes Section 20 for full description and detail.
Note that the trading floor will be insulated with 50mm Isoboard, and all other areas
insulated with Sisalation, all fitted over purlins.
See Schedule of Finishes Section 20 for full description and detail.
7.8 CEILING VOIDS/FIRE COMPARTMENTS

Ceiling voids/fire compartments are to be compartmentalised in Rhino board
cladding to conform to the requirements of the Local Authority Fire Department and
for National Building Regulations.
7.9 FRAMED, LEDGED AND BATTENED DOORS

All external doors are to be framed, ledged and battened doors.
A 0,6mm galvanised mild steel plate is to be fitted to the outside face of all external
doors.
(Refer to Door details Section 21.2)
7.10 FLUSH DOORS

All internal doors are to be semi-solid flush doors, or solid as specified, with veneer
suitable for painting complying with the requirements of SANS 545. Doors in two
leaves are to be fitted with rebated edge strips.

PAGE
65
7.11 DOOR STOPS

All outward-opening doors with parliament hinges must be provided with brass
hooks and eyes to keep in an open position, as well as doorstops fixed to walls.
7.12 WEATHER BOARDS

All external inward opening doors are to be fitted with 76mm x 38mm chamfered and
treated timber weatherboard.
7.13 TRAP DOORS

Form maintenance trap doors above Cold/Freezer Rooms or in flush ceilings at
strategic positions for access for future maintenance to hot water cylinders and
refrigeration piping.
7.14 BUMP RAILS

7.14.1 Galvanized Pipe Bump Rail
Install a 75mm diameter galvanized pipe as a bump rail at back of house area
as indicated on layout plan. See detail DET57.
7.14.2 Stainless Steel Bump Rail

Install a 75mm diameter stainless steel pipe as bump rail on both sides of
crash doors on trading floor side.

PAGE
66
SECTION 8: IRONMONGER (REVISION – A)

8.1 GENERAL
Locks, latches and associated furniture for doors are to comply with SANS 4. All
ironmongery is to be selected and approved. All fittings are to be oiled and eased on
completion.
8.2 SCREWS
All visible screws are to be of the same metal, colour and finish as the parts they
secure, solid and not plated.
8.3 KEYS
Each lock must be supplied with two keys.
8.4 STAMPING
All locks must be stamped with a reference number and the keys must be similarly
stamped with a corresponding number to the lock which they control.
8.5 KEY LABELS

Each lock must be supplied with a 1,6mm brass oval label. Each label must be clearly
stamped with room description.
8.6 DOOR FURNITURE AND IRONMONGERY

All external doors and frames to be galvanized. Refer to Door schedule.
8.7 LOCKS
All locks throughout the premises are to be 3 or 4 lever Mortice locksets with lever
furniture as approved.
8.8 INDICATOR BOLTS

Indicator bolts are to be fitted to all W.C. cubicle doors.
8.9 NAME PLATES

Refer to schedule of nameplates.
8.10 KICKING PLATES

Refer to Door schedule.
8.11 BARREL BOLTS

Heavy duty barrel bolts are to be fitted to all double doors.

PAGE
67
8.12 TOWEL RAILS

Type and size to be fitted to all toilet facilities and canteen as specified on the SC
architects drawing.
8.13 TOILET ROLL HOLDERS

Refer to Sanitary Schedule of Finishes Section 20.6.
8.14 LOCK CHANGE AT BENEFICIAL HANDOVER

All locks to external doors are to be changed at beneficial handover in the presence of
the Shoprite Checkers Representative.
8.15 LOCK TO STRONG ROOMS

The keys to the locks of the strong room doors as well as the Anti-Bandit doors are to
be delivered by hand to the Shoprite Checkers Representative in a sealed envelope as
supplied by the manufacturer.

PAGE
68
SECTION 9: FOUNDER & SMITH (REVISION – A)

9.1 PRESSED STEEL DOOR FRAMES

1,6mm pressed steel doorframes are to be of approved manufacture and to comply
with the requirements of SANS 1129.
Frames are to allow for the fitment of 40mm thick doors.
Pressed steel doorframes for coastal areas are to be hot-dip galvanised before leaving
the manufacturer’s works.
9.2 CORNER PROTECTORS

All exposed columns and corners of walls on the trading area and service areas shall
be protected by brushed stainless steel under tile corner protectors where shown on
drawings. Refer to SC architects drawings for sizes applicable to specific areas.
9.3 WIRE MESH PARTITIONS

Full height Mentex 304 partitions complete with gates. Refer to Wire screen details.
All coastal areas to be galvanised otherwise painted or both.
9.4 BULKHEADS
Skim plastered Rhino board bulkheads supported on steel framework (steel
substructure supported from roof structure) to be erected over service departments
and various other areas of which the extent will be indicated on the SRC Architect
work drawings. Bulkhead structural support needs to be provided as per the
Structural engineer's detail.
Bulkheads for Checkers and Checkers Hyper stores usually start between 2,7m – 3,3m
above FFL, extending (depending on circumstances) to either 4,5m or tie beam or full
height to underside of ceiling. Refer to the work drawings of the SRC Architect.
9.5 STRONG ROOM DOOR

Records room door is to be category 3 Mutual or similar approved, complete with
vents.
9.6 IMPACT TRAFFIC DOORS

Double action traffic doors with Perspex vision panels on medium duty steel framing
and spring arm action between trading area and service areas. See door schedule for
full description of manufacturers, supplier and installation.

PAGE
69
9.7 ALUMINIUM DOORS AND SHOP FRONTS

The abbreviation AAAMSA used herein refers to the Association of Architectural
Aluminium Manufacturers of South Africa.
9.7.1 Anodizing
Anodising is to be Grade A quality (25 microns) for coastal regions. Samples
are to be submitted for approval.
9.7.2. Powder Coating

Powder coating as per specification. Samples are to be submitted to SRC for
approval.
9.7.3 Construction
Construction is to comply with the minimum performance requirements
contained in the relevant “Selection Guides” as published by AAAMSA from
time to time.
Designs not covered by AAAMSA are to comply with SANS 10160 in particular
and current National Building Regulations.
The manufacturer must at all times ensure that contact between incompatible
materials is prevented.
The Shop front Manufacturer is to take responsibility for the design stability
and performance of his units, and is to provide workshop drawings for final
approval before manufacture commences.
9.7.4 Fittings
Weather sealing is to be of materials that are compatible with aluminium and
to be such that any degradation, shrinking, warping or adherence to sliding or
closing surfaces does not impair the performance of the installation.
Glazing beads, gaskets and glazing compounds are to be of materials that are
compatible with the aluminium, finishes, the glass and any other glazing
materials.
Hardware, bearing devices and fittings in general are to be made of materials

resistant to atmospheric corrosion and must be of a design so as to be
accessible for adjustment; repair and replacement after the windows, etc. have
been installed.
Fastenings are to be of material that is compatible with aluminium and

aluminium finishes.
Entrance doors may be one or a combination of the following: Double action

Spring doors (Aluminium framed glass); Sliding (manual or electrically
PAGE
70
operated) (Aluminium framed or frameless) glass doors; Sliding stacking

(Aluminium framed or frameless) glass doors; Sliding folding (Aluminium
framed or frameless) glass doors.
Electrically operated perforated or solid panel roller shutter doors (powder

coated). Door heights may vary between 2,1 meter and 4 meter.
Doors are to be fitted with deadlocks and flush bolts on the leading edge of
the doors.
All locks are to be of the replaceable cylinder type, temporary cylinder being
provided during building operations and the final cylinders handed to
Shoprite Checkers at the time of Beneficial Occupation.
Some external doors are to be provided with heavy-duty chromium plated

double knuckle hasp and staple to receive a padlock fitted externally.
9.7.5 Glazing
All glass to shop fronts is to be safety glass and glazing is to be carried out in
accordance with current National Building Regulations read in conjunction
with SANS 10137 : 2002, as well as other applicable SANS Standards and SABS
0400.
All glazing beads are to be fixed to internal side of shop front.
Glazed partitions of anodised aluminium framing are to be glazed in

laminated safety glass. Such partitions are to be constructed on top of dwarf
wall and to extend to ceiling level or bulkhead as detailed.
9.8 ROLLER SHUTTERS

9.8.1 General
Roller shutter doors, other than those to be electrified, are to be hand
operated from the inside.
All gaps between channel guides and walls and at the top and the bottom of
roller shutter doors are to be suitably sealed.
9.8.2 Receiving
Refer to Door Schedule for details in Section 21.2.

PAGE
71
SECTION 10: PLUMBER & DRAINLAYER

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER (REVISION – A)
10.1 LOCAL AUTHORITIES

All plumbing and drainage work is to comply with the Local Authority requirements.
10.2 PVC SEWER PIPES

To comply with SANS 819: 1999.
10.3 CAST IRON PIPES

To comply with SANS 746: 2010.
10.4 MILD STEEL PIPING

To comply with SANS.
10.5 COPPER PIPES

To comply with SANS 460: 1985, 460: 1985 and 460: 1975.
10.6 PLASTIC WASTE TRAPS

To comply with SANS 1321 – Part 1.
10.7 STONEWARE
To comply with SANS 559.
10.8 GRATINGS
To comply with SANS 60335-1: 1995.
10.9 GENERAL INSTALLATION OF DRAINAGE AND WATER

SANS 10400, SANS 10252 part 1 & 2 and their associated documentation.
10.10 GEYSERS EMERGENCY DRAINS

To be installed in accordance with SANS 10400, 10252 and associated specifications
and manufactures requirements.
10.11 POLYETHYLENE AND UPVC PIPES

As recommended in SANS 10112.
10.12 MAIN PIPE CONNECTIONS

To requirements of Local Authority.
10.13 STANDARD FITTINGS

Ball valves and stopcocks, etc. are to be tested and stamped SABS. Ball valves are to
comply with the requirements of SANS 752: 2000.

PAGE
72
In the event that water pressure is below 3 bar non-metallic ball-floats intended for
use with ball valves specified above are to comply with SANS 1006.
All water taps and stopcocks are to comply with the requirements of SANS 266: 2000
and bear the standardisation mark of the South African Bureau of Standards.
With the approval of the SRC Architects, water taps (metallic) are to comply with
SANS 226.
10.14 SANITARY FITTINGS

Sanitary fittings are to comply with the respective SABS Standards as follows:
(a) Glazed ceramic sanitary ware SANS 497
(b) W.C. flushing cisterns SANS 821
(c) Stainless steel sinks with draining boards SANS 242
(d) Stainless steel sinks SANS 907
(e) Stainless steel wash-hand basins and wash troughs SANS 906
10.15 WATER CONNECTION AND METER

Provide an approved 50mm connection of the semi-positive rotary piston type with
brass or bronze working chamber with screwed ends for coupling to water mains and
hinged cover to cyclometer dial. The water meter is to register in litres and to be
accurate within 2% of any rate of flow. The working parts are to be easily removable
from the casing, without disturbing the connecting pipes.
Provide a cast iron meter box of suitable size, with a hinged lid, set level in the ground
on a half brick chamber, built up from bottom of pipe trench in cement mortar.
10.16 COLD WATER SUPPLY

Connect to water meter or point of supply with 19mm polyethylene water piping as
per SANS 533 – 1 Class 16 and lay 375mm underground to various parts of the
premises where water is required.
10.17 HOT WATER SUPPLY

Where electric hot water heating is specified, supply and set on bearers in roof, or,
where not in roof space, on brackets or platforms shown on drawings, approved
horizontal electric hot water cylinders and break pressure units, complying with the
requirements of SANS 151 and bearing the standardisation mark of the South African
Bureau of Standards. To be installed in accordance with SANS 10400, 10252 and
associated specifications and manufactures requirements. To comply with SANS
10400 XA in that 50% minimum of the water heating to be by means of heat pump
or solar panels.
The capacity of electrical hot water cylinders for the various areas is as follows:
(a) Tea kitchen (Canteen) and all toilet facilities 150 litre
(b) All Service Departments (i.e. Butchery/Deli’s,
Bakery, Fish etc.) 200 litre
PAGE
73
(c) Fruit and Veg Preparation area 150 litre

(d) Backup Food Preparation areas (where applicable) 200 litre
(e) Cleaner room 150 litre
It may be possible in certain instances to share hot water cylinders between facilities.
It will be up to the sole discretion of the SRC Architect.
Refer to SRC Architect/ Plumbing consultant drawings for number and positions of
cylinders.
10.18 WATER TAPS AND VALVES

All water taps and stopcocks are to comply with the requirements of SANS 266: 2000
and bear the standardisation mark of the South African Bureau of Standards.
Water taps are reviewed frequently and the make and model may differ from the time
when the specification is considered by the developer to when work drawings are
prepared by the SRC Architect. The SCR Architect work drawing specification will then
supersede this specification at no additional cost to Shoprite Checkers (Pty) Ltd.
Ball valves are to comply with the requirements of SANS 752: 2000 and bear the
standardisation mark of the South African Bureau of Standards.
10.19 STOP COCKS

Provide brass screw stop cocks on hot and cold water supply pipes inside the
premises where required, including on supply pipe to cisterns and tanks in roof, or to
break pressure unit on electric hot water cylinder. Stop cocks in service areas visible to
the public to be as per Schedule of Finishes.
10.20 SINKS
Stainless steel sinks with drainers and 150mm high splash backs are to be supplied
and fixed to steel pipe supports all set 100mm clear from walls.
All sinks are to have 38mm waste outlets and 25mm diameter overflow pipes
connected to the drain above the trap.
All service departments to be provided with prep sink and a double bowl pot sink.
Refer to Schedule of Finishes Section 20.
Sinks are to be provided to the various areas as follows:

 Fruit & Veg Prep Area
 Fish Prep
 Butchery Prep
 Deli Prep
 Floor Deli
 Bakery Prep Area
 Staff Kitchen
PAGE
74
 Refuse Room
10.21 HAND WASH BASINS

One-piece rangers are approved where two or more basins are installed together.
Porcelain basins are required for:

 Manager’s/Supervisor’s toilet
 Disable toilets
 Dispensary
 Female Toilets
 Male Toilets
 All Service departments (bakery, deli’s, butchery, fish etc.)
Hand wash basins are reviewed frequently and the make and model may differ from
the time when the specification is considered by the developer to when work
drawings are prepared by the SRC Architect. The SCR Architect work drawing
specification will then supersede this specification at no additional cost to Shoprite
Checkers (Pty) Ltd.
Refer to the SRC Architect's drawings.
10.22 URINALS
Ceramic as per Schedule of Finishes or as shown on the SRC Architect's drawing.
Urinals are reviewed frequently and the make and model may differ from the time
when the specification is considered by the developer to when work drawings are
prepared by the SRC Architect. The SCR Architect work drawing specification will then
supersede this specification at no additional cost to Shoprite Checkers (Pty) Ltd.
10.23 PEDESTAL WATER CLOSET PANS

Pedestal water closet pans are to be of the wash down type, manufactured of vitreous
china, or equally approved toilet seats, complying with the requirements of SANS 497:
1991.
Pans are to be fitted with double flap heavy-duty type seats on chromium plated
hinge fixings.
10.24 CISTERNS
10.25 GREASE TRAPS

All waste pipes from sinks in food preparation areas and floor drains are to discharge
over stainless steel finished grease traps let into floors complete with removable mesh
baskets to Local Authority approval.
PAGE
75
10.26 FLOOR TRAPS

Refer to Schedule of Finishes. Type will be specified by the Shoprite Checkers
Architect.
10.27 SUMP PUMPS AND PIPE WORK

Where any facilities are situated below natural ground level, an automatic electric
sump pump or pumps, complete with float switches, control panel and associated
pipe work, where required by the SRC Architect. These pumps are to be capable of
discharging 450 litres of water per minute. The pump is to be connected to an
automatic alarm system, which will give audible warning of pump failure. Head of
pump to be determined prior to installation by the Mechanical Engineer.
10.28 WATER SUPPLY IN REFRIGERATION CABINETS

A 13mm diameter water supply pipe is to be provided to certain refrigeration
cabinets. Refer to the SRC Architect's drawings.
This pipe is to project 50mm above finished floor level and to be fitted with a 15mm
diameter gate valve.
10.29 WATER SUPPLY TO BAKERY OVENS AND PROOVER

Provide a 15mm diameter water supply to the exhaust canopy in the Bakery for
connection to the oven.
The outlet is to terminate 2,550mm above finished floor level with stop valve and
threaded T-piece. New paint added.
10.30 OVERHEAD SPRAY UNIT FOR FRUIT & VEG AND FISHERY
Provide a 38mm diameter water supply pipe to overhead spray point as indicated on
the SRC Architect's drawings.
10.31 CONDENSATION DRAINS IN FLOOR TRENCHES

A 110mm diameter main drain is to be installed outside the refrigeration floor trench
and to be fitted with 100mm, 75mm and 50mm diameter branches where specified by
the Shoprite Checkers Specialist Refrigeration Contractor.
This condensation drain may also serve all cold and freezer rooms and refrigerated
cabinets. The condensation pipe is to be suitably trapped and vermin proofed at the
exit to the main sewer line. These outlets are to discharge over galleys. The
condensation drain is to have a minimum fall of 1 to 80.
10.32 UNDER SLAB FIXING

The pipe supports and brackets to be positioned in accordance with the various
manufactures requirements. The developers plumbing consultant must take adequate
measures to prevent damage below the Supermarket against drainage, leakage and
failure.

PAGE
76
10.33 ICE MACHINES

Provide a 22mm diameter cold water supply together with stopcock and threaded
end for connection to the ice-making machines as indicated by the SRC Architect.
Provide a 38mm diameter waste pipe to the nearest gulley. Refer to position on SRC
Architect drawings.
10.34 CONVECTION OVEN

Provide a 22mm diameter cold water supply together with stopcock and threaded
end for connection to the convection oven as indicated by the SRC Architects. Provide
a 50mm diameter heat resistant waste pipe up to 1m in the floor. Refer to position on
the SRC Architects drawings.
10.35 DRAIN TO PROOVER AND OVEN

Provide a 75mm diameter trapped waste outlet with chromium plated grid in the
position inside the prover in the Bakery.
10.36 EXCAVATION AND FILLING

Drains, joints and connections should not be covered until they have been tested to
the satisfaction of the Local Authority and the SRC Architect.
10.37 GULLEYS
Gulley’s are to be formed with a 100mm diameter PVC gulley trap.
10.38 HOLES & CHASES FOR PIPES

All holes and chases are to be cut in floors, roofs, ceilings, for pipes, brackets, and are
to be made good in all trades. All internal water piping is to be concealed by building
or chasing into walls.
10.39 SURFACE MOUNTED PIPING

No surface mounted piping will be accepted.
10.40 DRAINS TO COLD ROOMS

To be supplied and installed as specified by the SRC Specialist Refrigeration
Consultant.
10.41 SUSPENDED PIPING IN TENANTED AREAS

All drainage piping in other tenanted areas to be in HDPE with expansion joints at
every 12m. The above mentioned piping is to be protected with drip trays with a
minimum width of 600mm wide x 50mm sides.
Drip tray detail to be submitted and approved by the SRC Architect. Drip tray to slope
with the slope of the piping with a minimum 50/75mm outlet at the end of the tray.
Drainage from tray to discharge into an open area specified by the SRC Architect.

PAGE
77
10.42 UNDER COUNTER GEYSERS

Kwikot 10 litre under counter/basin Prisma Geysers to be installed.
Installation is to comply with manufacturer's specifications and where SANS 10252

specified and all related documents therein.
10.43 HEAT PUMPS

Heat Pumps are to comply with Eskom 2.8COP requirements. Certificates for heat
pumps confirming the above compliance are necessary. Refer to Schedule of Finishes.
10.44 TRENCHING
All trenching, bedding and backfill shall be in accordance with SABS 1200-DB/L/LB/LD
(as amended) or an approved equal and to the manufacture's recommendations.
All excavation and backfill shall be by the Plumber. The Plumber shall be responsible
for the coordination of the trench routing, slope and elevation and shall supervise the
grading, backfilling etc. of trenches in which plumbing work is laid.
Normal fillings of the trench should then proceed in layers not exceeding 300mm in
thickness, each layer well rammed. Heavy mechanical rammers should not be used
until the fill has reached a depth of 300mm above the top of the pipe. Special
consideration and selection of backfilling material will be necessary. That is, no stones
or rocks are to be in the backfilling mentioned below.
Piping is to be a minimum of 600mm below surface bed levels as indicated on SRC

Architect drawings.
10.45 BEDDING AND SIDEFILLING

Backfilling must be carried out with necessary care, any levelling pegs or temporary
packing shall be removed. The thickness of the bedding under the barrel of the pipe
should not be less than one third of the diameter and a minimum of 100mm thick. In
very soft or wet conditions, or where the bottom of the trench is very irregular, this
thickness should be increased as necessary to give a suitable bed. The bedding shall
be thoroughly compacted in layers not more than 150mm thick to give a uniform
bed, true to gradient, on which the pipe may be laid. Pipes shall be laid directly on
this bedding. Bricks or other hard material must be placed under the pipes for
temporary support. Further bedding material should be placed around the pipe and
be thoroughly compacted in 75mm layers by careful hand tamping up to the crown of
the pipe, eliminating all cavities under the two lower quadrants of the pipe. The same
material should be placed over the crown of the pipe for not less than two thirds of
the diameter, with a minimum height of 100mm and a maximum of 300mm, and be
thoroughly compacted. The process of filling and tamping shall proceed equally on
either side of the pipe, so as to maintain equal pressure on both sides.

PAGE
78
10.46 MATERIAL FOR BEDDING SIDEFILLING

Soils, excavated from the trench (such as free draining coarse sand, gravel, loam and
soil of a friable nature) will be suitable for use as side fill material, but they must be
capable of being compacted sufficiently to provide adequate support for the pipe.
Soils, such as hard chalk which break up when wet, and clay should not be used
immediately around the pipe for bedding, side fill or backfill. The material excavated
from the trench is unsuitable, and a medium granular backfill material shall be used.
10.47 COMPACTION
Compaction under paved areas and under roads shall be kept to within 2% of the
optimum moisture content while compacting, it to the specified density. Compaction
will be carried out in layers as described in the previous paragraph. A 95% modified
AASHTO density shall be applicable where no density is specified. Except for the
above cases, the major part of the backfilling of pipes shall be done to 80% modified
AASHTO or unless specified by the Structural Engineer.
10.48 CONNECTIONS TO EXTERNAL SERVICES

These connections to conform to SANS 10400P, SANS 10252 and the requirements of
the Local Authority.
10.49 WATER TANK

The SRC Architects must be consulted in water scares areas regarding water supply
and water quality. Water tanks to be provided by developer at his cost in consultation
with the SRC Architects. (Refer to DET20 for minimum requirements). (Refer to
Schedule of Finishes).
10.50 FLOOR DRAINS TO PREP AREA

Pollution solution floor trap with removable basket. Refer to Schedule of Finishes
10.51 FLOOR DRAINS IN COLDROOMS

Herbish floor drain HD200V (H) NW100. Refer to Schedule of Finishes.

PAGE
79
SECTION 11: PAINTER (REVISION – A)

11.1 GENERAL
See the Schedule of Finishes Section 20 for paint specification.
In addition to these the SRC Architect may elect to paint different colours and or
paint types in different areas at no additional cost to Shoprite Checkers (Pty)
Ltd.
All oil paints, oil stains, varnish, linseed oil, knotting, driers, distempers, etc. are to be
the best of their respective kinds and of approved brand and colour. Each coat of
paint is of a distinctive colour selected by the Shoprite Checkers Architect.
All materials for paintwork, for which South African Bureau of Standards Specifications
have been published, are to comply with the requirements of such specifications and
bear the standardisation mark of the Bureau. Materials for paintwork for which no
SANS Specification has been published are to be of brands approved by the Shoprite
Checkers Architect.
All materials for paintwork must be brought on to the site in unopened containers
and no adulteration is allowed.
Undercoats for paintwork are to be supplied by the manufacturer of the paint being
used for the finishing coat.
The various primers, undercoats, paints, eggshell, etc. are to comply with the
requirements of the specifications quoted hereunder and to be of the type and grade
stated:
(a) Wood Primer: SANS 678, Type I for exterior woodwork and Type III for interior
woodwork.
(b) Metal Primer: For steel windows, doors, doorjambs and other articles normally dip
or spray primed at the manufacturer's works – SANS 5909.
(c) Metal Primer: SANS 679, Type I.
(d) Undercoats: For all surfaces under High Gloss, Oil Gloss, Flat and Eggshell finishing
paints – SANS 681, Type II.
(e) High Gloss Enamel Paint: SANS 630, Grade I.
(f) Flat Paint: SANS 515.
(g) Acrylic Emulsion Paint (Interior): SANS 1586: 1995, Grade I (Polyacrylic Resin Base).
(h) Acrylic Emulsion Paint (Exterior): SANS 1586: 1995 (Polyacrylic Resin Base).

PAGE
80
11.2 PREPARATORY WORK

All floors must be swept clean and walls dusted down. Surfaces not being painted,
such as face brickwork, sills, floors, etc. must be covered up and protected against
spotting.
Woodwork being painted is to be brushed down, knots treated with knotting and all
surfaces primed, stopped with hard stopping and rubbed down to an even surface.
Woodwork being oiled or stained must be thoroughly cleaned, stopped with tinted
stopping and well rubbed down.
All metal surfaces being painted are to be cleaned of all rust, scale, dirt, salt deposits
and grease by scraping, brushing or degreasing with alkali detergent solution as
required.
New galvanised metal surfaces and surfaces of all non-ferrous metals being painted
are to be cleaned down as above and given one coat of wash primer (metal etch
primer) complying with the requirements of SANS 723. After cleaning off rust on
metal work, the portions so affected are to be treated with an approved rust inhibitor.
All plastered surfaces being painted are to be filled where necessary with suitable
stopping and rubbed down.
All ceilings cover strips and cornices being painted are to be filled where necessary
with suitable stopping and all nail heads are to be primed with flat paint.
Surfaces are to be perfectly dry before painting commences.
11.3 APPLICATION OF PAINTS, ETC.

All coats of paints, etc. must be thoroughly dry before subsequent coats are applied
and rubbed down where necessary.
All work to be finished to colour approved by the Shoprite Checkers Architect. The
tints of undercoat are to approximate those of the finishing coat but with a slight
difference in the tint of each coat.
Backs of frames and other joinery in contact with brickwork, etc. must be primed
before building in, whether the article is painted or not.
Priming to external structural timber is to be applied before fixing.
Wood fillets, cover strips, etc. are to be knotted, primed and stopped before being
coated with emulsion paint or eggshell.
All prime coats are to be applied by brush, the priming being well brushed in to
obtain maximum penetration.
PAGE
81
The use of a spray gun on site is not permitted, except in the case of cellulose or
other special paints where spraying is the accepted method of application.
All materials are to be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
11.4 PAINTING TO WOODWORK

Knot, prime, stop and paint one undercoat and one coat high gloss enamel paint to
all exposed woodwork internally and externally, except to hardwood, shelves, ceiling
cover strips and exposed timber.
11.5 OILING AND WAXING TO HARDWOOD

Prepare, stop with tinted stopping, oil once with raw linseed oil and once with wax
polish all exposed hardwood internally, and oil twice all exposed hardwood externally,
all well rubbed in.
11.6 PAINTING TO METALWORK

Clean down, prime with metal etch primer and paint one undercoat and one coat high
gloss enamel paint to all exposed galvanised metal surfaces (except to roof covering)
and to all non-ferrous metal surfaces.
Steel windows, burglar bars, pressed steel door frames and other metal work built in
as the work proceeds and primed before being built, must be cleaned and rubbed
down on exposed surfaces, touched up with zinc chromate primer where required,
and painted with one undercoat and one coat high gloss enamel paint.
All other exposed metalwork, except cast iron pipes, must be cleaned down, primed
with zinc chromate primer and painted as above.
11.7 PAINTING TO CEILINGS

Prepare, stop and paint two coats of PVA paint to all ceilings, including cover strips
and cornices. Prime nail heads and wooden cover strips before painting.
11.8 PAINTING TO INTERNAL WALLS

Prepare, prime with an approved alkali resisting primer, and paint one undercoat and
one coat high gloss enamel paint to plastered walls in toilets. All other plastered
internal walls are to be prepared and painted with two coats PVA external acrylic
paint.
11.9 LEAVE PERFECT

All necessary care must be taken to keep the works perfectly clean and free from
spotting and to leave the premises clean and fit for occupation on completion.

PAGE
82
SECTION 12: GLAZIER (REVISION – A)

12.1 GLASS
There are various glass installations and glazing applications throughout the
supermarket that will be indicated on the SC Architect work drawings which may vary
from details indicated elsewhere in this specification or not indicated at all. The SC
Architects final work drawing will supersede all at no additional cost to Shoprite
Checkers (Pty) Ltd.
General glass is to comply with the requirements of SANS CK 55 and safety glass with
the requirements of SANS 1263-1.
Sheet glass, unless otherwise specified, is to be clear float glass of ordinary glazing
quality, free from bubbles, stains or scratches, 4mm thick.
Obscure glass, unless otherwise specified, is to be small arctic glass, 4mm thick.
Glass for mirrors is to be polished plate glass, 6mm thick.
Glass to shop fronts is to be Fadeban laminated safety glass as follows:
(a) High impact Fadeban (9,5mm thick) is to be used to all fixed and opening
sections below door head height in external shop fronts.
(b) Normal strength Fadeban (6,5mm thick) is to be used to all fixed and opening
sections above door head height only in external shop fronts.
(c) Glass for adjustable glass louvers is to be clear sheet glass, 6mm thick.
12.2 GLAZING
Glazing to shop fronts is to be in accordance with SANS Code of Practice “Glazing and
Fixing Glass in Buildings” and as required by the National Building Regulations and
any other current regulations.
Glass panes exceeding 0,4m2 in area must, in addition, be secured with glazing
springs in wood sashes and with glazing clips inserted in holes in steel framing.
Glass panes to have adequate glazing clearance and aluminium frames.
Obscure glass to be fitted where indicated on SC Architect drawings.
All other windows, fanlights, etc. shall be glazed with clear sheet glass.

PAGE
83
12.3 MIRRORS
Over all wash hand basins fix 400mm wide x 600mm high x 6mm thick bevel edged
silver plated glass mirrors to wall with double-sided adhesive tape.
12.4 WINDOWS
Glaze all external windows from the inside.
Glazing to view panels of offices to be Smokey grey tinting.

PAGE
84
SECTION 13: WATERPROOFER (REVISION – A)

13.1 GENERAL
All waterproofing shall be executed by approved specialists and are to carry a written
guarantee.
13.2 WATERPROOFING OF FLAT ROOFS

All concrete, screeds and brick surfaces to be waterproofed shall be dry, firm, smooth
and free of loose aggregate, sharp protrusions, formwork release agents and other
contaminants. Honeycombed concrete and other uneven places must be made good
to a smooth, even and firm surface. Brickwork must be built to fair-face with flush
horizontal and vertical joints. Screeds must be lightly steel trowelled to give a smooth
surface. Cement mortar fillets steel trowelled smooth shall be provided at wall and
floor junctions.
Prime fully with bitumen primer all verges, flat surfaces and other areas to receive the
waterproofing membrane (allow solvents to flash off). The roof shall be waterproofed
by one layer of 4mm thick Derbigum SP (or similar product approved by the SRC
Architect) sealed to the roof deck by torch-on fusion. Side-laps of 75mm and end-
laps of 100mm shall be sealed together by torch-on fusion. Turn-ups and turn-downs
shall be similarly fused to the primed surface and well fixed to angles, outlets, fillets
and flat edges, including all square cutting and waste. This work shall be done in
strict accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations.
The contractor shall lodge a 10 year insurance backed watertight guarantee on all
roof waterproofing with the SRC Architect prior to the commencement of the work.
13.3 SPECIALISTS
The specialists must be satisfied with the grading, screeds, etc. before any
waterproofing is laid.
Concrete and screeded surfaces must be completely dry prior to application of

waterproofing membrane.
13.4 SURFACE-BEDS
Damp proof membrane across brick foundation walls and under surface beds shall be
250 micron PVC sheeting laid in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
13.5 WATER-TIGHTNESS
The premises shall be rendered completely watertight and any defects allowing the
ingress of rain or seepage shall be rectified by the Owner/Developer at his own cost.

PAGE
85
13.6 ON SUSPENDED CONCRETE SLABS
13.6.1 Cold and Freezer Rooms

Sika Cemflex with membrane under freezer and cold room on slabs. Refer to
detail DET01 & DET02.
13.6.2 Food Prep Areas, Service departments, Cleaners Room, Toilet Areas, Staff
Canteen Prep and Wet Returns Room
Sika Cemflex with membrane in service area on slabs. (Refer to detail DET05
and the SRC Architect's drawings).

PAGE
86
SECTION 14: SITE WORKS (REVISION – A)

14.1 GENERAL
The construction of parking areas shall be to the design and supervision of the
appointed Civil Engineer.
Provision shall be made for differentiation between heavy-duty traffic and general
customer parking.
The final surface of the parking area must be either concrete, brick paving,
interlocking cement paving or premix of appropriate specification.
All kerbs shall be of heavy-duty design.
The general planting and landscaping of external areas and their maintenance must
be to the approval of the Local Authority and Shoprite Checkers (Pty) Ltd.
14.2 DEMARCATION
Parking areas, driveways, etc. shall be demarcated in accordance with accepted
standards, allowing for adequate circulation of customer vehicles and separation from
delivery vehicles.
Parking bays shall be of minimum size 5,0m x 2,5m. Width of isles between parking
bays shall be 7,5m minimum.
14.3 TROLLEY BAYS

Covered Trolley parking bays (500 - 1,500 trolleys depending on supermarket size)
and trolley collection points must be accommodated in parking areas and common
areas in positions that are easy accessible to customers.
The development must make provision for adequate routes for the collection and
replenishment of trolley bays in the supermarket. (Specifically multi-level shopping
centers and preferably not by means of customer service lifts).
The position of trolley parking bays and the protection of it from damage by
customer vehicles shall be as indicated by the SC Architect or assigned Shoprite
Checkers representative.
14.4 BOLLARDS
Bollards may be required at exits from the premises to:
I. Prevent misappropriation of trolleys.

II. To protect property from damage.
PAGE
87
14.5 SIGNAGE
Parking bays for the disabled shall be demarcated and suitably signposted with
international signs.
All pole and indicating signs shall be protected by suitable bollards or crash rails and
shall be mounted on raised walkways.
All appropriate signage to ensure the free flow of traffic, the direction of the public
and the prohibition of entry, shall be demarcated and/or erected in accordance with
acceptable standards.
14.6 TRAFFICABLE KERBS

Trafficable kerbs are required at strategic locations for trolley access to and from the
customer parking area.
14.7 PAVED AREAS, FILLING AND SOIL TESTS

14.7.1 General
All civil work shall be done according to the latest edition of the prevailing
Codes of Practice applicable in the country. Fall in parking area not to exceed
3%.
14.7.2 Specification for Parking Areas

60mm thick concrete interlocking blocks (25Mpa crushing strength);
On »
20mm bedding sand;
On »
120mm G5 selected material, CBR>45, compacted to 95% MOD AASHTO
density;
On »
200mm G7 selected material, CBR>15, compacted to 93% MOD AASHTO
density (100% for sand);
On »
Fill material from site or imported, compacted as described under Filling;
On »
In-situ material compacted to 93% MOD AASHTO density.
See Soil Tests below for test required by the engineer.
14.7.3 Specification for Loading Areas

80mm thick concrete interlocking blocks (25Mpa crushing strength;)
On »
20mm bedding sand;
On »
200mm G5 selected material, CBR>45 compacted to 95% MOD AASHTO
density;

PAGE
88
On »
300mm G7 selected material, CBR>15 compacted to 93% MOD AASHTO
density (100% for sand);
On »
Fill material from site or imported, compacted as described under Filling;
On »
In-situ material, compacted to 93% MOD AASHTO density.
See Soil Tests below for test required by the engineer.

OR
Concrete premix as per engineer.
14.7.4 Filling
Backfilling material must be placed in layers not exceeding 200mm and each
layer must be compacted to 93% MOD AASHTO density. If sand is used for
the backfilling, it must be compacted to 100% MOD AASHTO density.
See Soil Test below for test required by the engineer.
14.7.5 Soil Tests

The Contractor is responsible for appointing an independent testing
laboratory at his own expense to perform the following tests:
(a) Grading analysis and Atterberg limits for each type of material used;
(b) CBR results for each type of material used;
(c) Thickness of each selected layer; and
(d) MOD AASHTO density tests for all the layers.
Frequency of tests for every layer, selected layer (thickness as specified) or fill
(200mm).
Layer Test type One test every

(refer to above)
Selected layers a&b 1,500m²
c&d 500m²
Fill a&b 5,000m²
d 500m²
The Contractor shall forward results of all laboratory tests to the Engineer for
approval.

PAGE
89
SECTION 15: ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

SECTION 15.1: DETAILED SPECIFICATION (REVISION – A)
15.1.1 General
This part of the specification describes all major categories of the scope of works for
a Checkers, or Checkers Hyper store, with or without line shops as a Checkers
development, or a leased section as part of another developer’s shopping centre, and
is therefore to be read in conjunction with the relevant drawings listed elsewhere.
Any discrepancies are to be referred to the Checkers Electrical Design Consultant, by

e-mail, who will clarify them as soon as possible.
Certain electrical components may have to be installed in conjunction with shop

fittings after Beneficial Occupation (BO) and no extra claims whatsoever will be
entertained in this regard.
The entire installation must comply with the by-laws of the Local Power Supply
Authority, international standards applicable to the geographical areas and/or the
South African Bureau of Standards (SANS) Code of Practice 10142 and the latest
amendments thereof, where applicable.
The SANS code of practice 10142 will govern the minimum standards of systems,
material and workmanship.
The quality of material and workmanship will be inspected periodically by the

Checkers Electrical Design Consultant, who reserves the right to reject any inferior
material or workmanship.
15.1.2 Landlord Infrastructure

15.1.2.1 Existing System (Local Supply Authority)
The power supply voltage of the shopping centre must be at least 400V
continuous at peak network consumption at Checkers’ main board. If the
aforementioned voltage cannot be guaranteed, then arrangements must
be made (with the Supply Authority) to investigate the problem and to
rectify it, as the developer will be held responsible for any related
damages to equipment.
15.1.2.2 New Mains Power Supply System

If the project consists of an entire shopping complex containing a
supermarket and line shops, being developed by Checkers, the
reticulation system is to be as per the main line diagram prepared for the
PAGE
90
particular project, inclusive of the high voltage cable system, substation

equipment, etc.
Where a Checkers supermarket or Checkers Hyper is a tenant in a

development, the mains supply cable capacity to the supermarket’s main
distribution board must be determined by the Developer’s Consultant and
must cater for the main circuit breaker rating stated on the line diagram
of Checkers Design Consultant.
An average diversified Electrical load of 160VA/m2 is required for the

Supermarket. This is however an indicative number and the final Electrical
supply to the Supermarket must be calculated and approved by the
Checkers Electrical Design Consultant. Checkers will not be liable for
any additional cost in this regard
In both of the above instances, the Electrical Contractor must submit a

certificate of compliance for the partial completion of the MDB
installation to the Main Contractor, well ahead of the Beneficial
Occupation Period, and obtain the electrical consumption deposit
agreement and amount, for presentation to and settlement by Checkers.
The Developer’s Electrical Contractor is to allow for and pay all other
costs, inspection fees, etc. which will be due to the Local Supply Authority,
as and when required.
The Developer must pay costs such as connection fees, project approval
fees, etc. which will be due to the Local Supply Authority.
15.1.2.3 Mall and Walkways

The approach to the supermarket’s entrance is to be lit to a minimum
average illumination level of 400lux and or to the satisfaction of the
Checkers representative.
15.1.2.4 Supermarket
The electrical installation shall consist of the main cable supplies, main
distribution board, sub-main distribution boards, reticulation systems,
lighting, power, emergency power supply unit, voltage stabilising control
units (CVT’s), auxiliary services, wire ways and conduit system, etc. This is
also to include a mains power check meter of the mullet function
electronic memory type and space allocation for a full automatic power
factor control unit for Checkers.
15.1.2.5 Line Shops

The installation shall consist of the main supply cable for each line shop
from a separate metering panel in the substation, lighting, power and the
auxiliary services wire way and conduit systems.
PAGE
91
15.1.2.6 Power and Site Lighting

The installation shall consist of the main cable supplies, distribution
boards, walkways, mall and parking area lighting, including auxiliary
services conduit systems where applicable.
15.1.3 Supermarket Infrastructure

Although the Builder will paint all exposed steel material such as conduits, cable trays,
ducting, etc., the Electrical Contractor must ensure that colours of electrical
equipment are not altered or damaged during the execution of the works. The
Electrical Contractor must treat all exposed cuts of galvanised material immediately
after the cutting or drilling operation with cold galvanise paint.
15.1.3.1 Permanent Power

Permanent power must be made available at least 4 weeks before
Beneficial Occupation. A temporary three phase supply large enough to
supply A/C units or the permanent specified power supply must be made
available well before this 4 week period for the A/C system “blow-out” of
ducting prior to commissioning.
At Beneficial Occupation, the power, lighting, telephone and all other

services described in this document are to be fully operational, tested and
commissioned. A Certificates of Compliance (COC) for each distribution
board are to be issued at Beneficial Occupation. This is also applicable to
all variations which have been issued during the course of the contract
period.
Work to be carried out during the Beneficial Occupation period includes:
(a) Illuminated signage, inside and outside;

(b) All food preparation area equipment including coffee shop, deli’s,
bakery, fish and butchery prep area equipment connections;
(c) Serving areas line-up equipment;
(d) Circuits to be installed to Island freezers, fruit and vegetable boats
and displays;
(e) Shelve and shop fitting lighting in various areas;
(f) Access control to cash offices; and
(g) Public address system;
(h) Checkout counters;
(i) Manager’s offices Joinery, Money Market joinery, Kiosk and Medirite
(if applicable);
(j) Lights on frames and gantries by others;
(k) Scale stands Data and power points;
(l) Scanning points.

PAGE
92
15.1.3.2 Services Co-ordination

Allowance must be made to co-ordinate the positions of all electrical
components with other services and building structures.
Samples of light fittings, switches, socket outlets or other components not

specified, are to be submitted for approval by the Checkers Electrical
Design Consultant before ordering.
15.1.4 Mains Supply & Distribution Boards

The following descriptions of the various divisions should be read in conjunction with
the drawings and distribution board line diagrams. Where discrepancies are found,
the Contractor must refer such to the Checkers Electrical Design Consultant for a
ruling.
15.1.4.1 New Mains Power Supply

The mains supply must be complete in all respects, as set out on the main
distribution line diagram, or as designed by the Developer’s Electrical
Consultant. A complete earth system consisting of copper Cadweld earth
mats and possible additional earth rods must be installed to obtain a
reading of less than 10 Ohms or in accordance to local supply authority if
less than 10 Ohms.
The sleeves and ducts for cable reticulation will be supplied and installed
by the Developer and his Electrical Contractor must allow for attendance
to the Main Contractor to ensure the correct placement of the
aforementioned. The Developers Electrical Contractor must also protect
the open ends of the sleeves against ingress of water and debris. The
sleeves must also be sealed off after cable installation to render same
vermin proof.
In areas where the mains supply is found to be unstable and voltage

spikes could occur, a 20kVA single phase constant voltage transformer
(CVT), controlling the voltage within a limit of 5% above or below the
400V, is to be supplied and installed, as part of this contract, for circuits
feeding the time clock, scales, tills and computers.
Where possible, the CVT should be a part of the main distribution board.
Power factor capacitors shall be in its own enclosure next to the Main
distribution board with a physical separation between the two to prevent
a fire from spreading from one unit to the other.
15.1.4.2 Main Distribution Board: MDB and DB1

The Checkers Electrical Design Consultant will supply the distribution
board line diagrams. The switchboard manufacturer’s shop-drawings
must be submitted, at an early stage of the contract, to the Checkers
PAGE
93
Electrical Design Consultant for approval before manufacturing

commences. Reference must be made to Section 15.2.19 for the quality,
surface preparation and construction of the distribution boards.
The Contractor must ensure that the distribution board(s) are

manufactured demountable or otherwise, to be able to fit into the room
or space provided, and fit through doors and/or passages/restrictions.
No costs or delays will be entertained in this regard. The sections are to
be constructed in a modular form and provided with pre-formed
protected wiring access penetrations between the sections.
Floor standing boards must be of the compartmented cabinet type, be

fitted with self-locating front panels and installed on a raised plinth of
100m AFFL. Distribution boards front panels are to be fitted with lockable
doors. The external finish is to be epoxy coated electric orange. Both
doors and corresponding front panels to powder coated as follows:
 NORMAL SECTION – ORANGE

 EMERGENCY SECTION – RED
 ESSENTIAL SECTION (UPS) - VIOLET
The panels are to be fitted with Trefolite engraved screw on labels

identifying the four parts in addition to the equipment labelling.
Penetrations for incoming and outgoing wiring are to consist of 6 (2 per

the sub-distribution compartments) pre-formed P9000 openings on top
of the board with temporary screw on covers for removal on site. Large
cables should be terminated on to gland plates.
Monitoring Meter
A Monitoring Meter, measuring the supermarket load only, must be
supplied, installed and commissioned for every main incomer of the
supermarket.
This meter is used for monitoring purposes and is to be installed

downstream from the supermarket’s main circuit breaker. It should be
installed (as far as practically possible) within the supermarket premises
leasable area in a dedicated enclosure inside the MDB (or the appropriate
DB closest to the metering point). If this is not possible, a separate
dedicated enclosure must be installed on a wall closest to the metering
point. A suitably sized bore hole with a grommet (large enough for an
Ethernet cable and RJ45 connector) should be cut in the top or bottom of
the enclosure to allow connection to the network via an Ethernet cable.
Once the monitoring meter position is determined, it is a requirement to

PAGE
94
make contact with Checkers’ IT Field Services Department within the

relevant Division to install an Ethernet cable that runs from the nearest
network switch to the position of where this meter is situated.
The monitoring meter will be an Elster Kent A1700 Type (3 phase 4 wire
Class 0,5 meter) and must be ordered with the following communication
devices and settings:
 RS232 Module fitted internally;

 Ethernet Module with RJ45 output also fitted internally;
 Link Cable (db25 to db9);
 Ethernet Module to be programmed with the Supermarket Branch IP
address, Default Gateway, and Subnet Mask. These details can be
obtained from the IT Field Services Department or the Projects
Department;
 The meter IP address is always the store IP address, with a 220 at the
end, e.g. xxx.xxx.xxx.220 or 172.19.82.220; and
 Suitably sized Current Transformers of the Solid Core Type.
By the time of meter commissioning, the meter has to be connected to

the network via the Ethernet cable plugged into the Ethernet module and
successfully communicating.
The meter and communication devices are obtainable from:

Honeywell Smart Energy
Tel: 011 470 4900
Email: nigel.baker@honeywell.com; Web: http://www.elstersolutions.com
This meter will remain the property of the supermarket and may not be
used by the reseller or supplier to bill the supermarket on. A separate
meter needs to be installed for billing purposes.
Billing Meter
A meter used for measuring and billing the supermarket supply should be
installed as per the Electricity Reseller requirements. This meter should
not be confused with the Monitoring Meter. The Billing Meter is to be
installed such that it is accessible to the Electricity Reseller or Supplier and
should not be installed within the supermarket premises leasable area or
MDB as far as possible.
This Billing Meter is to be installed in accordance to the Code of Practice

for Electricity Metering (SANS 474:2009/NRS 057:2009).
The proposed Billing Meter is also to have Time-of-Use (TOU) reading

capability.
PAGE
95
15.1.4.3 Power Factor Correction

Provision is to be made for a power factor correction (PFC) unit, that
could be installed in the future. The space to be left available directly
adjacent to the MDB and is to be calculated and implemented as per
below specifications:
15.1.4.3.1 All sites requires vacant space adjacent to the MDB of no

less than 1,000mm (W) x 1,800mm (H) x 700mm (D) to allow
for PFC panel and a minimum of 1,000mm of vacant space in
between the MDB and PFC unit for safety considerations.
Please note that as with all electrical panels space in front of

these panels should be unobstructed and a minimum space
of 1000mm is to be left available for the ease of access (door
arc) for future maintenance etc.
15.1.4.3.2 An adjustable circuit breaker should be installed and wired in

the MDB with “PFC” label on the front of panel at the nearest
point to the position left available for prospective PFC panel.
Max adjustable size of these MCB is to be calculated at a
ratio of x .65 (65%) of the size of the Main Incoming Breakers
current rating. The cabling of this breaker is also to have a
suitable current rating for the max capacity of the circuit
breaker in question.
The Electrical Contractor is to confirm the circuit breaker and

cable specification with the Electrical Design Consultant
before ordering the unit.
15.1.4.4 Refrigeration Switch Board (by Refrigeration Contractor)

The cable to this board must be supplied and installed as part of this
contract, extending from MDB Emergency Section to the refrigeration
plant room. The Electrical Contractor must allow for the termination of
the cables onto or inside these boards, connecting onto the main switch
and ensuring correct phase rotation. As the final position of this board
may not be known at planning stage, 5m of additional cable must be
provided for.
All field wiring will be supplied and installed by others.
15.1.4.5 Air-Conditioning, Ventilation and Smoke Extraction (Distribution

Board by Air-Conditioning Contractor)
This cable must be supplied and installed as part of this contract,
extending from MDB/MDB Emergency Section/DB1/DB1 Emergency
Section to the air-conditioning plant room. The Electrical Contractor must
PAGE
96
allow for the termination of the cable onto or inside the board,
connecting onto the main switch and ensuring correct phase rotation. As
the final position of this board is not known at this stage, 5m of additional
cable must be provided for.
The Electrical Contractor must provide auxiliary A/C and ventilation

equipment such as room type conditioners, ventilation fans, etc. with a
power supply complete with an isolator or outlet socket to within 1,5m of
the equipment. The equipment will be supplied from the respective DB’s
in accordance to the layout drawings and schematic diagrams.
The final connection from the Isolator to the HVAC equipment will be by
others. It is essential that the Electrical Contractor co-ordinate the
positions of isolators with the HVAC Contractor.
All field wiring for the main A/C equipment and controls will be supplied
and installed by others (unless otherwise instructed via the Checkers
Electrical Design Consultant).
15.1.5 Emergency & Essential Power Supply

15.1.5.1 Standby Generator
A complete automatic mains failure standby system, consisting of a diesel
generator set, is to be supplied, installed and commissioned as part of
this contract, including the connecting-up of all cabling.
Refer to the layout drawing of the Electrical Consultant for the position of
the plant outside the supermarket, which will determine the route of
supply and return cables between the auto mains failure panel and MDB
Emergency Section/DB1 Emergency Section.
The power capacities of the emergency plants are quoted as continuous

ratings and are to be indicated as such on the main schematic line
diagram, and could be categorised as follows for leasing purposes:
 New stores with GLA between 3,000m² and 5,000m² : Prime Rated
at 600kVA.
Generator sizing for Checkers Hyper stores will be determined on a

project by project basis, depending on store size and equipment.
The above sizes are indicative and it remains the Electrical Design
Engineer’s responsibility to calculate the generator size and submit
calculations to the Checkers Technical department for review and
approval.

PAGE
97
Generator output to be Prime rated with continuous output at rated

capacity for 24hours or more. Power factor to be rated at 0,8 lagging at
50Hz.
15.1.5.2 Equipment to be Supplied with Emergency Power:

(Will apply when Full Load generator is not required)
 All refrigeration;
 UPS Unit(s);
 Butchery band saws and sealer/wrapping machine;
 Smoke extraction system (fire system);
 Fresh air ventilation system (legally required to operate);
 Electrically operated doors and locks;
 30 - 40% lighting in BOH;
 100% lighting on trading floor;
 Fire Escape route lighting;
 EAS Equipment;
 Passenger lifts/Hoists;
 Air conditioning units in Dark Room, Cash and Case up Offices,
Managers offices (if close offices), Scanning offices and Admin
Offices;
 Conveyor Belts;
 Checkouts;
 Bakery - 1x oven, 1x proover, mixer, extraction canopy;
 Deli - Chicken griller, chips fryer, 1x dry heat cabinet, 1x Bain Marie
cabinet, extraction canopy.
15.1.5.3 Generator Specification

The technical requirements for an emergency generator as set out in the
scope of works are detailed as follows:
Only emergency power systems of approved manufacturers are to be

supplied and installed, such as:
 Only the following engines approved Cummins, Doosan, Caterpillar,

Detroit, John Deere, Perkins, Volvo and Iveco diesel engines with a
two bearing Stamford or a Le Roy alternator and a Lovato or Deep
sea controller on the AMF panel are approved;
 Fuel storage and main base: The main “I” beam base is to contain a
diesel storage tank, with a maximum possible capacity. A fuel gauge,
inspection hole and a set mounted hand operating fuel pump are
required. The first full tank of diesel shall be supplied as part of this
contract;
 Vibration elimination: An auxiliary frame for the engine/alternator
mounting is to be fitted with resilient anti-vibration mountings,
positioned onto the lower main “I” beam base, in order to minimise

PAGE
98
vibration to any structure;

 Air supply discharge systems and exhaust: The ducting for supply
and discharge air is to be provided as part of this contract and must
be designed in such a manner as to be without restrictions and to
prevent re-circulation of discharged air. The exhaust must be for
residential sound perimeters, insulated, steel clad type and routed to
the outside, so as not to be a disturbance to others or discharge
toward any air-conditioning or ventilation plant air intake;
 AMF panel and controls: The auto mains failure (AMF) panel is to be
equipped with the main change-over motorised circuit breakers
(contactors are not acceptable), ammeters and voltmeters, safety
function indicators, controls, switch gear, etc., for both the mains
power and batteries, and the full spectrum of warning alarms if
malfunctioning should occur. Labelling must be engraved, screwed-
on ABS material; and
 General: All components are to be of the best quality and
performance, with a 12 month guarantee;
 Acoustic treatment of generator noise to be 65dB at 5m or within
local by law limits or to the Acoustic Consultant's documentation and
specification, whichever is the lowest.
Automatic Mains Failure Control Panel will be fitted with the following:
 Set mounted heavy gauge sheet metal cubicle primed with etch type
zinc chromate and finished with two coats baked enamel and fitted
with the following components:
 Voltmeter Phase to phase and Phase to neutral;
 Frequency meter;
 Ammeters for each phase;
 Indicating LED light to indicate generator on load/set on automatic
and load on normal supply;
 Set generator start/stop push buttons for manual control;
 Audible alarm switch.
Equipment to automatically shut down the set and indicate the respective
fault should any one or more of the following faults occur, as a minimum:
 Start failure
 Low oil pressure
 High engine temperature
 Low fuel supply
 Over speed
Control switch to give the following operation modes:

 Off: DC control circuits will be isolated;
 Auto: The plant will start and stop automatically depending on
whether the mains supply is available or not;
PAGE
99
 Test: The automatic operation of the plant is tested without placing

the plant on load.
15.1.5.4 Maintenance to Generator/s

The appointed generator supplier in co-operation with the electrical-
contractor -engineer is responsible for the overall testing, balancing and
commissioning of all the systems.
The generator installations shall be guaranteed for a period of twelve

months. The twelve-month cost-free (for Checkers) maintenance and
guarantee period on all the systems, equipment, materials and
workmanship shall commence on completion (at Beneficial Occupation
Handover). The generator supplier shall execute regular services strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications during this period. The
Developer or Landlord is liable for and/or to hand over the following:
a) Three copies of the operating and maintenance (O & M) manuals,

as well as a CD containing all the information in the O & M
manuals, on completion of the installation as well as at completion
of the guarantee maintenance period. The manuals and CD are to
be complete with the following:
b) The description of all the systems;
c) The operating instructions, maintenance instructions, fault-finding
instructions and maintenance schedules for all the systems;
d) The equipment brochures and manuals;
e) All the testing and commissioning recordings and data. This section
shall be complete with the design and the actual recorded data;
f) The electrical and control wiring diagrams and the electrical
compliance certificate;
g) The installation drawings;
h) A list of all the equipment and the major material suppliers
complete with contact details;
i) A list with the contact names and numbers (for breakdowns and
emergency call outs).
15.1.5.5 Un-Interruptible Power Supply (UPS)

A complete reliable UPS supply for critical and essential loads is to be
supplied, installed and commissioned as part of this contract, including
the connecting-up of all cabling.
The UPS is required as a reliable, continuous free from voltage

disturbances and frequency fluctuations supply.

PAGE
100
The Checkers IT Department will confirm the size (kVA) UPS required with
associated battery run time at specified load. The Electrical Contractor
must confirm unit requirements prior to procurement.
The approved supplier are Tower UPS Distribution (3300 Series) for all
units. This needs to be confirmed with Checkers as suppliers might have
change.
The main performance criteria are as follows:

 VFI double conversion technology to provide a quality power supply;
 Dual on-line conversion microprocessor;
 Automatic and manual bypass;
 ECO mode operation;
 Multi-language LCD screen, compliance with European Standard
50091-2;
 Communications port with monitoring software and stand-alone
cabinet with modular expansion slots for additional batteries.
Technical Specification
 VA rating 20 000VA (To be confirmed)
 Voltage 400V +/- 2%, 3-phase in & 3-phase out
 Waveform sine wave
 Input pf 0,98
 Input current THD THD <9% (<5% with optional)
 Frequency 50Hz
 Overload 110%
 Battery runtime 40 minutes at full load
 Batteries 12 V 7 AHR lead acid (maintenance free)
 Recharge time 5 - 8 hours
 Noise (at 1m) 45dBA
 Display LED Type
 Ports RS 323, RJ 11, RJ 45
Equipment to be supplied with essential power (UPS):

 All Tills;
 Pin-pads;
 All PCs and servers in store;
 All IT switches;
 Money Market ticket printer;
 Scales;
 Security alarm and CCTV system;
 Fire alarm system;
 Radio retail audio system;
 Store RF scanning system;
 Access control and Magnetic locks;
PAGE
101
 Scanning points.
A second UPS of similar specification and manufacturer shall be installed

in the receiving office and will feed all emergency lighting in the main
aisle (at the till line, in the centre of the trading area and the back of the
trading floor) to accommodate the generator start up. Other anti-panic
lights if required can also be connected to this UPS. The size of the UPS
will be a maximum of 10kVA, but should be calculated depending of store
size and load requirements. The UPS shall have a battery runtime for at
least 5min at full load. Thus no fittings with batteries should be installed.
15.1.6 Area Description

15.1.6.1 Main Entrance
For Checkers, the light fittings to be installed in the entrance bulkhead are
recessed LED downlighters.
The number and position of the fittings will be determined by the store
layout and as shown on the lighting drawings.
Conduits are to be allowed in the floor slab for EAS equipment. Draw
boxes and conduits to be installed in positions and reticulated as shown
on the drawings.
15.1.6.2 Money Market

Power & Data Provision
Power skirting will be provided in the counter by the Store Shop Fitter.
16A Switched Sockets normal power (white socket) and 16A Dedicated
Switched Sockets (red socket shaven earth) will be installed by the
Electrical Contractor and wired as shown on the drawings.
16A Dedicated Switched Sockets (black) on Emergency supply will be

required in the ceiling void for EAS equipment at the Main Entrance as
shown on the drawings.
Data and telephone point’s inserts must be allowed as shown on the

drawing. Sufficient number of conduits must be allowed for data and
telephone cabling.
Socket and Data Outlets for electronic displays will be provided on back
wall at heights as shown on drawings.
Lighting Provision
For Checkers, the light fittings to be installed in the ceiling are recessed
LED downlighters, the number and position of the fittings will be

PAGE
102
determined by the store layout and indicated as such on the lighting

drawings.
Any deviation from the specified fitting needs to be approved by

Checkers’ Senior Store Design Manager.
The lights are to be switched with the trade floor lighting circuits.
15.1.6.3 Kiosk
Power skirting will be provided in the counter by the Store Shop Fitter.
Sockets and outlet points for the following will be provided as shown on
the detail drawing:
 Coffee Bar Equipment;
 Cigarette Displays & Fridges;
 Under counter Geyser;
 Ice Cream Freezer;
 Soft Serve Machine.

telephone cabling.
Lighting Provision
For Checkers, the light fittings to be installed in the Ceiling are recessed
LED downlighters, the number and position of the fittings will be
drawings.
Signage point on bulkhead to be provided as shown. The lights are to be

switched with the trade floor lighting circuit.

The lights are to be switched with the trade floor lighting circuit.
15.1.6.4 Manager's Office

Two compartment light grey PVC Power Skirting will be installed at
620mm AFFL (top edge) under the manager’s desk as shown on the
layout drawings.
PAGE
103

telephone cabling.
Socket and data outlets for electronic displays will be provided on back
wall at heights as shown on drawings.
Lighting Provision
For Checkers, the light fittings to be installed in the Ceiling are recessed
LED downlighters,

A Key Switch to control the store trade floor and associated area lighting
for each stage will be provided at the manager’s office or at the front
entrance. A control wire will be provided to the relevant DB as shown on
the schematic diagrams.
The lights are to be switched with the trade floor lighting circuits.
15.1.6.5 Administration Office

620mm AFFL (top edge) under the desks as shown on the layout
drawings.

telephone cabling.
The following control and display panels are to be installed on the back
wall of the office:
 Roof Vent or Smoke Extract fan either or being applicable to store
fire design;

PAGE
104
 Fire Detection;
 Intruder alarm Keypad;
 Refrigeration remote panel;
 Air Conditioning control panel.
The outlet boxes to the panels are to be installed at heights and positions
as shown on elevation drawings so as to ensure panels line up in a neat
manner.
Lighting Provision
The light fittings to be provided are 600 x 600mm lay in LED luminaires
with prismatic diffusers. The number and position of the fittings will be
determined by the store layout and as shown on the lighting drawings.
The lights are to be controlled by means of light switch as indicated.
15.1.6.6 Scanning Room

620mm AFFL (top edge) under the desks as shown on the layout
drawings.

telephone cabling.
Lighting Provision
with prismatic diffusers.
15.1.6.7 Dark Room

620mm AFFL. (Top edge) under the desks shown on the layout drawings
and behind the cupboard up in the corner into the ceiling spaces.

PAGE
105
16A Switched Sockets normal power (White socket) and 16A Dedicated
Switched Sockets (Red socket shaven earth) will be installed by the
Dedicated sockets at high level are required for the Data Cabinet and on
the Powerskirting rising to the ceiling for equipment in the shelfs of the
cupboard.

drawing. The IT department will determine the quantity. Sufficient number
of conduits must be allowed for data and telephone cabling.
The data trunking from the tills and for the trading floor shall be linked to
the IT cabinet. The consulting engineer to ensure the correct amount of
trunking is indicated to cater for all the IT cables. The UPS unit and
battery cabinet will be located in this room and connected to the DB as
shown on the Schematic diagrams. Sufficient slack must be allowed on
the trailing cable to the DB so as to allow the unit to be drawn away from
the wall.
The Air-Conditioning unit in the room will be a split type and the isolator
must be wired to an Emergency circuit.
Lighting Provision
drawings.
15.1.6.8 Cash Office

620mm AFFL. (Top edge) under the desks as shown on the layout
drawings.

drawing. The IT department will determine the quantity. Sufficient number
of conduits must be allowed for data and telephone cabling.
All AC units in this office will be connected on an emergency circuit.

PAGE
106
Lighting Provision
drawings.
Access Control
The Security doors to the office are interlocked to limit one person access
at a time. Access will be by means of a tag reader or intercom.
Release buttons will be located on the inside offices to allow authorised

entrance and exit.
The conduits and outlet point must be installed as shown on the layout
drawings for the access control infrastructure.
Access control equipment will be supplied and installed by Checkers

Direct Contractors. However the Electrical Contractor is to liaise with the
Security Contractors to ensure all their requirements are in place prior to
security equipment installation.
15.1.6.9 Cash-Up Room

drawings.
Lighting Provision
drawings.
Cash Safe
A pilot light must be installed above the safe door on the office side wired
to a light switch located inside the safe. This light switch will control both
the light fitting inside the safe together with the pilot light. A buzzer
PAGE
107
installed above the safe door must be controlled from bell press inside
safe
A draw box and conduit linked to the intruder alarm system must be
installed on the inside of the safe.
15.1.6.10 Camera Room

drawings.
Data point inserts must be allowed as shown on the drawing. The IT

department will determine the quantity. Sufficient number of conduits
must be allowed for data cabling.
Power skirting will be installed vertically from the ceiling void to the under
counter power skirting for CCTV system field wiring.
Lighting Provision
drawings.
15.1.6.11 Check Out Arcade

Specialists will supply and install the checkout units during the Beneficial
Occupation period and the signage specialist will provide a “power pole"
arrangement complete with overhead gantry to be utilized by the
Electrical Contractor to reticulate wiring to the check outs.
The checkout configuration requires substantial wire-ways for both the

power and data requirements to the checkout units. The Electrical
Contractor must supply and install the following:
 Power circuits: Normal, Emergency and essential power circuits, from
a P9000 wiring channel complete with covers linked to overhead
gantry from above front office bulkhead. Wiring will be split and
looped to each check-out via the power pole (supplied by others);

PAGE
108
 Data wire-way: Install P9000 wiring channel with cover to overhead

gantry from above front office bulkhead. Channel to terminate in the
Dark room. The Checkers IT department will install the data wiring in
a star configuration.
In check-out tables and on power pole (Quantities as per drawing)

 1 x Bell push-button wired-up;
 1 x Call light bell push wired to call light flasher unit;
 1 x Electronic flasher unit for 100W 230V lamps; buzzer and flasher
unit installed by others;
 1 x Single lever two-way switch for operational light wired up;
 1 x Standard 16A SSO’s for general use; and
 1 x Standard 16A SSO’s for fridges at front of check-out;
 2 x 16A double dedicated switch socket + 1 x Single dedicated (red)
switch socket. (Total 5 socket) on ups supply;
 1 x 16A Single dedicated (black) switched socket for EAS on
emergency supply.
NOTE: All “red” sockets + normal “white” sockets are supplied with the
checkout unit. Wiring to be completed by the Electrical Contractor.
 1 x Telephone and data point supplied with checkout.
Lighting Provision
For Checkers stores, if there are no ceilings then a continuous suspended
LED linear fitting.
layout and indicated as such on the lighting drawings.
The lights are to be controlled by means of the key switch.
15.1.6.12 Trade Floor

16A switch socket outlets of the chalet pedestal type are to be installed
underneath certain gondolas, as indicated on the drawing. These points
are to be fed by means of cast-in conduits. In the Kitchen shop area each
gondola shall have a chalet pedestal with a 16A switch socket.
16A switch socket outlets for the beverage fridges will be mounted on a
wiring channel at 500mm AFFL behind the fridges. Conduits to the wiring
channel to be cast into the floor slab.
Sockets shown on drawings at floor low fridges also to be mounted on

chalet pedestal and points fed by means of cast-in conduits.
PAGE
109
P8000 and P9000 channel suspended above lighting channels to link data
and power from BOH receiving office and service departments to front of
house offices will be installed as shown on the layout drawings. The same
channel combinations will be provided to cross over from the scanning
room to the check-out gantry as shown.
Any cable ladder visible on the trading floor should be fitted with a cover
or be perforated cable tray.
All trunking and cable ladders/trays visible on the trading floor should be
painted either by the builder or powder coated before installation. The
require colour should be confirmed by the Architect.
Scanning points shall be installed on the trading floor. There should be 3

for smaller stores and up to 6 for larger stores. The positions need to be
agreed with Checkers IT and Checkers Store planner.
Lighting Provision
Specialist areas (such as fruit and veg area, Kitchen Shop, etc.) will
have different fittings such as track spots etc. as indicated in the
luminaire schedule and the drawings.
This specification covers the lighting installations to new and existing

Checkers and Hyper stores. The Contractor should therefore relate the
correct description of the lighting configuration to the particular
application as set out on the drawings.
The average light intensity in new stores will be designed for a minimum
average of 1,200lux initial intensity and approximately 1,000lux
maintained over the entire trading area.
It will be required from the Electrical Contractor to liaise with both the
A/C and the Refrigeration Contractor during the construction period, to
prevent any clashes resulting in abortive works and delays. The Electrical
Contractor must protect the trunking installations against damage by
others. Deformed or damaged systems are not acceptable, and
replacement thereof will not be to the client’s account.
Emergency lighting in a Checkers store must consist of approximately

40% of preselected circuits staggered over the trading area in positions as
indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Consultant.
The wiring to the various rows of P2000 (41 x 41mm) galvanised wiring
channel feeding and supporting the light fittings, shall be done via P9000
(75 x 128mm) wiring channel at a level of approximately 300mm above
PAGE
110
the false ceiling, or as high as possible The suspension method must be

confirmed with the Electrical Engineer prior to fixing and suspension of
trunking. The suspension rods or cable shall be fixed at a maximum
spacing of 1,5m apart.
Where rows of light do not coincide with the purlins for fixing, a portion
of additional P2000 must be fitted between two purlins for suspension
purposes. Wiring channel to be painted the same colour as the trusses.
Trade floor light fittings should not be suspended lower than 3,800mm
AFFL with the optimum height being 4,300mm AFFL. The suspension
height however to confirmed with the electrical design consultant prior to
fixing rows of P2000 channel.
Minimum wiring size will be 2,5mm2 copper conductors and circuits over
60m will be reticulated with 4mm2 copper conductors.
Note: No Channel system may be filled by more than 40%.

 Checkers: Open ceiling with trusses exposed, lighting shall be a
continuous suspended LED linear fitting with Pendants installed on
the frame above the checkout arcade.
 Checkers Hyper: Open ceiling with trusses exposed, lighting shall be

a continuous suspended LED linear fitting with Pendants installed on
the frame above the checkout arcade.
The lighting to the trading area shall be controlled by means of two key
switch at the manager’s pulpit or front door, to select 40% (emergency
circuits) and a further 60% (normal circuits). Some night lights will stay on
24 hours. These circuits will be indicated on the lighting layout drawings.
Shelves stocked with electrical appliances will be fitted with LED strip type
luminaires. The specification for the type of LED luminaires together with
the fixing detail will be provided by the Electrical Design Engineer once
the location of the appliance shelf has been determined.
The fixing and connection of the LED lights will be done by the Electrical
Contractor.
15.1.6.13 Dispensary
Power skirting will be provided in the dispensing counter by the Store
Shop Fitter. 16A Switched Sockets normal power (White socket) and 16A
Dedicated Switched Sockets (Red socket shaven earth) will be installed by
the Electrical Contractor and wired as shown on the drawings.
PAGE
111
The DB will be surface complete with door/doors and separate sections

for Normal, Emergency and essential supply as shown on schematic
diagrams.
Note that the SSO for the fridge in the kitchen is on emergency supply.

drawing. The IT department will determine the quantity. Sufficient
number of conduits must be allowed for data and telephone cabling.
Lighting Provision
Light fittings to be installed between racks will be lay in 600 x 600 LED
fittings and recessed LED downlighter over the counter and indicated as
such on the lighting layout drawings and specified in the legend.
The over counter LED downlighters will be on emergency circuit.
The lights are to be switched from light switches as shown.
Health & Beauty Section Lighting Provision

Light fittings shall either be LED recessed down lighters if there is a
ceiling, continues LED linear fittings if open ceiling and track with track
mounted spots if there is a frame installed.
15.1.6.14 Deli
The basic electrical installation to these areas is to be completed before
the commencement of the Beneficial Occupation period. A large variety
of fixed and loose standing equipment will only be placed in position
after commencement of Beneficial Occupation. The Electrical Contractor is
required to co-ordinate with the equipment supplier, and to perform the
final connections in a neat, robust and flexible manner. The final
connection from power outlets to equipment must be wired with
insulated heat resistant wiring.
The power outlets (three and single phase) and SSO indicated on walls as
per the electrical layout drawings must be fed by means of a 25mm
diameter conduit, installed from the DB via the floor slab, terminating in
draw boxes at the heights indicated on the drawings.
The installation of surface mounted electrical outlets, mainly 5-Pin

sockets, at the cooking/services mid floor islands to be mounted on white
epoxy coated O line power masts. Power masts to extend into the ceiling
void. Wiring, cabling and data cabling to be reticulated from the ceiling
void down the power pole to the outlet points.
PAGE
112
Should equipment however been located against a wall, the three phase
electrical outlets will be hard wired from recessed Isolators at 1,400mm
AFFL, located to the side of the equipment. Connection will be by means
of an outlet point located behind the equipment in the form of an un-
switched 5-Pin socket and plug top. All wiring will be routed via recessed
conduits. The position shall be as per the Electrical Engineers drawing.
The three or single-phase power outlets shown on walls must consist of

an isolator at 1,400mm AFFL and a flush round steel end box at low level.
The Electrical Engineer to check the heights that different equipment
required and indicated the correct height on the electrical layout
drawings.
The DB will be recessed and must be dust proof rated. The DB will be
positioned at a location out of public view and will have a white epoxy
finish. Circuits and wiring sizes are as per schematic diagrams.
Data and telephone on walls will consist of a 100 x 100 x 50mm draw box
with blank cover at height indicated.
Scale pedestals are to be fed by means of conduit cast in floor slab.

Conduits to end in bottom of scale pedestal for both power and data.
Care must be taken during construction to protect these conduits from
damage. Draw wires must be allowed in all data 25mm dia. conduits.
Hand wash basins are fitted with auto taps. Supply to the auto tap will be
by means of a transformer in the ceiling, plugged into a 16A socket
located in the ceiling void above the basin. A 25mm dia. conduit flush to
the wall will be extended from the ceiling void (adjacent to socket) to
underneath the basin, ending in a 60mm dia. draw box. Wiring from the
auto tap transformer to the basin tap will be drawn in for final connection
by others.
A STOP/START (S/S) station for the extract canopy fan control will be
positioned as per the layout drawing. Fan Motor control (MCC) will be
provided either in the local DB or in the HVAC Contractors control panel.
The location of the MCC must be confirmed with both the Electrical and
Mechanical Consultant prior to installation. Cabling according to the
schematic diagrams must be installed to an appropriate Isolator within
1,5m of the fan motor.
Lighting Provision
The light fittings to be provided are 600 x 600mm lay-in LED luminaires in
the lay in ceilings and recessed LED down lighters in the bulkhead.

PAGE
113
Note the extract canopy will be fitted with its own luminaires and the
Electrical Contractor is to allow for connection for this canopy luminaire to
the lighting circuit.
15.1.6.15 Bakery
the commencement of the Beneficial Occupation period. A large variety
after commencement of Beneficial Occupation. The Electrical Contractor
is required to co-ordinate with the equipment supplier, and to perform
the final connections in a neat, robust and flexible manner. The final
The installation of surface mounted electrical outlets, mainly 5-Pin sockets

for bakery equipment, mid floor islands to be mounted on rectangular
white epoxy coated O Line power masts. Power masts to extend into the
ceiling void. Wiring, cabling and data cabling to be reticulated from the
ceiling void down the power pole to the outlet points.

drawings.
Data and telephone on wall will consist of a 100 x 100 x 50mm draw box

Draw wires must be allowed in all data 25mm dia. conduits.
PAGE
114

damage.
located in the ceiling void above the basin. A 25mm dia. Conduit flush in
underneath the basin, ending in a 60mm dia. Draw box. Wiring from the
by others.
A STOP/START (S/S) station for the extract canopy fan control will be
positioned as per the layout drawing. Fan Motor control (MCC) will be
provided either in the local DB or in the HVAC Contractors control panel.
The location of the MCC must be confirmed with both the Electrical and
Mechanical Consultant prior to installation. Cabling according to the
schematic diagrams must be installed to an appropriate Isolator within
1,5m of the Fan motor.
Lighting Provision
Recessed tilted spots shall be installed in front of the bread baskets.
Note the extract canopy will be fitted with its own luminaires and the
Electrical Contractor is to allow for connection to the lighting circuit.
15.1.6.16 Fish
the commencement of the Beneficial Occupation period. A lessor amount
after commencement of Beneficial Occupation. The Electrical Contractor is
final connections in a neat, robust and flexible manner. The final
PAGE
115

sockets, at the cooking/services mid floor islands to be mounted on
rectangular white epoxy coated O Line power masts. Power masts to
extend into the ceiling void. Wiring, cabling and data cabling to be
reticulated from the ceiling void down the power pole to the outlet
points.

and isolator at 1,400mm AFFL and a flush round steel end box at low
level. The Electrical Engineer to check the heights that different
equipment required and indicated the correct height on the electrical
layout drawings.
finish. Circuits and wiring sizes are as per schematic diagrams. The Fish
Shop can be fed from the Butchery DB if these two departments are next
to each other.

located in the ceiling void above the basin. A 25mm dia. conduit flush in
by others.
Lighting Provision
Recessed tilted spots shall be installed. Note the extract canopy will be
fitted with their own luminaires and the Electrical Contractor is to allow
for connection of this luminaire to the lighting circuit.
layout and indicated as such on the lighting drawings

PAGE
116
15.1.6.17 Butchery
the commencement of the Beneficial Occupation period. An amount of
fixed and loose standing equipment will only be placed in position after
commencement of Beneficial Occupation. The Electrical Contractor is
final connections in a neat, robust and flexible manner.

sockets, at the preparation tables to be mounted on rectangular O Line
type white epoxy coated. Power mast to extend into the ceiling void.
Wiring, cabling and data cabling to be reticulated from the ceiling void
down the power mast to the outlet points.
Note that the one band saw and sealer/wrapping machine are on
emergency power supply.

drawings.

located in the ceiling void above the basin. A 25mm dia. conduit flush in
PAGE
117
by others.
Lighting Provision
Recessed tilted spots shall be installed.
layout and indicated as such on the lighting drawings
15.1.6.18 Wine Section

Power must be supply for the wine fridge. Some stores also have a Wine
dispenser build into a cupboard that requires power. SSO on a pedestal
shall also be provided below the shelving.
Lighting Provision
The lighting shall be by means of suspended track and track mounted
LED spot lights.
15.1.6.19 Cheese Section

Lighting Provision
The lighting shall be by means of suspended track and track mounted
LED spot lights.
15.1.6.20 Fruit & Vegetable Boats

damage.
The exact position of pedestals must be confirmed with the Electrical

Consultant prior to installation.

PAGE
118
Lighting Provision
The lighting shall be by means of track and track mounted LED spot.
The luminaires will be mounted to a suspended metal frame supplied and

installed by others. Electrical Contractor is to wire the frame and connect
the individual display lights.
Note that this frame may be store specific and the frame type to be
confirmed with the Electrical Consultant prior to ordering light fittings.
15.1.7 Facilities Area Description

15.1.7.1 Staff Facilities
16A Switched Sockets normal power (White socket), telephone and
intercom outlets will be installed as shown on the drawings.
Isolators and outlets for Hand dryers and Auto taps will be positioned as
Lighting Provision
The light fittings to be provided in these facilities are as follows:
 Passages – Surface mounted LED Linear fitting;
 Toilet stalls – Surface Mounted Linear LED Fitting or Surface mounted
round LED fittings if cubical are full height;
 Toilet basins & circulation – Surface mounted LED Linear fitting;
 Staff change rooms – Surface mounted LED Linear fitting.
The positions and number of light fittings will be indicated as such on the
lighting layout drawings.
The lights are to be switched from positions as shown on the drawing.
15.1.7.2 Training Room

16A Switched Sockets normal power (White socket), telephone and data
outlets will be installed as shown on the drawings. Data point and
Dedicated SSO to be installed for the Training stations.
Lighting Provision
The light fittings to be provided are 600 x 600mm lay-in LED luminaires if
there is a ceiling otherwise LED Linear Luminaire.

PAGE
119
The positions and number of light fittings will be indicated as such on the
lighting layout drawings.
15.1.7.3 Receiving Office

drawings.

drawing. IT department to determine the quantity. Sufficient number of
conduits must be allowed for data and telephone cabling.
Dedicated sockets at high level are required for the Data Cabinet to be
installed by others.
Due to the number of data cables to the cabinet P9000 must be allowed
to the cabinet as indicated.
Lighting Provision
The light fittings to be provided 600 x 600mm lay-in LED luminaires
15.1.7.4 Receiving Cages

Lighting Provision
The light fittings to be provided in these facilities are as follows:
 Drop Temp – Surface Vapour proof LED Luminaire;
 Dry Goods – Surface Vapour proof LED Luminaire;
 All BOH – Surface Linear LED Luminaire.

PAGE
120
The lights are to be controlled by means of light switch as indicated or via

key switch.
Access Control
For night drop facility draw boxes on the outside in receiving yard will be
linked to positions in receiving passage by means of 25mm dia. conduits
as shown on the drawings. Draw wires must be installed.
Access control equipment and wiring will be By Others.
15.1.7.5 Bulk Store

16A Switched Sockets normal power and outlets will be installed as
For Conveyors in bulk store a power outlet point must be provided at the
conveyor controls and will be wired to an emergency circuit as shown.
For bulk stores with hoists an electrical connection must be provided at

the top of the shaft adjacent to the hoist control panel. The circuits too
must be on emergency supply.
The supply rating and cable will be as shown on the drawings and
schematic diagrams.
Lighting Provision
Although the bulk stores appear on drawings as a double volume space,
Checkers will introduce a Mezzanine floor for extra storage space.
This additional floor must be considered when reticulating cable trays,

wiring channel and conduits through the bulk store area. Due care must
be taken with co-ordination of services.
The average light intensity in the bulk store new stores will be designed
for a minimum average of 220lux between racking.
The Electrical Contractor will liaise with both Fire Protection (sprinklers)
and Fire Detection Contractors during the construction period to prevent
any clashes resulting in abortive works and delays.
P2000 (41 x 41mm) galvanised wiring channel feeding and supporting the
light fittings will be fixed under the store mezzanine structure and
suspended from purlins by means of 6mm galvanised rods. The rods will
be fixed at a maximum spacing of 1,5m apart.

PAGE
121
Where rows of light do not coincide with the purlins for fixing, a portion
of additional P2000 must be fitted between two purlins for suspension
purposes.
Surface Linear LED Luminaire or Open Channel with LED tubes shall be
installed.
The lights are to be controlled by means of light switch as indicated or via

key switch.
The light fittings are to be spaced and installed as per lighting layout
drawings.
15.1.7.6 Staff Entrance

16A Switched Sockets normal power (White socket), telephone and data
outlets will be installed as shown on the drawings.
A Dedicated SSO and data outlet shall be installed near the staff
entrances for the Krones Clock.
Access Control
The security mesh doors at the entrance are interlocked to limit one
person access at a time on entry and exit.
Release buttons will be located at security desk for control of access

doors.
The conduits and outlet point must be installed as shown on the layout
drawings for the access control infrastructure. Note point for Emergency
break glass unit must be allowed as shown.
Access control equipment will be supplied and installed by Checkers

direct Contractors. However the Electrical Contractor is to liaise with the
security Contractors to ensure all their requirements are in place prior to
security equipment installation.
15.1.7.7 Cold Rooms & Freezer Rooms

Power Provision
The Refrigeration Contractor will provide the wiring from the door heaters
and fans to a position above insulated rooms.
The Electrical will allow for and perform the connection from the point
above the rooms to a 24hr circuit (circuit breaker switched). The
connection may be looped together due to the low power consumption.

PAGE
122
The positions and circuits will be indicated on the layout and schematic
drawings.
Lighting Provision
Surface Vapour LED Luminaires shall be installed in these rooms suitable
to withstand the temperature in the room. The Contractor shall ensure
that the fitting does not block the airflow form the blower coils in the
rooms.
The luminaires are installed surface on the room roof panelling. The
Electrical Contractor must ensure wiring through the panel to the light
fitting is formed in a ‘U’ shape to allow any condensation to gather at the
bottom of ‘U’ to drip off and not enter the light fitting.
The light switch controlling the room lights must be fitted with a pilot
light in the toggle to indicate if the light fittings are on.
The lighting circuits will be over ridden by the key switch.
15.1.7.8 Fruit & Veg Preparation Facility

Power Provision & Data
Data point for scale to consist of recessed 100 x 100 x 50mm draw box
with blank cover. Conduit is to be linked to the data wire-way.
Lighting Provision
Surface Vapour LED Luminaires shall be installed.
The luminaires are installed surface on the room roof panelling. The
Electrical Contractor must ensure wiring through the panel to the light
fitting is formed in a ‘U’ shape to allow any condensation to gather at the
bottom of ‘U’ to drip off and not enter the light fitting.
The lighting circuits will be over ridden by the BOH key switch.
15.1.7.9 Wet Refuse

Power Provision
16A Switched Sockets normal power in water tight enclosure will be
provided for wash down equipment.

PAGE
123
Lighting Provision
Surface LED Luminaires shall be installed.
The lighting circuits will be over ridden by the key switch.
The number and position of the fittings indicated as such on the lighting
drawings.
15.1.7.10 Receiving Yard

Lighting Provision
Luminaires will be installed surface under the receiving door overhang
canopy. These lights will be photocell controlled along with all wall
mounted luminaires on the external of the building. The Electrical
consultant and Electrical contractor to ensure that the yards are well light
with no dark spots.
Wall mounted LED flood lights will be installed between receiving RSD
and switched by means of a water tight light switch located externally at
the nearest access door.
The number, positions and switching of the light fittings will be indicated
as such on the lighting drawings.
15.1.8 Circuitry and Switching

Non-Essential Circuits
Key switches positioned at the manager’s office or front entrance and near the staff
entrance are to control the non-essential power, 40% and 100% of the trading area
lighting. The non-essential power can be switch with the 40% trading floor lights.
The night lights will remain switched on 24 hours. These are the trading floor lights
connected to the UPS.
All indoor lighting circuits shall be switch from the Key switches other than the 24
hour circuits. Even if an offices or room have a separate light switch it shall still be
switched form the key switches. All the services departments and back of house
lights must be switch off with the 40% trading floor stage.
The switched socket outlets for non-essential circuits must be connected to an Earth
Leakage Unit and must consist of:
 Standard 16A SSO’s with three round pins

PAGE
124
Essential Circuits (UPS Supply)

Essential circuit SSO’s circuits are NOT connected to any Earth Leakage Unit and must
consist of:
 Dedicated type with a “shaven” earth pin with RED insert, toggle and cover plate.
Emergency Circuits (Generator Supply)
Illuminated Light Switches

Cold-rooms, Freezer rooms, Strong rooms, etc. are all to be fitted with illuminated
light switches indicating the interior light operation
15.1.9 Signage
Checkers supermarkets, the illuminated entrance sign and additional outside sign
points are each to be a separate circuit fed from MDB/DB1 via contactors as per
schematic diagrams.
The Checkers supermarkets will have various LED lit signage inside the store on
displays and on bulkheads. Signage will be controlled from MDB/DB1, via a contactor
linked to the stores key switch system.
15.1.10 Telephone and Computer Wire-Way Networks

These systems require conduiting and draw boxes as shown on the drawings. They
must be chased flush into walls with the conduits routed into false ceiling spaces or
via concrete floors.
Draw boxes are to be fitted with white epoxy coated cover plates and distribution
panels are to be fitted with lockable doors.
It will also be required from the Electrical Contractor to allow for draw wires in all
conducts, and to give full assistance to a subsequent specialist.
Note all data conduits are ‘Spur’ reticulated to outlet points at scales, scanners, etc.
NO Daisy chain conduiting will be accepted.
15.1.11 Auxiliary Services Conduit Systems

All the items below require a conduit system, as part of this contract, for the auxiliary
services as described and as set out in the relevant drawing. The conduit system
must be chased flush into walls with the conduit ends terminating into false ceiling
spaces or draw boxes and distribution points as applicable. It will be required of the
Electrical Contractor to allow for draw wire in conduits, covers on boxes and to give
assistance to Specialist Contractors as required.

PAGE
125
15.1.11.1 Smoke Detection System

The conduit system with draw wires must be installed as shown on the
relevant drawing. The provisional amount only covers the value of the
actual fire control equipment and wiring by the Specialist Sub-Contractor.
15.1.11.2 Access Control to Cash Offices

The conduit systems with draw wires must be installed as shown on the
relevant drawing. The equipment and wiring will be done by the Specialist
Sub-Contractor directly appointed by Checkers.
15.1.11.3 Public Address System

15.1.11.4 Intruder Alarm System

15.1.11.5 CCTV Surveillance & Monitoring

15.1.11.6 EAS System

Note that the ‘Black’ sockets in the check outs are for the EAS equipment.
Further sockets in the ceiling above the Money market are for the EAS
equipment and wiring circuits must be strictly according to the circuitry
shown on the drawings. All circuits will be on emergency supply
(Generator backed).
15.1.12 Landlord Provision (Checkers Development)

15.1.12.1 Landlord’s Power Provision and Site Lighting
Where Checkers Properties will be the Developer, the Landlord's
operations are grouped into two areas, i.e. DB - L1 feeding the substation
and service areas, and DB - L2 for the public walkways, parking and
circulation areas.

PAGE
126
15.1.12.2 Line Shops and Sub-Distribution Circuits

Apart from the distribution board described below, a metering section
must be supplied and installed for the purpose of the Supply Authority's
meters as shown on the diagrams. The Contractor must provide meters,
which are in accordance with the Local Supply Authority’s requirements,
including IEC & ISO international standards.
The preferred meters are the Elster Kent with LAN card.
15.1.12.3 Main Distribution Board: MDB-LS

A floor standing compartmented cabinet type board must be supplied
and installed, with the external finish in epoxy-coated electric orange.
The sections are to be of a modular construction as far as possible and be
manufactured to the standard technical specification included herewith.
15.1.12.4 Sub-Distribution Boards

Each of the line shops must contain a surface mounted distribution board
with a door, fitted as set out in the drawings and distribution line
diagrams. A section of white P8000 trunking is to extend from the DB
into the ceiling for all the sub-circuits and the main cable supply.
15.1.12.5 Sub-Circuits
Each of the line shops is to be fitted out with lighting, power and
telephone points as set out in the drawings. The light fittings are to be of
the approved type and the installation is to be either on the surface or
fitted into the “T” ceiling grid as applicable to the project to render light
level between 350 - 400lux.
The sub-circuits, lighting, power sign point are to be fed by means of

“twin and earth” wiring or “surfix” cables installed in the false ceiling space
and tied with cable straps.
All socket outlets and telephone points are to be flush in walls or

columns, with the relevant conduit extending into the ceiling space. The
telephone conduit must be directed to the main telephone DB provided
for the centre, and under no circumstances shall one shop’s system
interfere with or terminate into another.
15.1.13 Provisional Sum Items

The Electrical Contractor is to call for tenders for all the provisional sum items. He
must purchase the specified items as directed by the Electrical Consultant after
tendering. The Electrical Contractor is to arrange for a fully detailed supplier’s
specification and to guarantee performance for approval by the Electrical Consultant
before implementing any work.

PAGE
127
15.1.13.1 Smoke Detection System

The type of system installed is an analogue addressable fire detection
system consisting of Ziton analogue addressable optical smoke detectors,
rate of rise heat detectors, resettable manual break glass units and Omni
sounders. ZP3 4 loop analogue addressable fire alarm panel including
charger and batteries.
The complete system must be installed in conduit with PH120 fire

retardant cable.
Line relays to be installed to shut down aircon system, extraction unit and
an interface link installed to link the intruder alarm system. All conduit
work to be done by the Electrical Contractor, with draw wires in conduit.
All work to be carried out as per SANS 10400 standards and SANS 10139
standards.
The smoke detectors are to be spaced and installed as per smoke

detection layout drawings.
SECTION 15.2: STANDARD TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATION
15.2.1 General
This part of the specification covers the general technical requirements and is to be
read in conjunction with the Detailed Electrical Specification. It should be noted that,
in the event of any discrepancy between these two parts, the latter supersedes this
general technical section.
South African Bureau of Standards (SANS) code of practice 10142 is to govern the
minimum standards of systems, material and workmanship.
15.2.2 Regulations
The installation shall be erected and tested in accordance with the following
regulations:
(a) The Occupational Health and Safety Act (South Africa);
(b) The Regulations of the local Gas Board where applicable;
(c) The Code of Practice for the Wiring of Premises, SANS 10142 (South Africa) or
the Code of Practice applicable to the Country where the project is carried out;
(d) The local Municipal by-laws and Regulations of the Electrical Supply Authority;
(e) The Standard Regulations of any Government Department, where applicable;
(f) The local and National Fire Regulations; and
(g) Telephone Regulations.

PAGE
128
It is assumed that the Contractor is conversant with the above-mentioned

requirements. Should any requirements, by-laws or regulations, which contradict the
contents of this document, apply or become applicable during erection of the
installation, such requirements, by-laws or regulations shall overrule this document
and the Contractor immediately inform the Engineer of such a contradiction. Under
no circumstances may the Contractor carry out any variations to the installation in
terms of such contradictions without obtaining the written permission to do so from
the Engineer.
15.2.3 Materials and Workmanship

All workmanship is to be to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and particular care is to
be taken to ensure a neat installation.
All materials and equipment required are to comply with the requirements of the
approved international standards and the local regulations. All materials are to be of
the best quality; unused, corrosion resistant, in good condition and complete.
Temporary installations and connections must be protected against mechanical and

weather damage.
The Contractor, where requested to do so, is to submit samples of equipment and

material to the Engineer for approval prior to installation. Samples may be retained
in the Engineer's possession until the contract is completed, after which they will be
returned.
The Contractor, without any additional cost to Checkers, is to replace any material
considered faulty or incorrectly erected or badly fixed. The Contractor shall be held
responsible for the correctness of all dimensions as set out.
The Engineer will conduct progress inspections during the execution of the works.
Discrepancies will be pointed out to the Contractor and these are to be remedied at
the Contractor's expense. Under no circumstances shall these inspections relieve the
Contractor of his obligations in terms of accuracy of dimensions, regulations or any
other documented matter.
15.2.4 Arrangements with the Supply Authority

The Contractor is to give all notices required, which may be due to the Local Supply
Authority, unless specified to the contrary. The amount charged by the Supply
Authority for connection of the installation to the main supply will be paid directly by
the Client.
It is to be the responsibility of the Contractor to make the necessary arrangements

with the Local Supply Authority at his own cost, and to supply the labour, equipment
and means of inspection, test and commissioning of the installation, to the
satisfaction of the Local Supply Authorities and Consulting Engineers.
PAGE
129
The Contractor is to supply and install, as part of the tender price, all notices and
warning signs that are required by the relevant laws, regulations and/or the
documents.
15.2.5 Testing the Installation

After completing the electrical installation or any section thereof, the Contractor is to
provide all the necessary test equipment and assistance, in order that the installation
can be tested to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer and the local inspectors.
Tests of earth continuity, insulation resistance, balancing of load on phases and

polarity shall be carried out by the Electrical Contractor and documented for record
purposes (see Section 15.3.3).
15.2.6 Conduit
15.2.6.1 Plain-End Conduit
Bosal conduit with accessories may be used, and the system details must
be submitted to the Engineer for approval if requested. The conduit shall
be hot-dipped galvanised inside and outside.
15.2.6.2 PVC Conduit

SABS approved Non-metallic conduit may be used. Non-metallic conduit
shall be of the uPVC grade. All bends are to be slow bends; jointing with
adhesives is to be jointed and bonded properly and installed at
approximately ambient temperature.
15.2.6.3 Flexible Conduit

Flexible galvanised steel PVC covered conduit is only to be used when
specified.
15.2.6.4 Conduit Accessories

(I) Metal Circular Type Boxes
The boxes are to be of the long spout pattern, manufactured of malleable
cast iron or pressed steel and stove enamelled jet black or galvanised as
required. The two cover fixing holes are to be diametrically opposite each
other, drilled and tapped at 50mm centres.
Junction, draw-in and inspection boxes are to be of adequate size and to

be supplied with heavy gauge metal cover plates, all galvanised.
(ii) Metal Switch Boxes and Socket Outlet Boxes

All switch boxes and socket outlet boxes are to be manufactured of
pressed galvanised steel of at least 1mm thickness. All boxes are to be
fitted with the necessary lugs to suit standard flush mounted switches and
socket outlets.

PAGE
130
Light switch boxes are to be 100mm x 50mm x 50mm with 20mm knock-
outs on the sides and one 20mm knockout on the top, bottom and back.
Socket outlet boxes shall be 100mm x 100mm x 50mm with two 20mm
knock-outs each on top, bottom and sides and backs.
(iii) Non-Metallic Conduit Accessories

Only custom-made conduit accessories may be used with non-metallic
conduit to ensure adaptability and a proper fit. The engineer must
approve the conduit system and accessories.
15.2.7 Installation of Conduits

Bending and setting of plain-end conduits must be done with special benders and
apparatus manufactured for this purpose, which are obtainable from the suppliers of
the system. Damaged conduits resulting from the use of incorrect bending apparatus
are to be completely removed, and any wiring already drawn into such damaged
conduits are to be completely renewed at the Contractor's expense.
15.2.7.1 Installation in Concrete Slabs

In order not to delay the building operation, the Contractor is to ensure
that all conduits and accessories that are to be cast in concrete are placed
in position in good time. The Contractor must be in attendance when the
concrete is cast.
All conduits, draw boxes etc., are to be securely fixed to the shuttering to
prevent displacement. Where the Builder uses fibreglass shuttering, the
equipment is to be fixed to the steel only and no holes may be drilled or
made in shuttering. All draw boxes and outlet boxes are to be plugged
with wet paper before they are secured to the shuttering.
As far as possible, conduits are not to be installed across expansion joints.

Where this is unavoidable, a conduit expansion joint is to be provided.
The installation of conduits in floor screeds is to be kept to a minimum.

Where conduits are installed in screeds, the top of the conduits is to be at
least 20mm below the surface of the screed. Where the screed is laid
directly on the ground, galvanised conduits are to be used. Conduits are
to be secured to the concrete slab at intervals not exceeding 2m where
the conduits leave the screed into the walls. The Contractor is to ensure
that these conduits are not visible above the screed.
When two or more conduits are laid parallel in concrete floors or slabs,
these conduits are to be spaced at least 25mm apart.

PAGE
131
All round conduit boxes to be used in concrete must be of the deep type.
No elbows and sharp bends are allowed in the concrete slabs, and sharp
sets must avoided. Draw boxes are to be installed, so as to ensure that
there are nowhere are there more than two 90 degree bends between
one end of a run and a draw box, or between draw boxes. Draw boxes
must be arranged so as to be accessible after completion of the work.
Cover plates for draw boxes and expansion joints are to be of metal, and
finished to suit the finished surfaces, and where possible, draw boxes are
to be grouped under one common cover plate.
All draw boxes, conduits, etc. that are installed in concrete are to be
cleaned with compressed air and provided with draw wires two days after
removal of the shuttering. Errors that occurred during the installation of
the conduits, and any lost draw boxes or blocked conduits, are to be
reported to the Main Contractor and Architect immediately, in order that
an alternative route can be planned before additional concrete is cast.
Any additional cost shall be for the Contractor's account.
15.2.7.2 Surface Mounted Conduit

Conduits are to be concealed in the building finishes as far as possible.
Where this is not possible, or where otherwise specified, surface mounted
conduits are to be installed in vertical or horizontal runs and only straight
lengths may be employed.
The use of inspection bends must be avoided. The conduits are preferably
to be evenly bent and connected with inspection couplings. No screw
threads must be visible after the completion of the conduit installation,
except where running joints occur.
Conduits are to be installed on approved spacer saddles, which are to be

firmly secured to the wall.
The crossing of conduits must be avoided. If such a crossing is necessary,

purpose-made metal boxes are to be provided at the crossing. The
positions and finish of these boxes are to fit in with the general layout.
Only approved wall fixing plugs may be used.
Parallel conduit runs are to be equidistant and saddles are to be installed

in line. Alternatively, a special clamp may be used to secure all conduits
in unison. In the case of conduits of different diameters, the latter
method may only be used if a purpose-made clamp designed to
accommodate the various conduit sizes is provided.

PAGE
132
All surface mounted conduits and accessories are to be painted with high
quality enamel paint or as otherwise specified. The colour is to comply
with the colour code specified for the installation, or where no code has
been specified, it is to match the colour of the surrounding finishes.
15.2.7.3 Conduits in Roof Spaces

In open roof spaces (no ceiling), conduits are to run along the wall plates
and the rafters. Conduits suspended between the rafters are not
acceptable.
Conduits in roof spaces are to be installed parallel or at right angles to

the roof members, and to be secured at intervals not exceeding 1,5m by
means of saddles screwed to the roof timbers. Nails or crampets are not
allowed.
Under flat rooves in false ceilings, or where there is less than 900mm
clearance, or in instances where the ceilings are insulated with glass wool
or other insulating material impeding access, the conduits are to be
installed in a manner which allows for wiring from below the ceilings, i.e.
loop in system. Draw boxes are to be installed in such a way that they
can easily be inspected from above.
15.2.7.4 Conduits in Brickwork

Conduits in brickwork are to be built into the wall and to be offset to
allow outlet boxes to be flush with the surface of the wall. Extension
boxes are to not be allowed.
Chasing of brickwork is not allowed except in 110mm (single skin) brick

walls, where the chasing must be carried out by the Electrical Contractor,
who must ensure that the chase will not cause structural problems to the
wall. Where cutting machines or other tools are intended to be used
which may cause damage, noise or excessive dust, the Electrical
Contractor is to liaise and make proper arrangements with the Main
Contractor to reduce such annoyance to a minimum.
15.2.7.5 Conduit Termination

Conduits are to be connected directly to draw boxes with spouted
connections. Conduit fittings are to be fixed tightly home and glued as
applicable.
Conduits are to be terminated by means of a brass female bush and two

locknuts in pressed steel switchboards and distribution boxes, cable
ducts, power skirting, etc. The conduit end fitting is to project only far
enough through the entry hole to accommodate the bush and locknut.

PAGE
133
A female bush and two locknuts must be used to terminate conduit

fittings at draw boxes and outlet boxes without spouts, should there be
sufficient room in the box. Where there is insufficient room, a coupling
brass male bush and locknut may be used with sufficient allowance for
the reduction of the internal diameter by the male bush.
Holes to accommodate brass bushes are to be large enough to

accommodate the bush with a minimum of clearance.
Bush-nuts for the connection of earth conductors to conduits are not

acceptable.
Conduit ends are to be cut at right angles to ensure that ends butt
squarely at joints.
The conduit ends are to be reamed and all joints tightly fitted. Only
approved couplings may be used. Running joints with long threads must
be kept to a minimum and locknuts must be provided to ensure a strong
mechanical and a continuous electrical joint.
Where the galvanising has been damaged, the area is first to be cleaned
and a coat of zinc-based paint applied. Additional coats of paint may
only be applied after the undercoat has completely dried. All surface-
mounted non-galvanised metallic conduits must be painted.
15.2.7.6 Installation of PVC Conduit

Where specified for a particular service, PVC conduit may be installed
under the following conditions: (see Section 15.3.6.2).
Insulated heat-resistant boxes are to be used for outlets of totally

enclosed luminaries and other fittings where excessive temperatures are
likely to occur.
PVC conduits or conduit boxes may not support luminaries or other

fittings. These fittings are to be secured to the surrounding structure in a
way that is acceptable to the Engineer.
The conduit is to be supported and fixed with saddles at a maximum of

1m, evenly spaced in roof spaces. The Contractor is to supply and install
all additional supporting timbers required.
It must be possible to rewire the completed installation in the future

without undue difficulty.

PAGE
134
15.2.7.7 Painting of Conduits

Exposed conduits are to be painted with normal oil paints. Under no
circumstances may PVA or other water-based paints be used on any
conduit. Care must be taken to ensure that the paint used does not
contain any component that will soften or have any other detrimental
effect on the materials from which the conduits and fittings are
manufactured.
15.2.7.8 Installation of Flexible Conduits

In installations where the equipment has to be moved frequently to
enable adjustment during normal operation, the connection of motors,
vibrating equipment, stove connections, and cases where required by the
Client, flexible cable of the correct cores and current-carrying capacity,
must be used instead of flexible conduits for the final connection to the
equipment.
15.2.7.9 General Requirements for the Installation of Conduits and Outlet

Boxes
All accessories, such as boxes for socket outlets, switches, lights, etc., are
to be accurately positioned. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to
ensure that all outlets are installed level and square, at the correct height
from the floor, ceiling or roof level, and in the correct position relative to
building lines and equipment positions as specified.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the correct final

floor, ceiling and roof levels in conjunction with the Main Contractor.
Draw boxes may not be installed in positions where they will be
inaccessible after completion of the installation. Draw boxes must be
installed in inconspicuous positions to the approval of the Architect, and
must be indicated on the "as built" drawings.
All draw boxes and outlets are to be fitted with cover plates, either as part
of the switch or socket assembly, or with blank cover plates if unused.
Blank cover plates are to match other cover plates in the same area.
Cover plates in both ceilings and walls are to overlap the draw box and
edges of any opening. If the fixing lugs are substantially deeper than the
finished wall surfaces, suitable coiled steel wire or tubes are to be used as
spacers. The edges of flush mounted outlet boxes are not to be deeper
than 10mm from the final surface.
Galvanised steel draw wires with a minimum diameter of 2,5mm are to be

installed in all unwired conduits, e.g. conduits for future extensions
telephone installations and other services.

PAGE
135
A maximum of two 90-degree bends, or the equivalent displacement, will

be allowed between outlets and/or boxes. All bends must be made
without heating the conduits and without reducing the diameter of the
conduits. The inside radius of a bend may not be less than five times the
outside diameter of the conduit.
A maximum of 15m straight conduit runs is allowed where a draw box is

to be installed at these maximum intervals.
All excess holes in draw boxes or other conduit accessories are to be

securely blanked off by means of brass plugs to render the installation
vermin proof.
15.2.7.10 Expansion Joints

At expansion joints, metal expansion boxes are to be used with one
conduit fixed to the box and the other capable of movement, to allow for
expansion and contraction of the concrete. To ensure earth continuity,
stranded copper conductors are to be clamped to the ends of both
conduits, as earth conductors cast in concrete will not be accepted.
The gap between the box and the sliding conduit is to be sealed with
Pratley Tic Tac or equivalent compound, to prevent the ingress of wet
cement.
15.2.8 Cable Trunking, Ducting and Power Skirting

The rigid type galvanised steel wire-ways for concealing wiring and suspending
electrical apparatus are described hereunder. Where the Engineers elect to specify or
instruct the Contractor to install the non-metallic type, it shall be of the uPVC grade.
15.2.8.1 Cable Trunking

All cable trunking and fittings are to be hot-dipped galvanised and epoxy
coated to SABS 763 (in South Africa) and are subject to the approval of
the Engineer.
The cable trunking is to be manufactured from sheet steel with the

following minimum thickness: (nominal sizes are stated)
41mm x 41mm - P 2000: 1,6mm thick

50mm x 76mm - P 8200: 1,0mm thick
76mm x 76mm - P 8000: 1,0mm thick
76mm x 127mm - P 9000: 1,2mm thick
All channels are to be supplied with cover plates, which are to be of the
clip-in type and may be manufactured from PVC if the cover is 76mm
wide or less. Channel covers for P9000 are to be galvanised type.
PAGE
136
All trunking bends are to be of easy sweep design, with smooth, rounded
corners, and where branch or crossover connections are made, the edge
of the apertures must be rendered smooth with approved edging strips.
Bends in trunking are to be such that the inner radius is at least three
times the external diameter of the trunking.
Lengths of trunking and corner pieces are to be joined by means of

internal fish plate sections, constructed from sheet steel, no less than
2,5mm thick and attached to the trunking with cadmium plated steel
round headed 5,0mm screws, complete with lock washers and nuts.
Where earthing is necessary, an insulated 2,5mm2 earth wire is to be
installed from either side of the joint, properly crimped and fixed to the
splice fixtures with additional nuts and washers to provide electrical
continuity across the joints. Care is to be taken that no fixture protrudes
into the trunking so as to damage or abrade cables when drawn into the
trunking.
The cable trunking is to be supported from the ceiling at distances not

exceeding 2m, or as specified by the manufacturer. Where the trunking is
not directly fixed to the surface, it is to be hung by means of galvanised
rods or galvanised conduit hangers, which are to be arranged to support
the trunking rigidly in both directions.
The Contractor is to arrange the layout of the trunking in conjunction with

the Main Contractor, to ensure that the trunking will not clash with the
service of other trades.
Adequate allowance is to be made for expansion and contraction, and

where the trunking passes over expansion joints in the building structure,
expansion couplers must be provided.
Where inverted trunking is used, the cables are to be retained in their

compartment by clips or fibre supports, at intervals not exceeding
300mm. However, if practical, trunking should be installed with the open
end to the side or top.
The space factor of cables in trunking may not exceed 40%, where the
space factor is the relation of the sum of the overall cross sectional areas
of cables to the internal cross sectional area of the trunking.
The ends of the trunking are not to be left open, but to be provided with
end pieces. Corner pieces are to be used for direction changes, as 90
degree direct bends will not be allowed.

PAGE
137
When cable trunking is cut, the edges are to be treated as described for
conduit to prevent rust.
15.2.9 Wiring of Conduit

Wiring may only be carried out after the conduit installation for a sub-distribution
board has been completed, but is to be finished before painting work commences.
No wires are to be drawn in before the conduits have been thoroughly cleaned of
debris and moisture and fitted with the necessary brass bushes.
PVC insulated or equivalent copper conductors and copper earth conductors are to
be used exclusively. The insulation is to be general purpose PVC, 600/1000V grade.
The conductors are to be of high conductivity annealed stranded copper and the
cores may be shaped or circular.
All unarmoured conductors are to be installed in conduits, cable channels (trunking)

or power skirting, and may under no circumstances be exposed. Cable channels and
power skirting must be of metal construction unless specifically approved to the
contrary.
The above wire ways are only permitted for relatively light current-carrying
conductors such as lighting and socket outlet circuits. Heavy current-carrying
conductors such as feeders to distribution boards and large power points must be
installed in separate conduits or wire ways.
Separate circuits are to be employed for lighting, power and plug circuits, with a
maximum of two single-phase circuits per 20mm diameter conduit. Conduit
capacities are to be as laid down in the enclosed tables (see Section 15.4).
All switch and phase conductors are to be PVC insulated. Red or multi colours may
be used for identification of different circuits or switching purposes. Neutral
conductors are to be black PVC insulated, and earth wires are to be green or
green/yellow.
Wiring is to be executed according to the loop-in system and no joints are allowed
inside conduits or boxes.
When conductors are drawn through conduits, care must be taken that they are not
kinked or twisted. Care must also be taken that the conductors do not come into
contact with materials or surfaces that may damage or otherwise adversely affect the
durability of the conductor.
A neutral conductor is to be installed to all three phase outlets intended for

equipment connection, whether sockets or isolators, irrespective of whether the
particular equipment normally requires a neutral or not.

PAGE
138
Conductors installed in vertical wire ways are to be secured at intervals not exceeding
5m to support the weight of the conductors. Clamps must be provided in suitable
draw boxes for this purpose.
The insulation of conductors may only be removed over the portion of the
conductors that enter the terminals of switches, socket outlets or other equipment.
When more than one conductor enters a terminal, the strands are to be securely
twisted together. Under no circumstances may strands be cut off.
Where earth continuity conductors are looped between terminals of equipment or

power/lighting outlets, the looped conductor ends are to be twisted together and
then soldered or ferruled with a “tail” connecting to the apparatus earth terminal to
ensure that earth continuity is maintained when the equipment is disconnected or
removed.
The following conductor sizes shall be used, except where stated otherwise:
(a) Lighting circuits: 2,5mm2 + 2,5mm2 copper earth conductor;

(b) 16Amp socket outlet circuits: 2,5mm2 + 2,5mm2 copper earth conductor;
(c) Stove circuits: 10,0mm2 + 6,0mm2 copper earth conductor;
(d) Hot water cylinder: 4,0mm2 + 2,5mm2 copper earth conductor.
15.2.10 Wiring of Cable Trunking

The conductors of each specific circuit are to be bound together and to be numbered
according to the circuit number of the distribution board by means of numbered
straps at distances not exceeding 2m.
The space factor of the cables in the trunking Cis not to exceed 40%.
15.2.11 Armoured Cables

Low voltage cables are to be rated at 600/1000V and to be PVC insulated copper
conductors / PVC bedded / armoured / black extruded PVC outer sheath. The cables
are to be manufactured in accordance with approved international standards and
bare the relevant mark.
15.2.12 Installation of Armoured Cables

15.2.12.1 Termination of Cables
Cable ends are to be terminated with glands or in cable boxes with the
associated accessories such as clamps, shrouds, etc. complying in all
respects with the recommendations laid down by the manufacturers of
the cables and glands employed.

PAGE
139
15.2.12.2 Termination of PVC Insulated Cables

Cable ends are to be terminated by means of adjustable glands and to be
fitted in accordance with the instructions of the cable and gland
manufacturer.
The correct size and type of gland for the particular cable termination
application must be used, and only Pratley or equal approved quality
products may be used.
15.2.12.3 Connection of Cable Conductors

Suitable lugs are to be used, preferably solidly sweated to the cable
conductor ends. Lugs may be crimped, using mechanical or pneumatic
tools designed for this purpose, on condition that evidence is submitted
that the method used complies with the international requirements
"Compression Joints in Copper".
Contact surfaces are to be thoroughly cleaned and smoothed and fixing

bolts must match the hole size of the lug. Where surface contact is
suspected or corrosion atmospheres are present, a suitable contact
compound must be applied between such surfaces prior to fixing.
Cables that are connected to clamp type terminals, where the clamping
screws are not in direct contact with the conductor, need not be lugged,
but the correct terminal size must be used.
Ferrules are to be used, as far as possible, where cable conductors are

connected directly to equipment with screws against the conductor
strands.
When cutting away insulation from cable conductors to fit into lugs, care
must be taken that no strands are left exposed. Under no circumstances
may any of the conductor strands be cut away to fit into lugs.
15.2.12.4 Testing of Cables

Each completed section of cable (including joints) is to be tested by
means of a suitable certified megger or cable pressure test equipment, as
applicable, and the results must be tabulated and certified.
Each low voltage cable is to be tested after installation (up to 400V) at

minimum 500V.
The Contractor must make all arrangements, pay all fees and provide all
equipment for these tests. The cost of testing is included in the tender
price.

PAGE
140
The Contractor is to notify the Engineer in good time so that he or his

representative may witness the tests.
On completion of the tests on any cable, the Contractor shall

immediately, submit three copies of the certified test report to the
Engineer.
15.2.13 Cable Trays and Ladders

The Contractor is to supply and install all cable trays and/or ladders as specified or as
required by the cable routes including the necessary supports, clamps, hangers, fixing
materials, bends, angles, junctions, reducers, T-pieces, etc. He is further to liaise with
the Main Contractor for the provision of holes and access through the structure and
finishes. He is furthermore to co-ordinate with other services to reduce delays and
disputes to a minimum.
Metal cable trays, ladders and all accessories are to be manufactured from perforated
rolled steel, which is to be hot-dip galvanised.
15.2.13.1 Metal Cable Trays

Metal trays manufactured to the following standards are to be used:
(a) Less than 150mm wide; 1,2mm min. thickness with 12mm return;
(b) 150mm to 457mm; 1,2mm minimum thickness with 19mm min.
return;
(c) 460mm to 610mm; 2,0mm minimum thickness with 76mm return.
The top of the up stands of trays listed in (a) and (b) must be smooth.
15.2.13.2 Cable Ladders

Metal cable ladders are to consist of a 76mm high side rail of 2mm
minimum thickness. Cross pieces consisting of P4000 channel sections
must be spaced at maximum intervals of 250mm. Where cables of
10mm2 or smaller are installed on cable ladders, the spacing of the
crosspieces must be 125mm. Cables must be clamped in position by
means of purpose-made cable clamps that fit into the crosspieces.
Cable ladders consisting of slotted metal rails that accommodate plastic

or metal cable binding bands, may be used in vertical cable runs against
walls, etc. These cable ladders will be considered in horizontal cable runs
for small cables for communication and control wiring upon the prior
approval of the Engineer.
Purpose-made cable trays consisting of 6mm angle iron and 6mm x

40mm minimum crosspieces are acceptable in industrial applications.
Crosspieces are to be welded in pairs at 250mm maximum centre-to-
centre intervals. The pairs are to be spaced approximately 10mm apart to
PAGE
141
allow cable clamps or metallic binding bands to affix the cables to the
tray.
15.2.13.3 Accessories
Horizontal and vertical bends, T-junctions and cross connections are to be
supplied by the Contractor. The dimensions of these connections are to
correspond to the dimensions of the linear sections to which they are
connected.
The radius of all bends is to be 1m minimum. The inside dimensions of

horizontal angles or connections are to be large enough to ensure that
the allowable bending radius of the cables is not exceeded. Sharp angles
are to be 45 degrees mitred if the cable radii will allow the use thereof
and if the cut edges have been filed and treated with cold galvanising.
15.2.13.4 Supports
Cable tray supports are to consist of two steel hanger rods, at least 8mm
in diameter, on both sides of the tray, with a substantial steel cross-
member on the underside of the tray, and bolted to the rods. Alternately,
cable trays may be cantilevered from walls on suitable brackets.
The supports must be strong enough and fixed at a distance, which will
prevent the cable tray from sagging more than 6mm over a 2m distance.
15.2.13.5 Fixing to the Structure

Where installed on concrete or brick, the supports for cable trays and
ladders are to be securely fixed by means of at least two heavy-duty
expansion type anchor bolts. Cantilevered trays are to be supported by a
minimum of two 6mm diameter expansion bolts per support.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that adequate fixing is

provided as cable trays and ladders that work loose are to be rectified at
his expense. The fixing is to take into account site conditions that prevail
during installation.
Where installed on vertical steelwork, cable trays and ladders are to be

fixed by means of 6mm diameter bolts and nuts.
On horizontal steelwork, use Caddy-type fasteners.
Horizontal trays and ladders must, in general, be installed 450mm below

slabs, ceilings, etc. to facilitate access during installation of cables.
Multiple runs are to be spaced at least 300mm apart, unless a different

spacing is specified in the detail technical specification.
PAGE
142
Metal trays and ladders are to be bonded to the earth bar of the
switchboard to which the cables are connected. Additional bare copper
stranded conductors or copper tape must be bolted to the tray or ladder
where the electrical continuity cannot be guaranteed. These additional
conductors or tapes must, in any event, always be installed in outdoor
applications and in coastal regions.
15.2.14 Wall Sockets and Fixing

The Contractor is to provide and fix all supports, clamps, brackets, hangers and other
fixing materials.
Where the fixing holes in bricks or concrete walls are smaller than 10mm diameter,
and where the mass of the equipment is less than 10kg, wall plugs may be used to fix
conduits, cables and other equipment. Fibre or plastic plugs may be used. Wooden
plugs are not acceptable. Aluminium plugs may be used in face bricks. Plugs
installed in joints between bricks are not acceptable. A masonry drill of the correct
size must be used to drill holes for plugs. Round head screws of the correct diameter
to match the specific plug must be used throughout.
Where the fixing holes are 10mm or larger, or where the mass of the equipment
exceeds 10kg, equipment must be fixed by means of expanding anchor bolts or by
means of bolts cast into the concrete or built into walls.
Brass screws bolts and nuts must be used to fix galvanised equipment.
15.2.15 Light Switches

The Contractor shall supply and install all the light switches of similar manufacture
throughout the installation.
15.2.15.1 Flush and Surface Mounted Switches

All switches are to be suitable for mounting in 100mm x 50mm x 50mm
or 100mm x 100mm boxes and must comply with the international
standards and bear the relevant marking.
Switches are to be of tumbler operated micro gap type rated at 16A,

250V.
Switches are to have protected terminals for safe wiring.
Contacts are to be of silver material.
On multi-lever switches, it must be possible to change any of the switches

individually.
The yoke strap must be slotted to allow for easy alignment.

PAGE
143
Where light switches are installed in partitions, they must, where possible,
be of the special narrow type intended for installation into the mullions.
15.2.15.2 Watertight Switches

Watertight switches are to be of the microgap type and suitable for
surface mounting.
The housing is to be of galvanised cast iron or die cast aluminium with

watertight cover plate and toggle.
The switch is to have a porcelain base and a quick acting spring

mechanism and to be rated at 16A. The ON/OFF positions are to be
clearly marked on the switch housing.
15.2.15.3 Ceiling Switches

Ceiling switches are to be rated at 16A, and to be suitable for ceiling
mounting on a round conduit box.
The switch is to be made of high impact strength nylon material.

Adequate space is to be provided in the unit for ease of wiring.
The switch colour is to be white and the switch must be fitted with a
nylon cord 1,25m long.
15.2.16 Socket Outlets

The Contractor is to provide and install all the socket outlets of similar manufacture
throughout the installation.
15.2.16.1 Flush and Surface Mounted Switched Sockets

All switched socket outlets are to be suitable for mounting in 100mm x
100mm x 50mm or 100mm x 50mm x 50mm.
Switches are to be of the tumbler operated micro gap type rated at 16A.
Terminals are to be enclosed for safe wiring.
Contacts are to be of silver material.
Safety shutters are to be provided on live and neutral openings.
The yoke fixing holes are to be slotted to allow for easy alignment.
Miniature circuit breakers are to be used in lieu of a switch where

necessary.

PAGE
144
Where 13A flat pin switched socket-outlets are specified, these must
comply with the international standard.
15.2.16.2 Watertight-Switched Sockets

The housing of watertight-switched sockets is to be of galvanised cast
iron or die cast aluminium with watertight-machined joints.
The switch is to have a porcelain base and a quick-acting spring

mechanism and be rated at 16A.
The ON/OFF positions are to be clearly marked on the switch or housing.
The socket openings are to be rendered watertight by means of

gasketted cover plates, which are screwed onto the body of the unit. The
cover plate is to be secured to the body of the unit by means of a chain.
15.2.16.3 Un-Switched Socket Outlets

Unswitched socket outlets may only be used in the case of 5A 3-pin units
intended for the connection of recessed light fittings installed in false
ceilings.
The socket outlets are to have shuttered live and neutral openings.
The socket outlets are to be suitable for installation in pre-punched wiring

channels, deep round conduit boxes.
15.2.17 Installation of Light Switches and Socket Outlets

Switches and socket outlets are to be accurately positioned in accordance with the
drawings. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all outlets are installed
level and square, at the correct height from the floor, and at the correct position
relative to building lines and equipment positioned as specified. It is the Contractor's
responsibility to determine the correct final floor level and ceiling level in conjunction
with the Main Contractor.
All switches and socket outlets are to be fitted with PVC cover plates. The colour of
cover plates is to be as specified or otherwise to match the surrounding finishes as
closely as possible. Cover plates in the same area are to have the same colour. Cover
plates of flush mounted socket outlets must overlap the draw-box and edges of the
recess. Cover plates may under no circumstances be cut, unless authorised by the
Engineer.
The sides of adjacent switches, plugs, push buttons, etc. must be parallel or
perpendicular to each other and uniformly spaced. A common escutcheon plate is to
be placed around flush mounted outlets and accessories where the standard cover
plates do not cover the cut-outs in the finishes.
PAGE
145
All socket outlets are to be installed at least 150mm away from the doorframes.
Unless specified to the contrary, switches adjacent to doors are to be installed on the
side containing the lock. If the position of the lock is not shown on the drawings, the
position is to be verified before the switch-box is installed. Switch-boxes in brick or
concrete walls are to be installed 150mm from the doorframe. Light switches
installed in partitions or doorframes are to be of the type designed for that purpose.
Where several switches are required in one position, multi-lever switches in a

common switch box are to be provided wherever possible. All circuits wired into this
box must be on the same phase, in order that voltages in excess of 250V are not
present in the box. Where it is not possible or practical to do this, barriers must be
installed and a label prominently displayed within the box, stating that different
circuits are present, and that voltages in excess of 250V are possible.
Outlet boxes are not to be recessed more than 20mm from the finished wall surface.
15.2.18 Automatic Switching Devices

15.2.18.1 Time Switches
Time switches are to be of single-pole type, suitable for 230V systems,
with contacts rated for the duty to be performed with a minimum rating
of 15A. Contacts are to be of high quality material, e.g. silver-plated or
solid silver.
The clock is to be an electronic quartz clock with a rechargeable battery

for a minimum of 24 hours reserve in case of mains failure.
The time switch is to have, in addition to a weekend program, a 24 hour

setting, with day and night indication that can be set to switch in 15
minutes steps.
The time switch is to be mounted in the distribution board where it is

easily accessible and simple to adjust. An external manual bypass switch
must be provided to permit the circuit to be switched "ON" or "OFF"
manually without affecting the operation of the time switch.
15.2.18.2 Photo-Electronic Daylight Sensitive Switch

The unit is to comprise a light sensitive photo cell, factory pre-set
operating level with "ON" at a light level of approximately 54lux and
"OFF" at approximately 108lux. A time delay of no less than 15 seconds
must be provided to prevent the unit from functioning due to short
period changes in illumination. The unit must be effectively safeguarded
against voltage surges by means of a suitable surge protector, which must
preferably form an integral part of the unit.

PAGE
146
The unit is to be of the wall mounting or panel type and be fitted into an
approved polycarbonate bulkhead fitting, complete with a suitable
bracket.
The cover of the unit is to be manufactured from a tough, durable

material providing protection against tampering. The cover is to have
good weathering properties. It is to be ultraviolet-resistant and not to
deteriorate when exposed to sunlight for prolonged periods.
The positions of the switches as indicated on the drawings are provisional

and the exact positions are to be confirmed with the Architect on site.
Individual outside lighting circuits on a building may be connected

directly to the daylight sensitive switch. Where two or more lighting
circuits are to be controlled by a single daylight sensitive switch, a
contactor actuated by the unit is to be provided in the switchboard,
unless the rating of the daylight sensitive switch allows it. A by-pass
switch enabling the lights to be turned on at any time must be provided.
15.2.19 Distribution Boards

15.2.19.1 Flush Mounted Distribution Boards
(I) Bonding Tray
The rust-proofed bonding tray is to be rigidly constructed from 1,6mm
sheet steel with bracing gussets welded in the four corners. Space,
mounting brackets and fixings must be provided on each board for a 20%
increase in switchgear. Knockouts are to be provided in the upper and
lower sides of the distribution boards. Only copper earth bars or studs
are acceptable and these must be brazed onto the metalwork of the tray
and treated with anti-corrosion application to avoid future electrolytic
corrosion.
(ii) Architrave Frame

The architrave frame is to be constructed from 1,6mm sheet steel with
bevelled edges. The architrave frame is to form a 25mm border around
the bonding tray and to be fixed to the tray in such a manner as to allow
for depth adjustment due to the irregularities of the wall finishes.
(iii) Doors
Doors are to be constructed from 1,2mm sheet steel, have a smooth flat
finish and be recessed flush in the architrave frame. The width of the
single doors may not exceed 0,6m. Door catches are to be chromium
plated brass and mounted flush in the door.

PAGE
147
Title charts with numbers and functions of the circuits typed on them is to
be covered by 1mm acrylic plastic sheet in the slots fixed to the inside of
the doors.
(iv) Chassis
A reinforced chassis is to be fixed to the architrave frame and to be
equipped with mounting clips or brackets for the fixing of the switchgear.
A distance of 100mm (or more, depending on the cable size) must be
allowed between rows of equipment and care must be taken to allow
enough space for the termination of the incoming cable to the main
isolator.
(v) Gland Plate

A gland plate is to be provided underneath the main switch, so that the
incoming armoured cable can be terminated inside the distribution board.
(vi) Front Panels

Front panels are to be constructed from 1,6mm sheet steel, with machine
punched slots to allow for the flush mounting of circuit breakers and
isolators. Panels are to be fixed to the architrave frames by means of
knurled cheese headed machine screws so that a clearance of 40mm is
maintained between the panels and the doors.
When installing motor starters with overload protection in distribution

boards, provision must be made for resetting the overload trip buttons
without having to remove the panels. A flush mounted reset button must
be provided in the panel if the contactor does not contain one.
Screwed-on engraved PVC labels are to be provided under all the cut-
outs in the panel with all the equipment clearly marked to indicate the
number of the circuit and its function. Names of distribution boards must
be on label strips at the top of the panel. Label strips are to be made
from black celeron with 6mm white engraved letters.
(vii) Busbars
Busbars are to consist of solid copper with adequate cross-section for
each phase and to be mounted on suitable insulators. Busbars are to be
drilled and tapped for 7mm diameter chromium plated steel bolts, which
must be screwed in from the back and soldered to prevent them from
coming loose. Washers, spring washers and hexagon nuts are to be
supplied for each bolt. An approved method is to be used to mark the
live busbars with the appropriate phase colours.

PAGE
148
Each distribution board is to be provided with neutral and earth bars of

solid brass. Each busbar must be supplied with one bigger terminal for
the feeder cable.
(viii) Wiring
Wiring is to be carried out in front of the chassis and the conductors are
to be bound together with cable clips in neat vertical and horizontal
looms. PVC insulated conductors with sizes to suit the relevant
switchgear are to be used. The ends of the wires connected to busbars
are to be provided with suitable crimping lugs, firmly crimped, and the
ends of the wires connected to clamps of miniature circuit breakers are to
be turned together firmly, before they are inserted into the terminals.
Continuous circuit breaker busbars (100A standard copper) are to be used

to join the common line side circuit breaker terminals.
Bunched conductors are to be neatly formed to present a uniform

appearance without twisting or crossing the conductors. Conductors
leaving the harnesses are to be so arranged that they are adjacent to the
chassis.
Conductors to hinged panels and doors are to be secured on both the

door and the frame and to be looped between the two points. The loop
is to be arranged to produce a twisting motion when the door is opened
or closed. A flexible protection sleeve is to be installed over the
conductors.
Where wiring channels are used, they are to be installed horizontally and
vertically. Under no circumstances may power and control circuit wiring
be installed in the same wiring channel. Channels may not be more than
40% full.
Grommets are to be installed in each hole in the metalwork through

which conductors pass.
The colour of the conductors for all 240V circuits is to correspond to the
colour of the supply phase for that circuit. Neutral conductors must be
black. All other conductors in the board, supplying control circuits, etc. be
coded in colours other than those specified above. A colour code is to be
devised for each board and the colour code to be shown on the wiring
diagrams.
All conductors that terminate at wiring terminals and all conductors used
for the internal wiring of the switchboard are further to be identified at
both ends by means of durable cable marking ferrules. PVC or other tape
PAGE
149
is not acceptable. The number on the markings must be shown on the

wiring diagrams.
(ix) Expanded Metal

Where switchboards are to be built into 115mm thick walls, expanded
metal is to be spot welded to the rear of the bonding trays. The expanded
metal is to protrude at least 75mm on each tray side to prevent the
plaster from cracking.
15.2.19.2 Surface Mounted Distribution Boards

These boards are to comply with the specification for flush mounted
distribution boards, except that architrave frames and bonding trays are
not required. The surface mounted box is to be supplied, manufactured
from 1,6mm corrosion resistant sheet steel with knockouts at the top and
bottom for conduit entries. The distribution boards are to have a neat
square finish without flanges or other projections. Knockouts are not to
be provided if the surface mounted distribution boards are specified to be
splash proof.
The steel reinforced tray is to be suitably braced and stiffened to carry the
chassis, door and equipment. Lugs to secure the switchboard to a vertical
surface are to be provided.
15.2.19.3 Distribution Boards: General

(i) Mounting of Circuit Breakers
All moulded case circuit breakers are to be flush mounted with only the
toggles protruding. Miniature circuit breakers may be installed in clip-in
trays mounted on the frame. All other circuit breakers are to be bolted to
the chassis. Special provision is to be made for large main switches when
designing the framework. Care is to be exercised that the rear studs of
circuit breakers are properly insulated from the steel chassis.
(ii) Instrumentation
All metering instruments are to be flush mounted in the front panel or
door. The rear terminals of instruments mounted on doors are to be
covered with an insulating material to prevent accidental contact. Current
transformers for metering are to be mounted so that the rating plate is
clearly visible. Fuses for instrumentation are to be mounted in an easily
accessible position and clearly marked.
(iii) Busbars
Busbars are to be manufactured of solid drawn high conductivity copper
with a rectangular cross-section in accordance with the international
approved standard.

PAGE
150
(iv) Finish
Welding joints and steel work are to be ground smooth and to be free
from blemishes.
Prior to painting, all metal parts are to be thoroughly cleaned of rust, mill
scale, grease and foreign matter to a continuous metallic finish.
Sand, shot blasting, or acid pickling and washing are to be employed for
this purpose.
Immediately after cleaning, all surfaces are to be covered by rust

inhibiting, tough, unbroken metal-phosphate film and then thoroughly
dried.
Within 48 hours after phosphating, a passivating layer consisting of a high

quality zinc chromate primer is to be applied, followed by two coats of
high quality alkyd-based baked enamel.
Other metal parts e.g. switchboard panels, etc., are to have a minimum
paint thickness after painting of 0,06mm. In coastal areas, the dry film
thickness shall be increased to at least 0,1mm.
(v) Labelling
Care is to be taken to ensure that all equipment is fully labelled and that
accurate descriptions and safety warning notices appear in English or the
official local language.
Engraving plastic or ivory sandwiched strips are to be used throughout.

The strips are to bear white lettering on a black background for normal
labels and red lettering on a white or yellow background for danger
notices.
The following guidelines apply to determine the type and size of label:
(a) On the main distribution and sub-distribution boards, and on
busbar sections, the lettering is to be at least 10mm high and the
labels are to be fixed on the outside in a prominent position.
(b) For the labelling of switchgear, including circuit breakers, isolators,

contactors, etc., the lettering is to be at least 5mm high and the
labels are to be fixed on the front panel of the distribution board.
(c) All other equipment, including meters, instruments, indicator lights,

switches, push buttons, circuit breakers, fuses, contactors, control
relays, protection relays, etc., are to be identified. The function of

PAGE
151
the equipment is to be labelled as such and the Main Isolator

designated: "SWITCH OFF IN CASE OF EMERGENCY".
(d) Flush mounted equipment within doors or front panels is to be

identified with labels fixed to the doors or front panels respectively.
The labels for equipment installed behind panels are to be fixed to
the chassis close to the equipment. If this equipment is positioned
too close together to accommodate descriptive engraved labels, the
equipment may be identified by a code or number on an engraved
label, which must be fixed close to the equipment. The code
number is to be identified on a legend card, which is to be installed
on the switchboard behind a plastic or other protective cover.
(e) The circuit numbers are to appear at grouped single-pole circuit

breakers. The circuit numbers are to correspond to the circuit
numbers on the final installation drawings. The above-mentioned
circuits are to be identified on a legend card, which is to be installed
on the inside of the switchboard door, or in any other position
where it can conveniently be observed.
(f) Labels are not to be fixed to components or trunking but to doors,

panels, chassis or other permanent structures of the switchboard.
(g) Engraved strips are to be secured to facilitate a neat alternative of

the designation of the labels. Sufficient fixing points are to be
provided to prevent labels from warping. Labels may be secured by
the use of brass bolts and nuts, self-tapping screws, slotted label
holders or pop-rivets.
(vi) Drawings for Approval

A set of three prints of the shop drawings for the switchboards is to be
submitted to the Architect for approval before the boards are
manufactured. The following information shall be presented:
(a) A complete wiring diagram of the equipment on the boards;
(b) A complete layout of the arrangement of the switchboards indicating

all equipment dimensions and the construction of the boards. The
position and method of fixing and sizes of busbars is to be shown;
(c) All labelling information in English on a separate sheet; and
(d) The make, catalogue number and capacity of all equipment such as
isolators, circuit- breakers, fuses, contactors, etc.

PAGE
152
The approval of drawings does not relieve the Contractor of his

responsibility to supply the switchboards according to the requirements
of this specification.
15.2.20 Kilowatt-Hour Meters

Unless specified to the contrary, kilowatt-hour meters are to be suitable for operation
on 250/400V, 50Hz systems and to have no creepage reading under voltage
fluctuation or no load.
The meter is to be of the digital type with recording memory capacity of up to 3

months.
The integrating period on maximum demand meters is to be 30 minutes, unless

specified to the contrary.
Kilowatt-hour meters are to be graded and calibrated for the specific application to
avoid the application of multiplication factors where possible. Where multiplication
factors are unavoidable, this is to be clearly indicated in unit form and not a
combination of several factors. Current transformer ratios must be incorporated in
the factor.
Facilities for a security seal are to be provided on the fixing screws of the cover.
15.2.21 Instantaneous and Maximum Demand Ammeters

Ammeters are to be manufactured to the international standard and to be totally
enclosed in robust insulated dust proof housings, suitable for flush mounting in a
vertical position.
The ammeter is to have 100mm2 dial with a clear scale showing the instantaneous
current value and maximum demand mean current value on the basis of a 15 minute
period, and is to be fitted with a residual pointer to indicate the maximum mean
current value during any period between manual resetting.
Ammeters are not to impose a burden exceeding three V.A. at the current
corresponding to full-scale deflection.
Current transformers are to be manufactured to the international standard and be

rated at 5VA and have a class "C" accuracy. The current transformers are to have a
short circuit time rating equal to that of the switchgear in which they are installed.
15.2.22 Voltmeters
Voltmeters are to be manufactured to the international standard. They are to be of
the moving iron, spring controlled pattern totally enclosed in robust insulated dust
proof housings, suitable for flush mounting in a vertical position.

PAGE
153
The voltmeters are to have 100mm2 dial scaled to suit the system voltage and having
a suppressed zero. The nominal voltage must be marked with a red line.
The voltmeters are to be protected by HRC cartridge fuses and housed in suitable
insulated fuse carriers with a panel-mounting base.
A rotary selector switch is to be provided to select the voltage between lines or

between any line and neutral. The switch must be clearly marked to indicate which
reading has been selected.
15.2.23 Current Transformers

Current transformers are to be of the ring type, compliant with and suitable for mains
frequency. They are to be foot mounting type, rather than busbar mounting.
For metering applications they are to be of the following class:

O-200A Class 1
200-600A Class 0,5
600A and above Class 0,2
For indication circuits, the current transformers are to be Class 5.
All current transformers are to be earthed through a removable link.
15.2.24 Isolators
This section covers switches suitable for panel mounting for use in power distribution
systems of 50Hz, 600V. Switches for motor isolation are included.
The switches are to be of the single- & triple- pole, on load, hand operated type.
The switches are to have a high-speed closing and opening feature.
The switches are to be suitably rated for the continuous carrying, making and
breaking of the rated current specified, as well as the through-fault current capacity
as specified.
To distinguish the switches from circuit breakers the operating handles are to have a
distinctive colour and/or the switch is to be clearly and indelibly labelled "ISOLATOR".
15.2.25 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

This clause covers single or multi-pole moulded case circuit breakers for use in power
distribution systems, suitable for panel mounting, for ratings up to 1000A, 600V,
50Hz.
The continuous current rating, trip rating and rupturing capacity are to be as
specified.
PAGE
154
The contacts are to be silver alloy and to close with a high pressure wiping action.
Where specified, the circuit breaker is to be capable of accommodating factory fitted

shunt trip or auxiliary contact units or similar equipment.
The operating handle is to provide clear indication of "ON", "OFF" and "TRIP"
positions.
The mechanism is to be of the TRIP-FREE type, preventing the unit from being held in
the ON position under overload conditions.
A single manufacturer must, as far as is practical, supply all moulded case circuit
breakers in a particular installation.
The incoming terminals of single pole miniature circuit breakers are to be suitable for
connection to a common busbar.
The circuit breaker is to have a rating plate indicating the current rating, voltage
rating and breaking capacity.
Extension type operating handles are to be provided for units of 600A rating and
above.
15.2.26 Earth Leakage Relays

Earth leakage relays are to be single- or three-phase units with a sensitivity of 30mA,
with an associated circuit breaker or, alternatively, an on-load switch, for use on 250V
single phase or 400V three phase, 50Hz supplies.
The units are to be suitable for installation in switchboards in clip-in trays or bolted to
the chassis.
On-load switches used integrally with earth leakage units (two pole for single-phase
units and three pole for three phase units) are to comply with the international
standard.
15.2.27 Contactors
Contactors are to be of the open or totally enclosed, triple or double pole,
electromechanical operated, on load, air-break type suitable for 400V or 250V
supplies.
Contactors are to have the following characteristics:

(a) Enclosed coil, easily replaceable;
(b) A permanent air gap in the magnetic circuit to prevent sticky operation;
(c) Provision for quick and simple inspection of contacts; and
PAGE
155
(d) Clearly marked main and auxiliary terminals;
All parts must be accessible from the front.
Contactors that are not located in switchboards are to be housed in enclosures that
comply with IP 54 of IEC 144 (international standard).
The current rating of the contactors is to be as specified for the circuit with a
switching duty in accordance with the manufactures data plate, utilisation category
ACI for lighting and power circuits and utilisation category AC3 for motor starting.
In addition to the required current carrying capacity and switching duty of a

contactor, the contactor chosen for a particular application is to be rated for the
maximum through fault current allowed by the back-up protection devices at the
point where the contactor is installed. Careful co-ordination of short circuit devices
must take place.
All laminations of the magnetic system of the contactor are to be tightly clamped.
Noisy contactors will not be accepted.
Non-current-carrying metallic parts are to be solidly interconnected and a common

screwed earth terminal is to be provided. The contactor is to be earthed to the
switchboard earth bar.
Latched contactors are to be provided with a trip coil and a closing coil. The
contactor is to remain closed after de-energising the closing coil and shall only trip
on energising the trip coil.
15.2.28 Mounting Heights of Switches, Socket Outlets, Distribution Boards, etc.

Mounting heights are to be as indicated on drawings. Where outlets or wiring trays
must be built into face brick walls, the heights must be adjusted to the nearest joint
in the face brick layers.
15.2.29 Light Fittings

15.2.29.1 Fluorescent Light Fittings
A fluorescent lighting fitting is to consist of a ventilated wiring channel
manufactured with all sharp ends eliminated. The wiring channel must
contain the heat resistant wiring, the ballast and the lamp holders
securely fixed to the wiring channel to ensure positive contact with the
lamp terminals. It must be possible to remove all equipment from the
fitting without taking down the housing.
The ballast must be a totally enclosed electronic unit (similar or equal to

Econolite or Osram) and must have an efficiency of at least 95% and
corrected power factor of 0,98 lagging. The ballast is to be designed for
PAGE
156
silent operation with filters for interference. No visible flicker of light may
be apparent and no dark and bright zones may occur anywhere along the
length of the lamps.
Light fittings be complete with lamps, of which the colour will be specified
elsewhere.
The finish is to be in white baked enamel. All fluorescent fittings with

equipment and accessories are to comply with the international approved
standards.
15.2.29.2 Bulkhead Compact Fluorescent Fittings

Internal wiring must be carried out in high temperature silicone covered
copper conductors and the control gear must be similar as described for
fluorescent light fittings above.
Clear polycarbonate diffusers are to be used and each lamp is to be fitted

with separate control gear and to comply with the international standards
operating voltage 250V minimum.
15.2.30 Installation of Light Fittings

The mounting positions of luminaries are to be verified on site. All luminaries are to
be placed symmetrically with respect to ceiling panels, battens, beams, columns or
other architectural features of the space, unless otherwise indicated. The layout as
shown in the documents must generally be adhered to, but any discrepancies or
clashes with structural or other features must be referred to the Architect before
commencing erection of the installation.
Cover plates are to be fitted over all draw boxes and outlets intended for luminaries
that are not covered by the luminaries’ canopy, lamp holder, ceiling rose or similar
accessories.
Where an outlet box or draw box provides the necessary support for luminaries, all
luminaries, with the exception of fluorescent luminaries mounted against ceilings, are
to be fixed directly to the box. Fluorescent luminaries and luminaries with a mass in
excess of 10kg are to be suspended independently of the outlet box.
Where wooden blocks are used to suspend luminaries, ceiling battens may not be
cut. The wooden blocks are to be cut to fit around battens and shall be screwed to
the ceiling.
Only self-tapping or similar screws are to be used to suspend fluorescent fittings from
the wooden bearers.

PAGE
157
Luminaries (especially fluorescent luminaries) may also be suspended from ceilings by

means of suspended metal channels. The metal channel may be supported by
conduits, steel cabling or threaded rods. Should metal rods be utilised, these are to
be screwed to anchor bolts fixed in the roof slab or bolted to purlins and tie beams as
applicable. Wiring must either be installed in conduits fixed to the metal channel, or
in the metal channels and covered with a suitable cover plate. Purpose-made clamps
or spring nuts are to be used to fix the luminaries to the cable channel.
The necessary hangers are to be provided where luminaries of the non-suspension

type have to be fixed below false ceilings or roof slabs. The use of 20mm conduits
fixed to the roof slab or ceiling is preferred. Provision must be made for adjustments
to enable the levelling of luminaries. Suspended conduits are to be fixed to the
ceiling by means of screwed dome lids, bolts and nuts. Ball-and-spigot type dome
lids are to be used where conduit lengths exceed 600mm. Wiring is to be installed in
the conduit hangers.
Where provision has not been made for the fixing of luminaries, the Engineer must
approve conduit extensions or angle brackets or any other fixing method.
In the case of tiled ceilings with exposed or concealed T-section supports, surface
mounted luminaries are to be fixed only to the “T” by means of course thread self-
tapping screws. Luminaries may, alternatively, be fixed to metal crosspieces resting in
the ceiling tees.
Drilling of holes in ceiling tees to support luminaries is not allowed. Luminaries are to
be fixed in neat relation to the ceiling layout.
In all false ceilings where wiring channels are used, recessed luminaries are to be
connected to the wiring channels by means of unswitched 5A socket outlets.
The following requirements shall be adhered to:

(a) Socket outlets used are to be of 5A minimum rating;
(b) The connector cord attached to the luminaries may not exceed 3m in length and
is to consist of 1,5mm2 minimum, 3 core PVC insulated flexible cord;
(c) The 5A socket outlets are to be positioned so that they are not more than
600mm above the false ceiling.
Connections of the heavy brass terminal type in porcelain insulators are to be

employed to make joints between the wiring of the fittings and the general wiring.
PVC insulated conductors, unless protected by an approved heat-resistant sheathing,
may not be used where the temperature of the insulation is likely to exceed 70 oC. In
unventilated luminaries, or luminaries capable of housing incandescent lamps over
60W, the interconnecting wiring from the lamp holder to the circuit wiring is to
consist of silicon-rubber insulated conductors.

PAGE
158
High bay luminaries are to be securely suspended from the roof structure. The
luminaries may be fixed to suspended wiring channels, containing the wiring, on
condition that:
(a) Rigid channels with a width of 42mm will be used; and

(b) The channels are supported at intervals that will prevent sag or warp.
15.2.31 Connections to Equipment

15.2.31.1 Connections to Outlets
Connections to the wiring of light fittings or other appliances, where
connectors are used, are to be affected by means of connectors of the
heavy brass terminal type in porcelain insulators or the insulated steel
spring type. No other type of connector will be accepted.
15.2.31.2 Connections to Hot Water Cylinders

The Contractor is to liaise with the Main Contractor to establish the type
of hot water cylinders that will be supplied, as well as their positions, to
enable the Contractor to determine draw box positions local to the hot
water cylinders.
Each water heater is to be connected to a separate circuit with a separate

green PVC insulated earth conductor.
The conduit from the switchboard to the water heater is to terminate in a

draw box within 1m of the water heater terminals. The connection from
the draw box must take the form of conductors in conduit or PVC
insulated cable. Only in instances where heaters are mounted out of
normal reach may flexible conduit and round boxes with dome lids be
used for the final connection.
Before testing a water heater, the Contractor is to confirm with the

Plumbing Contractor that the unit is filled with water.
Unless otherwise specified, the wiring of water heater circuits of loading

not exceeding 4kW are to consist on 4mm2 conductors and 2,5mm2 earth
conductor.
Unless it is specified that isolators for water heaters are to be provided in

the switchboard, a local isolator is to be provided for each water heater.
In the case of water heaters not exceeding 4kW, a 50A double pole metal-
clad isolator is to be surface mounted over the flush conduit outlet box.
15.2.31.3 Connections to Cooking Appliances

Unless specified to the contrary, the circuit to a cooking appliance of 3kW
or less is to consist of:
PAGE
159
(a) 2 x 10mm2 PVC insulated conductors and 6mm2 bare copper earth
conductor for single phase; or
(b) 4 x 4mm2 PVC insulted conductors and 2,5mm2 bare copper earth
conductor for three phase connections.
A 60A double pole or 30A triple pole micro gap isolator flush mounted in
a wall outlet box is to be installed 1,4m above floor level to the left or
right of the appliance. A white baked enamel cover plate is to be
provided on the finished surface as applicable.
25mm diameter conduit is to be installed from the isolator to terminate

450mm above floor level behind the appliance position. The conduit end
is to be approximately 75mm long and must face downwards. Sufficient
slack is to be provided in the flexible connection to move the appliance
600mm away from its normal position for cleaning or maintenance.
Alternatively the 25mm diameter conduit from the isolator is to terminate

in a round outlet box 450mm above floor level a 45A 3 pin single-phase
or 5 pin three-phase socket outlet is to be mounted on the round draw
box. The connection to the appliance is to consist of a plug and 10mm²
rubber insulated and sheathed cable. The cable is to be long enough to
enable the appliance to be moved 600mm from its normal position for
cleaning or maintenance. Each appliance is to be connected to a separate
circuit. A separate earth wire is to be provided for each appliance.
Crimped or soldered lugs are to be provided on all conductors intended

for connection to cooking appliances.
15.2.32 Balancing of Load

As the work progresses, and on completion, the Contractor is to balance the load
across the three phases, where applicable.
15.2.33 Earthing
15.2.33.1 General
The whole of the completed installation is to be effectively and efficiently
earthed in accordance with the requirements of the Local Supply
Authority.
In his price, the Contractor must allow for copper bonding straps, wiring
and the proper bonding of the whole installation, including the bonding
of the sheeting, down pipes, gutters, etc., where applicable. Only brass
bolts, nuts and washers may be used.

PAGE
160
15.2.33.2 Main Earth

The main earth is to be installed in accordance with the requirements of
the Local Supply Authority and must be to their approval and satisfaction.
The resistance to earth may not exceed 2 Ohms.
Single- & three- phase supplies up to 80A are to consist of a 10mm2 bare
copper conductor (BCEC), to be installed with the service connection
cable up to the point of supply, where it must be connected to the main
earth bar. Copper coated earth spikes must be installed to reach the
equivalent earthing value as prescribed above.
For large consumer applications above 100A, the BCEC should be as

specified in the detailed specification or as shown on the schematic line
diagrams, and could vary from earth spikes to earth mats, as applicable.
15.2.33.3 Low Tension System

Where sub-distribution boards are fed by means of PVC conductors
drawn in conduit, a separate bare copper conductor is to be taken from
each board to the main distribution board, drawn in conduit together
with the PVC conductors. The sizes of the earth conductors must be in
accordance with the enclosed table.
Where armoured cable is used, an earth conductor is to be installed with

the armoured cable. If green PVC insulated conductors are available in the
specified earth conductor sizes, it must be installed in preference to bare
copper conductors.
All 16Amp socket outlets, fluorescent and mercury vapour light fittings,
fixed heater and hot water cylinders shall be earthed by means of 2,5mm²
green PVC insulated copper conductors.
All lighting switch outlet boxes, fluorescent fittings, etc. are to be

provided with an earth stud, to which the earth wire lugs are to be bolted.
The earth conductor of every circuit is to be taken from the earth bar of
the distribution board and to be looped at each outlet, without breaking
the conductor, up to the last outlet on the circuit. At each outlet, the
earth wire is to be folded and a cable lug to be crimped onto the folded
end. The crimping lug is then to be bolted to the above-mentioned earth
stud of the lighting fitting or outlet box. All connections, locknuts,
busbars, etc. are to be securely tightened and the Contractor is to test the
installation to ensure that the resistance of the earth path does not
exceed the prescribed value.

PAGE
161
15.2.33.4 Buildings
All metal hot and cold water pipes and waste pipes are to be
interconnected by means of 12,4mm x 1,5mm solid tapes, which are to be
clamped with brass bolts and nuts. The tapes are to be fixed to the walls
by means of brass screws at intervals not exceeding 230mm. Earth clips
are to be manufactured from 1,0mm copper tape, which must be at least
12,5mm wide and supplied complete with 25mm x 5mm diameter brass
bolts, washers and nuts.
Water earthing must consist of a 10mm2 copper wire connected from the
distribution board to the nearest water pipe in the roof area.
Iron roofs, gutters, down pipes etc. are to be interconnected in the same
way. Iron roofs are to be connected at intervals not exceeding 15m by
means of a 10mm² bare copper wire. The common earth conductor is to
be installed under the roof, over its full length and to be firmly fixed to
the upper purlins. It is to be bonded to the main earth conductor of all
distribution boards.
15.2.34 Power Factor Correction Equipment

Not applicable.
15.2.35 Telephone/Data Installation

15.2.35.1 General Requirements
Cables or conductors for telephone services are to be separated from all
other services by:
(a) providing separate metal channels or conduits;
(b) installing power cables, conductors and accessories at a minimum
distance of 300mm from routes reserved for telephone cables; or
(c) an earthed metal barrier, installed in such a manner to ensure that
the minimum distance through free air space between the telephone
cables and other services is at least 300mm.
In cases where high voltage cable runs are parallel to telephone cable
runs for long runs, the correct spacing is to be determined by conferring
with Telkom (South Africa) or the local telephone supply authority.
Conduits or wiring channels provided for telephone services may not be

used for any other purposes. Where non-metallic channels are used, the
separation stated elsewhere is to be maintained throughout the
installation.
15.2.35.2 Main Telephone Distribution Board

The size and position of the main telephone distribution board, where
required, is to be in accordance with the drawings. The board is to
PAGE
162
consist of a metal tray, architrave frame and hinged doors, and is to be

flush mounted in the position shown on the drawing(s).
A 20mm thick soft wooden panel (fine grade pine without knots) is to be
installed in the main telephone distribution board and cover the entire
inside back of the board. Chipboard or similar materials are not
acceptable.
All conduits and sleeves to telephone outlets or sub distribution boards in

the buildings or on the site, as well as the main incoming sleeves, are to
shall terminate at the main telephone distribution board as indicated on
the drawing(s).
15.2.35.3 Telephone Outlets

Telephone outlets in walls are to consist of flush mounted 100mm x
100mm x 50mm draw boxes. Blank cover plates are to be fitted to all
telephone outlets.
Telephone outlets are to be interconnected and connected to the

telephone distribution boards as shown on the drawings.
All conduits and all ducts or channels are to be provided with galvanised
steel draw wires.
Metal channels or power skirting installed on the same floor level on

opposite walls of the same area, as well as parallel runs of under floor
ducting intended for the installation of telephone cables, are to be
interconnected at intervals of 6m. Conduit may be used for these
interconnections.
15.2.36 Painting and Finishes

All painted material is to be stored on site in such a manner that the paint work is not
damaged, and the Contractor shall be held responsible for the good condition of
both interior paint work of equipment, on erection.
On completion of the Contract, any damage that may have been done to plaster
work, ceilings, floors, woodwork, etc., in the execution of the Electrical Contract, is to
be rectified and made good by the Contractor at his own expense and to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
15.2.37 Inspection
Once the Contractor has completed the installation, written notice is to be given to
the Engineer in order that a mutually acceptable date can be arranged for a joint
inspection. During the course of the inspection, the Engineer or his representative
will compile a list of items (if any) requiring further attention. A copy of this list will
PAGE
163
be provided to the Contractor who will have a period of 7 days in which to rectify the
offending items of the installation.
The Contractor is to test all circuits, in the presence of the Engineer or his
representative, with respect to:
(a) Phase balance;
(b) Insulation level; and
(c) Polarity.
15.2.38 Guarantee
The Sub Contractor is to guarantee to the Principal Contractor (who will pass same
onto the Landlord) all the material and workmanship pertaining to the electrical
installation and Specialist Sub Contractors of this Contract for a period of 12 months.
The guarantee is to be valid for the full period from the date when the Engineer has
accepted the installation in good working condition on the final hand-over date.
The only exclusion to the 12 months will be lamps of luminaries, which are to be
guaranteed for a period of 18 months, and the fluorescent ballasts for a period of 5
years.
The Client has the right to replace faulty equipment or rectify poor workmanship at
the Landlord's cost during the guarantee period, should the Landlord fail to effect the
corrective action within a period of 48hr of notification. The Client reserves the right
to deduct the actual cost of repairs from the rental.
15.2.39 Documented Records

Within a period of two months after the hand-over period, the Electrical Contractor
provides the Client, via the Landlord, a set of as-built drawings and diagrams of the
complete installation. These documents are to be accompanied with relevant
manufacturer’s diagrams and catalogue information of all the equipment supplied
and installed.
Should the Contractor fail to comply with the above, the Client will not submit the
certificate of completion, which will result in the withholding of the outstanding
retention funds.

PAGE
164
SECTION 15.3: STANDARD TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATION : TABLES

PAGE
165

PAGE
166

PAGE
167

PAGE
168

PAGE
169

PAGE
170

PAGE
171

PAGE
172
SECTION 16: MECHANICAL (REVISION – A)

Shoprite Checkers Stores are mechanically ventilated and air-conditioned.
Shoprite Checkers’ Mechanical Consultant will specify in which area of the supermarket the
above systems will be applicable.
Evaporative cooling will not be accepted as an air-conditioning solution, unless specifically

agreed upon by Shoprite Checkers.
The positioning of all openings in structural elements to suit the installation of air
conditioning ducts, cables, fans, etc. are to be confirmed with the Shoprite Checkers Architect
and Mechanical Consultant.
Mechanical services shall be unobtrusive and shall be properly coordinated with other
services. Design layouts shall be submitted to the Shoprite Checkers Architect and
Mechanical Consultant for comments and approval.
Outdoor condensing units, including refrigeration and condensate drain piping, shall be
located out of sight.
16.1 DESIGN CONDITIONS

16.1.1 Altitude
The project altitude shall be taken into account whilst considering the required
duties and capacity of the ventilation equipment and the air-conditioning
plant.
16.1.2 Ambient Design Conditions

Refer to the minimum and maximum outside ambient temperatures and
humidity for both summer and winter applicable to the area, in accordance
with CSIR Research Report 300 by E.N. van Deventer, for a probability level of
2,5%.
16.1.3 Noise Levels

The air-conditioning and ventilation installation shall be designed and installed
not to exceed the following noise levels:
(a) Trading and checkout arcade areas - NR 40

(b) Back-up service areas - NR 45
(c) Offices - NR 35

PAGE
173
The attenuation of sound generated from plant rooms shall be properly

attended to in accordance with and to the satisfaction of the Local Authority
requirements and an SRC consultant at the Owner/Developer’s cost.
16.2 AIR-CONDITIONING
The air-conditioning installation for the supermarkets is to operate independently of
the systems feeding the neighbouring tenants, and shall be designed and installed in
accordance with the requirements of Shoprite Checkers, SANS 10400 and the Local
Authority By-Laws.
16.2.1 Trading Area and Checkout Arcade

The trading area, checkout and entrance mall as well as service counters in the
checkout arcade area, shall be air-conditioned by means of a ducted Rooftop
Package type air-conditioning system, and the conditions in these areas shall
be maintained at 22,0ºC db and 50% RH (+/- 1,5ºC db and 5% RH) in summer
and winter at the outside design conditions applicable. The air-conditioning
system shall be designed and installed complete with the minimum fresh air
supply as required.
Ducted split type and ceiling cassette type systems will not be acceptable.
16.2.2 Scanning Offices

The Scanning Offices shall be air-conditioned by means of independent AC
systems that shall be able to operate for 24 hours a day. The conditions in
these rooms are to be maintained at 22,0ºC db and 50% RH (+/- 0,5ºC db and
5% RH) in summer and winter at the outside design conditions applicable.
The air-conditioning systems shall be designed and installed complete with
minimum fresh air supply as required.
16.2.3 Cash & Cash-Up Offices

The Cash & Cash-up offices shall be air-conditioned by means of an
independent AC system that shall be able to operate for 24 hours per day.
The conditions in these rooms shall be maintained at 22,0°C db and 50% RH
(±1,5°db and 5% RH) in summer and winter at the outside design conditions
applicable. The air-conditioning systems are to be designed and installed
complete with minimum fresh air supply required.
16.2.4 Receiving Office

The Receiving office shall be air-conditioned by means of an independent AC
system that shall be able to operate for 24 hours per day. The conditions in
these rooms shall be maintained at 22,0°C db and 50% RH (±1,5°db and 5%
RH) in summer and winter at the outside design conditions applicable. The
air-conditioning systems are to be designed and installed complete with
minimum fresh air supply required.

PAGE
174
The Bulk Store Air-Conditioning remote control panels shall be installed inside
this office and the position of the panels coordinated with shelving etc.
16.2.5 Admin Manager’s Office

The Admin Manager’s shall be air-conditioned by means of an independent
AC system that shall be able to operate for 24 hours per day. The conditions
in these rooms shall be maintained at 22,0°C db and 50% RH (±1,5°db and 5%
RH) in summer and winter at the outside design conditions applicable. The
air-conditioning systems are to be designed and installed complete with
minimum fresh air supply required.
The Trading Air-Conditioning as well as the Smoke Ventilation remote control

panels shall be installed inside this office and the position of the panels
coordinated with the smoke detection/fire panel.
16.2.6 Staff Canteen & Training Rooms

The Staff Canteen and Training Rooms shall be air-conditioned by means of
independent AC systems that shall be able to operate for 24 hours a day. The
conditions in these rooms are to be maintained at 22,0ºC db and 50% RH (+/-
0,5ºC db and 5% RH) in summer and winter at the outside design conditions
applicable. The air-conditioning systems shall be designed and installed
complete with minimum fresh air supply as required.
16.2.7 Dispensary
The Dispensary, including the office and Consultation Area shall be air-
conditioned by means of an independent AC system that shall be able to
operate for 24 hours per day. The conditions in these rooms shall be
maintained at 22,0°C db and 50% RH (±1,5°db and 5% RH) in summer and
winter at the outside design conditions applicable. The air-conditioning
systems are to be designed and installed complete with minimum fresh air
supply as required.
16.2.8 Bulk Store

Air-conditioning to bulk stores do not apply to all stores, but only in certain
geographical areas. It will be confirmed by Shoprite Checkers management
when heads of agreement is negotiated. If the Bulk Store is not air-
conditioned, Section 16.3.2 will apply.
The Bulk Store shall be air-conditioned by means of a ducted Rooftop Package

type air-conditioning system, and the conditions in these areas shall be
maintained at 25,0ºC db and 50% RH (+/-1,5ºC db and 5% RH) in summer and
winter at the outside design conditions applicable. The air-conditioning
system shall be designed and installed complete with the minimum fresh air
supply as required.

PAGE
175
Ducted split type and ceiling cassette type systems will not be acceptable.
16.3 VENTILATION
16.3.1 Back-Up Service Areas
The back-up service areas (bulk store, softs store, returns store, staff toilets
and change rooms, butchery, sausage prep, bakery, flour store, dry store, fish
prep, fruit and veg prep, refuse room, deli, night drop, security office, receiving
areas, dispensary kitchenette and toilet etc.) shall be mechanically ventilated.
These areas shall be supplied with fresh air and/or extract air, in accordance
with the requirements of SANS 10400 & SANS ‘1850 Kitchen Extract Canopy
Systems’.
16.3.2 Bulk Store

The Bulk Store shall be mechanically ventilated by means of suitably located
individual extract fans. A ducted extract system is not acceptable. Unless the
bulk store is Air-Conditioned then Section 16.2.7 will apply – tbc by Shoprite
Leasing Agent.
16.3.3 Exhaust Canopy Systems

Exhaust canopy systems including make-up air systems are to be designed and
installed, where required, in all service departments, where applicable.
Stainless steel exhaust canopies will be provided in the following

areas/sections of the supermarket, but not limited to:
Bakery
Ovens canopy: stainless steel exhaust canopy complete with stainless
steel baffle filters, and two rigid aluminium flexible ducts
(per oven) from the flue discharge of the oven to the
back of the extract canopy.
Deck Oven canopy: stainless steel exhaust canopy complete with stainless
steel baffle filters, and two rigid aluminium flexible ducts
(per oven) from the flue discharge of the oven to the
back of the extract canopy.
Doughnut fryer: stainless steel canopy complete with stainless steel

baffle filters.
Stove: stainless steel canopy complete with stainless steel

baffle filters. If the Stove is only used for heating and
not cooking by means of oil or grilling then the stainless
steel canopy will not be a required, unless called for by
the local authority.

PAGE
176
Deli
Chicken grillers, etc. canopy: stainless steel exhaust canopy complete with stainless
steel baffle filters.
Deli Prep and Service Lane

Grillers, fryers, etc. canopy: stainless steel exhaust canopy complete with stainless
Fish Prep
Fish/chips fryers, etc. canopy: stainless steel exhaust canopy complete with stainless
Pasta Prep
Pasta cookers, etc. canopy: stainless steel exhaust canopy complete with stainless
The canopies shall be of Halton or Cyclovent AMMS Manufacture

The extract canopies, duct plenums and visible spigots shall be manufactured from stainless
steel sheet steel. All the external and visible sections and canopies shall be constructed of
material of a minimum thickness 0,9mm or 1,2mm if the length of the canopy exceeds 3m.
The grade of stainless steel to be used shall be 304 brush finish. All internal exhaust plenums,
filter holding frames, etc. on the inside of the canopies must be finished in 0,9mm thick brush
finish grade 304 stainless steel. All the discharge plenums and spigots shall also be finished
finish in 0,9mm thick 304 stainless steel.
The extract canopies shall be complete with Halton or ‘Cycloclean’ baffle type stainless steel
grease filter sets, which shall include stainless steel, filter holding frames and drip trays.
Baffle filters comprise a number of interlocking vanes which, when assembled, form a two-
pass grease removal device. The pressure drop remains constant and the blades provide a
barrier in the event of a flash fire. Baffle filters should be fabricated entirely from stainless
steel. The canopies shall have a discharge plenum and a drip gutter all around and two off
plugged drains for washing purposes. The canopies are to be installed complete with the
necessary stainless steel spigots, steel hangers, steel supports, flashing plates and shall be
neatly sealed against the walls and against each other where installed back to back or next to
each other to form one canopy. The canopies shall be fitted with recessed vapour-proof
fluorescent light fittings (Illumination of 600lux).
If an island canopy is required for an island Deli, the extract canopy shall be of the box type
(island mounted) and shall be installed back to back or next to each other to form one single
canopy and shall be complete with make-up air.
The stainless steel extract canopy over the front side of the bakery oven shall be of the box
type and shall be installed at high level over the front side of the oven. The canopy shall be
complete with brushed grade 304 stainless steel baffle plate type filters. The canopies shall be

PAGE
177
neatly flashed and neatly sealed against the oven. All discharge points (two per oven
typically) on top of the oven shall be connected to the back (exhaust plenum) of the canopy
by means of rigid aluminium flexible ducting and matching stainless steel spigots.
All extract and make up air systems shall be interlocked and connected to the Checkers key
switch. All extract canopy systems and make-up air systems, to switch ‘on’ in the morning
when the store is opened by the store manager and switched ‘off’ when the store is closed
and night. No local controls inside the departments will be allowed.
The extract canopy systems and make up air systems will be interlocked with the smoke
detection system, to switch off on a double knock smoke or fire signal.
Care shall be taken with the location of the make-up air supply grilles so as not to affect
service below.
All extract canopies shall be fitted with a fire suppression system that is designed to suppress
fires and complies with an acceptable standards.
NOTE : Acceptable standards are ISO, EN, BS, NFPA, UL, FM and SANS standards.
16.3.4 Air Curtains

Air Curtains shall be allowed for at the front doors of the store as well as at the
Butchery Loading Yard door.
Air Curtains to the front doors of the store shall not be a requirement in a
‘closed mall’ arrangement.
Air curtains shall operate automatically and shall be switched with the store
‘key switch”.
16.3.5 Fire Smoke Extract Ventilation Systems

The Trading Area shall be served by means of an automatic smoke extract
system complete with make-up air openings. The system shall comply with EN
12101 and SANS 10400.
The Bulk Store (if exceeding 500sqm) shall be served by means of an

automatic smoke extract system complete with make-up air openings. The
system shall comply with EN 12101 and SANS 10400.
The smoke ventilation systems shall be interfaced with a double knock smoke
detection system and shall operate automatically.
Vertical penetrations through side cladding shall take preference over roof
penetrations.

PAGE
178
16.4 ELECTRICAL WORK AND CONTROL

The Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Contract includes the supply and installation of
all the main air-conditioning and ventilation distribution boards, sub-boards, remote
control panels and the wiring from these boards, control panels, local isolators and
socket outlets to the relevant equipment.
All the electrical distribution boards, electrical equipment and cables related to the
air-conditioning and ventilation installation shall be adequately sized to withstand the
design electrical fault level and shall incorporate all the necessary phase failure and
voltage fluctuation protection.
The main AC system’s electrical and control circuits shall incorporate all the necessary
relays for the interface with the smoke detection system.
On completion of the installation, the Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Contractor

shall provide a Certificate of Compliance for the electrical portion of the installation.
16.5 COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE

The Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Contractor is responsible for the overall testing,
balancing and commissioning of all the systems.
The air-conditioning and ventilation installations shall be guaranteed for a period of

twelve months. The twelve-month free maintenance and guarantee period on all the
systems, equipment, materials and workmanship shall commence on completion (at
Beneficial Occupation Handover). The Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Contractor
shall execute regular services (minimum of four services, two Major and two Minor)
during this period.
a) Three copies of the operating and maintenance (O & M) manuals, as well as a

CD or Soft Copy containing all the information in the O & M manuals, shall be
handed over to Shoprite Checkers on completion of the installation. The
manuals and CD are to be complete with the following:
b) The description of all the systems.
c) The operating instructions, maintenance instructions, faultfinding instructions
and maintenance schedules for all the systems.
d) The equipment brochures and manuals.
e) All the testing, air balancing and commissioning recordings and data. This
section shall be complete with the design and the actual recorded data.
f) The electrical and control wiring diagrams and the electrical compliance
certificate.
g) The as-built drawings.
h) A list of all the equipment and the major material suppliers complete with
contact details.

PAGE
179
i) A list with the contact names and numbers (for breakdowns and emergency
call outs).
16.6 WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT BY OTHERS

The following work does not form part of the Air-Conditioning and Ventilation
Installation Contract.
16.6.1 Builder’s Work

a) The provision of all the openings in slabs, walls, ceilings, bulkheads, roofs,
etc., and the making good (including the counter/back flashing and
waterproofing) after the installation of the systems.
b) The provision of concrete plinths, drain points and fresh water supply
points in the supermarket AC plant room, or where required.
c) The supply and installation of timber frames and wall sleeves in brick and
masonry openings, as required for the fixing of ducting, fans, equipment,
air diffusion equipment, etc. The AC and Ventilation Contractor is to
provide the timber frame and wall sleeve details.
d) The provision of access panels where required in the ceilings and the
bulkheads.
e) The provision of openings in doors and the installation of the door grilles,
where required. The AC and Ventilation Contractor is to supply the door
grilles.
f) The provision of water (where required) for commissioning and testing of
systems.
16.6.2 Electrical Work

Refer to Section 15: Electrical Installation.
a) The 3-phase electrical supply to the main air-conditioning and ventilation

distribution boards and connecting up to the main isolators.
b) The 3-phase/1-phase electrical supply to the equipment, as well as the
provision of the local isolators and/or socket outlets, where required, at all
the air-conditioning and ventilation equipment.
c) The provision of electrical power to the light fittings in the exhaust
canopies.
d) The provisions of on/off controls for the kitchen exhaust canopies
integrated with the store key switch to switch on and off.
e) The provision of temporary power and lighting required for the
installation, testing and commissioning of the systems.
f) The interface of the air-conditioning, ventilation, extract canopy systems,
make up air systems, smoke extract systems with the smoke detection
system.
g) The provision of emergency power supply to the air-conditioning,
ventilation & smoke ventilation equipment, where required.

PAGE
180
16.7 GENERAL INFORMATION

16.7.1 The following applies to Supermarkets with no Ceilings over the Trading
and the Checkout Arcade Areas
a) All the visible and exposed ducting over the trading and checkout arcade
areas shall be of the round spiral type and to be un-insulated and painted.
The use of rectangular ducting over these areas must be agreed upon and
approved by Shoprite Checkers.
b) No AC and ventilation equipment, ducting, spigot boxes, air diffusion
equipment, hangers, materials, etc. may be installed below 4,500mm from
the finished floor level inside the trading and checkout arcade areas.
c) If required by the prevailing ambient conditions (e.g. in humid areas)
suitable interval insulation of the closed cell type, shall be installed in the
supply air duct work.
16.7.2 The following General Conditions also apply

a) The main trading and checkout arcade area air-conditioning system shall
be controlled via balancing room temperature sensors and the system’s
internal controls. The AC system shall be switched from a remote control
panel in the manager’s office. The remote control panel shall be complete
with a selector switch for “Automatic/Manual” control as well as a selector
switch(es) for “Vent only/Cooling and Heating” control. The remote
control panel shall be complete with all the necessary pilot lights for the
indication of the system and the equipment (i.e. system, compressors,
fans, heater, etc.) operation and failure. The control circuit of the AC
system shall also include a 7-day/24 hour timer with 24 hour back up.
b) The supply and return air from the main trading area AC system shall be
positioned so as to prevent any interference with the operation of the cold
and refrigeration cabinets in the trading area.
c) The main air-conditioning ducting over the trading and checkout arcade
areas shall be complete with the necessary OBD type balancing dampers
(and airtight access panels) for the proper balancing of the air distribution
to these areas.
d) All the exposed and visible ducting, exhaust canopies, equipment, hangers
and supports, etc. inside the supermarket shall be painted according to
the Shoprite Checkers Architect’s color specification.
e) All the exposed and visible ducting, equipment, hangers and supports, etc.
on the outside of the supermarket shall be painted according to the
Project Architect’s color specification.
f) All the air diffusion equipment shall be of aluminium construction.
g) All areas that are air-conditioned or mechanically ventilated, or where
required, shall be provided with door grilles.
h) All external ducting carrying conditioned air (on the outside of the
building) is to be externally insulated with 50mm rigid pre-formed iso-
cynurate (PIC) sections with density of 32kg/m³and shall be finished with

PAGE
181
two coats of polyester resin reinforced with 300g fiberglass chopstrand

(applied by a specialist). This shall be sanded smooth and coated with a
resin rich topcoat pigmented to the final colour (colour to Shoprite
Checkers Architect colour specification).
i) All internal ducting carrying conditioned air (on the inside of the building)
and running inside ceiling or enclosed voids shall be externally lagged
with 25mm foil faced FRK fiberglass duct insulation.
j) All the equipment, ducting, materials, etc. shall be properly protected
against corrosion in all coastal and corrosive areas.
k) The air-conditioning and ventilation systems shall be co-ordinated with
the building structure and all the other building services applicable.
l) The AC and Ventilation Subcontractor shall prepare and provide all the
builders work details related to air-conditioning and ventilation
installation.

PAGE
182
SECTION 17: REFRIGERATION & (REVISION – A)

INSULATION: Builders Work
SECTION 17.1: REFRIGERATION

17.1.1 Description of Work
The refrigeration work is to be carried out by a Specialist Contractor, who will be
directly appointed by Shoprite Checkers. The installation is to allow for the successful
application and adherence to the Occupational Health and Safety Act No. 85 of 1993
throughout installation and the entire life of the plant.
The Refrigeration Contractor is responsible for off-loading on site. Lifting and fixing in
position of all the equipment required in completing the installation. The
Refrigeration Contractor will be responsible for the transport of equipment to site.
The developer is to provide adequate security to the construction site during
installation and should pay special attention to areas where copper piping has been
installed by the refrigeration contractor.
The supply of the refrigerated and non-refrigerated display cabinets will be a direct
contract between Shoprite Checkers and the Specialist Cabinet Supplier.
At the time of Beneficial Occupation of the Store by Shoprite Checkers (or shortly
thereafter), the refrigerated and non-refrigerated cabinets will be delivered to site. The
developer is to ensure that there is sufficient space such that the cabinets can be
delivered and moved into position on the trading floor. Where the store is part of a
larger development the developer is to ensure a path for delivery through any part of
the development leading to the store entrance. If the centre layout does not allow for
delivery then the developer must make provision for an alternative way into the store
for cabinets such as the breaking open of a wall. Openings through which cabinets are
to be moved are to have minimum dimensions of 2,5m x 2,5m. In general, the delivery
of refrigerated and non-refrigerated cabinets will take place in phases, over a period
of three days or more.
17.1.2 Plant Room Layout Requirements

The refrigeration plant is to be located in a dedicated closed plant room with
remotely mounted condensers in a separate well-ventilated open area and secure
from theft and vandalism. All measures to secure the plant room will be for the
developers/landlords cost.

PAGE
183
The minimum floor space required for the open and closed refrigeration plant areas is
summarised in Table 17.1 below. Please note that the table is intended for indicative
purposes only and the developer is to consult the Shoprite Checkers Professional
Team before finalising the plant room size.
Table 1 - Minimum Space Requirements for Shoprite Checkers Open and

Enclosed Plant Room Areas
Checkers Checkers Hyper

Open Condenser
60m² 100m²
Area
Enclosed
60m² 100m²
Compressor Area
The Refrigeration Contractor is responsible for the rigging of all equipment into
position. The Developer shall be responsible for ensuring that adequate access to the
plant room to facilitate the rigging of equipment with a crane or alternative rigging
equipment is provided. This includes access to the open refrigeration condenser area
as well as access to the closed plant area housing compressor packs. The developer is
to ensure that adequate and easy access to the plant room(s) is provided for any
authorised persons involved in the maintenance of the plant, for the entire life cycle of
its operation. In the case where the plant room is not situated at ground level, access
to the plant room is to be via a staircase and not a cat ladder. The staircase is to
conform to the Shoprite Checkers standard staircase detail and the South African
Plant room slabs (both for the enclosed compressor area and the open condenser
area) are to have a weight bearing capacity of at least 500kg/m². Note that the
dynamic load introduced by refrigeration equipment and the static load introduced
by walls etc. is not included in the above figure. The Structural Engineer is to include
the associated safety factor for dynamic loading and the final weight bearing capacity
of the slab is to be approved by the Structural Engineer.
The refrigeration plant room is to be built in accordance with the requirements of

SANS 10147 and any other applicable building regulations and standards. It is the
responsibility of the Builder to ensure that these regulations and standards are strictly
adhered to.
17.1.3 Plant Room

a) The refrigeration plant room is to be provided with a lockable solid double
door which conforms to the plant room door detail which can be found in the
door schedule. The doors to plant rooms are to have a minimum dimension of
2,100mm(h) x 1,800mm(w) clear to ensure that all equipment including
distribution boards and double stacked refrigeration packs can be moved into
the plant room with ease.
PAGE
184
b) The condenser plant areas are to be open so as not to restrict air flow to the
condensers. Where this is not practically possible due to security, aesthetic,
acoustic, building structure requirements or up stand beams etc the developer
is to have any obstruction approved by the Shoprite Checkers Professional
team before construction. However, all necessary structures around the open
refrigeration condenser area such as palisade fencing, bollards, acoustic
louvers, breezeblocks or any other structural equipment as approved by the
Shoprite Checkers Professional Team shall be provided by the Developer at his
cost. Notwithstanding the above, at least two of the adjacent sides of the
condenser area are to be left open to allow for the unimpeded flow of air to
the condensers. Where there is limited allowance for free flow of air to the
open condenser area, the Shoprite Checkers Professional Team is to advise on
the minimum free space required for proper operation of the plant.
c) The Developer shall provide a water tap in the open condenser area in
accordance with the standard schedule as provided by the Shoprite Checkers
Architect.
d) The floor of the enclosed plant room area housing the refrigeration equipment
is to be painted battleship grey chemically resistant epoxy by the Builder.
e) Roof insulation to the enclosed plant room is to be provided by the Builder.

See the Schedule of Finishes for description of Sisalation or equal approved
roof insulation.
17.1.4 Penetrations
The provision of all the openings in slabs, walls, ceilings, bulkheads, roofs, etc. shall be
by the Builder according to the Shoprite Checkers Architect’s plan. The sealing of
openings through which refrigerant piping runs shall be done by the Refrigeration
Contractor according to the standard detail.
17.1.5 Pipe Risers

a) Where refrigeration pipe risers are installed on top of cabinets the
Refrigeration Contractor shall be responsible for the cladding of the riser with
Chromadek and finished by the Builder according to the Shoprite Checkers
Architect’s Specification.
b) Any finishing of other pipe risers shall be the full responsibility of the Builder
and shall be done in accordance with the Shoprite Checkers Architect’s
Specifications.
17.1.6 Condensate Drains

a) The main underground condensate drains shall be a minimum of 110mm in
diameter with corresponding 50mm condensate up-stands 100mm above FFL
and shall be provided by the Builder. These up-stands are not to be trapped

PAGE
185
and are to be capped to avoid builder’s rubble ingress. The Shoprite Checkers
Architect shall provide a drawing of the trading area, service areas, back of
house, plant room and cold-rooms to the Builder detailing the location of
condensate drain points.
b) Where condensate piping is located in service areas such as the butchery

preparation area, fruit & veg preparation area and perishables receiving, the
50mm PVC condensate drain pipes are to be chased or built into walls
according to the Engineers detail and connected to the 110mm main
underground drain by the Builder. Where specified, the Builder must provide a
50mm stub 600mm below the ceiling level for drainage of blower coils.
17.1.7 Core Drills

Where the trading area is on a slab, mezzanine or above a basement, the penetrations
required for refrigeration services and drainage are to be core drilled by the Builder
during construction with approval from the Structural Engineer and in accordance
with his specifications. Each penetration for refrigeration piping is to be provided
with a 110mm PVC sleeve. The PVC sleeves are to finish at a minimum of 50mm
above FFL and are to be sealed externally to prevent water from seeping below.
Provision must be made in the budget for at least 20 additional Core drill
penetrations other than those indicated on the initial drawings of the professional
team.
17.1.8 Trenches
The Builder is to provide all trenches necessary for the reticulation of refrigerant
piping to serve cabinets on the trading floor. A drawing detailing the position, size
and layout of the required trenches shall be issued by the Shoprite Checkers Architect.
Trenches are to be installed according to the Structural Engineer’s specification. No
other services such as condensate drains, water supplies etc. are allowed in the
refrigeration trench. Only refrigeration piping and associated electrical cabling is
allowed to be placed in the refrigeration trenches. Similarly, no other services are
allowed to cross a trench unless the crossing takes place below the concrete surface
bed of the trench.
17.1.9 General
Water supply must be provided to the non-refrigerated cabinets where specified by
the Shoprite Checkers Architect.
NOTE:
It is the responsibility of the Builder to check and confirm that all drainage,
condensate drain and water points are as per the Shoprite Checkers Architects
Drawing after installation and before floor casting and reconfirmed after floor casting.
A detailed marked up drawing must be made available by the Builder in this regard.

PAGE
186
17.1.10 Electrical Work

a) The open refrigeration condenser area and enclosed plant room area are to be
fitted with lights suitable to achieve a design light level of 200LUX. Access
(passages or staircases) to the plant rooms are to be fitted with lights suitable
to achieve a design light level of 150LUX. All lights are to be provided with
local switching facilities.
b) Power supply to the non-refrigerated cabinets and self-contained cabinets

shall be by the electrical contractor.
c) The electrical contractor shall provide the main incoming electrical supply to
the refrigeration plant room DB including termination. The Refrigeration
Contractor shall be present to witness termination of the main electrical supply
and is to be responsible for coordination with the Electrical Contractor. This
electrical supply shall be on emergency (backup) power.
d) A suitably sized electrical supply (UPS) including termination to serve the

refrigeration alarm board (which shall be situated in the admin office) is to be
provided by the Electrical Contractor. The supply of the refrigeration alarm
board (refer to standard alarm board detail) shall be the responsibility of the
Refrigeration Contractor.
e) The provision of a suitably sized electrical supply (UPS) including termination

to serve the refrigeration monitoring system which shall in general be situated
in the dark room. The supply of the refrigeration monitoring system shall be
the responsibility of the Refrigeration Contractor.
f) Two standard 16A socket outlets are to be provided in the plant room by the
Electrical Contractor. Refer to the standard plant room layout detail.
g) There are to be no conduits, Ega duct or surface cables mounted on insulation

panels where they are visible to the public.
SECTION 17.2: INSULATION INSTALLATION:

17.2.1 Description of Work
The Insulation Installation is to comply with the relevant codes of practice, be
completed by a Specialist Contractor at the developers cost and be built in
accordance with the Shoprite Checkers Standard Insulation Details and Specifications.
The Insulation Contractor is to be a member of the South African Refrigeration
Distribution Association. The Insulation Contractor is to be approved by the Shoprite
Checkers Professional Team and appointed by the Builder under the instruction of the
Shoprite Checkers Architect.

PAGE
187
The Builder is to fully co-ordinate and schedule the Insulation Contractor within the
Building Programme. The Builder is to issue to the Shoprite Checkers Professional
Team, within 1 week of receiving the instruction to appoint the Insulation Contractor,
a comprehensive integrated programme of works, fully detailing the manufacturing,
installation, commissioning and hand-over phases of the project. The Builder is also
to fully co-ordinate the installation of the insulation accessories, including Meat Rail
Systems, door mechanisms, strip curtains, pressure relief valves, door heaters and sill
details. On completion of the insulation installation, the Builder is to co-ordinate the
installation of the cold and freezer room electrical installation (lights and switches).
Prior to the site establishment of the Insulation Contractor, the Builder is to ensure
that the site is suitably prepared as per the Standard Insulation Details and
Specifications and that temporary lighting is installed to provide an acceptable
lighting level for the installation.
The floor finish in the cold and freezer rooms and (conditioned) receiving, processing
and preparation areas is to be as per the Standard Insulation Details and
Specifications. The Builder is to apply the final hard wearing topping on all completed
concrete floors as per the Architects specification.
The provision of floor drains to cold and freezer rooms must be carried out by the
Builder according to the drainage layout as provided by the Shoprite Checkers
Architect.
75mm Polystyrene ceilings are to be installed in all (conditioned) receiving and

preparation areas. These are to have at least one 600 x 600mm access hatch.

PAGE
188
SECTION 18: FIRE (REVISION – A)

18.1 GENERAL
All fire services shall conform to the requirements of SANS 10400 (The Application of
the National Building Regulations) as well as all requirements of the local and any
other authority having jurisdiction.
The fire protection services shall incorporate the following as applicable, as required
by SANS 10400 and the local and any other authority having jurisdiction:
- Fire hydrants
- Hose reels
- Portable fire extinguishers
- Automatic sprinkler installation
- Fire detection and manually activated alarm system
- Smoke ventilation
- Emergency lighting
- Statutory safety signage
- Voice evacuation system
- Fire blankets
The Architect and Fire Protection Consultant shall liaise closely with the Fire
Prevention Officer of the Local Authority to ensure that the minimum fire protection
measures are incorporated in the development. They shall also ensure that any
special requirements imposed by the Fire Safety Officer in respect of any other service
are forwarded to the respective designers of these services for incorporation in the
development.
18.2 RATIONAL FIRE DESIGN

The Fire Protection Consultant shall provide all the necessary Fire Plans and Rational
Fire Design Reports required for the Local Authority approval process. The primary
purpose of the rational fire design function is to provide information and the
necessary details of the fire protection system design, including calculations,
motivations, technical data and supporting documentation to demonstrate
compliance with SANS 10400 and the Local Authority requirements.
At the end of the project the Fire Protection Consultant shall arrange and conduct
inspections and performance tests with the fire department with the view of obtaining
the Local Authority’s approval for the issue of an Occupancy Certificate.
18.3 HYDRANTS, HOSE REELS AND PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

Fire hydrants hose reels and portable fire extinguishers shall be installed in
accordance with SANS 10400 and the Local Authority’s minimum requirements, and

PAGE
189
as directed by the Architect, Fire Protection Consultant in collaboration with the

Shoprite Checkers Store Planners.
Portable fire extinguishers shall be of DCP (dry chemical powder), gas (CO2) or wet
chemical type, to suit the particular application and the requirements of the Local
Authority.
18.4 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

Where required by SANS 10400 and the Local Authority, an automatic sprinkler
installation complying with ASIB 11th Edition rules, or SANS 10287 requirements, shall
be provided.
In addition to the requirements above, an automatic sprinkler system shall be

installed in all Bulk Store and ancillary areas, to comply with ASIB 11th Edition rules or
SANS 10287. The sprinkler layouts in the Bulk Store Areas shall be carefully
coordinated in conjunction with the racking layouts and other services. Sprinkler
piping and heads shall be adequately protected against accidental damage.
Water based sprinkler systems shall not be used or fitted on canopies and
kitchen cooking appliances.
18.5 FIRE WATER SUPPLY

The fire water supply parameters to site shall be established at an early stage of the
project. Water storage tanks and pumps shall be provided by Developer/Landlord,
where/if the water supply to site is not adequate.
18.6 FIRE DETECTION AND MANUALLY ACTIVATED ALARM SYSTEM

A fire detection and manually activated alarm system complying with the
requirements of SANS 10139 shall be provided. The fire detection and alarm system
shall interface with the emergency voice evacuation system, smoke ventilation
systems, air-conditioning, fresh air supply, extract air, fire doors on electro magnet
hold open devices, electrical locks on doors in escape routes, homing of lifts, etc., all
as required in terms of SANS 10400 and the requirements of the Local Authority. The
fire detection interface with other equipment shall operate on a double knock system,
to obviate accidental activation due to false alarms.
18.7 SMOKE VENTILATION

A smoke ventilation system activated by the fire detection system and complying with
the requirements of SANS 10400 and the requirements of the Local Authority shall be
supplied and installed. The smoke ventilation system can be of the natural roof
ventilator type or of the mechanical extract type. If natural roof ventilators are
installed then care shall be taken to prevent leakage due to rain. The ventilators shall
be provided with burglar bars and dust seals. The control panel/s shall be located in
the Admin Office.

PAGE
190
18.8 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

Emergency lighting, complying with SANS 10400 and the Local Authority
requirements, shall be supplied and installed. Emergency lighting shall be provided
with emergency power from the standby generator.
18.9 STATUTORY SAFETY SIGNAGE

Statutory safety signage shall comply with the requirements of SANS 1186 and as
directed by the Local Authority. Safety signage shall be of the photo luminescent
type and shall be mechanically fixed. Illuminated EXIT signs shall be installed at the
exit doors as directed by the Local Authority.
18.10 VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM

A voice evacuation system, activated by the fire detection system, and complying with
the requirements of the Local Authority, shall be provided.
18.11 FIRE BLANKETS

Fire blankets of sufficient size and inclusive of containers, shall be provided for the
service areas, in accordance with the requirements of the Local Authority. The
mounting positions of the fire blankets shall be agreed with the Architect and the
Store Planners.
18.12 GAS INSTALLATION

Where a LPG installation is required, the installation with the necessary alarms shall be
installed in accordance with the requirements and approvals of the Local Authority.
18.13 STANDBY GENERATOR

The Local Authority shall be consulted as to any special fire prevention requirements
that they may have regarding the installation and operation of a standby generator
and its fuel storage in the development.
18.14 GAS SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS AT COOKING EXTRACT CANOPIES

A gas suppression system shall be installed at certain cooking extract canopies
in stores where the Trading Areas are protected by a sprinkler system. Only
canopies over fryers, griddles, lava rock grilles, etc. shall be provided with a gas
suppression system. The gas suppression system shall be designed and installed
to comply with the NFPA 17A standard. One type F wet chemical fire
extinguisher shall also be located at each cooking extract canopy, or at a bank of
canopies. The gas suppression systems are to be supplied, installed, tested and
commissioned by a specialist contractor who is able to provided Certificates of
Compliance with the required standards.
A fire signal is to be sent from the gas suppression control panel to the fire
detection control panel to indicate activation of the gas suppression system, and
in order to raise alarm.

PAGE
191
SECTION 19: SIGNAGE (REVISION – A)

19 SIGNAGE
19.1 SRC shall be entitled to erect external signage at its own cost on the lease premises,
the building and the shopping centre in such a manner and such number of as
accords with SRC national signage policy from time to time, provided that the
minimum size of any one of SRC external signage are:
 Checkers 2,5m x 18m

 Checkers Hyper 3,5m x 26m
19.2 As a major anchor tenant in the shopping centre, SRC shall be entitled and have
preference to position its external signage in such a manner to the exterior of the
building as to gain maximum exposure to both vehicular and pedestrian customer
accesses to the building.
19.3 The Landlord/Developer shall submit to SRC elevation drawings of the building as
soon as these have been prepared, to enable it to select its signage positions
timeously.
19.4 The Landlord/Developer shall ensure that the building design make provision for the
above signage requirements. In the event that suitable signage walls are found to be
lacking, the Landlord/Developer will at his cost construct additional signage walls or
structures to facilitate the installation of signage in accordance with SRC national
signage policy.

PAGE
192
SECTION 20: SCHEDULE OF FINISHES (REVISION A)

SECTION 20.1: FLOORING
CODE TYPE DESCRIPTION OF FINISH AREA

F1 Wood Floated - 30mpa 150mm Thickness - Front of House
Concrete Slab - Wood floated concrete slab
strength and design by the
Engineer.
- Joints filled with Polysulphide
Panel size 5m x 5m length
F2 Power Floated - Power floated concrete floor - Double Volume Bulk

Concrete Floor Slab slab 40MPA strength and design Store
by the Engineer. - B.O.H Circulation
180mm Thickness Passages
- Mechanically floated perfectly - Night Drop Receiving
smooth joints filled with - Receiving
Polysulphide. - Drop Temp Receiving
- Joints at 3,6m or to be specified - Perishable Night Drop
by the Structural Engineer. - Dry Refuse Room
- Store
- Returns
- Refuse Area
F3 Resin-Reinforced - Poly screed - All Cold Rooms Freezers

Screed - Refer to refrigeration details
F4 Porcelain Tile - 300 x 300 x 10,8mm ZERO DG30 - All Offices

(By Tilespace) (SHZDG30). - Managers Office and
1st grade dark grey unpolished Treads
porcelain tiles with 2mm joints, - Passages
tiles adhered to slab with TAL - Service Departments
Goldstar-6HR rapid set - Fruit & Veg Prep
adhesive, ensuring that each tile - Returns
is 100% coated. - Cleaner Room
- 6mm expansion joints filled with - Staff Areas
light grey Polysulphide. - Canteen (300mm border
- Joints pointed with TAL dark around perimeter only

PAGE
193
grey high traffic wall and floor,

grout. Not pointed.
- Epoxy grouting in service
departments.
F5 Porcelain Tile - 600 x 150 x 10mm (SHVM156) - Canteen (except for

(By Tilespace only) (wood tile) 300mm border around
1st grade porcelain tiles with perimeter)
2mm joints, tiles adhered to slab
with TAL Goldstar-6HR rapid set
adhesive, ensuring that each tile
is 100% coated.
- Dove grey high traffic grouting
to flush and not pointed.
- Tiled in 3m x 3m panels
- 3mm Expansion joints filled with
TAL Seal Master chord & Seal
Master 1000 sealant.
- Opening to be raked clean of
cement before inserting soft
joint.
- Brick bond pattern.
F6 Vinyl Floor - GTI MAX 7083-14-DARK GREY - General Trading Floor

By GERFLOR - Checkout Arcade
- Money Market, Kiosk
To be installed by and Customer Info
FLOORS DIRECT
- GTI MAX 7081-14-ORANGE - Perishable (Fresh) Area
- First row tiles at departments to

be glued to surface bed.
- Transition strip where level
difference and/or change of
finish.
- GTI MAX CARBON BLUE - Tech-X
F7 Porcelain Tile - 600 x 600 x 10 LUNE SKATHI - Wine Section

(By Tilespace) (SHLS60) with Tal dark grey
high traffic grout.
F8 Bakerite Steel Floor - Bakerite steel floor tiles 345 x - Bakery

Tiles 345 supplied by Bakerite - Proover and Oven
PAGE
194
Industries laid solidly embedded

into ‘Sika 212’ grout as per
Manufacturer’s instructions.
- Finished perfectly flush and
horizontal 5 x 5 Polysulphide
sealed with Polyethylene
backing chord at interfaces with
floor tiles.
F9 Concrete - Concrete 80mm interlocking - Deliveries Yard

Interlocking Pavers, paver blocks strength, design
or Reinforced and laying by the Engineer.
Concrete by - Falls to drains to be at 1:60
Structural Eng.
F10 Mentis Grid - Mentis grid to the Engineer’s - Service Yard

specification.
F11 Grano - Grano 30MPa - Service Yard Ramps and

- Broom finish Docking Bay
F12 Overhead Concrete - Off shutter concrete - Where Applicable

Slab
F13 Waterproofing - Refer to DET09 - Cold & Freezer Rooms

Membrane - Internal & External Areas
(when on DERBIGUM
suspended slab)
F14 Sika Cemflex - Internal areas SIKA Cemflex - Service Departments

Waterproofing - Fruit & Veg Prep
(when on - Cleaner’s Room
suspended slab or - Refrigeration & AC Plant
surface bed) Room.
- All Floor Drains
F15 Porcelain Tile - Conproj 60G- Light grey 60 - Medirite

(By Tilespace) 600 x 600 with dark grey high
raffic grout.
Behind & front of counter

PAGE
195
SECTION 20.2: SKIRTING

FRESH “X” - CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER

S1 Porcelain - 300 x 300 x 8,3mm (SHZDG 30 ) - CCTV
Tiles 1st grade unpolished porcelain tiles with - Airlock/Fire Escape
2mm joints. - Training Room
- Cut to form a 100mm high skirting - Offices
- Cut edge to face downwards - Passage
- Glued to wall plaster with TAL - Receiving/Computer
- Goldstar-6HRrapid set adhesive, ensuring Office
that each tile is 100% coated. - Cash-Up
- Joints pointed with TAL dove grey wall and - Cash Office
floor grout, smooth and slightly concave. - ID
- 8mm Expansion joints filled with light grey - Safe
Polysulphide. - Dispensary
- Staff Toilets
S2 Porcelain - 300 x 300 x 8,5mm (SHZDG 30 ) - Butchery

Tile Skirting - Cut to form a 100mm high skirting - Deli
- Cut edge to face downwards - Bakery
- Glued to wall plaster with TAL Goldstar- - Fish
6HRrapid set adhesive, ensuring that each - Wine Area Internal
tile is 100% coated. (If not covered by
- Joints pointed with TAL dove grey wall and wall bays
floor grout, smooth and slightly concave. shopfitting)
- 8mm Expansion joints filled with light grey
Polysulphide.
- Skirting tile in service departments to be at
45 degrees.
- Ridge tile detail in all service departments
below cabinets (see detail).
S3 Aluminium - TDC detail CHCW-03-020 - Wine External

Skirting - Ferro powdercoat Charcoal Ferrograin or
Akzo Matt Anthracite grey.

PAGE
196
SECTION 20.3: WALLS


W1 Sand/Cement - 5:1 Sand/Cement one coat plaster - Steel Float all Walls
Plaster application, wood-floated and smooth to be Painted
Application steel trowelled finish, free of any - Wood Float all Walls
Ceramic blemishes. to be Tiled
- Form neat, straight V-joints between
end of wall and concrete column
junctions, joint trowel-cut through full
depth of plaster.
- Finish with 1ct masonry paint an2cts
eggshell paint.
W2 Porcelain - 200 x 1,200 CONCRETO CIZA 12 - Bakery Service Area

Wall Tiles (SHBCC 120) wall tiles (By Tilespace),
from floor to U/S bulkheads or to
above suspended ceilings where
applicable.
- 2mm joints to be pointed in TAL dove
gray wall and floor grout with Talbond
fungicidal additive, adhered to plaster
substrate with TAL professional
adhesive, fully covering back of each
tile.
- Full height horizontal stack bond.
W3 Porcelain - 200 x 600 WHITE GLOSS BEVELLED - Butchery Service Area

Wall Tiles (SHBB26) wall tiles (By Tilespace), from
floor to U/S bulkheads or to above
suspended ceilings where applicable.
- 2mm joints to be pointed in TAL super
white wall and floor grout with Talbond
tile.
- Full height herringbone pattern.

PAGE
197
W4 Porcelain - 200 x 600 WHITE GLOSS BEVELLED - Deli Service Area

Wall Tiles (SHBB26) wall tiles, from floor to U/S and Kitchen Area
(By Tilespace) bulkheads or to above suspended - Bakery Kitchen Area
ceilings where applicable. - Butchery Kitchen Area
- 2mm joints to be pointed in TAL super - Cold Deli (1,3m high
white wall and floor grout with Talbond wall)
tile.
- Full height horizontal stretcher bond.
W5 Porcelain - 200 x 600 DOLCEVITA 26L (SHDVL 26) - Fish Service Area
Wall Tiles wall tiles, from floor to U/S bulkheads
(By Tilespace) or to above suspended ceilings where
applicable.
- 2mm joints to be pointed in TAL super
white wall and floor grout with Talbond
tile.
- Full height horizontal stretcher bond.
W6 Porcelain - 200 x 600 WHITE GLOSS BEVELLED - Cheese Deli

Wall Tiles (SHBB26) wall tiles, 2mm joints to be
(By Tilespace) pointed in TAL super white wall and
floor grout with Talbond fungicidal
additive, adhered to plaster substrate
with TAL professional adhesive, fully
covering back of each tile.
- Up to 1,500mm AFFL horizontal
stretcher bond.
W7 Ceramic Wall - 70 x 240 LIVERPOOL BLACK (SHLBLK - Café/Coffee Area
Tiles 724) wall tiles, from floor to U/S Behind Counter Line-
(By Tilespace) bulkheads or to above suspended Up
ceilings where applicable.
- 2mm joints to be pointed in TAL white
wall and floor grout with Talbond
tile.
- Up to 1,500mm AFFL stretcher bond
PAGE
198
pattern.
W8 Ceramic Wall - 600 x 600 LUNE SKATHI- SHLS60 - Coffee Seating Area
Tiles - 3mm Flush joint with High traffic dark
(By Tilespace) grey grout.
- Up to 1,100mm AFFL
- Stack bond
- Adhered to plaster substrate with TAL
professional adhesive, fully covering
back of each tile.
W9 Laminate - Route De Vince (Fonce D29DS) from - Wine Area

Tiles Kronotex. (External Walls only)
- Full height with Anthracite grey angles - Cheese Deli
to all corners. (Above 1,500mm)
W10 Porcelain - 400 x 400 x 8,0mm (SHG 140) 1st grade - Toilets
Tiles unpolished porcelain tiles with 2mm - Lockers (if not face
joints, tiles adhered to slab with TAL brick)
Goldstar-6HR rapid set adhesive, - Fruit & Veg Prep
ensuring that each tile is 100% coated. - Cleaners Room
- To height of 1,400 AFFL. 200mm cut tile - Returns (decanting
at top. area)
- 2mm Flush joint with light grey grout
W11 Ceramic Wall -300 x 300 x 8,3 ZERO DARK GREY (DG) - Canteen
Tiles (SHZDG30).
(By Tilespace) - 2mm Flush joint with High traffic dove
grey grout.
- Stack bond up to 1,400mm AFFL.
200mm cut tile at top.
- Adhered to plaster substrate with TAL
professional adhesive, fully covering
back of each tile.
-
W12 Matt Beige - 600 x 300 BROADWAY CEMENT ROAD - Money Market
Porcelain 36 (SHBCR 36) 1st grade porcelain tiles. - Kiosk
Tiles - 2mm Flush joint with oatmeal grout - Manager Office
(By Tilespace) - Stack bond up to 1,500mm AFFL - Checkout Arcade
- Adhered to plaster substrate with TAL - Fire Escape Doors
professional adhesive, fully covering - FHR cubical
back of each tile. - Around impact doors

PAGE
199
W13 Face Brick - Face bricks/blocks to Architects’ - Ladies & Gents

approved sample surface flush, Lockers
perpends flush, horizontal joints slightly - Staff Circulation
recessed, smooth and concave, all - Security
sealed with 3 coats sealant. - Airlock/Fire Escape at
- Montana Travertine tile from Corobrick. Staff Area only
Other face brick to be approved by the - Staff Entrance
SRC Architect. - Double Volume Bulk
Store
- B.O.H Circulation
Passages
- Night Drop Receiving
- Receiving
- Drop Temp Receiving
- Perishable Night Drop
- Dry Refuse Room
- Deliveries Yard
- Refuse Area (Yard)
- Plant Room
Bulk store room wall finish to be confirmed - Bulk Store (to be

by SRC Architect. confirmed by SRC
architect)
W14 Checker Plate - 2mm Thick Aluminium checker plate - Cold Room & Freezer
or Height: 1,200mm. Room
Sureprotect - Screwed and plugged to wall surface,
from Gradus with stainless steel dome-headed
screws, to Fischer wall-plugs all evenly
spaced OR fixed by panelling sub-
contractor to refrigeration panels facing
service corridors.
W15 White Glazed - 200 x 200 WHITE GLOSS 20 (SHGW20) - Medirite Kitchen and
Tile 2mm Flush joint with super white grout WC
With Talbond fungicidal additive. - Café Kitchen Area

PAGE
200
SECTION 20.4: PAINT

LOCATION APPLICATION WALL DECORATION

Walls Generally x1 coat masonry x2 coats DULUX 00NN 53/000 Veil matt
Trading & Offices paint OR
x2 coats PLASCON Silver Side Prof. low sheen
acr.
PB=6.00 PC=1.00 PF=0.50 PP=0.50
BOH (If not face x1 coat masonry x2 coats DULUX 00NN 25/000 Seal Gray matt
brick) paint OR
From ffl to 1,4m x2 coats PLASCON Castle Gate Prof. low sheen
acr.
PB=22.00 PI=1.50 PL=20.00 PK=32.50
1,4m to x1 coat masonry x2 coats DULUX 00NN 53/000 Veil matt

Control Line paint OR
(3,200mm) x2 coats PLASCON Castle Gate Prof. low sheen
acr.
PB=22.00 PI=1.50 PL=20.00 PK=32.50
BOH (If not Face x1 coat masonry x2 coats DULUX 00NN 25/000 Seal Gray matt
Brick) paint OR
From ffl to 1,4m x2 coats PLASCON Castle Gate Prof. low sheen
acr.
PB=22.00 PI=1.50 PL=20.00 PK=32.50
1,4m to full height x1 coat masonry x2 coats DULUX 00NN 53/000 Veil matt
paint OR
x2 coats PLASCON Castle Gate Prof. low sheen
acr.
PB=22.00 PI=1.50 PL=20.00 PK=32.50
Bulkheads Fascia & x1 undercoat x2 coats DULUX 00NN 25/000 Seal Gray matt
Walls paint OR
Above control line x2 coats PLASCON Castle Gate Prof. low sheen
(3,200mm) acr.
PB=22.00 PI=1.50 PL=20.00 PK=32.50

PAGE
201
Bulkhead Soffit x1 undercoat x2 coats PLASCON EPL 30 (White)

OR
Other approved paint supplier
BOH x1 undercoat x2 coats DULUX 00NN 25/000 Seal Gray matt

Door & Door OR
Frames x2 coats PLASCON Castle Gate Prof. low sheen
Walls Behind acr.
Money Market, PB=22.00 PI=1.50 PL=20.00 PK=32.50
Kiosk and Manager
Office. From 1,500
above FFL.
Purlins, Trusses, x1 undercoat x2 coats DULUX 00NN 13/000 Obsidian Glass

Sprinkler Pipes, Matt
Trunking, Water OR
Supply Pipes, Any x2 coats PLASCON to match Obsidian Glass Matt
Structural Supports PB=105.00 PC=14.00 PF=03.00 PK=15.00
& A/C Duct.
Slab/Soffit
Wine Section
(Internal)
Staff Canteen, x1 undercoat x2 coats DULUX 30YY 68/024

Search Area & Staff Barley Beige Eggshell enamel
Passages. OR
(Above 1,400 AFFL) x2 coats PLASCON Aged Lace Prof. med sheen.
(If Search & (PB=1.10, PH=0.40,PL=4.20)
Passages Not Face
Brick)
Training x1 undercoat x2 coats DULUX 30YY 68/024

(Full height) Barley Beige Eggshell enamel
OR
x2 coats PLASCON Aged Lace Prof. med sheen.
(PB=1.10, PH=0.40,PL=4.20)
Powder Coating Powder Coating, -to match paint colours

Colours OR
Anthracite Grey
To be confirmed by SCP architect

PAGE
202
Medirite (Interior x1 coat masonry x2 coats PLASCON Acrylic PVA, colour WHITE to
Walls & Ceilings) paint full height of walls.
Medirite Doors x1 Coat masonry x2 coats PLASCON Acrylic PVA, colour WHITE to
paint full height of walls.
OR
Other approved paint supplier

PAGE
203
SECTION 20.5: CEILING


C1 Ceiling Tiles - Gypsum 1,200 x 600 x 12,5 vivid white - Offices
Suspended drop-in ceiling tiles in down T38 vivid - All Prep Areas
white exposed “T” system:- Principal - All Staff Facilities
(BOH where not “T” suspended by rigid pressed metal - Dry Refuse
visible to angles 19 x 19 at least every 2,400 - Wine Store
customer) centres, with pop-rivet fixing to roof - Receiving Office
purlins, or bracketed and slab soffit, - Wet Returns
which ever applies/balance of hangers
can be standard wire.
- Ceiling sub-contractor to allow for
instruction of unistrut intermediate
supports, where, so as to insure the
correct spacing for hangers, as
recommended by ceiling tile
manufacturer e.g. where steel purlin
spacing is too far apart.
- Aluminium profile M6 corner trims, if
none other specified.
- Note: Sub grid structure to be installed
according to the Donn system if
ceiling laid more than 3,5m below
support line.
C2 Ceiling Tiles - Gypsum 600 x 600 x 12,5 vivid white - Medirite

Suspended drop-in ceiling tiles in down T38 vivid - Butchery
white exposed “T” system:- Principal - Bakery
(FOH where “T” suspended by rigid pressed metal - Deli
visible to angles 19 x 19 at least every 2,400 - Fish
customer) centres, with pop-rivet fixing to roof
purlins, or bracketed and slab soffit,
which ever applies/balance of hangers
can be standard wire.
- Ceiling sub-contractor to allow for
instruction of unistrut intermediate
supports, where, so as to insure the
correct spacing for hangers, as
recommended by ceiling tile
manufacturer e.g. where steel purlin
PAGE
204
spacing is too far apart.

- Aluminium profile M6 corner trims, if
none other specified.
- Note: Sub-grid structure to be
installed according to the Donn
system if ceiling laid more than 3,5m
below support line.
- Painted white
C3 Flush - 12,5mm Rhinoboard ceiling boards, - Money Market

Plasterboard secured to GMS partition studs at 400 - Entrance
12,5mm with centres, with shadow line edge trim Bulkhead
Bulkhead System (standard Donn W-profile, finished - Kiosk
White):- Joints covered with rhino fibre - Managers Office
tape. - Over Counter
- Note: Steel support by the Engineer Line-Up of
located above bulkhead line. Butchery, Deli,
Fish, Bakery,
Bread, Deli,
Wine. (Size to be
confirmed by the
SRC Architect).
C4 Flush - Suspended Ceiling - Money Market

Plasterboard 12,5mm plasterboard sheets 1,200 - Entrance
Ceiling 12,5mm wide, nailed to 38 x 38 timber battens Bulkhead
at 400mm centres in the direction - Kiosk
parallel to roof purlins, to steel tees at - Managers Office
600mm centres, running above and - Over Counter
suspended from roof purlins with rigid Line-Up of
hangers, either steel rods or pressed Butchery, Deli,
GMS angles, with appropriate secure Fish, Bakery,
fixings to purlins. Bread, Deli. (Size
- Butt-joints in boards to be covered to be confirmed
with fibre tape: by the SRC
Soffit skimmed with minimum 5mm Architect).
Gypsum Cretestone – perfectly - Cash Office
smooth. - Wine (curved
- Allow of cross-bracing of hangers in ceiling).
bay per 5m run in the direction of
purlins.
Used where - Plasterboard ceiling onto steel tees at

ceiling is at rake 400c/c, secured to soffit of steel lipped
PAGE
205
of roof channel purlins (at 1650c/c).
C5 Concrete - All protrusions ground off flush, - Site Specific

Skimmed blemishes removed, cleaned surface to (refer to
be skimmed flush with approx. 6mm Architect's
Rhinolite skim-coat. instruction)
C6 Sisalation FR420 - Sisalation heavy industrial grade lay - Back of House

or Equal between roof sheets and purlins, with Areas
Approved standard straining wire soffit supports, - Covered
of type 8 at cantered as recommended Plantrooms
by manufacturer.
C7 Isoboard or - 40 - 100mm ISOBOARD or - Trading Floor

Lamdaboard LAMDABOARD (Thickness is subject - Covered
(pre-painted) to rational design and compliance to Plantroom
SANS 10400XA), is to be used for roof
insulation or other alternative to be
approved by Shoprite Checker’s
representative. Roof insulation to
comply with SANS 10400. Roof
insulation to be 100mm centre groove
Isoboard, over purlin installation or in
between purlin installation with a top
hat fixing detail. Centre groove finish
to face the trading floor.
Fixing and roof guarantee must be
provided to the Shoprite Checkers
Architect.
- Roof structure exposed: 5,0 - 100mm
Isoboard (dependant on rational
design) finished neatly against
wall, with standard edging channel, 50
x 6mm Nutec board fixed against wall
and painted same as wall.
- Painted Dulux 00NN 13/000

PAGE
206
SECTION 20.6: SANITARYWARE

CODE & TYPE DESCRIPTION OF FINISH AREA

SAN1
Pot Sink - Sink Unit: Franke DCBPS Double Bowl Pot - Bakery
(As Specified by Sink 1850 x 650 x 910 high (code 2620010- - Butchery
Architect) 001). - Fish Area
- Bowl Size: 600 x 500 x 300, 420 stainless steel - Fruit & Veg
stand AI SI 304CR N1 grade with 150 H splash Prep
back, stainless steel stand frame, with
adjustable feet and stainless steel tubular
shelf under bowl with overflow outlet. Unit
mounted onto floor tiles with 75mm away
from wall.
- Unit mounted on floor, 75mm away from wall.
Base of nozzles 250 above sink-top/2 mixer
taps. Centred on bowl.
- Black PVC heavy duty waste trap with 86f
flange, 93mm shank slotted, with plug and
backnut.
Tap - Mixer Taps: Hansgrohe - Talis Care - Basin

Mixer - Chrome - Extra Long Handle.
OR
- Grohe-Euroco Safety-Taps-Basin mixers-
Chrome (Grohe-32793000).
OR
- Cobra (Taps & Mixers) - Medical Elbow
Action - Mixer - Chrome - Wall Mixer
(515/055-21). Cobra - Traps - Waste, Traps
and Overflows - Chrome Plated - Bath/Sink
Waste (317 - 40). Cobra - Traps - Waste,
Traps and Overflows - Chrome - Bottle Trap
(365/40).
- Name board onto indicate stock code per
department in ceiling above.
SAN2
Pot Sink - Sink Unit: Franke Double bowl 1,650 x 650 x - Deli Prep
(As Specified by 910 high (code 2620011-001).
Architect) - Bowl Size: 600 x 500 x 300, 420 Stainless

PAGE
207
steel AI SI 304CR N1 grade with 150H splash

back, on stainless steel stand frame, with
adjustable feet and stainless steel tubular
shelf under bowl with overflow outlet. Unit
mounted onto floor tiles with 75mm away
from wall.
- Base of nozzles 250mm above sink-top/2
mixer taps. Centred on bowl.
backnut.
Tap - Hansgrohe - Talis Care - Basin Mixer -

Chrome - Extra Long Handle requires 2 for
double bowl.
OR
- Grohe-Euroco Safety – Taps - Basin mixers-
OR
(365/40).
SAN3
Prep Sink - Franke SCBS single bowl preparation sink - Fish Area
1,650 x 650 x 910mm high (code 2620012). - Deli Prep
500 x 500 x 230mm deep pressed bowl AI SI
340CR N1 grade stainless steel with 150H
splash back, on stainless steel stand frame,
with adjustable feet and stainless steel
tubular shelf under bowl with overflow outlet.
- Unit mounted on floor, 75mm away from wall.
Base of nozzles 250 above sink-top 1 mixer
tap. Centred on bowl.
backnut.
Tap - Hansgrohe - Talis care -Basin Mixer – chrome

- Extra Long Handle.
PAGE
208
OR
- Grohe- Euroco Safety – Taps - Basin mixers-
OR
(365/40).
SAN4
Basin Single - Vaal Daisy Basin (code 700803) 510 x 400 - Bakery
Semi-rectangular vitreous china with one tap - Deli Prep
hole. Chrome bottle trap (365/40). - Fish Area
Bolted to wall with two 10mm bolts (code - Butchery
8448ZO). - Fruit & Veg
- Hansgrohe flow regulating valve at water Prep
supply from wall and chromium plated pipe,
connection from wall flange to tap basin.
Clear silicone sealant between tip of tiling key
and tile.
Tap - Mixer Taps: Hansgrohe - Focus - Electronic

Basin Mixer - Chrome - with 230V mains
connection (Supplier code HG31174000)
require 1 for single bowl.
OR
- Grohe Eureco Cosmopolitan E with power
box (code GRO-36384000).
Grohe angle valve (code GRO-2201700M).
Miscellaneous - Chrome - Angle Valve (832 -
10). Cobra - Traps - Waste, Traps and
Overflows - Chrome Plated - Bath/Sink Waste
(317 - 40). Cobra - Traps - Waste, Traps and
Overflows - Chrome - Bottle Trap (365/40).
SAN5
Hot Water Cylinder - Kwikot megaflow dual 1000: 200 litre 1,380 - Bakery
long x 540 horizontally mounted with - Deli Prep
complete with all standard accessories, - Butchery
mounted on drip tray bracketed to wall in - Fish Area
ceiling, supplies hot water to pot sink and - Fruit & Veg

PAGE
209
basin (Note: with supply from purified water Prep

tank and positioned indicated by Project - Dispensary
Architect). (100 l)
- Position: As indicated on drawings 205 - Staff Toilets
- Drip tray: 1,500 x 600 x 50 up stand stainless - Canteen
steel 18/10 type 304 40mm drain outlet - Returns
chased into wall and connected to sink outlet. Sorting
- (10 litre undercounted push through geyser Room
to be used instead of 200l where required by
the SRC Architect).
SAN6
Heat Pump - Enerflow heat pump or equal approved. - Where
Specified By
Notes: Includes Heat pump unit Insulation the SRC
for the exposed pipes Mounting brackets & Architect
Fasteners Strainer (1) 22mm Ball valves (2)
Anti-vibration mounts Hard switch-over
switch for manual override LCD monitor
Probe pocket Thermostatic Diverter Valve
Solar drain cock 4,7kW Energy output unit
Uses only 1,4kW electricity COP rating of
3,66* Suitable for 200l> geysers Electricity
savings on water heating household products
of 67% Water outlet temperature 55°C Uses
CFC-free gas only Cobra Heat Pumps have
been fitted with a disinfect cycle function in
conjunction with the 2kW back-up element
to prevent the growth of bacteria such as
Legionella.
SAN7
Hydroboil (Canteen - 10 litre Franke Hydroboil in canteen - Canteen
Unit Sink Detail) OR
- 10 litre hot water dispenser from E-Boil
SAN8
Floor Trap Outlets
1) - Herbish floor drain HB200 V (H) NW 100 - Cold Rooms
stainless steel, with top flange flush with floor
finish 100mm PVC waste pipe connected to
WWP (Note: Floor finish graded to fall toward
floor drain).
- Refer to Architect's detail
PAGE
210
2) - Pollution solution KB/FT 1 = Kitchen - Drop Temp

drain/floor trap standard floor trap, inlet on - Returns
top and 110mm outlet with stainless steel Sorting Room
basket and 300 x 300mm stainless steel cover
plate. Connected to WWP (Note: Floor finish
graded to fall toward floor drain).
OR
- Similar from Herbish
3) - Pollution solution KB/FT 2 = Kitchen - Bakery

drain/floor trap standard floor trap, inlet on - Deli Prep
top and 110mm outlet with stainless steel - Butchery
basket and 300 x 300mm stainless steel - Fish Area
cover plate. Connected to WWP (Note: Floor - Fruit & Veg
finish graded to fall toward floor drain). Prep
OR
- Similar from Herbish
SAN9
Gully - Gully outlet for wet waste - Wet Refuse
- Trolley Wash
Bay
SAN10
Oven Proover and
Convection Oven
Outlet
1) - Oven: Cobra brass shower trap 50mm (code - - Bakery
373SQ) placed in precise position. In front of
oven, outlet pipe to be galvanized mild steel.
1 per oven as indicated on the SRC Architect's
plan.
- Proover: Cobra brass shower trap 50mm - Bakery

2)
centre in floor of proover. 1 per proover as
indicated on the SRC Architect's plan.
- Convection oven: 50 Blue Marley PVC at left - Bakery

3)
back corner on floor. - Floor Deli
- Deli Prep
- Staff toilets and canteen: HB125H shower - Male Toilets

4)
outlet. - Female Toilets
- Canteen

PAGE
211
SAN11
Grease Trap - Herbish Grease Trap HBGT500 with 50 inlet - Bakery
and outlet. - Deli Prep
- Butchery
- Fish Area
- Fruit & Veg
Prep
- Deli Cold
SAN12
Hose - Cobra 207EC-20-STAR - Female Toilet
- Male Toilets
Tap - Tap: Chromium plate-threaded nozzle with - Drop Temp
hose union and chromium plated extension Area
pipe and flange: Cobra 058 + 059 cold water - Fruit & Veg
supply only, via supply pipe chased into wall. Prep
- Butchery
Receiving
- Ref. Plant
Room
- AC plant room
- Returns
Sorting
- Cleaners
Room
SAN13
Basin - Vaal Daisy Basin (code 700803) 510 x 400 - Dispensary x2
Semi-rectangular vitreous china with one tap - Kitchen
hole. Chrome bottle trap (COB-365/40). - Office
Bolted to wall with two 10mm bolts (code - Gatehouse
8448ZO). (Robust and
Simple Tap)
Tap - Hansgrohe - Décor E2 - Basin Mixer 100 – - Managers WC
Chrome. - Disabled
- Hansgrohe angle valve regulating valve at
supply from wall and chromium plated pipe
connection from wall flange to tap against
wall. Clear silicone sealant along back rim and
sides.
- Waste: Cobra 301 - 32, basin waste, CHR.
PL/62 f Flange, 80mm sank, slot.
OR
- Grohe Euroeco special - tap-basin mixer-
Chrome (code GRO-3276500.
PAGE
212
- Grohe Angle valve (code GRO-2201700M).

- Cobra (Taps & Mixers) - Noka - Mixer -
Chrome Plated - Single Lever Basin Mixer.
- Cobra - Miscellaneous - Chrome - Angle
Regulating Valve.
- Waste, Traps and Overflows - Chrome Plated
- Basin Waste.
- Traps and Overflows - Chrome - Bottle Trap.
- Handle - Chrome - Gala Exp Medical EA
Lever.
OR
Disable Handle - Cobra Medical lever –tap-basin mixer (code
COB-NM-851).
SAN14
Staff Basin - Vaal Quail underslung vanity basin product - Female Toilets
(code 700400). - Male Toilets
- Canteen
Tap - Hansgrohe - Décor E2 - Basin Mixer - 100 -
Chrome - Single lever.
(1 tap/basin)
- Angle Valves: Hansgrohe - Chrome Angle
Valves.
- Trap Waste: Cobra 301 - 32, basin waste, CHR
PL/62 f flange, 80mm sank, slot.
- Hansgrohe angle valve regulating valve at
supply from wall and chromium plated pipe
connection from wall flange to tap flange to
tap.
- Clear silicone sealant along back rim and
sides against wall.
OR
- Cobra (Taps & Mixers) - Noka - Mixer -
Chrome Plated - Single Lever Basin Mixer.
Regulating Valve.
- Waste, Traps and Overflows - Chrome Plated
Basin Waste.
- Traps and Overflows - Chrome - Bottle
Trap.
OR
- Grohe Eurosmart single lever basin mixer –
Chrome (code GRO-32467001).

PAGE
213
SAN15
WC 1 - Vaal Orchid wall hung paraplegic pan (code - Disabled
439016). Complete with lid, fitments and C.P. Toilets
side-flush lever or a back inlet exposed flush
valve.
- Double flap toilet seat with sta-tite hinges
- 32mm Stainless steel side grab rail (code
D12).
OR
- Franke (code 2510012)
- Paper holder: Kimberley Clark professional
SQ3 white code SA 405 607.
- Seat & Lid: Bemis 16 SS toilet seat with sta-
tite hinges.
- Flushmaster FM1.100 with C-FM8.80
Extension lever
OR
- Grohe 120 concealed cistern (code
8962Z000) for floor mounted applications
with pneumatic push button.
OR
- Geberit Sigma 10 brushed stainless steel
actuator 115.787.SN.5 with kombifix cistern
110.772.00.1 - Pneumatic single flush and
stainless steel cover.
SAN16
WC 2 - Vaal Afsan low level 90 degree outlet - Female Toilets
washdown pan (code 750100). - Male Toilets
- Paperholder: Kimberley Clark professional S - Dispensary
Q3 white code SA 405 607. - Managers
- Seat & Lid: Bemis 7200 AR Toilet
- White PVC convection bend with cleaning
eye access & screw-cap.
- Cobra Watertech Junior Flush Master
Flush valve FJ2.100
OR
- Grohe 120 Concealed cistern (code
8962z000) with Grohe inlet/outlet connector
(code 8962z100).
- With Skate SS control panel (code 8965Z000)
OR

PAGE
214
- Geberit Sigma 10 brushed stainless steel

actuator 115.787.SN.5 with kombofix cistern
110.772.00.1.
SAN17
URINAL - Vaal Sweetpea - Urinal - White - Back Entry - Male Toilets
Urinal (705127).
- Notes: "Sweetpea" urinal wall hung with back
inlet fittings (code 7054Z2). Include a 38mm
c.p. domical grating, a spreader (with a 20mm
diameter thread), and two hanger brackets.
- Cobra - Cobratron - Electronic - Brass -
Urinal Flush Valve (EL-8.112).
- Cobra - Spares Centre - Electronic - Not
Applicable. - IP67 Transformer Box (EL-
TRANS3-M).
brackets
OR
- Grohe Tectron Skate IR electronic actuator
plate. Infra-red control.
OR
- Geberit sigma 10 urinal flush control –
electronic 116.035.SN.1
- Universal set for urinal 116.004.00.1
- Urinal flush pipe budget 119.704.11.1
- Urinal inlet set 152.489.16.1 with concealed
siphonic urinal trap.
SAN18
MIRROR 1 - 400w x 700 high x 6mm thick: Silver edge - Manager's
polished all round, fixed to wall with 4 no. Toilets
cupped mirror screws, fixed into fisher wall - Female Toilets
plugs, waterproofed backing. Mirror flush - Male Toilets
with wall tiles around. Mounted on wall, - Dispensary
centred over basin unit, starting from top
basin unit.
MIRROR 2 - 400w x 900 high x 6mm thick: Silver edge - Disabled

polished all round, fixed to wall with 4 no. Toilet
cupped mirror screws, fixed into fisher wall
plugs, waterproofed backing. Mirror flush
with wall tiles around. Mounted on wall,
centred over basin unit, starting from top
basin unit.

PAGE
215
SAN19
Sink in Canteen - Franke NVN621 Nouveau double bowl - Canteen Sink
stainless steel drop in sink (code 1990002). - Canteen Basin
Tap - Hansgrohe - Décor E2 - Mixer - Chrome -

Single lever basin mixer (Supplier code
31820000) chromium plated, with waste,
plugs, outlets, extension pipes and traps.
- Angle Valve: Hansgrohe - Chrome angle
valves (supplier code HG90610800).
- Clear silicone sealant between top of tilling
key and tiles, and at side edges.
OR
- Cobra Noka Sink mixer-Chrome plated
- Cobra Angle regulating valve-Chrome plated
- Cobra Bottle trap-Chrome
OR
- Grohe Eurosmart Cosmopolitan Sink mixer-
Chrome.
- Grohe Angle regulating valve-Chrome
- Cobra Bottle trap-Chrome
(code 365/40)
SAN20
Washtroughs - Franke: Model LDS drip sink (code 2630026). - Cleaners
Size 600 x 500 x 258mm deep, manufactured Room
in grade 304 (18/10) stainless steel size 600 x - Returns
500 x 257mm deep single compartment. Sorting
Fitted on a pair of eagle brackets mounted
600mm AFFL.
- Bibtap: Cobra 207 EC - 20- Star (cold water
supply) Chromium plate - Treaded nozzle
with hose union and chromium plated
extension pipe and flange: Cobra 058 + 059.
- Bibtap: Cobra 206 -15 - Star (hot water
supply) Bibtap with chromium plate extension
pipes and flange: Cobra 058 +059.
- Sealant: Silicone sealant along back rim and
sides against wall.
SAN21
Mixer Tap for Deli - Hansgrohe - Focus E - Mixer - Chrome - - Deli
Prep Bowl Single Lever Basin Mixer (code 31806000)
with waste, plugs, outlets, extension pipes

PAGE
216
and traps.
- Angle Valves: Hansgrohe - Chrome Angle
Valves (Supplier code HG90610800).
OR
- Cobra - Tugela - Mixer - Brass - Sink Mixer
(TU-970).
Regulating Valve (832 - 10).
- Cobra - Traps - Waste, Traps and Overflows -
Chrome Plated - Bath/Sink Waste (317 - 40).
- DPE - Du Bois - Waste, Traps and Overflows -
White - 40mm - Sink P-Trap (DB3A).
OR
- - Grohe Sink mixer-Chrome (code GRO-
31812001).
- - Grohe Universal angle valve –Chrome
(code GRO-2201700M).
SAN22
Sink & Vanity Basin - Dispensary Sink Unit: Kwikot Stainless - Sink
in Dispensary Classique (code SDI-880-DBR 870 x 470mm). - Vanity Basin
- Dispensary Vanity Basin Unit: Vaal sanitary
ware iceberg vanity basin 420 x 420mm (code
703400).
Tap - Hansgrohe - Décor E2 - Mixer - Chrome -

Single Lever basin mixer chromium plated,
with waste, plugs, outlets, extension pipes
and taps.
- Hansgrohe - Focus E2 - Prep Bowl Mixer
(Supplier code 31806000) chromium plated,
with waste, plugs, outlets, Extension pipes
and traps.
- Angle Valves: Hansgrohe - Chrome angle
valves.
OR
- Grohe Sink mixer-Chrome (code GRO-
31812001).
- Grohe Universal angle valve – Chrome
(code GRO-2201700M).
OR
- Cobra - Noka - Mixer - Chrome Plated -
Single Lever Basin Mixer (NA-952).
- Cobra - Cobra - Miscellaneous - Chrome -

PAGE
217
Angle Regulating Valve (832-10).

- Cobra - Waste - Waste, Traps and Overflows -
Chrome Plated - Basin Waste (303).
- Cobra - Traps - Waste, Traps and Overflows -
Chrome - Bottle Trap (340).
SAN23
Kiosk Sink - Small Gelato sink unit – 500 x 600 x 900h - Kiosk Sink
stainless steel counter with bowl in top bowl
size 400 x 350 x 200D and swing door below
includes all plumbing and fittings with
removable access panel.
Supplied as part of shopfitting
Tap
- Mixer tap: PMX 74 under basin mixer from
Kwikot

PAGE
218
SECTION 20.7: LIGHT FITTINGS

FRESH “X” - CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER (REVISION –A)
Department Type of Ceiling Type of Fitting Fitting Name Colour Supplier Suppliers Code Kelvin Temp Additional Notes
Fruit & Veg TDC Frame Track Spot B.Lee Black Oktalite B.Lee 3P LED4000‐BVC 05 special colour
General Food No Ceiling Track Spot B.Lee Black Oktalite B.Lee 3P LED4000‐830 05 3000K
Hot Deli Skimmed Ceiling Recessed Agira Plus Silver Oktalite AgiraPl LED4000‐830 03 3000K
Drop in Ceiling Recessed LED panel White Province Lighting Theia-R/6x6/80/40/36/Op 4000K
Cold Deli TDC Frame Recessed Scenatic Point White Oktalite SncPoint 905 C02 BR‐FL LED1100‐830 01 3000K
No Ceiling Track Spot B.Lee Mini Black Oktalite B.LeeMini 3P LED4000‐830 05 3000K
Wine Skimmed Ceiling Track Spot B.Lee Mini Black Oktalite B.LeeMini 3P LED4000‐830 05 3000K
Skimmed Ceiling Suspended Pendant Lights by Linear Pen 0441 Over tasting counter
Butchery + Fish Skimmed Ceiling Recessed Agira Plus Silver Oktalite AgiraPl LED3000‐M+F 03 special colour 4000K
No Ceiling Track Spot Amatris B.Lee White Black Oktalite B.Lee 3P LED3000‐M+F 05 special colour
If service area have skimmed
Skimmed Ceiling Recessed Amatris White Oktalite Amatris G2 C04 WR LED2000‐840 01 4000K
ceiling and not drop in
Skimmed Ceiling Suspended Pendant Lights by Linear PEN0441 Over Counter
Bakery Skimmed Ceiling Recessed Agira Plus Silver Oktalite AgiraPl LED4000‐BVC 03 special colour
Skimmed Ceiling Recessed Nimbus Silver Oktalite NimbusVP HRS‐WW LED4000‐BVC 03 special colour
Skimmed Ceiling Recessed Amatris White Oktalite Amatris G2 C04 WR LED2000‐830 01 3000k If service area have skimmed
ceiling and not drop in
No Ceiling Track Spot B.Lee Black Oktalite B.Lee 3P LED4000‐BVC 05 special colour
Kitchen Shop TDC Frame Track Spot B.Lee Mini Black Oktalite B.LeeMini 3P LED4000‐840 05 4000K
Health & Beauty Skimmed Ceiling Recessed Agira Silver Oktalite Agira LED4000‐840 03 4000K
Dispensary Skimmed Ceiling Recessed Agira Silver Oktalite Agira LED4000‐840 03 4000K
Skimmed Ceiling Recessed Amatris White Oktalite Amatris G2 C04 WR LED2000‐840 01 4000K
Skimmed Ceiling Recessed Aegeon 195 White Province Lighting Aegeon 195/80/40 4000K
Money Market Skimmed Ceiling Recessed Agira Plus Silver Oktalite AgiraPl LED4000‐840 03 4000K
Kiosk Skimmed Ceiling Recessed Agira Plus Silver Oktalite AgiraPl LED4000‐840 03 4000K
Manager offices Skimmed Ceiling Recessed Agira Plus Silver Oktalite AgiraPl LED4000‐840 03 4000K
Entrance
Skimmed Recessed Agira Plus Silver Oktalite AgiraPl LED4000‐840 03 4000K
Bulkhead/Ceiling
Check outs TDC Frame Pendant Bali Black/Orange Oktalite OL Bali500 LED5000‐835 3500K Only in Fresh-X stores
No Ceiling/Ceiling Continuous Line C‐Line Black Oktalite 7640TB LED9000‐840 ET 05 4000K No TDC Frame
Signage above services
No Ceiling Track Spot B.Lee Black Oktalite B.Lee 3P LED4000‐835 05 3500K
departments
General trade floor No Ceiling/Ceiling Continuous Line C‐Line Black Oktalite 7640TB LED9000‐840 ET 05 4000K
Front line offices Drop in Ceiling Recessed LED panel White Province Lighting Theia-R/6x6/80/40/36/Op 4000K
BOH & Staff Room No Ceiling/Ceiling Surface Saxa White Province Lighting saxa/80/40/54w Triproof 4000k
Bulk Store & Cold Room No Ceiling/Ceiling Surface Saxa White Province Lighting saxa/80/40/54w Triproof 4000k
No Ceiling/Ceiling Surface Metropolis White Province Lighting Metropolis/84/40/48 4000k Cold rooms
White Inside
And Outside
Tech X No Ceiling Suspended Pendant Lights by Linear PEN0441 4000K
With Black
Cable
White Inside
And Blue
No Ceiling Suspended Pendant Lights by Linear PEN0441 4000K
Outside With
Black Cable
With mounting bracket and
No Ceiling In Joinery LED Stip White LED SA CDE 4000K
drivers
With mounting bracket and
No Ceiling In Joinery LED Stip White LED SA Luminis E3 4000K
drivers
No Ceiling In Joinery LED Stip Black LED SA DAE 35 4000K With drivers
Installed In
No Ceiling LED Stip White LED SA CDE-S 23W 816mm 4000K
Gondola End
No Ceiling Recessed Downlight White LED SA DL HR ECO 4000K Adjustable LED
No Ceiling Suspended LED Fitting Black LED SA GL_590_ETE_45W4KCGS 4000K
No Ceiling Suspended LED Fitting Black LED SA GL_1200_ETE_45W4KCG 4000K
No Ceiling Suspended LED Fitting Black LED SA GL_1500_ETE_55w4KCG 4000K
No Ceiling Suspended LED Fitting Black LED SA GL_2200_ETE_85W4KCG 4000K
Mounted 1800mm away from

No Ceiling Track Spot BVEO Spot White Oktalite BVEO 32W With WFL Reflector 4000K
shelf with 1000mm track
Standed panel wire, 80mm
CDE-S 24V 23W/m (NL100MM),1816mm
Personal Care No Ceiling LED Stip LED SA 4000K Tail, Opal Cover,CDE-R/S
length
Metal Clip
CDE-S 24V 23W/m (NL100MM),1816mm Standed Cabtyre, 3000mm Tail,

No Ceiling LED Stip LED SA 4000K
length Opal Cover,CDE-R/S Metal Clip
FRT5 Toolclip stainless,

No Ceiling LED Strip LED SA FRT5 24V 23W/m (NL100MM), 816mm length 4000K 3000mm tail, FRT5 Grey
endcaps
Coffee Skimmed Ceiling Suspended Pendant Lights by Linear PEN0441 Over counter
Café Skimmed Ceiling Suspended Pendant Illumina Royal super dome pendant Suspended in bulkhead
Skimmed Ceiling Suspended Pendant Province Lighting Type A: PPEN-DS-BW Banquet seating
Skimmed Ceiling Suspended Pendant Province Lighting Type B: PPEN-DS-CW Banquet seating

GENERAL
DETAILS - C INDEX 21
SECTION 21.1 GENERAL DETAILS

NUMBER DESCRIPTION
DET01 TYPICAL DETAILS FOR COLD OR FREEZER ROOMS ON EXISTING
CONCRETE SUSPENDED SLAB
DET02 TYPICAL DETAILS FOR COLD ROOM AND FREEZER RECESSED IN NEW
CONCRETE SUSPENDED SLAB
DET03 TYPICAL DETAILS FOR FREEZER RECESSED IN CONCRETE SURFACE

BED
DET04 TYPICAL DETAILS FOR COLD ROOM ON CONCRETE SURFACE BED
DET05 TYPICAL WATERPROOFING DETAILS FOR FOOD PREP AREAS ON

SUSPENDED FLOOR SLABS
DET06 TYPICAL DETAIL FOR INSULATION IN FREEZER FLOOR
DET07 TYPICAL PROOVER SECTIONS 1 OF 2
DET08 TYPICAL PROOVER SECTIONS 2 OF 2
DET09 TYPICAL FULLBORE DETAIL - VERTICAL TYPE OUTLET WITH DOMICAL
GRATING
DET10 TYPICAL PIPE PENETRATIONS ON SUSPENDED RC SLAB
DET11 BAKERITE' STEEL TILES
DET12 TILING & CONCRETE FLOOR TRANSITION AND EXPANSION JOINT DET.
DET13 TYPICAL BOLLARD
DET14 TYPICAL SERVICE TRENCH (300 - 600mm); MAX 500mm DEEP
DET15 DETAIL OF STAIRS AT LOADING PLATFORM
DETAIL OF HANDRAIL TO STAIRCASE AT FIRE ESCAPE AT MEZZANINE
DET16
FLOOR
DET17 DETAIL OF STAIRCASE AT REFRIGERATION PLANTROOM

DET18 DETAIL OF STAIRCASE AT MEZZANINE STORAGE AREA
DET19 DETAIL OF GENERATOR PLINTH
DET20 DETAIL OF WATER TANK PLINTH & DIAGRAM
DET21 SECTION THROUGH MAIN DB PLINTH
DET22 DETAIL OF BUMPERS AT LOADING PLATFORM
DET23 DETAIL OF CANOPY AT STAFF ENTRANCE AND BUTCHERY RECEIVING
DET24 LOADING DOCK DETAIL
DET25 DETAIL OF CANOPY AT RECEIVING CAGES
DET26 DETAIL OF CONVEYOR IN STORAGE AREA

DET27 DETAIL OF TAP FOR BAKERY DOUGH MIXER
GENERAL

NUMBER DESCRIPTION
DET28 DETAIL OF MAIN ENTRANCE BULKHEAD
DET29 DETAIL OF FHR & NICHE BULKHEAD
DET30 DETAIL OF BULKHEAD AT WING WALLS
DET31 DETAIL OF BULKHEAD AT FRONT OFFICES
DET32 DETAIL OF BULKHEAD OVER COUNTER LINE-UP
DET33 DETAIL OF CEILING IN FRONT OF COLD RM & FREEZER
DET34 DETAIL OF FIRE WALLS AT FRONT OF HOUSE & BACK OF HOUSE
DET35 TYPICAL DETAIL HORIZONTAL SUPPORT (SUB-FRAME)
DET36 DETAIL FOR FIXING SERVICES (EXCL. LIGHTS) HANGERS TO ROOF
PURLINS
DET37 DETAIL OF STAIR STEP EDGE PROFILE AT OFFICE & STAFF FACILITIES
DET38 DETAIL OF TYPICAL TROLLEY BAY
DET39 DETAIL OF TYPICAL EXTERNAL TROLLEY BAY
DET40 DETAIL OF TYPICAL RESTRICTOR BOOM AT PARKING ENTRANCE
DET41 TYPICAL EXTRACTION CANOPY FOR PREP AREAS
DET42 FLOOR DRAINS ON SUSPENDED SLAB
DET43 TYPICAL FLOOR DRAIN: KD/FT 1
DET46 TYPICAL FLOOR DRAINS:
1. HERBISH 200V FLOOR DRAINS(COLD ROOM) &
2. HERBISH 125H SHOWER TRAP(STAFF CANTEEN & TOILETS)
3. Ø50 mm COBRA BRASS TRAP(PROOVERS & OVENS)
DET47 TYPICAL RODDING EYE DETAIL
DET48 TYPICAL DETAILS FOR CHECKERS CHECKOUTS 1 OF 3
DET51 TYPICAL DETAILS FOR CHECKERS EXPRESS
CHECKOUTS 1 OF 3
CHECKOUTS 2 OF 3
CHECKOUTS 3 OF 3
DET54 TYPICAL HOIST DETAILS & SPECIFICATION (1 OF 2)
DET54 TYPICAL HOIST DETAILS & SPECIFICATION (2 OF 2)
DET55 CORNER PROTECTORS 1 OF 3
GENERAL

NUMBER DESCRIPTION
DET58 BUMP RAILS IN BOH
DET59 SPLASH RIDGE DETAIL AND BUMPER RAIL
DET60 BUTCHERY LOW WALL DETAIL
DET61 BUTCHERY GLASS WALL DETAIL
DET62 COLUMN DETAILS
DET63 TYPICAL SKIRTING TILE
DET64 TYPICAL CAGES 1 OF 3
GENERAL
DETAILS - C DET01 21

POLYSCREED
CONCRETE FLOOR (25MPa) 10X10mmPOLYSULPHIDE SEALANT JOINT

AROUND THE INTERNAL PERIMETER OF
THE COLD ROOM /FREEZER PRIME
INSULATION BY OTHERS JOINT BEFORE PLACING THE SEALANT
WALL PANEL
10
100
*
DPC
SIKA CEMFLEX WATERPROOFING

MEMBRANE
EXISTING CONCRETE SUSPENDED SLAB
TYPICAL SECTION TROUGH WALL

SCRABBLE THE SURFACE OF THE
EXISTING CONCRETE SURFACE BED
TO REMOVE REMAINING PAINT OR OTHER 20mm THK POLYSCREED
CONTAMINANTS ON THE SURFACE. THE THICKENING ACROSS DOOR
BACKGROUND MUST BE CLEAN, OPENING
DRY, FIRM AND FREE OF DUST
AND LOOSE PARTICLES BEFORE
PROCEEDING.
HEATER ELEMENT(BY OTHERS) FREEZERS
ONLY
POLYSCREED
WALL PANEL
CONCRETE FLOOR(25MPa)
DOOR
100x75x6 ANGLE (GALVANISED)

WITH LUGS CAST INTO STEP
INSULATION BY OTHERS
10
20
100
300
*
DPC

MEMBRANE
EXISTING CONCRETE SUSPENDED SLAB
*= DIMENSION BY OTHERS TYPICAL SECTION TROUGH DOOR
NOTE:
1. POLYSCREED TO BE APPLIED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS.

2. THE PREPARED SURFACE IS TO BE SATURATED WITH WATER 24 HOURS BEFORE THE POLYSCREED IS
APPLIED.
3. THE TEMPERATURE IN COLD ROOMS AND FREEZERS CAN ONLY BE DROPPED AFTER 5 DAYS AND
BELOW FREEZING POINT 7 DAYS AFTER THE POLYSCREED HAS BEEN LAID.
4. POLYSCREED AVAILABLE FROM "TECHNICAL FINISHES" (011) 8227242
DETAIL : TYPICAL DETAILS FOR COLD OR FREEZER ROOMS

ON EXISTING CONCRETE SUSPENDED SLAB
GENERAL DETAILS SCALE: 1:20 REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -
GENERAL
POLYSCREED

TO REMOVE REMAINING PAINT OR OTHER
CONTAMINANTS ON THE SURFACE. THE
BACKGROUND MUST BE CLEAN,
PROCEEDING.
CONCRETE INFILL
(15MPa)
EXISTING CONCRETE
CONCRETE FLOOR(25MPa) SURFACE BED
INSULATION BY OTHERS detail A
WALL PANEL
10
100
50
*
DPC
75
SIKA CEMFLEX
WATER PROOFING
MEMBRANE
75mm THK CONCRETE

BLINDING (15MPa)
POLYSCREED
DRY, FIRM AND FREE OF DUST HEATER ELEMENT(BY OTHERS) FREEZERS
AND LOOSE PARTICLES BEFORE ONLY
PROCEEDING.
CONCRETE INFILL
(15MPa)
WALL PANEL
DOOR
CONCRETE FLOOR(25MPa) EXISTING CONCRETE

SURFACE BED
10
20
100
300
*
DPC
75
SIKA CEMFLEX
WATER PROOFING
MEMBRANE
75mm THK CONCRETE

BLINDING (15MPa)
TYPICAL SECTION TROUGH DOOR * = DIMENSION BY OTHERS
NOTE:
APPLIED.
DETAIL : TYPICAL DETAILS FOR COLD ROOM & FREEZER

RECESSED IN NEW CONCRETE SUSPENDED SLAB
GENERAL
POLYSCREED

PROCEEDING.
CONCRETE INFILL
(15MPa)
NEW CONCRETE
CONCRETE FLOOR(30MPa) SUSPENDED SLAB
WALL PANEL
10
100
50
*
DPC
75
SIKA CEMFLEX
WATER PROOFING
MEMBRANE
75mm THK CONCRETE

BLINDING (15MPa)
POLYSCREED
TO REMOVE REMAINING PAINT OR OTHER CONTAMINANTS
ON THE SURFACE. THE BACKGROUND MUST BE CLEAN,
PROCEEDING. HEATER ELEMENT(BY OTHERS) FREEZERS
ONLY
CONCRETE INFILL
(15MPa)
WALL PANEL
DOOR
CONCRETE FLOOR(30MPa) NEW CONCRETE

SUSPENDED SLAB
10
20
100
300
*
DPC
75
SIKA CEMFLEX
WATER PROOFING
MEMBRANE
75mm THK CONCRETE

BLINDING (15MPa)
TYPICAL SECTION TROUGH DOOR * = DIMENSION BY OTHERS
NOTE:
APPLIED.
DETAIL : TYPICAL DETAILS FOR FREEZER RECESSED IN

CONCRETE SURFACE BEDS
GENERAL

TO REMOVE REMAINING PAINT OR
OTHER CONTAMINANTS ON THE
SURFACE. THE BACKGROUND MUST
BE CLEAN,
DRY, FIRM AND FREE OF DUST 300 X 20mm THICK
AND LOOSE PARTICLES BEFORE POLYSCREED
PROCEEDING. THICKENING ACROSS DOOR
OPENING ONLY
HEATER ELEMENT(BY OTHERS)

FREEZERS ONLY
10MM THICK
POLYSCREED
WALL PANEL
DOOR
10 x 10mm POLYSULPHIDE
SEALANT JOINT AROUND THE detail 1
INTERNAL PERIMETER OF THE
COLD ROOM/FREEZER. PRIME
10
JOINT BEFORE PLACING THE

SEALANT. 30020
EXIST. CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB
TYPICAL SECTION TROUGH COLD ROOM

SCALE 1:10
*= DIMENSION BY OTHERS
300 X 20mm THICK POLYSCREED

THICKENING ACROSS DOOR
OPENING ONLY
DOOR
20
EXIST. CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB
DETAIL 1
NOTE: SCALE 1:2
APPLIED.
DETAIL : TYPICAL DETAILS FOR COLD ROOM ON CONCRETE

SURFACE BEDS
GENERAL

WALL TILES
SKIRTING TILE
AT 45 DEGREES

MEMBRANE
TAL GOLDSTAR "6" ADHESIVE (TALBOND TO
REPLACE WATER IN MIX.) TAL EPOXY GROUT
(FINE)
PORCELAIN FLOOR TILES (BY

WALL ARCHITECT)
SCREED LAYER TO FALLS (NORMAL OR RAPID

NON-FOOD PREP AREA FOOD PREP AREA HARDENING) - 20mm THK MIN.
150
SUSPENDED RC SLAB
DETAIL : TYPICAL WATERPROOFING DETAILS FOR FOOD PREP

AREAS ON SUSPENDED FLOOR SLABS
GENERAL

TAPE MEMBRANE TO WALL
FOR POURING CONCRETE.
TRIM MEMBRANE FLUSH
AFTER POURING CONCRETE
AND POLYSULPHIDE
SEALANT ALL ROUND REFRIGERANT SEALANT
ERECTION CAVITY (50mm)

TO BE FILLED WITH
65mm ALUMINIUM CONCRETE AFTER FREEZER
CORNER COVING WITH INSTALLATION
GREY SILICONE SEALANT
65mm ALUMINIUM
CORNER COVING WITH
10mm THICK GREY SILICONE SEALANT
POLYSCREED BY BUILDER
50
WALL PANEL
0,8mm BENT WHITE

FFL EX. FFL
CHROMODEK CHANNEL
REFRIGERANT SEALANT
CONCRETE BY BUILDER +/-200
150 MICRON MEMBRANE TO
RETAIN CONCRETE
INSULATION 100mm
POLYURETHANE
150 MICRON VAPOUR

MEMBRANE
CONCRETE SLAB
RESCESSED BY OTHERS, TO
ACCOMODATE INSULATION
CONCRETE
SOLID FILL OR BASEMENT

OR MEZZANINE
NOTE:
APPLIED.
DETAIL A: TYPICAL DETAILS FOR INSULATION IN FREEZER FLOOR

GENERAL

STAINLESS STEEL
SIDE OF PROOVER
SCREED 1,100 1,100
TILES F.D DETAIL 1
DETAIL 2 F.D F.D
25
10
CONCRETE
SURFACE BED OR
20
RC SLAB
SECTION A-A 228 228

SCALE 1 : 25 456
FULL TILES FULL TILES
TYPICAL PROOVER 5
100 100
406
FULL TILES
6
406
A A
50mm DIA STAINLESS
STEEL DRAIN
FULL TILES
6
25
5
ESA 150 "GENESIS"

ALUMINIUM
STRAIGHT EDGE TRIM
PLAIN
PROOVER DOOR
TYPICAL PROOVER LAYOUT

SCALE 1 : 25
NOTE:
APPLIED.
DETAIL : TYPICAL PROOVER SECTIONS 1 OF 2
GENERAL DETAILS SCALE: VARIES REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

GENERAL

FLOOR DRAIN: Ø50mm
COBRA BRASS TRAP(GMS
outlet) CHROME PLATED SQUARE
GRATING
4°
10
SCREED
20
CONCRETE
SURFACE BED OR RC SLAB
1 1/2" FEMALE GMS

OUTLET
228 228
456
DETAIL 1
SCALE 1 : 10
STAINLESS STEEL
SIDE OF PROOVER
CONTINUOUS POLYSULPHIDE
SEALANT BEAD
TILES
5
2
TILE ADHESIVE
SCREED
CONCRETE
SURFACE BED OR RC SLAB
DETAIL 2
SCALE 1 : 2
NOTE:
APPLIED.
DETAIL : TYPICAL PROOVER SECTIONS 2 OF 2

GENERAL DETAILS SCALE: 1:2; 1:10 REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -
GENERAL

OPEN PLANT ROOM
DEVILS FORK
PALISADE FENCE
TO SCHEDULE
1850
SEE FULLBORE
DETAIL
WATERPROOFING
SCREED
SLAB BY 250
ENGINEER
TYPICAL SECTION OF FULLBORE
Grating: Fullflow outlet -

removable dome
10mm mastic joint
SCALE 1:10 waterproofing lapping concrete
with 200mm
screed to fall
torch-on waterproofing -
bituthene or similar
new suspended concrete slab
as per Structural Eng. details
refer to schedule of finishes

for fullbore specifications
water discharge pipe -

Ø100mm UPVC downpipe
DETAIL OF FULLBORE
DETAIL : TYPICAL FULLBORE DETAIL - VERTICAL TYPE OUTLET

WITH DOMICAL GRATING
GENERAL

TAL EPOXY (FINE) GROUT
PIPE
REPAIR SCREED
NEW TILES
MEMBRANE FOR 1m ARROUND
FLOOR DRAIN AND DRESSED UP
AGAINST SIDES OF PIP
EXIST. SCREED
CLOSE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
ARROUND PIPE WITH 2mm
BINDING WIRE
CHAULK SOLID OPENING

BETWEEN DRAIN AND
SLAB EDGE WITH HIGH
STRENGTH GROUT
EXISTING CONCRETE
RC SLAB
SECTION: PIPE PENETRATIONS ON

SUSPENDED RC SLAB
SCALE 1:10

REFRIGERATION CABINET
DRAINAGE PIPE
uPVC PLAIN FEMALE STOP END (SEE
TABLE FOR SUITABLE SIZE)
CUT OPENING IN LID TO SUITE
DRAINAGE PIPE
FIX STOP END TO TOP

OF TILES WITH
POLYSULPHIDE
SEALANT
TILES
CORE DRILLED
PENETRATION IN SLAB
EXISTING CONCRETE
RC SLAB
STOP END SIZE :
DIAMETER OF DIAMETER OF
PENETRATION STOP END
SECTION: REFRIGERATION DRAINAGE PIPE (mm) (mm)
PENETRATIONS ON SUSPENDED RC SLAB
100 160
SCALE 1:10
150 200
DETAIL : TYPICAL PIPE PENETRATIONS ON SUSPENDED RC SLAB

GENERAL

OVEN OVEN OVEN
C/L
5
s.o.p.
A A
1,400
5x5mm polysulphide sealant joint around perimeter of tiles.

5
5 5
5,250
345x345 "BAKERITE" steel tiles bedded in SIKA grout '212'

in strict accordance with manufactures' specifications.
LAYOUT PLAN Steel tiles laid against each other i.e. no joints between tiles.
SCALE 1:50
5x5mm POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT

JOINT WITH POLYETHELENE
BACKING CHORD
BREAK AWAY EXISTING

SCREED LAYER TO
FIT STEEL TILES 5
'BAKERITE' STEEL TILES
BED STEEL TILES IN HIGH

STRENGTH SCREED(3 SAND,
1 CEMENT MIX)
EXISTING SAND / CEMENT SCREED
12mm THICK TILES

TILE ADHESIVE
DETAIL
SCALE 1 : 2
NOTE:
1. ALL PRODUCTS SPECIFIED TO BE APPLIED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURERS

SPECIFICATIONS.
2. STEEL TILES AVAILABLE FROM "BAKERITE INDUSTRIES" IN DURBAN. TEL: 031-700 5288
DETAIL : 'BAKERITE' STEEL TILES

GENERAL

PORCELAIN TILES
"GENESIS" ESA
ALUMINIUM EDGE TRIM ANGLE
POLYSCREED
TOP OF EXISTING
60
CONCRETE SURFACE BED
STRAIGHT CUT WITH CONCRETE

22
CUTTING EQUIPMENT TO FORM
RECESS IN EXISTING CONCRETE
SURFACE BED 300
EXISTING CONCRETE
SURFACE BED
RECESS
STRAIGHT CUT WITH CONCRETE
CUTTING EQUIPMENT TO FORM
RECESS IN EXISTING CONCRETE
SURFACE BED
NOTE:
8mm THK PORCELAIN TILES = "GENESIS" ESA 120 ALUMINIUM EDGE TRIM
12mm THK PORCELAIN TILES = "GENESIS" ESA 150 ALUMINIUM EDGE TRIM
TYPICAL PORCELAIN & CONCRETE FLOOR TRANSITION

SCALE 1:10
COMPRIFIX 15 / 38 EXPANSION
JOINT COVER STRIP - TOP TO BE
FLUSH WITH TOP OF TILES
TILE ADHESIVE
8 / 12mm THK TILES TILE GROUT

3 TO 4 3 TO 4 8
EXISTING SCREEN
(IF ANY)
COUNTER SUNK SCREW WITH

FISHER PLUG @ 500mm c/c
RC SLAB
TYPICAL EXPANSION JOINT DETAIL EXISTING EXPANSION

(TILE ON CONCRETE) JOINT IN RC SLAB
SCALE 1:5
DETAIL : TILING & CONCRETE FLOOR TRANSITION

DETAIL : TYPICAL EXPANSION JOINT DETAIL
GENERAL DETAILS SCALE: 1:5, 1:10 REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -
GENERAL

MASS CONCRETE
INFILL
(15MPa)
1,000
219x4,5mm
CIRCULAR HOLLOW
SECTION
1,200
600x600x1,3m DEEP
MASS CONCRETE
(15MPa) SURROUND
100
600
TYPICAL BOLLARD
SCALE 1:25
DETAIL : TYPICAL BOLLARD

GENERAL

150mm THK CONCRETE SLAB
OVER TRENCH (25MPa)
PORCELAIN TILES
50mm DEEP SAW-CUT JOINT
TO FORM STRAIGHT EDGE BEFORE
BREAKING OF EXISTING
SURFACE BED.3mm WIDE MOVEMENT JOINT
IN FINISHES. SEALED WITH FLEXIBLE
SEALANT. COLOUR TO MATCH GROUT
EXISTING CONCRETE 6mm SHUTTER

SURFACE BED BOARD
50
150
500 MAX.
WEAK FLOWABLE SAND/CEMENT
MIX (10:1) VIBRATED INTO PLACE
HALF BRICK
WALL
75mmTHK CONCRETE BED

(15MPa)
75
110 110
SEE REFRIDGERATION
ENGINEER'S DRAWING
(300 - 600mm WIDE)
TYPICAL SERVICE TRENCH (300 - 600mm WIDE)
(MAX 500mm DEEP)

SCALE 1:10
DETAIL : TYPICAL SERVICE TRENCH (300 - 600mm); MAX 500mm DEEP

RISER: 162
SCALE 1:10
TREAD: 250
162
65
75
250
275
25
GENERAL DETAILS
25
TYPICAL DETAIL: TREAD & RISER

GENERAL
GRANO
75 mm REEDING IN
DETAILS - C
LOADING PLATFORM
STANDARD 2 RAIL 43mm DIA. 8
SCALE: 120
MACLOCK STEEL HOLLOW TUBE
BALUSTRADING 7
50x50x6 mm L-IRON ANCHOR 6

CASTED INTO CONCRETE.
5
4
1300
REV DATE:
DETAIL OF STAIRS AT LOADING PLATFORM
75 mm REEDING IN GRANO
2
25 mm THICK UNTINTED 1
HARDENED GRANO
LOADING YARD 1,477
10.04.2019
REV -
DET15 21

GENERAL

50
900-950mm HEIGHT FROM STAIR NOSE
A
WALL
50
NOTE:
A. HANDRAIL Ø42 X 2.5MM GALVANISED M/STEEL PIPE ENDS CLOSED WITH DISC PLATES FULLY
WELDED, NEATLY GROUND SMOOTH.
B. STIRRUP Ø12mm SOLID GMS ROD FED INFOR HOLE DRILLED IN BASE OF H.RAIL & WELDED. END
SPLIT & FLAIRED, AND EPOXY GROUTED INTO HOLE DRILLED IN WALL.
SYMMETRICALLY SPACED OVER HANDRAIL LENGTH & MAX. 1500mm APART, WITH STIRRUP
NOT MORE THAN 400mm FROM EACH END.
C. DISC PLATE 40 X 5mm WITH Ø13mm HOLE DRILLED IN CENTRE FOR STIRRUP TO PASS THROUGH,
SPOT-WELDED ON REVERSE SIDE TO STIRRUP.
FINISH: IF POSSIBLE LOCALLY. USE M/STEEL ELEMENTS AND HOT-DIP-GALVANISED EACH UNIT
OTHERWISE USE GMS ELEMENTS AS ABOVE AND APPLY COLD-GALV TO WELDS.
DETAIL OF HANDRAIL TO STAIRCASE AT FIRE ESCAPE AT

MEZZANINE FLOOR
GENERAL

UP
PALISADE FENCE
CONDENSOR REFRIGERATION
PALISADE FENCE
PLANTROOM - UNCOVERED
50 SQM
PALISADE FENCE
TYPICAL PLAN: STAIRCASE OF REFRIGERATION PLANTROOM

SCALE 1 : 100
PALISADE FENCE GATE
STANDARD MENTIS
HANDRAIL
190
STEEL STAIRCAASE TO
ENG. DETAILS 250
TREADS = 250mm
NGL RISERS = 190mm
TYPICAL SIDE VIEW: STAIRCASE OF REFRIGERATION PLANTROOM

SCALE 1 : 50
DETAIL OF STAIRCASE AT REFRIGERATION PLANTROOM

GENERAL

LINTOL STAIR
SLAB FOR STAIR
STEP
0.090
90 x 90 x6mm M/STEEL
ANGLE IRON ATTACHED TO
WALL WITH 2 x M10 HILTY
HIT-HY 50 ANCHORS AS
PER ENG. DETAIL
TYPICAL DETAIL
MEZZANINE
TOP OF SLAB
SCALE 1:10
STD. CHECKERS
HANDRAIL
DETAIL
NGL
TYPICAL SIDE VIEW: STAIRCASE TO MEZZANINE STORAGE AREA

SCALE 1 : 100
up
MEZZANINE STORAGE AREA -

COVERED
PLAN VIEW: STAIRCASE TO MEZZANINE STORAGE AREA

SCALE: 1:100
DETAIL OF STAIRCASE AT MEZZANINE STORAGE AREA

GENERAL

5000
BACKUP GENERATOR
2500
REF 193 MESH
2 BRICKS HIGH SINGLE SKIN

RIGHT AROUND TO CONTAIN
PLINTH OIL & DIESEL
00
50
200
2.500
NOTE:
1. 30 MPA CONCRETE
2. REF 193 WIRE MESH SUSPENDED FROM THE FLOOR
3. SLOPE PLINTH TO ALLOW FOR 50mm STOP VALVE FOR DRAIN
DETAIL OF GENERATOR PLINTH

GENERAL

JoJo Manufacturer: Walrus Pumps
10000L
Flow Rate: 235 l/m
Head: 40 m
Pressure: Adjustable to 4 Bar
Power: 5 HP
Voltage:
Single Phase,220-240v, 50Hz

200
200 200 Inlet: 2 Inch

2,400
2,800 Outlet: 2 Inch
TYPICAL ELEVATION: WATER
TANK PLINTH THICKNESS Inverter Controlled
SCALE NTS
10 000L BACK- 10 000L BACK-

UP WATER UP WATER
RESERVOIR RESERVOIR
40mm BRASS
FLOAT VALVE
BALL OR
GATE VALVE
UNION
(WITH
P PRESSURE
SWITCH)
TYPICAL WATER TANK

UNION
INSTALLATION DIAGRAM
BALL OR CITY COUNCIL
SCALE 1:50
GATE VALVE MAIN VALVE & METER
Model No: TPH12T4KSIC

WATER SUPPLY TO STORE
(CLOSED)
BYPASS VALVE
DETAIL OF WATER TANK PLINTH & DIAGRAM

GENERAL

N DB ON PLINTH MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD ON 150mm PLINTH
750
750
5,590
TYPICAL PLAN OF MAIN DB ON PLINTH
SCALE 1:50
60 x 60 x 4mm ANGLE
CORNER PROTECTOR
FIXED ON EDGE
MAIN
DB BOARD
150
750
BRICK
WALL
150
SURFACEBED
TYPICAL SECTION OF MAIN DB ON PLINTH
NOTE:
1. DETAIL TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH ELECTRICAL CONSULTANTS DRAWING
DETAIL : SECTION THROUGH MAIN DB PLINTH

SCALE 1:10
GENERAL DETAILS SCALE: 1:50, 1:10 REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -
GENERAL

ROLLER SHUTTER
LOADING
DETAIL DETAIL DETAIL PLATFORM
400
GROUND LEVEL
1,000 1,000
TYPICAL ELEVATION OF BUMPERS AT LOADING PLATFORM

3 x BUMPERS AS PER DETAIL
TRUCK
SCALE 1:20
TRUCK
100 x 100 x 10mm THICK

M/STEEL ANGLE FIXED AS PER
LOADING PLATFORM
CONCRETE ENG. SPECIFICATION

LOADING PLATFORM
CANOPY ABOVE
CUIRTAIN
400
STRIP
BUMPER
TRUCK
TYPICAL PLAN: LOADING

PLATFORM WITH BUMPERS DETAIL: LOADING PLATFORM WITH BUMPERS
SCALE 1:100
DETAIL OF BUMPERS AT LOADING PLATFORM
GENERAL DETAILS SCALE: VARIOUS REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

GENERAL

FLASHING
SHEETING TO MATCH
BUILDING
50 x 50mm ANGLE IRON
SIDE CLADDING
TRUSS & PURLINS TO ENG.

DESIGN
VERTICAL FLASHING
500
1,500
NEW 220mm WALL

2,200
EXTERIOR
BUTCHERY RECEIVING &
STAFF ENTRANCE
FLOOR
NOTE:
1. ROLLER SHUTTER AT BUTCHERY RECEIVING ONLY
DETAIL OF CANOPY AT STAFF ENTRANCE &

BUTCHERY RECEIVING
GENERAL

REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB AS
PER ENGS. DETAILS &
SPECIFICATIONS
100 x 75 x 6mm THICK HEAVY

DUTY GALVANIZED STEEL ANGLE
FFL FOR FULL LENGTH OF LOADING
DOCK, ANCHORED INTO CONCRETE
SLAB AS PER ENGS.
SPECIFICATIONS
100
115 x 95mm BUMPERS AS PER
UNI CAPE EQUIPMENT (PTY) LTD
TYPE M12/4 DB402D (OEA),
FIXED VERTICALLY TO
MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS
IN FRONT OF LOADING DOCK @
CENTRES AS INDICATED ON GF
PLAN, C202
1,350 - HEIGHT TO BE CONFIRMED
900
CONCRETE RETAINING WALL WITH

FOUNDATION & BACKFILLING AS
PER ENGS. DETAILS
POWERFLOATED CONCRETE SLAB

TO ENGS. SPECIFICATIONS
350
FFL
SECTION:
SCALE 1:10
PLAN DETAIL
OF BUMPERS
SCALE 1:5
DETAIL : LOADING DOCK DETAIL

GENERAL

100 x 75 x 6mm THICK HEAVY
DUTY GALVANIZED STEEL ANGLE
FOR FULL LENGTH OF LOADING
DOCK, ANCHORED INTO CONCRETE
SLAB AS PER ENGS.
LOADING PLATFORM SPECIFICATIONS
100
115 x 95mm BUMPERS AS PER
UNI CAPE EQUIPMENT (PTY) LTD
TYPE M12/4 DB402D (OEA),
FIXED VERTICALLY TO
MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS
IN FRONT OF LOADING DOCK @
CENTRES AS INDICATED ON GF
PLAN, C202
REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB AS

PER ENGS. DETAILS &
SPECIFICATIONS
DETAIL: LOADING PLATFORM WITH BUMPERS

3500
FLASHING SIDE
CLADDING
CANOPY AT 3°
VERTICAL
FLASHING
TRUSS &
PURLINS TO
SCALE 1:10 ENG. DESIGN
RECEIVING AREA
RECEIVING YARD
3,450
2400
4,800
DETAIL
1.5° SLOPE
1500
1,350
NGL
FOUNDATION TO FOUNDATION TO
ENG. DETAIL ENG. DETAIL
NOTE:
1. STEEL STRUCTURE TO ENG. DRAWINGS;
2. CANOPY ROOF TO MATCH CENTRES COLOUR
DETAIL OF CANOPY AT RECEIVING CAGES
GENERAL DETAILS SCALE:1:10; 1:50 REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

4,100
750
MEZZANINE SLAB SLAB OPENING
255
1,1
00
STORAGE
GENERAL DETAILS
3150
GENERAL
25°
DETAILS - C
750
SCALE: 1:50
TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH
CONVEYOR
DETAIL OF CONVEYOR IN STORAGE AREA

REV DATE:
SCALE 1:50 Conveyor
722
10.04.2019
1,500 7,656 1,500
TYPICAL PLAN OF CONVEYOR
REV -
SCALE 1:50
DET26 21

GENERAL

50 50 x 50mm PLASTIC END
CAP
WATER METER
CWP RISER
1000
50 x 50mm M/STEEL SQ TUBE

WELDED TO BASEPLATE AND
PAINTED NEUTRAL
200 x 200 x 5mm THICK

M/STEEL BASEPLATE WITH 50 x
50 HOLE FIXED TO FLOOR WITH
45 COUNTERSUNK SCREWS
FFL
CWP SUPPLY PIPE FROM RING

200 MAIN
DETAIL OF TAP FOR BAKERY DOUGH MIXER

GENERAL

B C
3500-4000 TO U/S ENTRANCE BULKHEAD

75 M6
RECESSED WALL
ANGLE FIXED AS PER
MANUFACTURERS
INSTRUCTIONS
CHECKOUT ARCADE
FLOOR LINE
NOTE:
A. 35mm WIDE TEE'

B. STANDARD DRYWALL METAL STUDS AND CHANNELS
C. GYPSUM BOARD WITH SKIMMED JOINTS
D. TROFFER LIGHT FITTING
E. VINYL CLAD VIVID WHITE PATTERN CEILING BOARDS 12,5mm THICK IN EXPOSED SUSPENDED
T-SYSTEM
DETAIL OF MAIN ENTRANCE BULKHEAD

GENERAL

PAINT FHR PIPE TO
PLASTER AND ENAMEL PAINT ON INSIDE MATCH WALLS
LINTOLS WITH SCREED OVER
SQE TRIM AROUND TOP OF WALL

265
265
TILE SOFFIT LEVEL TO
CORNER PROTECTOR
SQE TRIM AROUND OPENING
SQE TRIM AROUND OPENING

2475
2475
2210
2210
2100
TILE WALLS AS PER WALL FINISHES

PLAN
30x30 UNDERTILE CORNER PROTECTOR

ON CORNERS
FLOOR LINE
SECTION ELEVATION FOR FIRE ESCAPE
Top of panel to line up with

top of perimeter wallband
16mm MDF baord

Finish: Painted Eggshell enamel:
Dulux 00NN 13/000
DOUBLE DOORS
FHR fixed to 16mm MDF board

at height advised by fire
consultant
2250
2250
FHR
914
16mm MDF board fixed to wall
with split batons
250
TYPICAL PLAN OF FHR & NICHE BULKHEAD DETAIL FHR BACKING BOARD
SCALE 1:50
DETAIL OF FHR & NICHE BULKHEAD

GENERAL

C
NEW CEILING
SOFT JOINT
FLOOR LINE
TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH

BULKHEAD IN FRONT OF WING WALL
SCALE 1:20
WING WALLS
SOFT JOINT
C C
12.5
B B
50
75
12.5
C C
TYPICAL PLAN OF BULKHEAD IN FRONT OF WING WALL

SCALE 1:5
NOTE:
A. 35mm WIDE TEE'

T-SYSTEM
DETAIL OF BULKHEAD AT WING WALLS

GENERAL

STEEL SUPPORT FOR
BULKHEAD TO ENG. B C
SPECIFICATION
UP TO 300mm FROM ROOF
B C
U/S OF FRONT OFFICE CEILING

WALL
63
3100
FLOOR
NOTE:
A. 35mm WIDE TEE'

T-SYSTEM
DETAIL OF BULKHEAD AT FRONT OFFICES

GENERAL

1,100
REFER TO ARCH. DETAILS
REFER TO ARCH DETAIL

C
C
3350 TO U/S DROP-IN 3300 TO U/S

CEILING COUNTER BULKHEAD M6
SOFT JOINT
M6
3200
FLOOR LINE FLOOR LINE 2300
CHECKERS AND HYPER SHOPRITE

TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH
BULKHEAD OVER FOOD COUNTERS BULKHEAD OVER FOOD COUNTERS
SCALE 1:20 SCALE 1:20
NOTE:
A. 35mm WIDE TEE'

T-SYSTEM
DETAIL OF BULKHEAD OVER COUNTER LINE-UP

GENERAL

3350 TO U/S OF SUSPENDED
CEILING TILES
M6
EXTEND FRONT COLDROOM

PANEL
COLD ROOM OR
FREEZER
3,000
COLDROOM
PANEL
FLOOR LINE
TYPICAL DETAIL OF CEILING JOINT AT COLD RM & FREEZER

SCALE 1:20
DETAIL OF CEILING IN FRONT OF COLD RM & FREEZER

GENERAL

SLAB / ROOF SHEETING
+/-2000
DRY WALL CONSTRUCTION
WITH X-RATED BOARDS
TO ACT AS FIREWALL
SOFT JOINT
BULK STORE TRADING FLOOR
SLAB / ROOF SHEETING

4500
DRY WALL CONSTRUCTION
+/-2000
WITH X-RATED BOARDS
TO ACT AS FIREWALL
FLOOR LINE
TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH FIRE WALL BETWEEN TRADING SOFT JOINT

FLOOR & BULKSTORE
SCALE 1:50
SERVICE
4500
DEPARTMENTS BULK STORE
FLOOR LINE
TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH FIRE WALL BETWEEN BULKSTORE

& SERVICE DEPARTMENTS
SCALE 1:50
DETAIL OF FIRE WALLS AT FOH & BOH

GENERAL

vertical supports fix to
roof structure above
horizontal bulkhead
ceiling line
support
WING WALLS
BULKHEAD LINE
5000 MAX
SLAB SOFFIT
WING WALLS
FLOOR LINE
NOTE:
· STRUCTURAL STEEL ELEMENTS TO BULKHEAD TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ENG. DETAIL;
· TYPICAL DETAIL OF BULKHEAD SUPPORT TO TRUSS;
· VERTICAL SUPPORT TO BULKHEAD TO BE 5000mm(MAX) APART;
· STRUCTURAL SUPPORT ACCORDING TO STRUCT. ENG. DETAIL & SPECIFICATION;
· SUPPORT DETAIL TO BE APPROVED BY ARCHITECT;
· THE SUPPORT TO CEILING GRID MUST BE ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURERS SUPPORT DETAILS;
· THE CONTRACTOR NEEDS TO PROVIDE A REPORT FROM DONN ACCORDING TO THE STABILITY
OF THE CEILING GRID SUPPORT
TYPICAL DETAIL HORIZONTAL SUPPORT(SUB-FRAME)

GENERAL

COLD FORM LIPPED
CHANNEL PURLIN
BRACKET 50X50X4 ANGLE

(40mm LONG)
M10 BOLT (GR.4.6)

25
50
25
THREAD BAR HANGER
DETAIL FOR FIXING SERVICES (EXCLUDING LIGHTS) HANGERS TO

ROOF PURLINS
GENERAL

300 X 300 X 8.5mm MADRID30 BEIGE
PORCELAIN TILE - REFER TO
SCHEDULE OF FINISHES
3
25 STAIR NOSING - SUPPLIED BY
GENESIS - PRODUCT CODE:
NFA125
23
ALUMINIUM STEP EDGE PROFILE

FRONT OF HOUSE & STAFF STAIRS
SCALE 1:2
FLOOR TILING - REFER TO SCHEDULE

OF FINISHES FOR SPECIFICATION
ALUMINUM STEP EDGE PROFILE

varies
DETAIL
20 8.5
250
TYPICAL STAIR SECTION
FRONT OF HOUSE & STAFF STAIRS
SCALE 1:5
DETAIL OF STAIR STEP EDGE PROFILE AT OFFICE AND STAFF FACILITIES

GENERAL

5250
110 150
1249 1247 1247 1247
80 DIAM STAINLESS STEEL TOP RAIL

10 DIAM SOLID
STAINLESS STEEL
180 180 115
ROUND
820
50 DIAM STAINLESS STEEL

ROUND POST
80 DIAM STAINLESS STEEL

BUMPER RAIL DEPTH OF POST FIXING FLOOR FINISH AS 10 DIAM SOLID
ON FOUNDATION TO BE PER CIVIL ENGINEER STAINLESS STEEL
400x200 THIICK CONCRETE
DETERMINED ON SITE DETAIL ROUND
FOUNDATION
TYPICAL SIDE VIEW: TROLLEY BAY

SCALE 1 : 50
WALL LINE
50 110
945
2070
2200
945
110
80
110
1129 1129 1129 1129 1129 1129
150
6772
7,032
PLAN VIEW: TROLLEY BAY

SCALE: 1:50
EXTERNAL TROLLEY BAYS TO BE COVERED WITH ROOF
DETAIL OF TYPICAL TROLLEY BAY

GENERAL
5.550 CHROMADEK FINISHED

500 4,550 500 ROOF SHEETING ON
GALV. STEEL PURLINS,
FIXED TO CURVED
GALV. STEEL BEAMS
CHROMADEK FINISHED
STEEL FACIA
GALVANIZED CURVED
SQUARE TUBING BEAM
2.600
2,200
75 X 75MM GALVANIZED
SQUARE TUBING
150 X 300MM PRECAST

CURB
CEMENTED TO SURFACE
BLOCK FOUNDATION
FRONT VIEW
5,000
75 X 75MM
GALVANIZED SQUARE
TUBING
5,000
150 X 300MM
PRECAST CURB
PLAN VIEW
NOTE:
- ROOF TO BE AS DRAWING OR DESIGN TO MATCH CENTRE ARCHITECTURE.
- DESIGN TO BE APPROVED BY SHOPRITE CHECKERS ARCHITECT.
- TAKES UP 2 PARKING BAYS.
DETAIL OF TYPICAL EXTERNAL TROLLEY BAY

GENERAL

400
180
110 110
30
400
1,400
1,370
400 x 700 BRICK WALL
COLUMN WITH CONCRETE
IN CENTRE. PLASTER AND
110 180 110 PAINT COLUMNS
220
700
260
220
FOUNDATION ACCORDING
COLUMN TO ENGINEERS DETAIL
PLAN COLUMN
SECTION
9,220
4,350 4,370
500 150 3,700 501 3,720 150 500
125 150 125 PURPOSE MADE STEEL SWIVEL RESTRICTION BOOM. PURPOSE MADE STEEL SWIVEL RESTRICTION BOOM.
GALVANISED & PAINT FINISH TO SPECIFICATION. GALVANISED & PAINT FINISH TO SPECIFICATION.
NO EXIT EXIT ONLY

150
150
ENTRANCE EXIT
1,250
150dia GLAVANISED ROUND TUBING.

400
1,100
PAINT FINISH TO SPECIFICATION.

150
125 125
2500 CLEAR HEIGHT
30mm CHAMFERED CONCRETE 30mm CHAMFERED CONCRETE

SHOULDER @ 45deg SHOULDER @ 45deg
PURPOSE MADE SWIVEL MECHANISM
2,650
DOWELED INTO CONCRETE COLUMN.

30
FIXING DETAILS TO ENGINEER.

PURPOSE MADE SWIVEL MECHANISM
DOWELED INTO CONCRETE COLUMN.
FIXING DETAILS TO ENGINEER. 400 X 700 COLUMN
TO DETAIL.
400 X 700 COLUMN
1,400
1,370
PLASTER & PAINT FINISH TO

TO DETAIL. SPECIFICATION.
PLASTER & PAINT FINISH TO
WALKWAY SPECIFICATION. WALKWAY
SURFACE SURFACE
NEW NON-MOUNTABLE CONCRETE
KERB INSTALLED TO ENGINEER. ROAD SURFACE
HEIGHT RESTRICTION ENTRANCE ELEVATION

FOUNDATION ACCORDING FOUNDATION ACCORDING
TO ENGINEERS DETAIL TO ENGINEERS DETAIL
400 335
ROAD SURFACE
EXIT
735
7,000
400 335
400 X 700 COLUMN 735
OM.
TO DETAIL. ION BO 335 400
PLASTER & PAINT FINISH TO STRICTATION.
IVEL RE IFIC
SPECIFICATION. E STEEL SW TO SPEC 400 X 700 COLUMN
AD NISH
OSE M INT FI TO DETAIL.
PURP ISED & PA PLASTER & PAINT FINISH TO
GALVAN SPECIFICATION.
700
SWIVEL POINT OM. SWIVEL POINT

ION BO
STRICT N.
375 400 3,575 521 IVEL RE ECIFICATIO
EEL SW SP
ADE ST T FINISH TO
DETERMINE ON SITE
E M
PURPOSISED & PAIN
GALVAN 3,575 400 375
WALKWAY WALKWAY
SURFACE SURFACE

KERB INSTALLED TO ENGINEER.

KERB INSTALLED TO ENGINEER.
ENTRANCE
TYPICAL RESTRICTION ENTRANCE PLAN
NOTE:
PROVIDE ALL ELECTRICAL SLEEVES TO ELECTRICAL

CONSULTANT FOR ACCESS CONTROL INSTALLATION.
TO BE APPROVED ON SITE BEFORE INSTALLATION.
DETAIL OF TYPICAL RESTRICTOR BOOM AT PARKING ENTRANCE

GENERAL

100
CEILING
M6
CANOPY
M6
FLOOR LINE
NOTE:
1. ALL CANOPIES TO END 100mm ABOVE CEILING LINE & CEILING TO BE FLUSH AGAINST CANOPY.
2. CANOPY HEIGHTS: BAKERY OVENS = 2600mm F.F.L
3. CANOPY HEIGHTS: DOUGHNUT FRYER = 1900mm F.F.L
4. CANOPY HEIGHTS: DELI = 2200mm F.F.L
5. CANOPY HEIGHTS: BRAAI = 1900mm
TYPICAL EXTRACTION CANOPY FOR PREP AREAS

GENERAL

SCREED
FLOOR DRAIN
REPAIR SCREED
NEW TILES

MEMBRANE FOR 1m ARROUND
FLOOR DRAIN AND DRESSED UP
AGAINST SIDES OF DRAIN
RC SLAB
CHAULK SOLID OPENING BETWEEN DRAIN

AND SLAB EDGE WITH HIGH
STRENGTH GROUT
CLOSE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

ARROUND DRAIN WITH 2mm
BINDING WIRE
FLOOR DRAINS ON SUSPENDED RC SLAB

SCALE 1 : 10
NOTE:
WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE(SIKA CEMFLEX) UNDER TILES TO EXTEND FOR FULL FLOOR IN ALL
FOOD PREP AREAS.
DETAIL : FLOOR DRAINS ON SUSPENDED SLAB

GENERAL

300
133
250
1. SECTION
scale 1:10 250
300
250
250
300 MODEL KD/FT 1 FLOOR

TRAP AS MANUFACTURED
1. PLAN: KD/FT 1 BY: POLUTION SOLUTION
scale 1:10
AFRICA CC
IRIS DE WITT
TEL: 082 733 6858
MODEL KD/FT 1 FLOOR TRAP AS

MANUFACTURED BY: POLUTION SOLUTION
AFRICA CC
TEL: 082 733 6858
OR HERBISH APPROVED EQUIVALENT
TYPICAL FLOOR DRAIN: KD/FT 1

GENERAL

294
300 250 X 250

COVER PLATE
120
Ø50mm INLET
254
50mmDIAM PVC
WASTE PIPE FROM Ø110mm OUTLET
500
GREASE TRAP
2. SECTION
scale 1:10 250
300
250
250
300 MODEL KD/FT 2 FLOOR

TRAP AS MANUFACTURED BY: POLUTION
2. PLAN: KD/FT 2 SOLUTION
scale 1:10
AFRICA CC
IRIS DE WITT
TEL: 082 733 6858

AFRICA CC
TEL: 082 733 6858

GENERAL

Ø50mm PVC WASTE PIPE FROM 250 X 250 COVER PLATE
GREASE TRAP
300
STEEL SUPPORT AND FIXING THERE OF TO
ENGINEERS DETAIL SPEC
120
254
Ø50mm INLET
450
Ø110mm
500
OUTLET
TYPICAL COFFER
450 SLAB
3. SECTION
scale 1:10 250
Ø50mm INLET
TYPICAL 530 X 530 COFFER
90° BETWEEN
PIPES
Ø110mm
300
250
OUTLET
250
300
3. PLAN: KD/FT 3
scale 1:10

AFRICA CC
TEL: 082 733 6858

GENERAL
Ø200mm INLET

240 X 240 X 3mm 304 Ø125mm INLET
S/S COVER PLATE
240
200 150 X 150 X 3mm 304
S/S COVER PLATE
150
Ø50mm OUTLET
4. SECTION 5. SECTION
scale 1:10
Ø110mm OUTLET
scale 1:10
240
150
150
240
4. PLAN: HERBISH 200V 5. PLAN: HERBISH 125H

FLOOR DRAIN SHOWER TRAP
scale 1:10 scale 1:10
NOTE: USED AT STAFF
NOTE: USED IN COLD RM TOILETS & CANTEEN
NOTE: FOR PROOVER &
CHROME PLATED SQUARE

GRATING
100
100
100
OVEN USE
1
1 /2" FEMALE GMS
OUTLET
6. PLAN: Ø50mm
COBRA BRASS
6. SECTION
scale 1:10 TRAP(GMS outlet
scale 1:10
TYPICAL FLOOR DRAINS

GENERAL

ACCESS COVER - 4mm GRADE 304 STAINLESS STEEL,
FIXED TO FRAME WITH 4 NO. COUNTERSUNK
STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS
4mm THICK GRADE 304 STAINLESS STEEL SUPPORT 6mm COUNTERSUNK STAINLESS
BRACKET WELDED TO FRAME STEEL SCREWS
50 200 50
6
60
10mm Ø HOLES IN FRAME SURROUND

NUMBER OF PER FRAME: 4
4mm THICK GRADE 304 STAINLESS

STEEL SUPPORT BRACKET WELDED TO
FRAME
FRAME - 6mm THICK GRADE 304

STAINLESS STEEL ANGLE.
'X'= 50mm AND 'Y'= THICKNESS OF
SCREED AND FINISH - 5mm.
FRAME TO BE PACKED AND LEVELED
TO LINE UP WITH TOP OF FLOOR
FINISH, BOLTED TO CONCRETE AND
GROUTED.
RODDING EYE COVER PLATE PLAN

SCALE 1:5
NOTE:
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE MANUFACTURER
TO ALIGN ALL COVERS AND FRAMES PRIOR
TO DELIVERY ON SITE.
ACCESS COVER - 4mm GRADE 304 STAINLESS STEEL,
FIXED TO FRAME WITH 4 NO. COUNTERSUNK
STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS
4mm THICK GRADE 304 STAINLESS STEEL SUPPORT 6mm COUNTERSUNK STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS
BRACKET WELDED TO FRAME
PORCELAIN TILES
'Y'
5
CEMENT SCREED
PACKING UNDER FRAME AND CEMENT GROUTING FRAME - 6mm THICK GRADE 304
STAINLESS STEEL ANGLE.
8mm Ø STAINLESS STEEL RAWLBOLTS 'X'= 50mm AND 'Y'= THICKNESS OF
NUMBER OF PER FRAME: 4 SCREED AND FINISH - 5mm.
FRAME TO BE PACKED AND LEVELED TO
LINE UP WITH TOP OF FLOOR FINISH,
BOLTED TO CONCRETE AND GROUTED.
RODDING EYE COVER PLATE SECTION

SCALE 1:5
TYPICAL RODDING EYE DETAIL
GENERAL DETAILS SCALE: 1:5 REV DATE: -10.04.2019 REV -

GENERAL

Belt to manufacturers details
Top to be 12mm Chipboard with 1.2mm
Stainless Steel to prevent denting with rubber
Rear section of checkout to slope bump rails
140
1,077
Cash drawer
Sensormatic
Slip printer
2,650
3,460 150 x 150mm cut out for cab

Wire basket in place of till in South Africa
stores
12mm Chipboard finished with Max on Top
Birch Grey ref. 741FH, powder coated steel
Plan of Checkout cover to match Spectrum Green by PG Bison
Scale : 1:20 with rubber bump rails
50mm Dia hole for cables 2No. 40 x 25mm removeable galvanised steel
cable trays fixed to underside of top, corners
Cut out for sensormatic to be rounded
2,650
950 600 1,101
485
494
564
1,077
1,007
910
513
140 809 910 545

R1
25
150 x 150mm cut out for cables Hole for power pole cables
50mm Dia hole for cables
Plan of Checkout
Scale : 1:20
DETAIL : TYPICAL DETAILS FOR CHECKERS CHECKOUTS 1 OF 3

GENERAL

Top to be 12mm Chipboard with Spectrum
Green by PG Bison with rubber bump rails
Sides to be galvanised mild steel to profile

and powder coated to match Spectrum Green
by PG Bison

and powder coated grey
Curved side to be galvanised mild steel to

profile and powder coated grey
Customer Side Elevation

Scale : 1:25
Top to be 12mm Chipboard with Spe

Green by PG Bison with rubber bump
Power pole

1,111

868

683
by PG Bison

485 1,027 485
Cashier Side Elevation

Scale : 1:25

cover to match Spectrum Green by PG Bison
with rubber bump rails
GENERAL DETAILS
Double power point fixed inside top
50mm space for cables Cut out for sensormatic Belt to manufacturers details
GENERAL
150 x 150mm cut out

for cables Stainless Steel to prevent denting with rubber
365 bump rails sloped to rear
DETAILS - C
2No. 30 x 20mm galvanised steel cable

trays fixed to underside of top
125 x 365 x 300mm steel housing for
125
nised mild steel to profile sensormatic CPU
SCALE: 1:20
d to match Spectrum Green 1x normal and 3 x Dedicated double plugs on
plate
Curved front to be galvanised mild steel to
nised mild steel to profile profile and powder coated grey
d grey
Udjustable feet
REV DATE:
Udjustable feet
Rear Section Front Section

Scale : 1:20 Scale : 1:20
10.04.2019
REV -
DET50 21

GENERAL

Stainless Steel to prevent denting with
rubber bump rails
35
565
495
35

Sensormatic cover to match Spectrum Green by PG Bison
Cash drawer
Slip printer
569 476 655
1,700
Plan of Checkout
Scale : 1:20
50mm Dia hole for 2No. 40 x 25mm removeable galvanised steel
cables cable trays fixed to underside of top, corners
Cut out for sensormatic to be rounded 5
12
R
35
565
495
35
Hole for power pole cables

R
1,700
12
5
Plan of Checkout
Scale : 1:20
DETAIL : TYPICAL DETAILS FOR CHECKERS EXPRESS CHECKOUTS 1 OF 3

GENERAL

Power pole


by PG Bison


cover to match Spectrum Green by PG Bison
1,111

868

683
by PG Bison

Cashier Side Elevation

Scale : 1:20

Double power point fixed inside top
GENERAL DETAILS
65mm Dia hole, silcone in Top to be 12mm Chipboard with
plastic cable route ring with 1.2mm Stainless Steel to prevent Birch Grey ref. 741FH, powder coated steel
cover denting with rubber bump rails cover to match Spectrum Green by PG Bison
GENERAL
2No. 30 x 20mm galvanised steel cable trays

DETAILS - C
fixed to underside of top
1x normal and 3 x Dedicated

double plugs on plate
SCALE: 1:20
Curved front to be galvanised mild steel to 65mm Dia hole, silcone in plastic cable route
profile and powder coated grey ring with cover
REV DATE:
Rear Section Front Section
Scale : 1:20 Scale : 1:20
10.04.2019
REV -
DET53 21

GENERAL

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CHECKERS HOIST (1 OF 2)
SPECIFICATION
Number & Type: Goods Lifts (non passenger carrying)
Capacity: 2500kg
Floor to floor: ±3600mm (to be advised at each project)
Pit void: 1600mm
Shaft Size: 1915mm wide x 3000mm deep (or as modified)
Determined by Manufacturer & Project specific
Head Room (less car): 4750mm
Car size (ID): 1800mm(wide) x 2700mm(deep) x 2100mm(high) TBA on
each project
Number of stops: TBA as per requirements (typical - 2)
Entrances: Same side - to be advised
Motor Room position: Top of shaft / To supplier
Motor Room floor: Created from top steel
Lifting mechanism: Geared double drum traction
Control: Relay logic call and send from both landings
Power needs: 380 x 400 v 3 phase 50Hz to be supplied by the
client
Car Doors: Bolton preferred, Cody accepted
Door Locks: Dupalocks LE2
Landing doors: Eurofold
Top Steel: Supplied for installation by the builder for masonry shaft
Finishes: General Hoist:
* car walls galvanised steel, stainless steel preferred
* Bumper Rails to the car wall - 3 sides, 3 heights,
butterfly raised s/steel bumber
Butchery Receiving Hoist:
* Car walls stainless steell
* Bumper Rails to the car wall - stainless steel bumper
butterfly raised
Floor: General Hoist: Raised Butterfly Stainless steel floor

Butchery Receiving Hoist: Raised Butterfly Stainless steel floor
Car light: Included Recessed in roof
Pit steels & bumpers: Included
DETAIL : TYPICAL HOIST DETAILS & SPECIFICATION 1 OF 2
GENERAL DETAILS SCALE: NTS REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

GENERAL

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CHECKERS HOIST (2 OF 2)
SPECIFICATION
Side guides: Attached to shaft diagonals / to supplier
Shaft Light: To be supplied by client in masonry shaft
Pit walls: Reinforced concrete or solid masonry (by builder)
Motor Room platform: Off the top steels - part of lift installation
Speed: 0.2 m/s (min)
Call & send buttons: Recessed in Wall
Maintenance: 12 months free first year
Motor, Control Speed, selection and make to be approved
& Gearbox:
Architrave: To arch detail but full width of sill

Load Limiting: Device and alarm
Walls of Lobby: Protect with painted 3m mild steel checker plates
Intercom: Included to communicate between floors
Shop Drawings & To be approved by WSP & Shoprite Checkers
Equipment:
Supplier list: To be approved by WSP & Shoprite Checkers

Compliance Standard: SANS 1545-5 complete with Test certificates
DETAIL : TYPICAL HOIST DETAILS & SPECIFICATION

GENERAL

8mm radiused curve
30 tile 50
plaster
30
50
plaster space behind
filled solid with mortar
inner flange
plugged & screwer
STAINLESS STEEL TYPE 304 18/10 STAINLESS STEEL TYPE 304 18/10
2mm THICK HIGHLY POLISHED 2mm THICK HIGHLY POLISHED
FACING SURFACES TO FACING SURFACES TO
EXACT HEIGHT OF TILES EXACT HEIGHT OF TILES
TYPE A - LOCATION TYPE B - LOCATION
Bakery/Deli Columns
Butchery/Fish
s/st sq edge trim

10 SQE100
tile
10
plaster
STAINLESS STEEL SQUARE EDGE TRIM

GENESIS OR EQUIVALENT
SIZE TO SUIT TILE THICKNESS
FULL HEIGHT OF TILING
TYPE C - LOCATION
Entrance Arcade tiled walls
Staff Facilities
DETAIL : CORNER PROTECTORS 1 OF 3

GENERAL

8mm radiused curve
50 tile
plaster
varies according to wall thickness
plaster space behind filled

solid with mortar
110 -230 wall
inner flange
steel-nailed to wall
contractor to notify supplier
of exact dimensions required
for each situation
wall thickness varies
STAINLESS STEEL TYPE 304 18/10

2mm THICK HIGHLY POLISHED
FACING SURFACES TO
EXACT HEIGHT OF TILES 76 70 20 80
TYPE D - LOCATION
Bakery/Deli
Butchery/Fish finished face
check finishes schedule
76
920
90x50x6 gms brackets

with 12mm diam holes
welded to angle
3no./2100mm length/side
2,000
70
920
20
chemical fixing
130
GALVANISED MILD STEEL ANGLE 76x76x6

HEIGHT TO 2100mm OR AS ON DRAWINGS
TYPE E - TYPICAL DETAIL OF
TYPE E - LOCATION 75 X 75 X 6 mm CORNER
Service Passages PROTECTOR
Back of house areas scale 1:25

GENERAL

BRICKWORK 150x150x6 STEEL
CHECKERPLATE
150
CORNER PROTECTOR
FIXED WITH CHEMICAL
ACHORS
150
CORNER PROTECTOR 2,8 m HIGH

(FULL HEIGHT)
CONER PROTECTOR
TWO 100x50x6mm STEEL

CORNER PROTECTOR WELDED
CHEMICAL
TOGETHER AS INDICATED
FIXING ROLLER AND FIXED TO BRICKWORK
SHUTTER WITH CHEMICAL FIXING.
GUIDE 1200 HIGH FROM FLOOR LEVEL
1500
WELD IN
CORNER
FROM TOP
TO
ELEVATION
BOTTOM

GENERAL

48 D. x 5,34mm STEEL TUBE WITH BENDS AS INDICATED,
ALL CUT TO LENGTHS INDICATED ON PLAN DWGS
WITH SUPPORTS WELDED ONTO BASE PLATES
END SUPPORTS AT MAX. 2000mm DISTANCES. ALL HOT DIP GALVANIZED
R=
100
50 INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS
90x90x6mm
THICK BASEPLATES
2000mm MAX 2000mm MAX

LENGTHS INDICATED ON PLAN
BUMPER RAIL ELEVATION

scale 1:10
90
15 60 15
Ø 12HOLE FOR M10

100
TYPICAL SECTION
15
CHEMICAL ANCHOR BOLT

WELD
scale 1:5
90
60
48Ø x 5,34mm STEEL TUBE
6mm PLATE
15
PLAN: BASE PLATE DETAIL

100
A.F.F.L scale 1:5
Double rail for approximately

5m at suitable place in BOH passage
100 350
Bread crate
100
A.F.F.L
TYPICAL SECTION FOR

BREAD CRATE HOLDING
IN PASSAGE
scale 1:5
DETAIL : BUMPER RAILS IN BOH

GENERAL

floor tile cut
with mitred cut at top
glued onto cement mortar wedge
ridge to terminate at through-
access points with same gradient
120
floor slab tile adhesive (TAL GOLDSTAR "6")
8mm porcelain tiles 8mm porcelain floor tiles
20
on tile adhesive
on tile adhesive
polysulphide polysulphide sealant

sealant
GRADUS INPRO 500 ALUMINIUM

WALL GUARD WITH PVC-U
COVERS INCLUDING END
CAPS (CODE 502) TO BE FIXED
WITH (6mmx60mm SCREW PLUGS)
AT 500 MM INTERVALS.
500
750
1050
1200
150
1800
BUMPER GUARD AT
150
BUTCHERY, DELI AND BUTCHERY CABINETS
BAKERY ENTRANCE EGG BUMPER GUARD

BUMPER GUARD AT BUTCHERY ENTRANCE
GRADUS WGS125/003 ALUMINIUM
WALL GUARD WITH PVC-U
COVERS INCLUDING END CAPS
(CODE 502). COLOUR:
1,460
DOLPHIN 106. CONTACT:

EGGS EGGS EGGS EGGS
NELIA ON (011)6093500
520
BUMPER GUARD AT EGGS EGG BUMPER GUARD
DETAIL : SPLASH RIDGE DETAIL AND BUMPER RAIL

GENERAL

TILE COPING AT
15 DEGREES AS
SHOWN
TILES
15|
EDGE TRIM
TILES
LOW WALL TILES
SECTION THROUGH BUTCHERY LOW LEVEL WALL(1300mm A.F.F.L)

SCALE 1:5
BUTCHERY LOW WALL DETAIL

GENERAL

rectangular tube secured to walls
at ends above ceiling level as per
engineers details and
specifications
Skimmed ceiling 150x12mm glass fin secured to but

Bulkhead at 2300 joint panels and to finished wall as
per glazing specialist details and Grid panel ceiling
specification
1,600
BUTCHERY SERVING AREA
3,000
type 'B' corner

protector to
full height and
length of wall
1,400
BUTCHERY
TILES
Notes:
SECTION · steel structure as per engineers details and specification.
· prime all steelworks with red oxide and 2 coats Plascon Velvaglo,
White.
· aluminium frame to be secured to wall and support structure as per
glazing supplier details and procedures.
· tiling set out to be aligned with the existing wall tiling.
· sufficient size movement joints to be allowed between glazing
panels.
· specification as per butchery finishes schedules, low level wall to be
tiled on both sides.
BUTCHERY
type 'B' corner protector to full length and TILES
height of wall
7,412 895
1,250 1,231 1,231 1,231 1,231 1,238 30 835 30
565
glazing secured inside frame
BUTCHERY SERVING AREA
TILES
PLAN
7,412 895
1,248 1,231 1,231 1,231 1,231 1,238 30 30
835
line indicates ceiling level
Butt-jointed
glazing secured
inside frame as
per glazing
supplier details
and procedures
2,082 to be checked on site
fixed
glazing
fixed
glazing
ELEVATION
DETAIL : BUTCHERY GLASS WALL - REFER TO ARCH. DETAIL

GENERAL

300
CEILING @ 3350 AFFL

OR AT BULKHEAD HEIGHT
- 3300 AFFL
JOINT OF CORNER
PROTECTORS TO BE
AT TILE JOINT
TILES AS PER WALL

FINISHES PLAN
PAINT
UNDER-TILE
CNR PROTECTOR
ELEVATION COLUMNS
TILES LAID WITH CERAMIC TILES
VERTICALLY UNDERNEATH
1,500
CEILINGS/BULKHEADS
SCALE 1:25
JOINT OF CORNER
PROTECTORS TO BE 530
AT TILE JOINT
300 300 230
110mm BRICK-
WORK AROUND
WATER PIPE
CONCRETE COLUMN CONCRETE COLUMN

300
TO ENG'S DETAILS TO ENG'S DETAILS
TYPICAL ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION

COLUMNS ON COLUMNS ON
TRADING FLOOR TRADING FLOOR
SCALE 1:25 SCALE 1:25 TILES AS PER WALL TILES AS PER WALL
FINISHES PLAN FINISHES PLAN
COLUMN DETAILS
50x50 S/S CORNER 50x50 S/S CORNER
PROTECTOR DETAIL PROTECTOR DETAIL
DWG C600-1, TYPE A DWG C600-1, TYPE A
LOCATION:
FREE-STANDING COLUMNS: TYPICAL PLAN TYPICAL PLAN COLUMNS ON
TRADING FLOOR & SERVICE DEPTS OF COLUMNS GRIDS CD/03 & CD/05
DETAIL : COLUMN DETAILS

GENERAL

100
cut porcelain floor tile skirting: cut edge

of tile to face downwards
silicone seal
TYPICAL SKIRTING TILE

SCALE 1:2
TYPICAL SKIRTING TILE

C09
11,720
1,863 1,863 2,590 1,620
C/L C/L 1,108 122 1,269 C/L
MEZZANINE SUPPORT 50x50x2.5 CROSS BEAM HEIGHT OF C/L
BEAMS SHS FRAME 90x90x4.0 SHS STILES MEZZANINE STRUCTURE
168 50 112
50
50x50x4 50x50x4 50x50x4 50x50x4 50x50x4 50x50x4

ANGLES ANGLES ANGLES ANGLES ANGLES ANGLES
GENERAL DETAILS
60x60x2.5 60x60x2.5 60x60x2.5
SHS FRAME SHS FRAME SHS FRAME
GUIDE TRACK FOR GATE
GENERAL
SLIDING GATE
TYPE CD35
DETAILS - C
50x50x4 50x50x4 50x50x4 50x50x4

ANGLE ANGLE ANGLE AS PER DOOR ANGLE
4,630 - CONFIRM ON SITE
SCHEDULE
SCALE: NTS
C/L TO MATCH
50x50x4 50x50x4 50x50x4 GATE MIDRAIL
ANGLE ANGLE ANGLE
FFL
DETAIL : TYPICAL STEEL CAGES 1 OF 3

60x60x2.5 SHS 90x90x4.0 MESH WELDED TO 90x90x4.0 50x50x2.5 SHS 90x90x4.0 GATE MESH WELDED TO 60x60x2.5 STILE
FIXED TO WALL SHS STILE OUTSIDE OF CAGE FRAMES SHS STILE SHS STILE INSIDE OF GATE FRAME FIXED TO COLUMN
EXTERNAL ELEVATION: STEEL CAGE 1

C09
REV DATE:
GROUND FLOOR BULK STORE
60x60x2.5 90x90x4.0 90x90x4.0 90x90x4.0 90x90x4.0 CD35 90x90x4.0 60x60x2.5
SHS STILE SHS STILE SHS STILE SHS STILE SHS STILE SHS STILE SHS STILE
steel sliding gate
10.04.2019
1,863 1,863 1,863 1,863 2,590 1,620
REV -
PLAN: STEEL CAGE 1
DET64 21

C09 C08
3,101 2,897 2,897 2,897 2,978
1,152 910 994 993 910 994 993 910 994 993 910 994 993 910 1,029
50x50x2.5 SHS
FIXED TO WALLS
1,925
60x60x2.5 SHS
CROSS BRACING
OVER CAGES
1,925
GENERAL DETAILS
GENERAL
1,925
DETAILS - C
50x50x4 ANGLE
CROSS BRACING
OVER CAGES
SCALE: NTS
1,925
CAGE 10 CAGE 9 CAGE 8 CAGE 7 CAGE 6
9,620 - INTERNAL DEPTH OF CAGE (WALL TO FRONT)

1,920
PLAN VIEW : TYPICAL STEEL CAGES 2 OF 3

60
REV DATE:
CD25/5 CD25/4 CD25/3 CD25/2 CD25/1
C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L
1,152 910 994 994 910 994 994 910 994 994 910 994 994 910 1,029
3,056 2,897 2,897 2,897 2,933
MAIN FRAME OVERALL 14,740
10.04.2019
PLAN: STEEL SCREENS 3 & 4 (CAGES 6-10) (SCALE: 1:100)
REV -
DET65 21

14,740 OVERALL CAGE SIZE (CONFIRM ON SITE)
3,056 2,897 2,897 2,897 2,933
1,152 910 994 994 910 994 994 910 994 994 910 994 994 910 1,029
C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L
60x60x2.5 STILE 60x60x2.5 SHS 60x60x2.5 SHS 60x60x2.5 STILE

FIXED TO COLUMN CAGE FRAME CAGE FRAME FIXED TO WALL
60x60 60x60 60x60

x2.5 60x60x2.5 x2.5 x2.5
STILES SHS FRAME STILES STILES
GATE GATE GATE GATE GATE

TYPE CD25 50x50x4 50x50x2.5 TYPE CD25 50x50x4 TYPE CD25 50x50x2.5 TYPE CD25 50x50x2.5 TYPE CD25 50x50x4
REF. DOOR ANGLE SHS FRAME REF. DOOR ANGLE REF. DOOR SHS FRAME REF. DOOR SHS FRAME REF. DOOR ANGLE
SCHEDULE SCHEDULE SCHEDULE SCHEDULE SCHEDULE
COLUMN
GENERAL DETAILS
50x50x2.5 50x50x2.5 50x50x2.5
FFL
GENERAL
MESH WELDED TO OUTSIDE MESH WELDED TO OUTSIDE

OF CAGE FRAME MEZZANINE FLOOR & SUPPORT STRUCTURE OF CAGE FRAME
AS PER ENG'S DETAILS
DETAILS - C
EXTERNAL ELEVATION: STEEL SCREEN 3 (CAGES 6-10)
SCALE: NTS
DETAIL : TYPICAL STEEL CAGES 3 OF 3
9,680 O/A DIMENSION OF CAGE
9,620 INTERNAL DIMENSION OF CAGE 60
1,925 1,925 1,925 1,925 1,920

50x50x2.5 SHS MESH WELDED ON TOP OF FRAME AS CEILING.
FIXED TO WALL SPRINKLERS TO BE INSIDE CAGES
50x50x4 ANGLE 60x60x2.5 SHS 50x50x4 ANGLE 60x60x2.5 SHS
REV DATE:
CROSS BRACINGS CROSS BRACINGS CROSS BRACINGS CROSS BRACINGS
60
60x60 50x50x4
x2.5 ANGLES
720
720
660 60
STILES
50
50
60x60 60x60
x2.5 x2.5
STILE 50x50x4 50x50x2.5 STILES
BOLTED ANGLE SHS FRAME
TO WALL
10.04.2019
2,160
2,160
2,280
2,280
3,000 -O/A CAGE HEIGHT

50x50x2.5
50x50x4 SHS FRAME
OVERALL HEIGHT OF CAGES 3,000
ANGLES
FFL FFL
50
50
20
20
MEZZANINE STEEL FLOOR STRUCTURE AS PER ENGINEER
REV -
DET66 21

DOOR
DETAILS - C
INDEX 21
NUMBER LOCATION
SECTION 21.2 DOOR DETAILS

D01 PIPE RISER AND DUCT
D02A ID ROOM
D02B CASH-UP AND CASH OFFICE
D03 SAFE
D04 TRADING AREA TO BOH
D05 TRADING AREA TO STAFF
D06 FLOUR STORE, TRAINING ROOM, RECEIVING OFFICE, BUTCHERY STORE,
CAMERA ROOM (IF NOT VISIBLE FROM TRADING FLOOR),
MEDIRITE WC AND KITCHENETTE
D07 TOILET CUBICLES
D08 STAFF ENTRANCE
D09 SINGLE FIRE ESCAPE DOOR
D10 DISABLED WC OUTWARD OPENING
D11 DOUBLE EMERGENCY ESCAPE DOOR
D12 SOLID PLANTROOM DOOR
D13 TRANSFORMER PLANTROOM DOOR
D14 MANAGER WC
D15 DISPENSARY TO CONSULTING & CONSULTING TO WC
D16 DISPENSARY PVT AREA & CONSULTING AREA
D17 BUTCHERY RECEIVING
D18 DROP TEMP RECEIVING & FRUIT AND VEG PREP
D19 DEPARTMENT TO PASSAGE, IF NOT DOOR, AND RETURNS
D20 DROP TEMP, PERISHABLE AND F&V RECEIVING
RS1 EXTERNAL ROLLER SHUTTER

RS2 INTERNAL ROLLER SHUTTER
RS3 DRY REFUSE & BUTCHERY RECEIVING
SF1A MAIN ENTRANCE (SLIDING FOLDING)

SF1B MAIN ENTRANCE (SLIDING STACKING)
SF1C MAIN ENTRANCE SWING DOORS (SHOPRITE ONLY)
SF2 DOOR STACKING CUBICLE
SF3 FHR CUBICLE DOOR IN ARCADE
SF4 ADMIN OFFICE, SCANNING OFFICE ENTRANCE, BUTCHERY OFFICE,
ENTRANCE TO MEDIRITE, CAMERA ROOM (IF IN ARCADE)
SF5 DARK ROOM
DETAIL ROLLER SHUTTER CORNER PROTECTOR & EXTERNAL DOOR DETAIL
DOOR
DETAILS - C
D01 21
LOCATION: PIPE RISER AND DUCT

600
536
150
HINGE
100
NO. DISK
2,032
CL
KICK PLATE
1,050
FULL WIDTH
TO U/S OF
DOOR HANDLE
100
HINGE
150
FFL
DOOR DOOR FRAMES

• 536x2032x40 SEMI-SOLID CORE FLUSH DOOR • 1,6mm THICK DOUBLE REBATED PRESSED
WITH 3mm TEMPERED HARDBOARD BOTH STEEL FRAME FOR WALL THICKNESS
FACES WITH TWO CONCEALED HARDWOOD INDICATED.
EDGES • FRAME ELECTRO-GALVANISED(COASTEL)
• CORE 50% SOLID TIMBER; WITH 1mm THICK • FINISH SELF-ETCHING CALCIUM PLUMBATE
POLISHED S/S KICKPLATE TO REQUIRED SIZE PRIMER, 1ct UNIV UNDERCOAT, 2cts PLASCON
ON OUTER FACE, EPOXY GLUED & SCREWED VALVAGLO
SUBSTRATE
WITH COUNTERSUNK S/S SCREWS ON OUTER

IRONMONGERY
EDGES.
KICKPLATE
• Kickplate full width to underside of door LOCK & FURNITURE
handle
• SS FLUSH RING
• SS ESCUTCHEON ON ROSE PROFILE
•
• SS SINGLE CYLINDER PROFILE

• SS CYLINDER DEADLOCK
DOOR FINISHES
• FINISH 1ct PLASCON WOOD PRIMER, 1ct FROM:
PLASCON UNIVERSAL UNDERCOAT, 2cts • ASSA ABLOY
PLASCON VALVAGLO (SEE PAINT SPEC.) • CISA
• DORMA
• GEZE
GENERAL
HINGES • 45 D x 2mm THICK NUMBER DISK.
• 2x 100mm STEEL BUTT HINGES INTEGRAL
WITH FRAME - PAINTED & SPINDLE OILED
DOOR DETAILS SCALE: 1:25 REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D02 -A 21
LOCATION: ID ROOM

970 CLEAR FINISHED OPENING
NUMBER
DISK
HANDLES
FFL
DOOR HINGES
• MUTUAL G1 ANTI-BANDIT PERSONNEL • HINGED ON ROTAN CONTINUOUS HEAVY
DOORS SUPPLIED BY MASS MUTUAL DUTY HINGES
AUSTEN - CONTACT (021 931 9404)
• COMPLETE WITH FRAME TO SUIT CLEAR
FINISHED OPENING OF 969x2100mm IN CLOSER
IRONMONGERY
110mm WALLS. • DORMA HEAVY DUTY DOOR CLOSER.

STANDARD WITH DOOR.
LOCK & FURNITURE

SUBSTRATE
• 300kg MAGNETIC LOCK TOP MOUNTED -

COMPATIBLE TO INTERFACE TO POWER
POINT ABOVE DOOR FRAME
· FOR ACCESS CONTROL - REMOTE
DOOR FINISHES CONTROL INTERLOCK (MAN TRAP) CASH
• DOOR FINISH SEALED LIGHT OAK OFFICE
VENEER.PAINTED WITH CLEAR VARNISH
• LOCK SUPPLIED WITH DOOR.
DOOR FRAMES
• 100x50 M/STEEL FRAME SUPPLIED GENERAL
• FINISH PRIMER UNDERCOAT.
• SATIN PULL HANDLES,D TYPE
• FINAL COATS BY CONTRACTOR
• NUMBER DISK - 45dia. x 2mm THICK.
AFTER INSTALLATION
• ASSA 87001SS DOORSTOP.
KICKPLATES
· S/Steel 300mm Kick plates

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D02 -B 21
LOCATION: CASH-UP & CASH OFFICE

VISION
NUMBER
DISK
HANDLES
FFL
DOOR HINGES
• MUTUAL G1 ANTI-BANDIT PERSONNEL • HINGED ON ROTAN CONTINUOUS HEAVY DUTY
DOORS SUPPLIED BY MASS MUTUAL HINGES
AUSTEN - CONTACT (021 931 9404)
• COMPLETE WITH FRAME TO SUIT CLEAR
FINISHED OPENING OF 969x2100mm IN CLOSER
IRONMONGERY
110mm WALLS. • DORMA HEAVY DUTY DOOR CLOSER.

STANDARD WITH DOOR.
LOCK & FURNITURE

SUBSTRATE
• 300kg MAGNETIC LOCK TOP MOUNTED -

COMPATIBLE TO INTERFACE TO POWER
POINT ABOVE DOOR FRAME
· FOR ACCESS CONTROL - REMOTE CONTROL
DOOR FINISHES INTERLOCK (MAN TRAP) CASH OFFICE
• DOOR FINISH SEALED LIGHT OAK
VENEER.PAINTED WITH CLEAR VARNISH
• LOCK SUPPLIED WITH DOOR.
DOOR FRAMES
• 100x50 M/STEEL FRAME SUPPLIED GENERAL
• FINISH PRIMER UNDERCOAT.
• FINAL COATS BY CONTRACTOR • VISION PANEL 300w x 400h FITTED WITH 38mm
AFTER INSTALLATION BRG BULLET RESISTANT.
• SATIN PULL HANDLES,D TYPE

• NUMBER DISK - 45dia. x 2mm THICK.
• ASSA 87001SS DOORSTOP.
KICKPLATES • KEY NR. DISK.
· S/Steel 300mm Kick plates

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D03 21
LOCATION: SAFE
1,040

868
FIREPROOF VENT
86
HINGE
CLEAR WALL OPENING
DOOR PLATE (1,880)

990w x 1960h
1,966
HANDLE
HINGE
FFL
DOOR PLATE (874)
DOOR HINGES
• STANDARD STRONGROOM DOOR TYPE DS • STANDARD BY SUPPLIER
50/2 CAT2 HEAVY DUTY - BY MUTUAL SAFE
& SECURITY (PTY) LTD
• WALL OPENING:1000w x 1920h
CLOSER
IRONMONGERY
• NIL
LOCK & FURNITURE

SUBSTRATE
DOOR FINISHES
• 2cts PLASCON VELVAGLO ON SUPPLIED GREY • LOCK SUPPLIED WITH DOOR.
UNDERCOAT
•(CONTRACTOR NOT ALLOWED TO OPEN
DOOR WITH KEYS)
DOOR FRAMES
• STANDARD BY SUPPLIER
GENERAL
• 185 x 185mm DOUBLE ENDED STRONGROOM
VENTILATOR ABOVE DOOR CENTRE TO DOOR IN
BRICKWORK BY MUTUAL.
• UNIVERSAL DOORSTOP BY MUTUAL.
KICKPLATES
• NIL

DOOR
DETAILS - C
Do4 21
LOCATION: TRADING AREA TO BACK OF HOUSE

1600-2200
BRUSH STRIP
HINGE HINGE
450x600 450x600
VISION VISION
PANEL PANEL
2100-2500
BRUSH STRIP
BUMPER BUMPER
HINGE HINGE
FFL
DOOR HINGES
• PURPOSE MADE INDUSTRIAL DOUBLE • 4 x CAST ALUMINIUM HINGES WITH CAM
CRASH-DOOR BY APEX (OR EQUAL OPERATION AND BEARINGS
APPROVED) - 1630x2036 (CONFIRM ON SITE)
- TO MANUFACTURER'S SPEC.
IRONMONGERY
• BLACK RUBBER PADS BOTH SIDES;

SUBSTRATE
• SIZE:(REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE FOR

EACH PROJECT)
LOCK & FURNITURE

• NIL
DOOR FINISHES
• FOR APEX DOORS WITH BRUSH, COLOUR GENERAL
CHARCOAL (CHECKERS STD).
• 3mm POLYCARBONATE VISION PANELS.
• BUMPER RAIL ON TRADING FLOOR
DOOR FRAMES AND BOH. AS DOOR STOP
• 127x76x3mm GALVANIZED MS STEEL BOX • S/S BUMPER RAIL ON TRADING FLOOR
SECTION FRAME WITH 127x64mm HEAD SIDE AS DOOR STOP
CHANNEL SECTION
• BLACK POWDER COATING ON FRAME • BRUSH STRIPS BETWEEN DOOR LEAFS, AND LEAFS
AND TOP FRAME.

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D05 21
LOCATION: TRADING AREA TO STAFF

1,250
75 1,100 75
BRUSH STRIP
64
HINGE
450x600
VISION
PANEL
2,044
1,980
BUMPER
HINGE
FFL
DOOR LOCK & FURNITURE

• INDUSTRIAL CRASH-DOOR BY APEX (OR • NIL
EQUAL APPROVED) - 1100x1980 SINGLE
SWING DOOR - WITH BRUSH STRIPS,
• BLACK RUBBER PADS BOTH SIDES.
IRONMONGERY
SUBSTRATE
DOOR FINISHES
• FOR APEX DOORS WITH BRUSH, COLOUR
CHARCOAL (CHECKERS STD).
DOOR FRAMES GENERAL

• 127x76x3mm GALVANIZED MS STEEL BOX • 3mm POLYCARBONATE VISION PANELS.
SECTION FRAME WITH 127x64mm HEAD
CHANNEL SECTION BLACK POWDER COATED • BUMPER RAIL ON TRADING FLOOR
AND BOH. AS DOOR STOP
• S/S BUMPER RAIL ON TRADING FLOOR
SIDE AS DOOR STOP
• BRUSH STRIP BETWEENN DOOR LEAF AND FRAME.

HINGES
• 2 x CAST ALUMINIUM HINGES WITH CAM
OPERATION AND BEARINGS

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D06 21
LOCATION:
FLOUR STORE, TRAINING ROOM, RECEIVING OFFICE, BUTCHERY STORE,

CAMERA ROOM (IF NOT VISIBLE FROM TRADING FLOOR), MEDIRITE WC DOOR 1 AND KITCHENETTE
877
813
100 150
GROOVE IN PLASTERED HINGE
100
WALLS WITH STEEL DOOR LEAF
DOWEL RODS
HINGE
100
NUMBER
DISK
FILL SOLID WITH
MORTAR BEHIND
STEEL FRAME FRAME WIDTH EQUAL TO
WALL THICKNESS + 30mm
2,032
2,064
BRICK WALLS
KICK PLATE
900
FLUSH DOOR
100
STEEL FRAME BEYOND
HINGE
200
150
FFL
DOOR DOOR FRAMES

• 813x2032x40 SEMI SOLID CORE FLUSH DOOR
WITH 3mm TEMPERED HARDBOARD BOTH • 1,6mm THICK DOUBLE REBATED PRESSED
FACES WITH TWO CONCEALED HARDWOOD STEEL FRAME.
EDGES CORE 100% SOLID TIMBER. • FRAME ELECTRO-GALVANISED
• FINISH SELF-ETCHING CALCIUM PLUMBATE
PRIMER, 1ct UNIV UNDERCOAT, 2cts PLASCON
VELVAGLO.
IRONMONGERY
LOCK & FURNITURE

SUBSTRATE
• SS TUBULAR LEVER ON NARROW STYLE BACK

KICKPLATE PLATE.
• Kickplate full width to underside of door • MORTICE SASH LOCK SS.
handle • DOUBLE CYLINDER.
• LEVER LOCK HANDLE INSIDE & OUTSIDE.
DOOR FINISHES FROM:

• FINISH 1ct DULUX WOOD PRIMER, 1ct DULUX • ASSA ABLOY
UNIVERSAL UNDERCOAT, 2cts DULUX • CISA
SILTHANE SILK ENAMEL • DORMA
OR • GEZE
• FINISH 1ct PLASCON WOOD PRIMER, 1ct
PLASCON UNIVERSAL UNDERCOAT, 2cts GENERAL
PLASCON VELVAGLO
• 1 no. ASSA 87001SS AS DOORSTOP SCREWED TO
FLOOR IN SENSIBLE POSITION TO ALLOW
HINGES MAXIMUM OPENING.
• 45 D x 2mm THICK NUMBER DISK.
• AIR GRILLE: TROX TYPE 525x225 AGS-T.
• KEY NR. DISK.

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D07 21
LOCATION: TOILET CUBICLES

826
DETAIL DOOR LEAF
1
762
150
FILL SOLID WITH FRAME WIDTH EQUAL TO

HINGE MORTAR BEHIND WALL THICKNESS + 30mm
STEEL FRAME BUILT IN ON LOCK SIDE
100
COAT-HOOK CLOSE TO DIVISION WALL

ON INSIDE
CENTRED
2210 AFL
2,032
INDICATOR BOLT CL
TILED WALLS
1,032
FLUSH DOOR
100
STEEL FRAME BEYOND

HINGE
150
FFL
30-40mm GAP UNDER DOOR
DOOR DOOR FRAMES

• 762x2032x40 SEMI-SOLID CORE FLUSH DOOR • STANDARD 1,6mm THICK DOUBLE REBATED
WITH 3mm TEMPERED HARDBOARD BOTH PRESSED STEEL FRAME FOR 110mm WALL
FACES WITH TWO CONCEALED HARDWOOD • FRAME ELECTRO-GALVANISED
EDGES • FINISH SELF-ETCHING CALCIUM PLUMBATE
IRONMONGERY
• CORE 50% SOLID TIMBER PRIMER, 1ct UNIV UNDERCOAT, 2cts DULUX
SUBSTRATE
SILTHANE SILK
LOCK & FURNITURE

DOOR FINISHES • WC INDICATOR BOLT
• WC DEADBOLT
• FINISH 1ct DULUX WOOD PRIMER, 1ct DULUX
UNIVERSAL UNDERCOAT, 2cts DULUX
SILTHANE SILK ENAMEL FROM:
OR • ASSA ABLOY
• CISA
PLASCON UNIVERSAL UNDERCOAT, 2cts • DORMA
PLASCON VELVAGLO • GEZE
GENERAL
HINGES • AS COAT HOOK/DOOR STOP,RUBBER TIPPED
• 2x 100mm STEEL BUTT HINGES INTEGRAL FIXED WITH ONE-WAY ALUM. SCREWS
DOOR DETAILS SCALE: VARIES REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D08 21
LOCATION: STAFF ENTRANCE

DETAIL 1,100 1,100 DETAIL
100 150
GMS SHEETING ON OUTER FACE
OF DOOR, WITH 20mm RETURN
DRIPBAR
FLANGES
ONTO SIDES & TOP EDGES
HINGE DOOR
100
HINGE GMS SHEETING ON OUTER FACE
OF DOOR, WITH 20mm RETURN
100
FLANGES
NO. DISK ONTO SIDES & TOP EDGES
DOOR 2032
DOOR 2032
LEVER HANDLE LEVER HANDLE
CL HINGE
100
1.093
KICK PLATE
1,150
1,150
0,8mm GMS SINGLE

1,050
1,050
SHEET TO OUTSIDE FULL WIDTH

FACE OF DOOR ON INSIDE DOOR LEAF
100
HINGE
150
FFL FFL
MORTAR BEHIND WALL THICKNESS + 30mm
WEATHER DRIP-BAR STEEL FRAME BUILT IN ON LOCK SIDE
DOOR DOOR FRAMES

• SOLID CORE FLUSH DOOR WITH 3mm THICK • STANDARD 1.6mm DOUBLE REBATED
MASONITE, BOTH FACES WITH TWO PRESSED STEEL FRAME
CONCEALED HARDWOOD EDGES FOR 230mm WALL
• CORE 100% SOLID PACKED TIMBER WITH
1mm THICK POLISHED S/S KICKPLATE TO
REQUIRED SIZE ON INNER FACE
LOCK & FURNITURE
• MORTICE SASH LOCK WITH S/STEEL FOREND
& STRIKING PLATE
DOOR FINISHES
• FINISH 1ct DULUX PINK PRIMER, 1ct • S/S TUBULAR LEVER HANDLES ON 152 x 152 x
UNIVERSAL UNDERCOAT, 2cts DULUX 1.6mm BACKPLATE WITH OVAL CYLINDER
CUT-OUT.
IRONMONGERY
SILTHANE SILK
• KNOB CYL LOCK.
OR
• FINISH 1ct PLASCON WOOD PRIMER, 1ct FROM:
PLASCON UNIVERSAL UNDERCOAT, 2cts • ASSA ABLOY
SUBSTRATE
PLASCON VELVAGLO • CISA

• DORMA
• GEZE
HINGES
• 3x100 STEEL BUTTS INTEGRAL WITH FRAME GENERAL
• 1 no. DOORSTOP
• NUMBER DISK ON INSIDE - 45mm D x 2mm THICK.
METAL SHEET PROTECTION
• CABIN HOOK
• 0.8mm GMS SINGLE SHEET EPOXY GLUED
ONTO OUTER FACE OF DOOR, WITH 20mm • INSTALL DRIP BAR AT TOP OF DOOR ON OUTSIDE
RETURN FLANGES ONTO SIDE & BOTTOM AND WEATHER BAR AT BOTTOM
EDGES; & FULL RETURN OVER TOP WITH
20mm FLANGE INSIDE - SCREWED AT EDGES • NO SUNLIGHT TO BE VISIBLE FROM INSIDE ,BELOW
(CONCEALED WHEN CLOSED). PAINTED OR AROUND DOOR.
SAME COLOUR AS WALL. • ALUMINIUM FLASHING ABOVE DOOR TO PREVENT
INGRESS OF RAIN WATER
• KEY NR. DISK.

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D09 21
LOCATION: SINGLE FIRE ESCAPE DOOR

DETAIL 1,100 1,100 DETAIL
100 150
HINGE
100
HINGE
1.093
100
NO. DISK
DOOR LEAF
DOOR 2032
DOOR 2032
CL HINGE
100
MORTAR BEHIND WALL THICKNESS + 30mm
STEEL FRAME BUILT IN ON LOCK SIDE
KICK PLATE
1,150
1,150
0,8mm GMS SINGLE

SHEET TO OUTSIDE FULL WIDTH
FACE OF DOOR ON INSIDE
100
HINGE
150
FFL FFL
WEATHER DRIP-BAR
DOOR DRIPBAR
DOOR
GMS SHEETING TAKEN OVER
TOP OF DOOR & 20mm RETURN INTERNAL FLOOR
AT BOTTOM & SIDES FINISH AS PER GMS SHEETING ON OUTER FACE
FIN. SCHEDULE OF DOOR, WITH 20mm RETURN
WEATHERBAR (WHERE APPL.) FLANGES
ONTO SIDES & TOP EDGES
25x75x25x6mm GALV. M.S. Z-PROFILE
WITH BUILDING-IN LUGS WELDED ON
BELOW AND BOLTTED TO SLAB -
FLOOR FINISH FLUSH WITH TOP OF LIP.
DOOR DOOR FRAMES

• SOLID CORE FLUSH DOOR WITH 3mm THICK • STANDARD 1.6mm DOUBLE REBATED
MASONITE, BOTH FACES WITH TWO PRESSED STEEL FRAME
IRONMONGERY
CONCEALED HARDWOOD EDGES FOR 230mm WALL

• CORE 100% SOLID PACKED TIMBER .
(1 HOUR FIRE RATING)
• POLISHED S/S KICKPLATE TO REQUIRED SIZE LOCK & FURNITURE
SUBSTRATE
ON INNER FACE
• SINGLE P/BOLT P/BAR 1200mm
DOOR FINISHES
• FINISH 1ct DULUX PINK PRIMER, 1ct • EN2-4 DOOR CLOSER
SILTHANE SILK • TO BE APPROVED BY FIRE
OR
CONSULTANT AND CONFORM TO SANS
10400
PLASCON UNIVERSAL UNDERCOAT, 2cts
PLASCON VELVAGLO FROM:
• ASSA ABLOY
HINGES • CISA
• 3x100 STEEL BUTTS INTEGRAL WITH FRAME • DORMA
• GEZE
• 0.8mm GMS SINGLE SHEET EPOXY GLUED GENERAL
ONTO OUTER FACE OF DOOR, WITH 20mm
RETURN FLANGES ONTO SIDE & BOTTOM • 1 x KEYBOX
20mm FLANGE INSIDE - SCREWED AT EDGES • INSTALL DRIP BAR AT TOP OF DOOR ON OUTSIDE
(CONCEALED WHEN CLOSED). PAINTED AND WEATHER BAR AT BOTTOM
SAME COLOUR AS WALL. • NO SUNLIGHT TO BE VISIBLE FROM INSIDE ,BELOW
OR AROUND DOOR.

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D10 21
LOCATION: DISABLED WC OUTWARD OPENING

900 900
150
150
HINGE HINGE
100
100
PULL HANDLE
2,032
2,032
100
KICK PLATE FULL WIDTH KICK PLATE FULL WIDTH
1,000
425x225 GRILLE 425x225 GRILLE
900
900
100
100
HINGE HINGE
150
150
FFL FFL
OUTSIDE INSIDE
DOOR DOOR FRAMES

WITH 3mm TEMPERED MASONITE BOTH STEEL FRAME FOR 110mm WALL
IRONMONGERY

SUBSTRATE
• CORE 50% SOLID TIMBER; WITH 1mm THICK PRIMER, 1ct UNIV UNDERCOAT, 2cts DULUX
POLISHED S/S KICKPLATE TO REQUIRED SIZE SILTHANE SILK ENAMEL
ON OUTER FACE,EPOXY GLUED & SCREWED
EDGES.
DOOR FINISHES HINGES

• FINISH 1ct DULUX WOOD PRIMER, 1ct DULUX • 2x 100mm STEEL BUTT HINGES INTEGRAL
UNIVERSAL UNDERCOAT, 2cts DULUX WITH FRAME - PAINTED & SPINDLE OILED
SILTHANE SILK ENAMEL
GENERAL
LOCK & FURNITURE
• DOORSTOP SCREWED TO FLOOR IN SENSIBLE
• FACILITY INDICATOR BOLT. POSITION TO ALLOW MAXIMUM OPENING.
• SS TUBULAR PULL HANDLES • NATURAL ANODISED PARAPLEGIC SIGN PLATE
• DOOR CLOSER. • 45 D x 2mm THICK NUMBER DISK.
FROM:
• ASSA ABLOY
• CISA
• DORMA
• GEZE

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D11 21
LOCATION: DOUBLE EMERGENCY ESCAPE DOOR 230
CLEAR OPENING BETWEEN JAMBS OF FRAME 1,800

REBATED DOUBLE DOOR 1,824
OPENING SIZE TO BE CONFIRMED BY FIRE CONSULTANT
100 150
FACE BRICK WALLS

HINGE HINGE
100
STEEL FRAME SOLIDLY FILLED

ON TOP & SIDES WITH MORTAR
HINGE HINGE
DOOR
100

TOP OF DOOR & 20mm RETURN
ON ALL SIDES
G.M.S. COVER PLATE

ON OUTSIDE ONLY
2400
DOOR

AT BOTTOM & SIDES FINISH AS PER
FIN. SCHEDULE
100
WEATHERBAR (WHERE APPL.)
HINGE HINGE 25x75x25x6mm GALV. M.S. Z-PROFILE

150
FFL
WEATHER DRIP-BAR - WHERE APPLICABLE

• SOLID CORE FLUSH DOOR WITH 3mm THICK • DOUBLE P/BOLT P/BAR 900mm
MASONITE, BOTH FACES WITH TWO
CONCEALED HARDWOOD EDGES • EN2-4 DOOR CLOSER-SET LEADING LEAF
• CORE 100% SOLID PACKED TIMBER . FASTER THAN INACTIVE LEAF.
(1 HOUR FIRE RATING)
• POLISHED S/S KICKPLATE TO REQUIRED SIZE
ON INNER FACE • LOCK & FURNITURE TO BE CONFIRMED BY
FIRE CONSULTANT AND COMPLY WITH SANS
10400
FROM:
• ASSA ABLOY
• CISA
DOOR FINISHES • DORMA
SUBSTRATE
IRONMONGERY
• GEZE
• FINISH INTERNALLY WITH 1ct DULUX PINK
PRIMER, 1ct DULUX UNIVERSAL UNDERCOAT,
2cts DULUX SILTHANE SILK ENAMEL
GENERAL
• NUMBER DISK ON INSIDE - 45mm D x 2mm THICK.

HINGES • 1 x KEYBOX
• 6 No. 100x76mm STEEL BUTT HINGES • INSTALL DRIP BAR AT TOP OF DOOR ON OUTSIDE
INTEGRAL WITH FRAME, SPINDLE OILED AND WEATHER BAR AT BOTTOM
• NO SUNLIGHT TO BE VISIBLE FROM INSIDE ,BELOW
OR AROUND DOOR.
DOOR FRAMES METAL SHEET PROTECTION

• STANDARD 1.6mm DOUBLE REBATED • 0.8mm GMS SINGLE SHEET EPOXY GLUED
PRESSED STEEL FRAME ONTO OUTER FACE OF DOOR, WITH 20mm
FOR 230mm WALL RETURN FLANGES ONTO SIDE & BOTTOM
20mm FLANGE INSIDE - SCREWED AT EDGES
(CONCEALED WHEN CLOSED). PAINTED
SAME COLOUR AS WALL.

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D12 21
LOCATION: SOLID PLANTROOM DOOR 230

100 150
FACE BRICK WALLS

HINGE HINGE
100
STEEL FRAME SOLIDLY FILLED

ON TOP & SIDES WITH MORTAR
HINGE HINGE
DOOR
100

TOP OF DOOR & 20mm RETURN
ON ALL SIDES
G.M.S. COVER PLATE

ON OUTSIDE ONLY
2400
DOOR

AT BOTTOM & SIDES FINISH AS PER
FIN. SCHEDULE
100
WEATHERBAR (WHERE APPL.)
HINGE HINGE 25x75x25x6mm GALV. M.S. Z-PROFILE

150
FFL
WEATHER DRIP-BAR - WHERE APPLICABLE

• SOLID CORE FLUSH DOOR WITH 3mm THICK • CYLINDER OVAL .
MASONITE, BOTH FACES WITH TWO • TUBULAR S/S LEVER HANDLES ON 152 x 152 x
CONCEALED HARDWOOD EDGES 1.6mm BACKPLATE WITH OVAL CYLINDER
• CORE 100% SOLID PACKED . CUT-OUT.
• SS REBATE SET.
• SS FLUSH BOLT 150mm BOTTOM
• SSFLUSH BOLT 225mm TOP
WITH KICKPLATE UP TO DOOR HANDLE BOLT

100mm GALV. 12,5mm SHOOT TO LEAF ONLY
DOOR FINISHES
SUBSTRATE
FROM:
IRONMONGERY
• FINISH INTERNALLY WITH 1ct DULUX PINK • ASSA ABLOY

PRIMER, 1ct DULUX UNIVERSAL UNDERCOAT, • CISA
2cts DULUX SILTHANE SILK ENAMEL • DORMA
• GEZE
GENERAL
HINGES
• 6 No. 100x76mm BRASS BUTT HINGES
INTEGRAL WITH FRAME, SPINDLE OILED
• 0.8mm GMS SINGLE SHEET EPOXY GLUED
ONTO OUTER FACE OF DOOR, WITH 20mm
RETURN FLANGES ONTO SIDE & BOTTOM
DOOR FRAMES EDGES; & FULL RETURN OVER TOP WITH
• STANDARD 1.2mm DOUBLE REBATED GALV. 20mm FLANGE INSIDE - SCREWED AT EDGES
STEEL FRAME (CONCEALED WHEN CLOSED). PAINTED
FOR 230mm WALL SAME COLOUR AS WALL.

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D13 21
LOCATION: TRANSFORMER PLANTROOM DOOR

100 150
HINGE HINGE
100
100
2400
100
HINGE HINGE
150
FFL

• STANDARD STEEL TRANSFORMER STATION • STANDARD LOCK MEGANISM WITH
DOUBLE DOOR WITH STANDARD PADLOCK
VENTILATION GRIDS • SS FLUSH BOLT 150mm BOTTOM
• SS FLUSH BOLT 225mm TOP
DOOR FINISHES
SUBSTRATE
FROM:
IRONMONGERY
• SAME FINISH AS EXTERNAL STEEL OF REST • ASSA ABLOY

OF CENTER. • CISA
• DORMA
• GEZE
GENERAL
HINGES
• 4x No. 100x76mm STEEL BUTT HINGES
INTEGRAL WITH FRAME, SPINDLE OILED
DOOR FRAMES
• STANDARD 1.6mm DOUBLE REBATED GALV.
STEEL FRAME
FOR 230mm WALL

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D14 21
DETAIL
LOCATION: MANAGER WC 1 762
100 150

HINGE
100
COAT-HOOK
ON INSIDE
HINGE
CENTRED
100
900
PLASTER TO WALLS NO. DISK
DOOR LEAF
PULL HANDLES
2,032
FLUSH DOOR
KICK PLATE
STEEL FRAME BEYOND FULL WIDTH
FILL SOLID WITH FRAME WIDTH EQUAL TO ON OUTSIDE
MORTAR BEHIND WALL THICKNESS + 30mm TO U/S OF
STEEL FRAME BUILT IN ON LOCK SIDE DR HANDLE
CLOSE TO DIVISION WALL
100
HINGE
200
150
FFL
MAX. GAP UNDER DOOR = 4mm
DOOR DOOR FRAMES

WITH 3mm TEMPERED HARDBOARD BOTH STEEL FRAME FOR 110mm WALL
• CORE 50% SOLID TIMBER; WITH 1mm THICK PRIMER, 1ct UNIV UNDERCOAT, 2cts DULUX
POLISHED S/S KICKPLATE TO REQUIRED SIZE SILTHANE SILK ENAMEL
ON OUTER FACE,EPOXY GLUED & SCREWED
EDGES.
IRONMONGERY
SUBSTRATE
KICKPLATE HINGES
• Kickplate full width to underside of door • 3x 100mm STEEL BUTT HINGES INTEGRAL
handle WITH FRAME - PAINTED & SPINDLE OILED
DOOR FINISHES
GENERAL
• FINISH 1ct DULUX WOOD PRIMER, 1ct DULUX
SILTHANE SILK ENAMEL
• AIR GRILLE: TROX 425x225AGS-T

• NUMBER DISK - 45mm D x 2mm THICK.
LOCK & FURNITURE • AS COAT HOOK/DOOR STOP, FIXED WITH ONE-
WAY ALUM. SCREWS
• SS TUBULAR LEVER • NATURAL ANODISED SIGN PLATE WITH DOOR
• MORTICE SASH LOCK SS. NAME - BY CHECKERS, IF REQUIRED.
• KNOB CYLINDER.
• KEY NR. DISK.
FROM:
• ASSA ABLOY
• CISA
• DORMA
• GEZE

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D15 21
LOCATION:
DISPENSARY TO CONSULTING AND CONSULTING TO WC

877
813
100 150
HINGE
100
HINGE
100
NUMBER
DISK
2,032
KICK PLATE
900
100
HINGE
150
FFL
DOOR DOOR FRAMES

• 813x2032x40 SEMI SOLID CORE FLUSH DOOR • 1,6mm THICK DOUBLE REBATED PRESSED
WITH 3mm TEMPERED HARDBOARD BOTH STEEL FRAME.
EDGES CORE 100% SOLID TIMBER; WITH • FINISH SELF-ETCHING CALCIUM PLUMBATE
1mm THICK POLISHED S/S KICKPLATE TO PRIMER, 1ct UNIV UNDERCOAT, 2cts PLASCON
REQUIRED SIZE ON OUTER FACE ,EPOXY VELVAGLO WHITE
GLUED & SCREWED WITH COUNTERSUNK S/S
SCREWS ON OUTER EDGES. LOCK & FURNITURE
IRONMONGERY
• SS TUBULAR LEVER ON 152 x 152 CYLINDER

SUBSTRATE
PLATE.
• MORTICE SASHLOCK SS.
KICKPLATE • DOUBLE CYLINDER.
• Kickplate full width to underside of door
handle
FROM:
DOOR FINISHES • ASSA ABLOY
• CISA
• DORMA
PLASCON VELVAGLO WHITE • GEZE
GENERAL
• 1 no. SS DOORSTOP SCREWED TO FLOOR IN
SENSIBLE POSITION TO ALLOW MAXIMUM
HINGES OPENING.
• 45 D x 2mm THICK NUMBER DISK.
• KEY NR. DISK.

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D16 21
LOCATION: DISPENSARY PVT AREA AND CONSULTING AREA

211 PELMET
COSY TOP
80 80 (NOT INCLUDED
TRACK
IN DIY SET)
WALL OPENING
2000Highx800Wide
100
900
2032
RECESS
HANDLE
eq eq
900
Guide plate
KICK PLATE - FULL WIDTH TO UNDERSIDE

OF DOOR HANDLE 1mm THICK STAINLESS
STEEL WITH COUNTER SUNK STAINLESS
STEEL SCREWS TO SIDE INDICATED.
STAINLESS STEEL TO BE POLISHED
Guide plate
6
IRONMONGERY

SUBSTRATE
• 813x2032x40 SEMI-SOLID CORE FLUSH DOOR • HILLALDAM 211 PELMI (WHITE

WITH 3mm TEMPERED HARDBOARD BOTH POWDERCOATED)
FACES WITH CONCEALED EDGES • HILLALDAM 96 TP HANDLE
• CORE 50% SOLID TIMBER
DOOR FINISHES GENERAL

• FINISH 1ct PLASCON WOOD PRIMER, 1ct • TRACKSTOP ON COSY TRACK
PLASCON VELVAGLO WHITE
HINGES
• HILLALDAM COSY DELUX DOOR SLIDING SET
DOOR FRAMES
• NIL
• WALL OPENING 2000 x 800

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D17 21
LOCATION: BUTCHERY RECEIVING

1.200
2.500
FFL
DOOR DOOR FRAMES

• STRIP CURTAIN FROM APEX: INDUSTRIAL • NIL
QUALITY CLEAR PVC STRIP CURTAIN FOR
OPENING SIZE 1200wx2500h IN PANELS OF
150mm WITH MOUNTING BRACKETS TYPE B
IRONMONGERY
AS PER THE MANUFACTURER

SUBSTRATE
DOOR FINISHES LOCK & FURNITURE

• CLEAR • NIL
HINGES GENERAL
• NIL • NIL

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D18 21
LOCATION: DROP TEMP RECEIVING & FRUIT AND VEG PREP

1.800
2.500
FFL
DOOR DOOR FRAMES

IRONMONGERY

SUBSTRATE

• CLEAR • NIL
HINGES GENERAL
• NIL • NIL

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D19 21
LOCATION: DEPARTMENT TO PASSAGE, IF NOT DOOR, AND RETURNS

0.900
2.100
FFL
DOOR DOOR FRAMES

IRONMONGERY

SUBSTRATE

• CLEAR • NIL
HINGES GENERAL
• NIL • NIL

DOOR
DETAILS - C
D20 21
LOCATION: DROP TEMP. REC.; PERISHABLE REC.& FRUIT AND VEG REC.

2400-2600
2400-2800
FFL
DOOR DOOR FRAMES

IRONMONGERY

SUBSTRATE
(AVAILABLE FROM APEX)

• CLEAR • NIL
HINGES GENERAL
• NIL • NIL

DOOR
DETAILS - C
RS1 21
LOCATION: EXTERNAL ROLLER SHUTTER AT MAIN REC.; NIGHT DROP REC.;
DROP TEMP. REC.; PERISHABLE REC. AND FRUIT & VEG PREP REC.

2400-2600 STRUCTURAL OPENING
JAMB CORNER PROTECTORS ON FACE BRICK WALLS
GUIDE TRACK CHANNELS FLUSH

WITH OPENING JAMB FINISH
LINE OF SHUTTER BOX OVER
2400-2600 STRUCTURAL OPENING

FACE BRICK WALLS
SHUTTER BOX
SHUTTER BOX
LINE OF
WALL BEYOND LINTEL SOFFIT
100
2,400 OR 2700 STRUCTURAL OPENINGCHECK ON SITE
2,400 - 2800 STRUCTURAL OPENINGCHECK ON SITE

ROLLER SHUTTER DOOR
100x75x6 G.M.S. ANGLE

CORNER PROTECTORS 75x150x3mm STEEL
TYPE H FIXING BRACKETS
WELDED TO STEEL
CHANNELS &
BOLTED TO WALL
(CHEMICAL FIXING)
2,000
75x25x3mm COLD
ROLLED STEEL
GUIDE CHANNELS
FFL FFL
DOOR HINGES
• Size: 2400 x 2700 mm • None
• STEEL ROLLER SHUTTER BY SERRANDA (or
equal approved)
IRONMONGERY
• SLATS TO BE MIN. 1.2mm THICK CLOSER

SUBSTRATE
• CHAIN OR ELECTRIC OPERATED

• None
LOCK & FURNITURE

• STANDARD LOCK AS SUPPLIED WITH
DOOR - GOOD QUALITY ROBUST TYPE TO
DOOR FINISHES BE APPROVED BY ARCHITECT
• GALVANISED factory finish to all elements
• GALVANISED GUIDE-COASTAL
• MILD STEEL & PAINT - INLAND GENERAL
DOOR FRAMES • GUIDE TRACK EDGES TO BE FLUSH WITH
OPENING JAMB FINISH
• GUIDES
• DOOR TO RETRACT FULLY UP TO OPENING
SOFFIT & BOX TO BE ABOVE LINTEL
KICKPLATES
• None
DOOR DETAILS SCALE: NTS REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

DOOR
DETAILS - C
RS2 21
LOCATION: INTERNAL ROLLER SHUTTER AT MAIN REC.; NIGHT DROP REC.;
DROP TEMP. REC.; PERISHABLE REC. AND FRUIT & VEG PREP REC.

1800 STRUCTURAL OPENING
JAMB CORNER PROTECTORS ON FACE BRICK WALLS

1800 STRUCTURAL OPENING

FACE BRICK WALLS
SHUTTER BOX
SHUTTER BOX
LINE OF
WALL BEYOND LINTEL SOFFIT
100

ROLLER SHUTTER DOOR

CORNER PROTECTORS 75x150x3mm STEEL
TYPE H FIXING BRACKETS
WELDED TO STEEL
CHANNELS &
BOLTED TO WALL
(CHEMICAL FIXING)
2,000
75x25x3mm COLD
ROLLED STEEL
GUIDE CHANNELS
FFL FFL
DOOR HINGES
• Size: 1800 x 2400 mm • None
equal approved)
IRONMONGERY

SUBSTRATE
• CHAIN OPERATED.
• None
LOCK & FURNITURE

• STANDARD LOCK AS SUPPLIED WITH
DOOR - GOOD QUALITY ROBUST TYPE TO
DOOR FINISHES BE APPROVED BY ARCHITECT
• GALVANISED GUIDE-COASTAL
• MILD STEEL & PAINT - INLAND GENERAL
DOOR FRAMES • GUIDE TRACK EDGES TO BE FLUSH WITH
OPENING JAMB FINISH
• GUIDES
• DOOR TO RETRACT FULLY UP TO OPENING
SOFFIT & BOX TO BE ABOVE LINTEL
KICKPLATES
• None

DOOR
DETAILS - C
RS3 21
LOCATION: DRY REFUSE & BUTCHERY RECEIVING

JAMB CORNER PROTECTORS 1200-1800 STRUCTURAL OPENING
CONFIRM DIMENSION ON SITE
100x75x6 THRESHOLD CORNER PROTECTOR

FACE BRICK WALLS 1200-1800 STRUCTURAL OPENING

CONFIRM DIMENSION ON SITE
SHUTTER BOX
SHUTTER BOX
LINE OF
LINTEL SOFFIT
ROLLER SHUTTER DOOR

100
2400-2800 STRUCTURAL OPENINGCHECK ON SITE

WALL BEYOND
2,700 STRUCTURAL OPENINGCHECK ON SITE
75x150x3mm STEEL
FIXING BRACKETS
WELDED TO STEEL
CHANNELS &
BOLTED TO WALL
(CHEMICAL FIXING)
75x25x3mm COLD
2,000
ROLLED STEEL
GUIDE CHANNELS

CORNER PROTECTORS
TYPE H
FFL FFL
DOOR HINGES
• Size: 1200 x 2700 mm • None
IRONMONGERY

SUBSTRATE
equal approved)
• MANUAL CHAIN OPERATION - LH OR RH,
WHICHEVER IS SUITABLE • None
LOCK & FURNITURE

• 2 No. PADLOCKS INSIDE - BY CHECKERS
DOOR FINISHES
• BUTCHERY-PAINT BOX AND GUIDES
GENERAL
• GUIDE TRACK EDGES TO BE FLUSH WITH
OPENING JAMB FINISH
DOOR FRAMES • DOOR TO RETRACT FULLY UP TO OPENING
• GUIDES SOFFIT & BOX TO BE ABOVE LINTEL
KICKPLATES
• None

DOOR
DETAILS - C
SF1 A 21
LOCATION: MAIN ENTRANCE (SLIDING FOLDING)

SIDE FIXING
TO BEAM OVER
100
CLEAR GLASS
IN ACCORDANCE
WITH SABS 0400
2,620
3000-4000
LOCK
LOCK FLUSH PULL HANDLE

150
HASP & STAPLE AS PER DETAIL

AT SHOPFRONT 1
LOCK LOCK
480
HEAVY DUTY LEVER FLUSHBOLT WITH 25 MM SPRING

LOADING DUST COVER IN FLOOR FROM HENDERSON
DOOR BRUSH UNDER EACH DOOR
150
SIZE DETERMINED PER PROJECT
DOOR DOOR FINISHES

STACKING DOORS WITH SA SLIDING DOOR • NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM (SHOPRITE)
FLEXIROL PARALLEL STACKING DOOR GEAR OR POWDER COATED MATT ANTHRACITE GREY
,FOR FINISHED DOOR OPENING SIZE AS PER (CH & HYPER) ,WITH GLASS PANELS.
LAYOUT, WITH PANELS STACKING PARALLEL
IRONMONGERY
INSIDE TO THE OPENING. DOORS ARE TO

SUBSTRATE
STACK, WHEN VIEWED FROM THE INSIDE, TO HINGES

THE RIGHT/LEFT OF THE DOOR OPENING, AND
• ON HINGED DOOR: UNION L-2241-
MUST CONSIST OF ALUMINIUM TOP TRACK
65SS/2x8SC NARROW STILE CYLINDER
TYPE 550, SOFFIT FIX ALUMINIUM BRACKETS
UPRIGHT LOCK - KEYED TO DIFFER - S/STEEL
TYPE 3/550S AT MAX. 700mm CENTRES, TWO
FOREND & STRIKING PLATE
BEARING HANGERS TYPE 556/61 PER LEAF,
PARALLEL STACKING RIGS, FLUSH PULLS TYPE
400A & SEMI FLUSH BOLTS TYPE 333A PER OR SIMILIAR FROM:
DOOR LEAF, 2 No. SLIDING DOOR HOOK • CISA
LOCKS TYPE 239A/H AND TRACK STOPS TYPE • DORMA
109/550. • GEZE
OR
STACKING DOORS WITH HILLALDAM-
LOCK & FURNITURE
STACKAWAY 150 GEAR.SIZE AS PER LAYOUT. • 3 x LOCKSETS AS INDICATED
DOORS ARE TO STACK, WHEN VIEWED FROM • LOCK INSIDE AND OUTSIDE AT LAST DOOR
THE INSIDE, TO THE RIGHT/LEFT OF THE DOOR
OPENING.100mm SUSPENSION BRACKETS.
CROSS PLATES 180º,135º,90º GENERAL
DEGREES.ALUMINIUM TOP TRACK • SINGLE SS LEVER HANDLE ON ROUNDED
600A.GALVANISED 600TF HANGER @150 OFF BACKPLATE + NUMBER DISK - 45mm D x 2mm
THE EDGE OF THE DOOR,1 HANGER PER DOOR THICK
(S/STEEL AVAILABLE).LOCATING KEYS • CLEAR SAFETY GLASS & SEALS IN STRICT
180º,135º,45º.FLUSH PULL HANDLES PER DOOR ACCORDANCE WITH SANS 10400
LEAF.477 FLUSHBOLT.9139 DUSK SOCKET
S/STEEL. 080002-197K35/6-HOOK DEAD BOLT
ONLY (NO LATCH) 35mm BACKSET. 868x1 SK
HINGE 3 PER 2 DOOR PANELS.

DOOR
DETAILS - C
SF1B 21
LOCATION: MAIN ENTRANCE (SLIDING STACKING)

SIDE FIXING
TO BEAM OVER
100
CLEAR GLASS
IN ACCORDANCE
WITH SABS 0400
2,620
3000-4000
LOCK
LOCK FLUSH PULL HANDLE
HASP & STAPLE AS PER DETAIL

150
AT SHOPFRONT 1
LOCK
LOCK
150 480
HEAVY DUTY LEVER FLUSHBOLT WITH 25 MM SPRING

LOADING DUST COVER IN FLOOR FROM HENDERSON
DOOR BRUSH UNDER EACH DOOR
INSIDE FIXING
SIZE DETERMINED PER PROJECT
DOOR DOOR FINISHES

STACKING DOORS WITH SA SLIDING DOOR • NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM (SHOPRITE)
FLEXIROLL PARRALEL STACKING DOOR GEAR. OR POWDER COATED MATT ANTHRACITE GREY
SIZE AS PER LAYOUT. (CH & HYPER) ,WITH GLASS PANELS.
DOORS STACKING PARALLEL OUTSIDE TO THE
IRONMONGERY
OPENING.DOORS ARE TO STACK,WHEN

SUBSTRATE
VIEWED FROM THE INSIDE TO THE LEFT/RIGHT

OF THE DOOR OPENING ,AND MUST CONSIST
OF ALUMINIUM TOP TRACK TYPE 550,SOFFIT
FIX ALUMINIUM BRACKETS TYPE 3/550S AT
HINGES
MAX. 700mm CENTRES,TWO BEARING
HANGERS TYPE 556/61HD PER LEAF,PARALLEL
STACKING RIGS,FLUSH PULLS PER DOORLEAF
TYPE 400A,TYPE 333A,SLIDING DOOR HOOK
LOCK TYPE 239A/H AND TRACK STOPS TYPE DOOR FRAMES
109/550. • NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM
OR
STACKING DOORS WITH HILLALDAM-
LOCK & FURNITURE
STACKAWAY 150 GEAR.SIZE AS PER LAYOUT. • CYLINDER LOCK
DOORS ARE TO STACK, WHEN VIEWED FROM • 3x SETS LOCK FROM INSIDE AND OUTSIDE.
THE INSIDE, TO THE RIGHT/LEFT OF THE DOOR
OPENING.100mm SUSPENSION BRACKETS.
CROSS PLATES 180º,135º,90º
DEGREES.ALUMINIUM TOP TRACK
600A.GALVANISED 600TF HANGER @150 OFF
THE EDGE OF THE DOOR,1 HANGER PER DOOR
(S/STEEL AVAILABLE).LOCATING KEYS GENERAL
180º,135º,45º.FLUSH PULL HANDLES PER DOOR • CLEAR SAFETY GLASS & SEALS IN STRICT
LEAF.477 FLUSHBOLT.9139 DUSK SOCKET ACCORDANCE WITH SANS 10400
S/STEEL. 080002-197K35/6-HOOK DEAD BOLT
ONLY (NO LATCH) 35mm BACKSET.

DOOR
DETAILS - C
SF1C 21
LOCATION: MAIN ENTRANCE SWING DOORS (SHOPRITE ONLY)

DIMENSIONS TO BE CHECKED ON SITE
6,896
765 2,300 765 2,300 765
PIVOT FLUSHBOLTS PIVOT PIVOT FLUSHBOLTS PIVOT
SAFETY SAFETY SAFETY SAFETY

GLASS GLASS GLASS GLASS
LOCK 1 LOCK 1 fixed
fixed fixed pane
pane pane
3,000
NATURAL NATURAL
ANODISED ANODISED
480 150
480 150
LOCK 2 LOCK 2
1,030
1,030
fixed fixed fixed
pane pane pane
150
150
SLAB LEVEL FLUSHBOLTS FLUSHBOLTS

CONCEALED FLOOR CONCEALED FLOOR
PIVOT & SHOE PIVOT & SHOE
DOOR DOOR FINISHES

• ALUMINIUM FRAME DOUBLE SWING DOORS • NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM (SHOPRITE)
• ALL TO MANUFACTURERS' DESIGN AND OR POWDER COATED MATT ANTHRACITE GREY
SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS. (CH & HYPER) ,WITH GLASS PANELS.
• 8.5mm HPR FADEBAN CLEAR SAFETY GLASS
IRONMONGERY
SUBSTRATE
(PROVIDE CERTIFICATE TO VERIFY)

HINGES
• TOP & BOTTOM UNSPRUNG PIVOTS WITH
CONCEALED ARMS AND SHOES
DOOR FRAMES
• NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM
LOCK & FURNITURE

• CYLINDER LOCKS
• 4PR BACK TO BACK C-SHAPED HANDLES
• HOLES DRILLED IN FLOOR TO RECEIVE FLUSBOLTS
• DUST EXCLUDING SOCKETS
GENERAL
• CLEAR SAFETY GLASS & SEALS IN STRICT
ACCORDANCE WITH SANS 10400

DOOR
DETAILS - C
SF2 21
LOCATION: DOOR STACKING CUBICLE

FRAME 870
HINGE
SMOKEY GREY
TINTED GLASS
SAME HEIGT AS SF1A/B
CL
150
HINGE RECESS HANDLE
SMOKEY GREY
TINTED GLASS
630
HINGE
FFL

HEAVY DUTY FLUSHBOLT
NOTE:
• ALL ALUMINIUM WORKS TO BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH AAAMSA STANDARDS.
• THIS DRAWING IS A DESIGN INTENT DRAWING. THE SUBCONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DESIGN
& SUPPLY.
• MANUFACTURER'S SHOP DRAWINGS ARE TO BE FORWARDED TO THE ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL
BEFORE INSTALLATION.
IRONMONGERY

• ALUMINIUM FRAME WITH SQUARE BEADS; • RECESS HANDLE OR SS FLUSH RING
DOOR WITH 85mm WIDE HEADRAIL & STILES
/ 150mm WIDE MIDRAIL & BOTTOM RAIL. • ADJUSTABLE ROLLER CATCH
• ALL TO MANUFACTURERS' DESIGN AND
SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS. TO BE INSTALLED FROM:
FLUSH WITH EXTERIOR WALL TILES. • ASSA ABLOY
• CISA
SUBSTRATE
• DORMA
• GEZE
GENERAL
• 6mm SAFETY GLASS WITH SMOKEY GREY TINT TO
BE EXECUTED STRICTLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE GLASS MANUFACTURERS' SPECIFICATIONS
AND ALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL
BUILDING REGS, SABS D137, SABS 0400 & SABS
DOOR FINISHES 1263.
• SEALS: DESIGN & SUPPLY
• NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM (SHOPRITE)
OR POWDER COATED MATT ANTHRACITE
GREY (CH & HYPER) ,WITH GLASS PANELS.
HINGES
• 1 1/2 prs 100mm ALUMINIUM SINKLESS
HINGES WITH DOUBLE NYLON WASHERS

DOOR
DETAILS - C
SF3 21
LOCATION: FHR CUBICLE DOOR IN ARCADE

700-1100
HINGE
600
PLASTERED
SMOKEY GREY BRICK WALLS
TINTED GLASS
2,100
830
FRAME INSTALLED
CL 930 U/F WALL FLUSH WITH EXT
150
HINGE
WALL TILES
SMOKEY GREY
TINTED GLASS
630
HINGE
FFL
NOTE:
& SUPPLY.
IRONMONGERY

• ALUMINIUM FRAME WITH SQUARE BEADS; • RECESS HANDLE OR SS FLUSH RING
DOOR WITH 85mm WIDE HEADRAIL & STILES
/ 150mm WIDE MIDRAIL & BOTTOM RAIL. • ADJUSTABLE ROLLER CATCH
• ALL TO MANUFACTURERS' DESIGN AND
SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS. TO BE INSTALLED FROM:
FLUSH WITH EXTERIOR WALL TILES. • ASSA ABLOY
• CISA
SUBSTRATE
• DORMA
• GEZE
GENERAL
BE EXECUTED STRICTLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH
DOOR FINISHES THE GLASS MANUFACTURERS' SPECIFICATIONS
• NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM (SHOPRITE) AND ALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL
OR POWDER COATED MATT ANTHRACITE BUILDING REGS, SABS D137, SABS 0400 & SABS
GREY (CH & HYPER) ,WITH GLASS PANELS. 1263.
HINGES

DOOR
DETAILS - C
SF4 21
2100 OVERALL FINISHED OPENING

LOCATION: ADMIN OFFICE, SCANNING OFFICE ENTRANCE, BUTCHERY OFFICE,
ENTRANCE TO MEDIRITE, CAMERA ROOM (IF IN ARCADE)

900 FINISHED OPENING
HINGE
SMOKEY GREY
1,350
NUMBER
DISK
CL LEVER HANDLES
150
KNOB ON INSIDE HINGE
ALUMINIUM PANEL
480
750
HINGE
150
FFL

NOTE:
& SUPPLY.
IRONMONGERY

• ALUMINIUM FRAME WITH SQUARE BEADS; • SS TUBULAR LEVER HANDLE ON NARROW STYLE
DOOR WITH 85mm WIDE HEADRAIL & STILES BACK PLATE
/ 150mm WIDE MIDRAIL & BOTTOM RAIL.
• ALL TO MANUFACTURERS' DESIGN AND • KNOB CYLINER LOCK
SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS. TO BE INSTALLED • SS SPRING LATCH & DEADBOLT LOCK.
FLUSH WITH EXTERIOR WALL TILES.
SUBSTRATE
FROM:
• ASSA ABLOY
• CISA
• DORMA
• GEZE

• NUMBER DISK - 45mm D x 2mm THICK.
• NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM (SHOPRITE)
• DOORSTOP SCREWED TO FLOOR IN SENSIBLE
OR POWDER COATED MATT ANTHRACITE
POSITION TO ALLOW MAX. OPENING.
GREY (CH & HYPER) ,WITH GLASS PANELS.
HINGES BE EXECUTED STRICTLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE GLASS MANUFACTURERS' SPECIFICATIONS
AND ALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NATIONAL
BUILDING REGS, SABS D137, SABS 0400 & SABS
1263.
• KEY NR. DISK.

DOOR
DETAILS - C
SF5 21
LOCATION: DARK ROOM

900 FINISHED OPENING
HINGE
0.150
CLEAR GLAZING
1,350
NUMBER
DISK
CL LEVER HANDLES
150
KNOB ON INSIDE HINGE
ALUMINIUM LOUVRE
PANEL
480
750
HINGE
150
FFL
NOTE:
& SUPPLY.
IRONMONGERY

• ALUMINIUM FRAME WITH SQUARE BEADS; • SS TUBULAR LEVER HANDLE ON NARROW STYLE
DOOR WITH 85mm WIDE HEADRAIL & STILES BACK PLATE
/ 150mm WIDE MIDRAIL & BOTTOM RAIL.
• ALL TO MANUFACTURERS' DESIGN AND • KNOB CYLINER LOCK
SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS. TO BE INSTALLED • SS SPRING LATCH & DEADBOLT LOCK.
FLUSH WITH EXTERIOR WALL TILES.
SUBSTRATE
FROM:
• ASSA ABLOY
• CISA
• DORMA
• GEZE

• NATURAL ANODISED ALUMINIUM (SHOPRITE) • NUMBER DISK - 45mm D x 2mm THICK.
OR POWDER COATED MATT ANTHRACITE • SS DOORSTOP SCREWED TO FLOOR IN SENSIBLE
GREY (CH & HYPER) ,WITH GLASS PANELS. POSITION TO ALLOW MAX. OPENING.
• 6mm N.S. CLEAR FADEBAN SAFETY GLAZING
SHALL BE EXECUTED STRICTLY IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE GLASS MANUFACTURERS'
HINGES SPECIFICATIONS AND ALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE NATIONAL BUILDING REGS, SABS D137, SABS
• 1 1/2 prs 100mm ALUMINIUM SINKLESS 0400 & SABS 1263.
HINGES WITH DOUBLE NYLON WASHERS • SEALS: DESIGN & SUPPLY
• KEY NR. DISK.

DOOR
DETAILS - C Detail 21
LOCATION: ROLLER SHUTTER CORNER PROTECTOR & EXTERNAL DOOR DETAIL

ALL AROUND ROLLER SHUTTER OPENING AT RECEIVING
WALL
PLATE PROTECTOR FIXED TO
BRICKWORK WITH M6 BOLTS
150
ROLLER
100
SHUTTER
SIDE
3.5 MM MILD STEEL

PLATE PROTECTOR
220 - 250 - MEASURE ON SITE
TYPE H
1. ROLLER SHUTTER TYPE H CORNER PROTECTOR
SCALE 1:5
DOOR LEAF
25x75x6mm GALV.
MILD STEEL ANGLE WITH
BUILDING-IN-LUGS WELDED UNDER
AND BOLTED TO CONC. SLAB
POWERFLOATED CONCRETE SLAB

2. EXTERIOR DOOR DETAIL
SCALE 1:5
NOTE:
• APPLY TO ALL EXTERNAL DOORS

WINDOW
NUMBER LOCATION
VP01
SECTION 21.3 WINDOW DETAILS

ADMIN OFFICE
VP02 BUTCHERY OFFICE
VP03 RECEIVING OFFICE
VP04 CASH-UP & CASH OFFICE
VP05 CHECKOUT ARCADE
WINDOW
DETAILS - C VP01 21
LOCATION: ADMIN OFFICE

VARIES - REFER TO ARCHITECT DRAWING
line up with door frame

FIXED - 1.100
vision panels
dtl
1
glazing panel
12 x 12mm aluminium glazing
beading
natural anodised
aluminium frame
smooth, neat plaster &

painted wall
DETAIL 1: Visual Panel

scale: 1:5
WINDOW FRAMES GLAZING

• 1659 x 1100mm Natural Anodised • Thickness: 6mm clear glass
Aluminium Frame • Conforming to SANS10400N
WINDOW DETAILS SCALE: 1:5;1:20 REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

WINDOW
DETAILS - C VP02 21
LOCATION: BUTCHERY OFFICE


FIXED - 1.100
vision panels
dtl
1
glazing panel
beading
natural anodised
aluminium frame

painted wall

scale: 1:5

· 900 x 1100mm Natural Anodised · Thickness: 6mm S10 BRONZE
Aluminium Frame TINT glass
· Conforming to SANS10400N
WINDOW DETAILS SCALE:1:5; 1:20 REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

WINDOW
DETAILS - C VP03 21
LOCATION: RECEIVING OFFICE

FIXED - 1.100
vision panels vision panels

(sliding)
dtl
1
glazing panel
beading
natural anodised
aluminium frame

painted wall

scale: 1:5

• 1114 x 1100mm Natural Anodised • Thickness: 6mm CLEAR glass
Aluminium Frame • Conforming to SANS10400N
WINDOW DETAILS SCALE: 1:5; 1:20 REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

WINDOW
DETAILS - C VP04 21
LOCATION: CASH-UP & CASH OFFICE

610
38mm BRG
1,000
PT2
Ø50mm
150
Glazed formica
base with tray
680 dtl

• 900 x 1100mm Supplied by MUTUAL AUSTEN • Thickness: 38mm BRG
safe & security (021-930-3585/6/9) • Conforming to SANS10400N
WINDOW DETAILS SCALE: 1:20 REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

WINDOW
DETAILS - C VP05 21
LOCATION: CHECKOUT ARCADE

5,603
859 859 859 859 859 859 450
GLASS FASTENER GLASS FASTENER
FIXED TO STIFFENER FIXED TO STIFFENER
900
SEE ADDITIONAL PIC

800
50
2,200
6mm VERTICAL
STEEL SUPPORT
1,300
STEEL HOOP IRON STRAPS

EXTENDING 450mm
INTO BRICKWORK JOINTS AND
FIXED TWICE WITH
50 SHOT DRIVEN NAILS TO
120x100x8mm THE STEEL STIFFENER
THICK BASEPLATES EVERY 2nd BRICK COURSE
Elevation - GS1
100
GLASS FASTENERS: 56x56x24

scale 1:50 CHROME FASTENER
(SEE ADDITIONAL PIC)
SAFETY GLASS PANELS
- TEMPERED GLASS 6mm VERTICAL STEEL
800
SUPPORT PAINTED HAMMERTONE

SILVER
(PLEASE CHECK MANUFACTURER
SPECIFICATION FOR APPLICATION)
TRADING ENTRANCE
PLASTER & PAINT AS GALVANISED HOOP IRON STRAPS

PER FINISHES SPECIFICATION EXTENDING 450mm INTO THE BRICKWORK
1,300
JOINTS AND FIXED TWICE WITH SHOT

DRIVEN NAILS TO THE STEEL
STIFFENER AT EVERY 2nd BRICK COURSE
GALVANISED STEEL STIFFENER
100
Section
scale 1:20 230

• N/A • Safety Glazing to Conform to
SANS10400N
WINDOW DETAILS SCALE:1:50; 1:20 REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

SANITARY
SECTION 21.4 SANITARY DETAILS

NUMBER DISCRIPTION
SA01 TYPICAL 1850mm POT SINK
SA02 TYPICAL 1650mm POT SINK
SA03 TYPICAL 1650mm PREP SINK
SA04 WASHTROUGH
SA05 SINK IN CANTEEN
SA06 BASIN IN STAFF AREA
SA07 URINAL IN MALE TOILETS
SA08 DISABLED WC 1 OF 3
WATER SUPPLY
GEYSER
STOP TAPS STOP TAPS

WATER SUPPLY
NOTE: SLEEVES TO
1700mm A.F.F.L TAPS FOR ELECTRICAL
POT RACKS INSURE THAT WATER LINE SUPPLY
IS INSTALLED AS INDICATED
TO PREVENT PIPES BEING
DRILLED BY SHOPFITTER PAPER ROLL
HOLDER 175
SOAP
SANITARY DETAILS
DISPENSER
ALLOW FOR
TRANSFORMER
250
250
2 115
DCBPS DOUBLE BOWL POT SINK 100
150
150
ELECTRICAL UNIT
SANITARY
CONNECTION 75
DISTANCE TO BE AS SHORT ° BELOW WHB
DETAILS - C
AS POSSIBLE REFER TO 90
DRAINAGE LAYOUT
TYPICAL 1850mm POT SINK

BLACK PVC
1 060
TRAP CHROME BOTTLE
910
910
WALL
800
SCALE: 1:25
TRAP
HB GT 500 * SINK TO BE FIXED ON
KB/FT 2 GREASE TRAP FLOOR WITH PLUGS
FLOOR DRAIN AND SCREWS
AFFL AFFL
ELEVATION SCALE 1:20 POT SINK
SECTION 1:20
CONFIRM EXACT DIMENSIONS WITH SUPPLIER
1850 * WHITE SILICON
65 SEALANT TO BE
590 303 303 590 DONE BEFORE B.O.
75 75 75 75 50 25 25
50
385
150
WALL
75
115
CHROME BOTTLE
200
99 75
TRAP
420
800
REV DATE: 10.04.2019

50
305
200
650
551
AFFL
SA01
DISTANCE TO BE AS SHORT
AS POSSIBLE REFER TO WHB
DRAINAGE LAYOUT SECTION 1:20
REV -
PLAN SCALE 1:20
21

STOP TAPS STOP TAPS

COVER PLATE AGAINST
WALL TO BE FIXED 175
PROPERLY
250
2 115
150
150
SANITARY DETAILS
75
SANITARY
1 160
BLACK PVC
1 060
1 060
910
910
TRAP
DETAILS - C
WALL
* SINK TO BE FIXED ON
TYPICAL 1650mm POT SINK

FLOOR WITH PLUGS
AND SCREWS
AFFL AFFL
SCALE: 1:25
ELEVATION POT SINK
SCALE 1:20 SECTION 1:20
1650
491 75 75 302 302 75 75 490
65
WALL
75
100 75
320
NOTE:
- 1650 POT SINK
650
550
- TO BE PURPOSE MADE
REV DATE: 10.04.2019

PLAN
SCALE 1:20
SA02
REV -
21

STOP TAPS
COVER PLATE AGAINST

WALL TO BE FIXED
PROPERLY
CONFIRM EXACT DIMENSIONS WITH SUPPLIER 175
SANITARY DETAILS
250
2 115
150
150
75
665
SANITARY
1 160
DETAILS - C
1 060
910
910
TYPICAL 1650mm PREP SINK

WALL
* SINK TO BE FIXED ON
FLOOR WITH PLUGS
AND SCREWS
SCALE: 1:25
AFFL AFFL
ELEVATION
SCALE 1:20 740
POT SINK
1650 SECTION 1:20
824 824
7575
WALL
75
75
665
565
REV DATE: 10.04.2019

PLAN
SCALE 1:20
SA03
REV -
21

SANITARY
DETAILS - C SA04 21

600 COVER PLATE AGAINST
WALL TO BE FIXED
PROPERLY
* WHITE SILICON
300
SEALANT TO BE
DONE BEFORE B.O.
600
122
AFFL
ELEVATION SCALE 1:20
600
300
300
100100
WALL
WALL
600
500
247
AFFL
PLAN SECTION
WASHTROUGH
SANITARY DETAILS SCALE: 1:20 REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -
line indicates top fixing support:
50x50mm m/steel angle iron frame
fixed to wall with m10 frame fit inside
50
edge. weld cross section to frame
200
below vanity top.
10L ZIP instant quail underslung vanity basin
600
boiling water
dispensor product code: 7004
SINK IN CANTEEN
from vaal sanitaryware
SANITARY DETAILS
Rustenberg Grey granite top Sink Unit: Franke Curveline CVN621
UPPER SHELVING PLAN stainless steel satin sink.
Sink Mixer Spout: Hansgrohe - Décor E2 -
Mixer - Chrome - Single lever basin mixer
SANITARY
(Supplier code 31820000) chromium

plated, with waste, plugs, outlets, extension
DETAILS - C
pipes and traps.

Construct unit as per
dimensions with 12mm
thick white melawood
SCALE: NTS
135 200 with peened finish and
246 246 246 246 Isolator for hydroboil supawood core(suplam)
10l zip instant boiling
300
water dispensor 300
Waterpoint for hydroboil White silicone seal
1 232
* Rustenberg Grey granite top Rustenberg Grey granite top
844
300
644
644
Sink Unit: Franke Curveline CVN621

stainless steel satin sink.
2 115
Microwave Finish, single lever Sink Mixer Spout: Hansgrohe
140
32
Lintel over openings with
1 704
2 brick courses over
1 400
1 350
510
Tile unit with 400x400 Ivory Wall tiles

Code SH481
900
white grout. use PVC edge trim
REV DATE: 10.04.2019

Mild Steel bracket Rustenberg Grey
242
granite shelf
painted neutral
100mm high tiled plinth
100
100
110 110 110 110 tiled with floortiles

570
1 110 1 118 1 110
580
SA05
3 778
ELEVATION SECTION A-A
REV -
21

Ø50mm W.W.P BUILT IN WALL AND
CONNECTED AT 500mm A.F.F.L
*WHITE SILICONE SEALANT
32mm RUSTENBERG GREY GRANITE
1 874 VANITY TOP WITH BULLNOSE EDGE
357 580 580 357 DOTTED LINE INDICATES 38 X 38 X 3mm
Bolted to wall using M10 bolts.
Apply silicone sealant or equivalent around basin edges, GALVANISED STEEL ANGLE FITTED TO WALL
and between basin and finishedwall surface area for a
SINGLE LEVER BASIN MIXER 70
163
secure and neat installation. Wipe of excess sealant
PRODUCT CODE: 31733000
300
and allow to dry. from HANSGROHE SANITARYWARE
275
QUAIL UNDERSLUNG VANITY BASIN
300
PRODUCT CODE: 7004
SANITARY DETAILS
163
FROM VAAL SANITARYWARE
120 110 110 121 TO DB
471 471 471
BASIN IN STAFF AREA

Plan
CEILING
SANITARY
CEILING LINE
DETAILS - C
SCALE: 1:30
Ø25mm
FLUSH 30A PP
ISOLATOR
400
400 400 400 *MIRRORS TO BE FIXED AGAINST WALL

OVER TILES
Ø60mm
700
600
TAPS: SINGLE LEVER BASIN MIXER 70
357 580 580 357 200
2700
TAPS: SINGLE LEVER BASIN MIXER 70 163 275 163 HAND
from HANSGROHE SANITARYWARE DRYER
from HANSGROHE 215 HOSE TAP
300
VANITY TOP: 32mm RUSTENBERG GREY VANITY TOP: 32mm RUSTENBERG GREY
1900
GRANITE WITH BULLNOSE EDGE GRANITE WITH BULLNOSE EDGE
1 600
BOTTLE TRAP: COBRA BOTTLE TRAP: COBRA

340-CHRONIUM PLATE 340-CHRONIUM PLATE
BOTTLE TRAP BOTTLE TRAP
1 100
REV DATE: 10.04.2019

900
900
QUAIL UNDERSLUNG VANITY BASIN QUAIL UNDERSLUNG VANITY BASIN
PRODUCT CODE: 7004 PRODUCT CODE: 7004
FROM VAAL SANITARYWARE FROM VAAL SANITARYWARE
VANITY LEGS: 38mm SQ. TUBING VANITY LEGS: 38mm SQ. TUBING
ON ADJUSTING FEET ON ADJUSTING FEET
SA06
REV -
SECTION FRONT ELEVATION
21

SANITARY
DETAILS - C SA07 21

350 650
Square Modern Concealed touch free, electronic

control valve. Supplied by Cobra - Product Code: EL-
8.112
"Sweetpea" urinal wall hung with back inlet.

Supplied a 38 mm c.p. domical grating, a spreader
(with a 20 mm diameter thread), and two hanger
brackets. Supplied by Cobra - Product Code: 705126
650
650
SIDE VIEW: WALL HUNG PAN FRONT VIEW: WALL HUNG PAN
scale 1:25 scale 1:25
NOTE:
- THIS SHOULD BE READ IN CONJUCTION WITH SCHEDULE OF FINISHES
- PLEASE FOLLOW SUPPLIERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
URINAL IN MALE TOILETS

SANITARY
DETAILS - C SA08 21

1800
A
500
Grab rail Space for
645
Toilet
Wheelchair
Toilet roll
Holder
295
1800
WHB
DISABLED W.C.
4 m2
B
B
VANITY SHELF
400
PLAN VIEW 1:25

A
Mirror
770
380
Grab rail
300
1750
Flush handle 300

300
WHB
820
740
480
Toliet
Podium
600 347
DISABLED W.C 1 OF 3
SANITARY
DETAILS - C SA09 21

500
Grab rail
Grab rail WHB VANITY SHELF
820
740
Space for
480
Wheelchair
ELEVATION B-B 1:100

Hinged edge
Hinged edge
300
300
Pull handle
1000
300
700
0,600
Kick plate Kick plate
Inside Outside
ELEVATION
DISABLED W.C 2 OF 3
SANITARY
DETAILS - C SA10 21

DOOR LOCK AND HANDLE HEIGHT DETAILS & ELECTRICAL POINTS
ELECTRICAL POINT DETAILS
Light switch Door handle

150
Work top
1200
Door Socket outlet

500
450
DISABLED TOILET DETAILS
DISABLED W.C 3 OF 3
WIRE SCREEN
NUMBER LOCATION
WS01 RETURNS
SECTION 21.5 WIRE SCREEN DETAILS

WS02 DRY REFUSE
WS03 DRY REFUSE
WS04 MEZZANINE CAGES; B.O.H. STORE
WS05 RECEIVING, DROP TEMP. REC., PERISHABLE, F&V PREP
WS06 AT EXTERNAL ROLLER SHUTTER AT MAIN RECEIVING, NIGHT DROP REC.,

DROP TEMP. REC., PERISHABLE RECEIVING
WS07 NIGHT DROP RECEIVING
WS08 RECEIVING
WS09 BULK STORE
WS10 STAFF SECURITY
WS11 STAFF ENTRANCE
WS12 STAFF ENTRANCE
WS13 G.F. BULK STORE
WS14 BULK STORE STEEL CAGE - PLAN & ELEVATION
WS15 BATTERY CAGE & STORE - PLAN
WS16 BATTERY CAGE & STORE - ELEVATION 1
WS17 BATTERY CAGE & STORE - ELEVATION 2
WS18 MEZZANINE CAGES AT B.O.H - PLAN
WS19 MEZZANINE CAGES AT B.O.H - ELEVATION
WIRE SCREEN
DETAILS - C WS01 21
LOCATION: RETURNS
PULL GRIP
WELDED
TO GATE 50 x 100h PULL

GRIP WITH
50 35 ROUNDED CORNERS
50
100
100
CLEAR OPENING 1040
50
50
GATE 900
75 STRIKING PLATE
20 50
20mm GAP
SLOTTED HOLES
FOR PADLOCK
HINGE
20mm GAP BETWEEN

CAGE FRAME & GATE 75 x 50h 75
STILE (MAX. 25mm) STOP PLATE
75
50
35
2,400 CLEAR OPENING
PULL GRIP,
MESH SPOT-WELDED PULL GRIP
STRIKING PLATE
TO REAR FACE
OF GATE FRAMING & PADLOCK
75 x 50h x 5
STRIKING PLATE
2,330
BRACING TUBE
FLUSH WITH
MID-RAIL REAR FACE
GATE FRAME
CAGE POST
MESH
FACE BRICK WALLS
HINGE GATE
FFL
80
GATE FRAME
• 900x2330 HOT DIP GALV MILD • GALV MILD STEEL TUBING WITH
STEEL GATE WITH 50x50x2.5 MS COLD GALV APPLICATION TO
HOLLOW SECTION AND 25x25x2.5 WELDS
HOLLOW SECTION MIDRAIL FRAME • STRIKING PLATE 100x150h x5 GALV
TUBING MITRE CUT AT CORNERS & MS PLATE WITH HOLE FOR
FULLY WELDED & GROUND PADLOCK
SMOOTH MENTIS TYPE 304
EXPANDED METAL SHEETING SPOT
WELDED TO REAR FACE OF FRAME
75x100h x5mm STOP PLATE TO
REAR OF GATE & ROUNDED PULL
GRIP (TO DETAIL) WITH HOLE FOR
PADLOCK WELDED TO GATE STILE
HINGES LOCK & FURNITURE

• 2 no. GMS HINGES • PADLOCK: VIRO Heavy Duty
W.SCREEN DETAILS SCALE: VARIES REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

WIRE SCREEN
DETAILS - C WS02 21
LOCATION: DRY REFUSE 950 O/A
145
STRUCTURAL OPENING

150
RECEIVING PASSAGE
BOLT SPINDLE PASSING THROUGH
ALL CYLINDERS, SPOTWELDED AT
BASE TO LOWEST CYLINDER. TOP
& BOTTOM CYLINDERS WELDED TO
PLATE, MIDDLE SECTION TO GATE
FRAME - WITH STEEL WASHERS
STRUCTURAL OPENING BETWEEN. 145x150x10mm PLATE
SECURED TO WALL WITH 3 No.
GATE 900 950 O/A 12mm DIA RAWLBOLTS.
38x38x2.5mm HOLLOW
20
75x150x5 ROUNDED
TUBULAR FRAME WITH GMS EAR-PLATE
CORNERS MITRED & 50
EXPANDED METAL WITH 50x30x5
150
HINGE FULLY WELDED ROUNDED EAR
500
75
1,030 EQUAL
50 WIDE SLOT 115
AS REQD.
IN FRAMEWORK
EXPANDED METAL
50
WELDED TO FRAME
50
30
SLAM-PLATE, 115x150x5 ROUNDED
EAR-PLATE GMS SLAM-PLATE
& LOCK, CENTER EXPANDED METAL 115
ON MID-RAIL
STRUCTURAL OPENING
2,060
2,100
CL MID RAIL WELDED

TO OUTER FRAME
DIAMOND PRESSED
PANEL GMS PLATE PANEL 115
1,030 EQUAL
DIAMOND PRESSED 115x150x5 GMS

SLAM-PLATE
150
75x150x5 ROUNDED
HINGE GMS EAR-PLATE
BOLTED TO WALL
FFL FFL 75
20
20mm GAP TO FLOOR
GATE BOTTOM PANELS

• SIZE: 900w x 2060h SINGLE LEAF • 0.8mm PRESSED MILD STEEL
SWING GATE PLATES, ALL EDGES WITH 10mm
RETURN FLANGES, SPOT WELDED
TO INNER FACES OF FRAME AND
MIDRAIL
FRAME FINISH
• 38x38x2.5 HOLLOW TUBING, WITH • MADE UP GATE TO BE HOT DIP
CORNERS MITRED & FULLY WELDED GALVANISED
MID-RAIL LOCK & FURNITURE

• 38x38x2.5 HOLLOW MILD STEEL • PADLOCK: VIRO Heavy Duty
TUBE WELDED TO OUTER FRAME
TOP PANEL GENERAL

• EXPANDED METAL WELDED TO • No. 2 HINGES, EAR-PLATE & SLAM-
FRAME PLATE AS DETAILED

WIRE SCREEN
DETAILS - C WS03 21
LOCATION: DRY REFUSE 145

150
DRY REFUSE
BOLT SPINDLE PASSING THROUGH
ALL CYLINDERS, SPOTWELDED AT
BASE TO LOWEST CYLINDER. TOP
& BOTTOM CYLINDERS WELDED TO
PLATE, MIDDLE SECTION TO GATE
FRAME - WITH STEEL WASHERS
950 O/A BETWEEN. 145x150x10mm PLATE
SECURED TO WALL WITH 3 No.
RECEIVING PASSAGE 12mm DIA RAWLBOLTS.
950 O/A ROUNDED GMS EAR-PLATE

STRUCTURAL OPENING WELDED TO TOP GATE RAIL,
SLAM-PLATE, EAR-PLATE WITH HOLE FOR PADLOCK
GATE 900 SHAFT - PASSES THROUGH
& LOCK, IN CORNER
OF WALL OPENING HOLE IN SLAM PLATE
20
38x38x2.5mm HOLLOW 30 38 20
EXPANDED METAL
150
HINGE TUBULAR FRAME WITH

500
CORNERS MITRED &

FULLY WELDED
1,030 EQUAL
50 WIDE SLOT 115

IN FRAMEWORK
EXPANDED METAL
35 6
WELDED TO FRAME
100
ON OUTSIDE
2,100 STRUCTURAL OPENING

50
EXPANDED METAL 120

2,060
CL MID RAIL WELDED SLAM PLATE: 120x100x60x6mm

TO OUTER FRAME GMS ANGLE, WITH EXPOSED
CORNERS ROUNDED, TWICE RAWL-
BOLTED TO OPENING SOFFIT; 100
DIAMOND PRESSED RECTANG. HOLE FOR EAR-PLATE
PANEL GMS PLATE PANEL
1,030 EQUAL
DIAMOND PRESSED
60
HINGE
FFL 35
20
20mm GAP TO FLOOR
GATE BOTTOM PANELS

• SIZE: 900w x 2060h SINGLE LEAF • 0.8mm PRESSED MILD STEEL
SWING GATE PLATES, ALL EDGES WITH 10mm
RETURN FLANGES, SPOT WELDED
TO INNER FACES OF FRAME AND
MIDRAIL
FRAME FINISH
• 38x38x2.5 HOLLOW TUBING, WITH • MADE UP GATE TO BE HOT DIP
CORNERS MITRED & FULLY WELDED GALVANISED
MID-RAIL LOCK & FURNITURE

• 38x38x2.5 HOLLOW MILD STEEL • PADLOCK: VIRO Heavy Duty
TUBE WELDED TO OUTER FRAME
TOP PANEL GENERAL

• EXPANDED METAL WELDED TO • No. 2 HINGES, EAR-PLATE & SLAM-
FRAME PLATE AS DETAILED

WIRE SCREEN
DETAILS - C WS04 21
LOCATION: MEZZANINE CAGES; B.O.H. STORE PULL GRIP
WELDED
50 x 100h PULL TO GATE

GRIP WITH
ROUNDED CORNERS 35 50
CAGE GATE CAGE
50
100
100
50
50
STRIKING PLATE 75
CL CL
900 SLOTTED HOLES
FOR PADLOCK
MESH SPOT-WELDED TO
CAGE RAIL CORRIDOR-FACE OF CAGE FRAME
C/L 20mm GAP
20mm GAP BETWEEN HINGE

CAGE FRAME & GATE
STILE (MAX. 25mm)
75 75 x 50h
STOP PLATE
CAGE POST
MESH SPOT-WELDED TO
REAR FACE OF GATE FRAMING
75
PULL GRIP, STRIKING
50
35
PLATE & PADLOCK
PULL GRIP
2,255
75 x 50h x 5
BRACING TUBING FLUSH STRIKING PLATE
MID-RAIL WITH REAR FACE
GATE FRAME
MESH
HINGE
FFL
GATE FRAME
• 810x2185 GALV MILD STEEL GATE WITH • GALV MILD STEEL TUBING WITH COLD
50x50x2.5 MS HOLLOW SECTION AND GALV APPLICATION TO WELDS
25x25x2.5 HOLLOW SECTION MIDRAIL • PULL GRIP 5mm GALV MS PLATE
• FRAME TUBING MITRE CUT AT CORNERS WELDED TO GATE STILE
& FULLY WELDED & GROUND SMOOTH • STRIKING PLATE 70x50x5 GALV MS
• MENTIS TYPE 304 EXPANDED METAL PLATE WITH HOLE FOR PADLOCK
SHEETING SPOT WELDED TO REAR FACE
OF FRAME
LOCK & FURNITURE

• PADLOCK: VIRO HEAVY DUTY
PADLOCK
HINGES
• 2 no. GMS HINGES
W.SCREEN DETAILS SCALE: NTS REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -

WIRE SCREEN
DETAILS - C WS05 21
LOCATION: RECEIVING, DROP TEMP. REC., PERISHABLE, F&V PREP
YARD
LINE OF SHUTTER BOX ABOVE

FACE BRICK WALLS
RECEIVING CAGE
CAGE FRAME FIXED
TO WALL WITH
SPACERS IF REQD.
FREE OF JAMB
CORNER PROTECTORS
2,760 - CAGE FRAME - CONFIRM ON SITE
EQUAL EQUAL+60 EQUAL+60 EQUAL
TOP TRACK
LINE OF
STRUCTURAL
OPENING
HINGE HINGE HINGE HINGE
BRACKET WITH TRACK

2,400 STRUCTURAL OPENING - CONFIRM ON SITE
2,555 - CAGE FRAME - CONFIRM ON SITE

CAGE FRAME
MESH SPOT-WELDED
TO INSIDE FACE OF
INDIVIDUAL GATE
FRAMES
RS DOOR
JAMB CORNER MID-RAIL MID-RAIL MID-RAIL MID-RAIL

PROTECTOR
25
PULL GRIP,
BRACING TUBE FLUSH STRIKING
WITH INSIDE FACE PLATE &
PADLOCK
ANGLE BRACING
1,125
20mm GAP BETWEEN
CAGE FRAME &
GATE STILE
FFL
GATE FRAME
• 4no. GALV MILD STEEL GATES • 60x60x2.5 GALV MILD STEEL
WITH 50x50x2.5 HOLLOWSEC FRAME TUBING WITH COLD GALV
AND 25x25x2.5 HOLLOWSEC CROSS APPLICATION TO WELDS PULL GRIP
BRACING WITH 25x25x2.5 GALV MILD 150x40x5mm GALV MS PLATE
STEEL BRACING ANGLES FRAME WELDED TO GATE STILE HOLED FOR
TUBING MITRE CUT AT CORNERS & PADLOCK STRIKING PLATE
FULLY WELDED & GROUND SMOOTH 120x50x5mm GALV MILD STEEL
MENTIS TYPE 304 EXPANDED METAL WITH HOLES FOR BOLT BOTH SIDES
SHEETING SPOT WELDED TO INSIDE
FACE OF FRAME
LOCK & FURNITURE

• PADLOCK: VIRO HEAVY DUTY
PADLOCK
• HILLALDAM COLBURN FOLDASIDE
HINGES 123 TOP HUNG GEAR FOLDING TO
• 100mm HINGES BOTH SIDES WITH ALL ACCESSORIES

WIRE SCREEN
DETAILS - C WS06 21
LOCATION: AT EXTERNAL ROLLER SHUTTER AT MAIN REC., NIGHT DROP REC.,
DROP TEMP. REC., PERISHABLE RECEIVING

100
60x2.5x DEPTH AS REQD. LINE OF SHUTTER BOX OVER
G.M.S. SPACER TUBES
(CONFIRM SIZE ON SITE)
- FIXED TO WALL FREE FROM
RS DOOR FIXING BRACKETS RECEIVING CAGE
FACE BRICK WALLS 2,820 GATE FRAME - CONFIRM ON SITE
SHUTTER BOX
EQUAL EQUAL +60 EQUAL +60 EQUAL
LINE OF TOP TRACK

STRUCTURAL
OPENING

BRACKET WITH
TRACK
2,700 GATE FRAME - CONFIRM ON SITE

CAGE FRAME
MESH SPOT-WELDED
TO INSIDE FACE OF
RECEIVING YARD
RECEIVING CAGE
INDIVIDUAL GATE
FRAMES
MID-RAIL MID-RAIL MID-RAIL MID-RAIL
25
PULL GRIP,
BRACING TUBE FLUSH STRIKING
WITH INSIDE FACE PLATE &
PADLOCK
ANGLE BRACING
1,125
20mm GAP BETWEEN
CAGE FRAME &
GATE STILE
FFL FFL
GATE FRAME
• 4no. GALV MILD STEEL GATES WITH • 60x60x2.5 G.M.S. TUBING WITH COLD
50x50x2.5 HOLLOWSEC FRAME AND GALV APPLICATION TO WELDS, SPACED
25x25x2.5 HOLLOWSEC CROSS BRACING AWAY FROM WALL WITH 60w x DEPTH
WITH 25x25x2.5 GALV MILD STEEL AS REQUIRED x2.5 G.M.S. TUBING TO
BRACING ANGLES ALLOW FLOOR TRACK POSITION FREE
• FRAME TUBING MITRE CUT AT CORNERS ON INSIDE.
& FULLY WELDED & GROUND SMOOTH • PULL GRIP 150x40x5mm GALV MS PLATE
• MENTIS TYPE 304 EXPANDED METAL WELDED TO GATE STILE HOLED FOR
SHEETING SPOT WELDED TO INSIDE FACE PADLOCK. STRIKING PLATE 120x50x5mm
OF FRAME GALV MILD STEEL WITH HOLES FOR
BOLT BOTH SIDES
LOCK & FURNITURE

• PADLOCK: VIRO HEAVY DUTY PADLOCK
• HILLALDAM COLBURN FOLDASIDE 123
HINGES TOP HUNG GEAR FOLDING TO BOTH
• 100mm HINGES SIDES WITH ALL ACCESSORIES

WIRE SCREEN
DETAILS - C WS07 21
LOCATION: NIGHT DROP RECEIVING

2,500 WALL OPENING - CHECK ON SITE
GOODS HANDLING PASSAGE
GATE
2400 AFFL
NIGHT DROP RECEIVING
2600 - CONFIRM ON SITE SOFFIT OF

WALL
OPENING
50 817 25 817 25 817 50 TOP TRACK BOLTED TO
WALL WITH STEEL SPACER
BLOCKS BETWEEN
GUIDE TRACK WITH PATENT BRACKET & BOLTS
TOP RAIL OF GATE FRAME

WITH HANGERS AS REQD.
MESH SPOT-WELDED
TO REAR FACE
OF GATE FRAMING
GATE 2,430
2,500
BRACING TUBE
BRACING TUBING FLUSH
WITH REAR FACE
PULL GRIP,
STRIKING PLATE
& PADLOCK
1,105
U-SHAPED 5mm THICK

20x50hx5mm PLATE BOTTOM GUIDE
THICK ROUNDED CHANNEL-BRACKET WITH
LUG TO STOP ROUNDED TOP CORNERS STOP
GATE AGAINST BOLTED TO FLOOR LUG
GUIDE CHANNEL
GUIDE CHANNEL ON FLOOR AT HEEL END
GATE FRAME
• 2600w x2430mm GALV MILD STEEL GATE • GALV MILD STEEL TUBING WITH COLD
WITH 50x50x2.5 MS HOLLOW SECTION GALV APPLICATION TO WELDS
AND 25x25x2.5 HOLLOW SECTION CROSS • PULL GRIP 150x40x5mm GALV MS PLATE
BRACING WELDED TO GATE STILE HOLED FOR
• FRAME TUBING MITRE CUT AT CORNERS PADLOCK
& FULLY WELDED & GROUND SMOOTH • STRIKING PLATE 100x5 GALV MS PLATE
• MENTIS TYPE 304 EXPANDED METAL BOLTED TO WALL
OF FRAME
LOCK & FURNITURE
• HILLALDAM STRAIGHTAWAY 200
HINGES SLIDING GEAR
• 2 no. GMS HINGES

WIRE SCREEN
DETAILS - C WS08 21
LOCATION: RECEIVING

DROP TEMP RECEIVING
GATE 2400 AFFL
RECEIVING
SOFFIT OF
WALL
OPENING
50 783 25 783 25 783 50 TOP TRACK BOLTED TO

BLOCKS BETWEEN

MESH SPOT-WELDED
TO REAR FACE
OF GATE FRAMING
GATE 2430
2435
BRACING TUBE
WITH REAR FACE
PULL GRIP,
STRIKING PLATE
& PADLOCK
20x50hx5mm U-SHAPED 5mm THICK

THICK ROUNDED PLATE BOTTOM GUIDE
CHANNEL-BRACKET WITH STOP
LUG TO STOP ROUNDED TOP CORNERS LUG
GATE AGAINST BOLTED TO FLOOR
GUIDE CHANNEL
GATE FRAME
• 2500w x2185mm GALV MILD STEEL GATE • GALV MILD STEEL TUBING WITH COLD
& FULLY WELDED & GROUND SMOOTH • STRIKING PLATE 100x5 GALV MS PLATE
• MENTIS TYPE 304 EXPANDED METAL BOLTED TO WALL
OF FRAME
LOCK & FURNITURE
• HILLALDAM STRAIGHTAWAY 200
HINGES SLIDING GEAR

WIRE SCREEN
DETAILS - C WS09 21
LOCATION: BULK STORE

GAGE OPENING 2,500 - CONFIRM ON SITE
MESH ON INSIDE OF GATE MESH ON

CAGE CAGE OUTSIDE
OF CAGE
MESH ON OUTSIDE GATE 2,600 - CONFIRM ON SITE

OF CAGE FRAME
PULL GRIP,
STRIKING PLATE
& PADLOCK
MESH ON
INSIDE
OF GATE
TOP TRACK BOLTED TO 2,600 - CONFIRM ON SITE

VERTICAL POSTS OF CAGE
WITH STEEL SPACER- 50 817 25 817 25 817 50
BLOCKS BETWEEN
GUIDE TRACK WITH PATENT BRACKET & BOLTS PULL
40 GRIP
150
100
MESH SPOT-WELDED
TO REAR FACE
OF GATE FRAMING SLOTTED
HOLES FOR
PADLOCK
GATE 2,185
BRACING TUBE 2,255
WITH REAR FACE
PULL GRIP,
STRIKING PLATE
& PADLOCK
U-SHAPED 5mm THICK 20x50hx5mm

PLATE BOTTOM GUIDE THICK ROUNDED
CHANNEL-BRACKET WITH LUG TO STOP
ROUNDED TOP CORNERS STOP
GATE AGAINST LUG
BOLTED TO FLOOR GUIDE CHANNEL
GATE FRAME
• 2600w x 2185h GALV MILD STEEL GATE • GALV MILD STEEL TUBING WITH COLD
& FULLY WELDED & GROUND SMOOTH • STRIKING PLATE 100hx5 GALV MS PLATE,
• MENTIS TYPE 304 EXPANDED METAL HOLED FOR PADLOCK, WELDED TO
SHEETING SPOT WELDED TO REAR FACE CAGE POST
OF FRAME
LOCK & FURNITURE

HINGES • HILLALDAM STRAIGHTAWAY 200
SLIDING GEAR

WIRE SCREEN
DETAILS - C WS10 21
LOCATION: STAFF SECURITY ACTIVE LEAF 50 x 100h
PULL GRIP

WITH
ROUNDED
MESH MESH CORNERS
50
100
1,800 WALL OPENING
1,750
C/L 1,700 GATE OPENING C/L
50
50 20 820 20 820 50 20
50x50x2.5 SHS TOP RAIL, 20mm SUSPENDED CEILING

@ 2800 AFFL 85 x 50h
BELOW SUSPENDED CEILING
STRIKING
C/L PLATE
50
20
50x50x2.5 SHS
CAGE POST 50x50x2.5
SHS CAGE
455
BOLTED TO WALL MESH 50x50x4 ANGLE
POST
BOLTED
TO WALL
50
50x50x2.5 SHS CAGE RAIL
20mm GAP C/L
BETWEEN
20
GATE FRAMES 35 50 35
50
& CAGE HINGE STOP PLATE HINGE
STLILES/RAIL PULL GRIP
(MAX. 25mm) WELDED TO
MESH MESH ACTIVE GATE
100
CAGE FRAME OVERALL 2,780
50
PULL GRIPS SLOTTED
BOTH SIDES HOLES
OF ACTIVE
GATE LEAF FOR 85
PADLOCK
GATE 2,185
2,085
BRACE TUBING
FLUSH WITH MID-RAIL MID-RAIL
OPENING FACE
GATE
120
FRAME
MESH OF GATES
35
MESH
SPOT-WELDED TO
OPENING FACE 50
OF GATE FRAMING 70 x 40h PULL GRIP
ROUNDED
HINGE HINGE STOP PLATE
AT TOP OF
50
FFL GATES
20
GATE FRAME
• GALV MILD STEEL SWING GATE WITH 2 • GALV MILD STEEL TUBING AS
LEAFS SIZE 820 (w) x 2185 (h), EACH WITH INDICATED WITH COLD GALV
50x50x2.5mm MS HOLLOW SECTION GATE APPLICATION TO WELDS. OUTER
FRAME AND 25x25x2.5mm HOLLOW STILES & TOP RAIL TO BE MITRE CUT
SECTION MID-RAIL; FRAME TUBING MITRE AT CORNERS, FULLY WELDED &
CUT AT CORNERS & FULLY WELDED & GROUND SMOOTH, WITH MENTIS TYPE
GROUND SMOOTH, WITH MENTIS TYPE 304 304 EXPANDED METAL SHEETING SPOT
EXPANDED METAL SHEETING SPOT WELDED WELDED TO EXTERNAL FACE OF CAGE
TO OPENING FACE OF EACH GATE FRAME. FRAME (ON AIRLOCK/PASSAGE SIDE).
PULL GRIPS 5mm GALV MS PLATE BOTH ROUNDED STOP PLATE 70x40x5
SIDES OF ACTIVE GATE. STRIKING PLATE WELDED TO CAGE RAIL AT TOP OF
85x50x5 GALV MS PLATE ON INACTIVE LEAF MEETING GATE STILES.
(CONFIRM PULL GRIPS/STRIKING PLATE ON
SITE).
LOCK & FURNITURE

• MAGLOCK AS PER ELECTR. ENG'S
SPECIFICATIONS.
HINGES • No. 2 SUITABLE APPROVED DORMA
DOOR CLOSERS (ON AIRLOCK SIDE) -
• 2 PAIRS GMS HINGES
CONFIRM WITH ARCHITECT ON SITE.

WIRE SCREEN
DETAILS - C WS11 21
LOCATION: STAFF ENTRANCE 6mm Ø THREADED MS RODS
WELDED TO FRAME &

PULL GRIP 50x100h PULL BOLTED THROUGH TIMBER
38 38 WELDED GRIP WITH DOOR FRAME, WITH NUTS/
TO GATE 50 ROUNDED CORNERS WASHERS ON INSIDE TO BE
MADE TAMPER PROOF
100
100
40x40x5
50
50
STOP PLATE
75 STRIKING PLATE
75
SLOTTED HOLES 50
37
FOR PADLOCK PULL GRIP
OPENING 930 (C.O.S.)
20 75 x 50h x 5
50 GATE 790 (C.O.S.) 20 50
STRIKING PLATE
20 50
40x40x5mm
ROUNDED STOP
270
PLATE WELDED
TO FRAME
HINGE
20mm GAP BETWEEN

FIXING FRAME & GATE POSITIONS FOR 3 No.
THREADED FIXING RODS
STILE (MAX. 25mm) ON EACH STILE OF FRAME
DOOR CD24
FRAME HEIGHT 2,090 (C.O.S.)
800
PULL GRIP,
STRIKING PLATE
2,000 (C.O.S.)
& PADLOCK
GATE
MID-RAIL FACE BLOCK WALLS
MIDRAIL FLUSH WITH

800
FIXING FRAME OUTSIDE FACE

MESH
GATE FRAME
MESH SPOT-WELDED
TO OUTSIDE FACE
OF GATE FRAMING
HINGE
220
FFL
20
GATE FRAME CONT.

• 790x2000mm HOT DIP GALV MILD STEEL ... THREADED MS RODS WELDED TO REAR
GATE WITH 38x38x2.5 MS HOLLOW OF FRAME WHERE INDICATED & BOLTED
SECTION AND 25x25x2.5 HOLLOW SECTION THROUGH TIMBER DOOR FRAME ON INSIDE
MIDRAIL WITH NUTS & WASHERS MADE TAMPER
• FRAME TUBING MITRE CUT AT CORNERS & PROOF. STRIKING PLATE 75x50x5mm GMS
FULLY WELDED & GROUND SMOOTH PLATE ON FRAME STILE. ROUNDED STOP
• MENTIS TYPE 304 EXPANDED METAL PLATE 40x40x5mm WELDED TO FRAME AT
SHEETING SPOT WELDED TO EXTERNAL TOP OF GATE STILE.
(OPENING) FACE OF FRAME
• ROUNDED PULL GRIP (TO DETAIL) WITH
HOLE FOR PADLOCK WELDED TO GATE
STILE
LOCK & FURNITURE
HINGES • MAGLOCK AS PER ELECTR. ENG'S
SPECIFICATIONS, CONNECTED TO SMOKE
• 1 PAIR GMS HINGES
ALARM.
FRAME • SUITABLE APPROVED HOLDING CATCH
ON EXTERNAL SIDE WALL - CONFIRM
• HOT DIP GALV FRAME FROM 50x50x2.5 MS WITH ARCHITECT & CLIENT ON SITE.
HOLLOW SECTION TUBING, MITRE CUT AT • VIRO HEAVY DUTY PADLOCK
CORNERS FULLY WELDED & GROUND
SMOOTH, WITH 6 No. 6mm Ø...

WIRE SCREEN
DETAILS - C WS12 21
LOCATION: STAFF ENTRANCE

PULL GRIP 120
WELDED 50x100h PULL GRIP
TO GATE 50 35 BOTH SIDES WITH
ROUNDED CORNERS
50
100
100
1,500 WALL OPENING (C.O.S.)
225 990 225
50
275 275
50
50 175 20 GATE 900 20 175
50 50 50 SLOTTED HOLES 75
50x50x2.5 SHS TOP RAIL, 20mm STRIKING PLATE
BELOW SUSPENDED CEILING (2800 AFFL) FOR PADLOCK
50 20
50x50x2.5 SHS 50x50x2.5
CAGE STILE SHS CAGE
70 x 40h STOP
455
BOLTED TO WALL MESH 50x50x4 ANGLE STILE BOLTED
TO WALL PLATE AT TOP
OF CAGE FRAME
70x40hx5 ROUNDED
50x50x2.5 SHS CAGE RAIL
50
STOP PLATE ON
CLOSING FACE
20
120
20mm GAP BETWEEN HINGE
GATE FRAME & CAGE
STILES/RAIL (MAX 25mm)
50
35
MESH MESH MESH
CAGE FRAME OVERALL 2,780
PULL GRIP
MESH SPOT-WELDED 50x50x2.5
TO FRONT FACE SHS CAGE
OF CAGE FRAME 75 x 50h x 5
POST STRIKING PLATE
PULL GRIPS BOTH
SIDES OF GATE,
STRIKING PLATE 50x50x4
GATE 2,185
& PADLOCK ANGLE

2,225
MID-RAIL
BRACE TUBING FLUSH
WITH OPENING FACE
MESH MESH MESH
GATE FRAME
MESH OF GATE C/L C/L C/L C/L

MESH SPOT-WELDED TO MESH
OPENING FACE
OF GATE FRAMING
1,500 WALL OPENING (C.O.S.)
225 990 225
HINGE 275 275
FFL
GATE FRAME CONT.

• GALV MILD STEEL SWING GATE SIZE 900 ... AT CORNERS, FULLY WELDED &
(w) x 2185 (h), WITH 50x50x2.5mm MS GROUND SMOOTH, WITH MENTIS TYPE
HOLLOW SECTION GATE FRAME AND 304 EXPANDED METAL SHEETING SPOT
25x25x2.5mm HOLLOW SECTION MID-RAIL; WELDED TO EXTERNAL FACE OF CAGE
FRAME TUBING MITRE CUT AT CORNERS & FRAME (STAFF ENTRANCE SIDE). STRIKING
FULLY WELDED & GROUND SMOOTH, PLATE 75x50x5mm GMS PLATE ON CAGE
WITH MENTIS TYPE 304 EXPANDED METAL STILE. ROUNDED STOP PLATE 70x40x5mm
SHEETING SPOT WELDED TO OPENING WELDED TO CAGE RAIL AT TOP OF GATE
FACE OF GATE FRAME. PULL GRIPS 5mm STILE.
GALV MS PLATE BOTH SIDES OF GATE.
LOCK & FURNITURE

HINGES • MAGLOCK AS PER ELECTR. ENG'S
SPECIFICATIONS, CONNECTED TO SMOKE
• 1 PAIR GMS HINGES
ALARM.
FRAME • SUITABLE APPROVED DORMA DOOR
CLOSER (ON AIRLOCK SIDE) - CONFIRM
• GALV MILD STEEL TUBING AS INDICATED WITH ARCHITECT & CLIENT ON SITE.
WITH COLD GALV APPLICATION TO • VIRO HEAVY DUTY PADLOCK
WELDS OUTER STILES & TOP RAIL TO BE
MITRE CUT...

WIRE SCREEN
DETAILS - C WS13 21
LOCATION: G.F. BULK STORE

DURALITE DOUBLE SWING DOOR
TRADING AREA
2045 AFFL
GATE
G.F. BULK STORE SOFFIT OF
WALL
OPENING
TOP TRACK BOLTED TO 50 978 25 978 50

BLOCKS BETWEEN

MESH SPOT-WELDED
TO REAR FACE
OF GATE FRAMING
GATE 2,075 - CONFIRM ON SITE
2,145 - C.O.S.
BRACING TUBE
WITH REAR FACE
PULL GRIP,
STRIKING PLATE
& PADLOCK
1,105
U-SHAPED 5mm THICK 20x50hx5mm

PLATE BOTTOM GUIDE THICK ROUNDED
CHANNEL-BRACKET WITH LUG TO STOP STOP
ROUNDED TOP CORNERS GATE AGAINST LUG
BOLTED TO FLOOR GUIDE CHANNEL
GATE FRAME
• 2080w x 2075h GALV MILD STEEL GATE • GALV MILD STEEL TUBING WITH COLD
& FULLY WELDED & GROUND SMOOTH • STRIKING PLATE 100hx5 GALV MS PLATE,
• MENTIS TYPE 304 EXPANDED METAL HOLED FOR PADLOCK, WELDED TO
SHEETING SPOT WELDED TO REAR FACE CAGE POST
OF FRAME
LOCK & FURNITURE

HINGES • HILLALDAM STRAIGHTAWAY 200
SLIDING GEAR

C09
11,720
1,863 1,863 1,863 1,863 2,590 1,620
C/L C/L CROSS FLOOR BEAM C/L C/L C/L 1,108 122 1,269 C/L
50x50x2.5 OF MEZZANINE MEZZANINE SUPPORT 50x50x2.5 CROSS BEAM HEIGHT OF C/L
122 50 SHS FRAMES BEAMS 168 50 SHS FRAME 90x90x4.0 SHS STILES MEZZANINE STRUCTURE
848 122 814 50 112
10
355 50
50
50x50x4 50x50x4 50x50x4 50x50x4 50x50x4 50x50x4
ANGLES ANGLES ANGLES ANGLES ANGLES ANGLES
2,340
2,280
W.SCREEN DETAILS
60x60x2.5 60x60x2.5 60x60x2.5
DETAILS - C
GUIDE TRACK FOR GATE

WIRE SCREEN
60
4,165
SLIDING GATE
50x50x4 50x50x4 50x50x4 TYPE WS10 50x50x4
ANGLE ANGLE ANGLE AS PER DOOR ANGLE
SCHEDULE
DETAIL : TYPICAL STEEL CAGES

SCALE: NTS
2,160
2,290
C/L TO MATCH
50x50x4 50x50x4 50x50x4 GATE MIDRAIL
ANGLE ANGLE ANGLE
50
FFL
20
LOCATION: BULK STORE STEEL CAGE - PLAN & ELEVATION
60x60x2.5 SHS 90x90x4.0 MESH WELDED TO 90x90x4.0 50x50x2.5 SHS 90x90x4.0 GATE MESH WELDED TO 60x60x2.5 STILE
FIXED TO WALL SHS STILE OUTSIDE OF CAGE FRAMES SHS STILE SHS STILE INSIDE OF GATE FRAME FIXED TO COLUMN
C09
REV DATE:
EXTERNAL ELEVATION: STEEL CAGE 1
GROUND FLOOR BULK STORE

60x60x2.5 90x90x4.0 90x90x4.0 90x90x4.0 90x90x4.0 WS10 90x90x4.0 60x60x2.5
SHS STILE SHS STILE SHS STILE SHS STILE SHS STILE SHS STILE SHS STILE
steel sliding gate
10.04.2019
1,863 1,863 1,863 1,863 2,590 1,620
O/A 11,720
REV -
PLAN: STEEL CAGE 1
WS14 21

50
2,236
W.SCREEN DETAILS
DETAILS - C
2C
WIRE SCREEN
50
CAGE O/A 4,632
LOCATION: BATTERY CAGE & STORE - PLAN

SCALE: NTS
2,236
STORE BATTERY CAGE
60x60x2.5 WS09 60x60x2.5
STILE STILE
WS06 steel sliding gate
REV DATE:
60
655 850 50 2,475 2,445 60

O/A 1,555 O/A 4,980
10.04.2019
2A 2B
WS15
PLAN: STEEL CAGES 2
REV -
21

4,980 FINISHED OPENING
655 GATE 850 50 2,475 GATE OPENING 2,445 60
50x50x2.5 STILE 50x50x2.5 RC SLAB ABOVE 60x60x2.5 50x50x2.5

FIXED TO WALL SHS FRAME STILE SHS FRAME
50 10
50x50x
2.5 STILE
50x50x4 50x50x4
W.SCREEN DETAILS
ANGLES ANGLES
1,120
50x50x GUIDE TRACK
1,060
DETAILS - C
2.5 SHS FOR GATE

FRAME
WIRE SCREEN
50
GATE SLIDING GATE
TYPE WS06 TYPE WS09
50x50x2.5 50x50x4
SHS FRAME ANGLES

SCALE: NTS
COLUMN
LOCATION: BATTERY CAGE & STORE - ELEVATION 1
2,160
2,280
C/L TO
50x50x4 MATCH
ANGLES
REV DATE:
50
FFL
20
50x50x2.5 SHS MESH WELDED 50x50x2.5 STILES MESH WELDED GATE MESH WELDED TO 60x60x2.5 STILE
TO OUTSIDE FIXED TO COLUMN TO OUTSIDE INSIDE OF GATE FRAME FIXED TO COLUMN
OF CAGE FRAME OF CAGE FRAME
10.04.2019
CAGE 2A CAGE 2B
EXTERNAL ELEVATION: STEEL CAGES 2A & 2B
REV -
WS16 21

CAGE O/A 4,632
60 2,236 50 2,236 50
60x60x2.5 RC SLAB ABOVE 50x50x2.5 50x50x2.5 STILE

STILE STILE FIXED TO WALL
10
50
W.SCREEN DETAILS
50x50x4 50x50x 50x50x4
ANGLE 2.5 SHS ANGLE
DETAILS - C
1,120
1,060
WIRE SCREEN
50

50x50x4 50x50x2.5 50x50x4
SCALE: NTS
ANGLES SHS FRAME ANGLES
LOCATION: BATTERY CAGE & STORE - ELEVATION 2
2,160
2,280
50x50x4 50x50x4
ANGLE ANGLE
REV DATE:
FFL
20 50
50x50x2.5 SHS MESH WELDED
TO BATTERY CAGE SIDE
10.04.2019
ELEVATION STEEL CAGE 2C
WS17
REV -
21

3,101 2,897 2,897 2,897 2,978
1,152 910 994 993 910 994 993 910 994 993 910 994 993 910 1,029
50x50x2.5 SHS
FIXED TO WALLS
1,925
60x60x2.5 SHS
CROSS BRACING
W.SCREEN DETAILS
1,925
OVER CAGES
DETAILS - C
WIRE SCREEN
1,925
4A 4B 4C 4D
50x50x4 ANGLE
CROSS BRACING
OVER CAGES

SCALE: NTS
LOCATION: MEZZANINE CAGES AT B.O.H - PLAN
1,925
CAGE 10 CAGE 9 CAGE 8 CAGE 7 CAGE 6
9,620 - INTERNAL DEPTH OF CAGE (WALL TO FRONT)

1,920
REV DATE:
60
WS06 WS06 WS06 WS06 WS06
C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L C/L
1,152 910 994 994 910 994 994 910 994 994 910 994 994 910 1,029
3,056 2,897 2,897 2,897 2,933
10.04.2019
MAIN FRAME OVERALL 14,740
REV -
PLAN: STEEL SCREENS 3 & 4 (CAGES 6-10) (SCALE: 1:100)
WS18 21

14,740 OVERALL CAGE SIZE (CONFIRM ON SITE)
3,056 2,897 2,897 2,897 2,933
1,152 910 994 994 910 994 994 910 994 994 910 994 994 910 1,029
60x60x2.5 STILE 60x60x2.5 SHS 60x60x2.5 SHS 60x60x2.5 STILE

FIXED TO COLUMN CAGE FRAME CAGE FRAME FIXED TO WALL
60x60 60x60 60x60

x2.5 60x60x2.5 x2.5 x2.5
720
660 60
STILES SHS FRAME STILES STILES
50
GATE GATE GATE GATE
TYPE WS06 TYPE WS06 TYPE WS06 TYPE WS06
50x50x4 50x50x2.5 50x50x4 50x50x2.5 50x50x2.5 50x50x4
ANGLE SHS FRAME ANGLE SHS FRAME SHS FRAME ANGLE
2,160
2,280
COLUMN
50x50x2.5 50x50x2.5 50x50x2.5
W.SCREEN DETAILS
3,000 OVERALL HEIGHT OF CAGES
FFL
DETAILS - C
50
20
MESH WELDED TO OUTSIDE MESH WELDED TO OUTSIDE

OF CAGE FRAME MEZZANINE FLOOR & SUPPORT STRUCTURE OF CAGE FRAME
AS PER ENG'S DETAILS
WIRE SCREEN
EXTERNAL ELEVATION: STEEL SCREEN 3 (CAGES 6-10)

9,680 O/A DIMENSION OF CAGE
SCALE: NTS
9,620 INTERNAL DIMENSION OF CAGE 60
1,925 1,925 1,925 1,925 1,920

50x50x2.5 SHS MESH WELDED ON TOP OF FRAME AS CEILING.
FIXED TO WALL SPRINKLERS TO BE INSIDE CAGES
50x50x4 ANGLE 60x60x2.5 SHS 50x50x4 ANGLE 60x60x2.5 SHS
CROSS BRACINGS CROSS BRACINGS CROSS BRACINGS CROSS BRACINGS
60
60x60 50x50x4
LOCATION: MEZZANINE CAGES AT B.O.H STORE - ELEVATION
x2.5 ANGLES
720
720
660 60
STILES
50
50
REV DATE:
60x60 60x60
x2.5 x2.5
STILE 50x50x4 50x50x2.5 STILES
BOLTED ANGLE SHS FRAME
TO WALL
2,160
2,160
2,280
2,280
3,000 -O/A CAGE HEIGHT

50x50x2.5
50x50x4 SHS FRAME
OVERALL HEIGHT OF CAGES 3,000
ANGLES
10.04.2019
50
FFL FFL
50
20
20
MEZZANINE STEEL FLOOR STRUCTURE AS PER ENGINEER
REV -
TYPICAL SIDE ELEVATION: STEEL SCREENS 4A-4D (CAGES 6-10)
WS19 21

REFRIGERATION
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
SECTION 21.6 REFRIGERATION DETAILS

R01 TYPICAL CROSS-SECTION OF PANELS FOR
COLD/FREEZER ROOMS
R02 TYPICAL JOINT DETAILS 1 OF 2

R03 TYPICAL JOINT DETAILS 2 OF 2
R04 RECESSED FREEZER ROOM FLOOR
R05 RAISED FREEZER ROOM FLOOR
R06 UNINSULATED COLD ROOM FLOOR
R07 RAISED COLD ROOM FLOOR
R08 RAISED COLD ROOM FLOOR
R09 STANDARD SWING DOOR
R10 TYPICAL SWING DOOR FRAME SECTION(TOP)
R11 STANDARD SLIDING DOOR
R12 TYPICAL CROSS-SECTION OF PANELS FOR

COLD/FREEZER ROOMS
STANDARD DOOR SECTION (BOTTOM) WITH
R13 RAMP
STILL/THRESHOLD DETAIL FOR FREEZER ROOMS

R14 (PART 1 OF 2)
STILL/THRESHOLD DETAIL FOR FREEZER ROOMS

R15 (PART 2 OF 2)
EXTERIOR WALL HEIGHT AT JOINT WITH NON-

R16 INSULATED CEILING
R17 INTEGRATED BUTCHERY COLD ROOM MEAT RAILS
R18 STAND-ALONE BUTCHERY COLD ROOM MEAT RAILS
R19 INTERNAL CHEQUERED PLATE INSTALLATION
R20 LIQUORSHOP COLD ROOM SHELVING
R21 STRIP CURTAINS
R22 CORNER CLIP-ON COVING
R23 REFRIGERATION COMPRESSOR PLANT 1 OF 2
R24 REFRIGERATION COMPRESSOR PLANT 2 OF 2
REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R01 21

0.6 0.6
varies
White Chromodek Virgin Polystyrene Lamination

Steel (0.6mm) (U = 0,046W/mc between
AND 16 kg/m³) OR chromodek
Polyurethane (U = and insulation
0,046W/mc AND core
16 kg/m³) foam
OPERATING TEMPERATURE INSULATION THICKNESS USAGE

• +10°C / +15°C • 50mm Polyurethane OR Drop temp/ prep
75 Polystyrene areas
• 0°C / +5°C • 80mm Polyurethane OR Coldroom

100 Polystyrene
• -29°C • 100mm Polyurethane OR Freezer

150 Polystyrene
TYPICAL CROSS-SECTION OF PANELS FOR COLD/FREEZER ROOMS

REFRIG. DETAILS SCALE: 1:1 REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -
REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R02 21

INTERNAL INTERNAL EXTERNAL
50 x 50 x 2mm ALUMINIUM ANGLE FIXED
WITH BLIND RIVETS AT 200mm CENTERS
AND SEALED WITH SILICONE SEALANT
WALL WALL
45° JOINT
WALL WALL REFRIGERANT SEALANT (NON

HARDENING BUTYL MASTIC)
WALL TO WALL WALL TO WALL

"T" JOINT "L" JOINT
100 x 100 0,8mm WHITE CHROMADEK BENT CORNER
DETAIL. FIXED WITH RIVETS AT 200 CENTERS. SEALED WITH
REFRIGERANT & SILICONE SEALANT. FREEZER TO HAVE 150
JOINT TO BE FOAM CLOSED OR PACKED x 150 0,8mm WHITE CHROMADEK BENT FLASHING.
WITH MINERAL WOOL BEFORE CORNER
CLADDING FITTED
CEILING
PANELS REBATED AND STEEL SKINS CUT 50 x 50 x 2L ALUMINUM ANGLE FIXED WITH
BACK TO PROVIDE THERMAL BLIND RIVETS AT 200 CENTERS SEALED WITH
DISCONTINUITY SILICONE SEALANT
WALL
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
INSULATED WALL TO
INSULATED CEILING JOINT
TYPICAL JOINT DETAILS 1 OF 2

REFRIG. DETAILS SCALE: NTS REV DATE: 10.04.2019 REV -
REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R03 21

INTERNAL FREEZER INTERNAL COLD ROOM
ROOM 50 x 50 x 2mm ALUMINIUM ANGLE FIXED
WITH BLIND RIVETS AT 200mm CENTERS AND
SEALED WITH SILICONE SEALANT
WALL
45° JOINT
SILICONE SEALANT
WALL WALL
100mm CHROMADEK COVER

JOINT TO BE FOAM CLOSED OR PACKED STRIP
WITH MINERAL WOOL. REFRIGERANT SEALANT (NON
FREEZER ROOM TO
UCOLD ROOM WALL JOINT
INTERNAL REFRIGERANT SEALANT (NON

SILICONE SEALANT
INSULATION
SILICONE SEALANT
EXTERNAL
PANEL TO PANEL TONGUE

AND GROOVE JOINT
TYPICAL JOINT DETAILS 2 OF 2

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R04 21

SEE DETAIL R02 FOR JOINTS
CEILING ERECTION CAVITY (50mm) TO BE FILLED WITH CONCRETE AFTER

FREEZER ROOM INSTALLATION
VAPOUR SEAL TO BE CUT-OFF FLUSH
WITH TOP OF CONCRETE ALUMINIUM CHECKER PLATE
ALUMINIUM COVING (AS PER DETAIL SILICONE SEALANT
3000
R22) SEALED TOP & BOTTOM WITH ALUMINIUM COVING (AS PER DETAIL R22) SEALED
GREY SILICONE SEALANT TOP & BOTTOM WITH GREY SILICONE SEALANT
0,8mm BENT WHITE CHROMADEK CHANNEL
10 mm THICK POLYSCREED BY FFL TILE FLOOR OR 6mm THICK EXISTING FFL
BUILDER WALL POLYSCREED BY BUILDER
CONCRETE BY OTHERS
190
THICKNESS AND INSULATION 100mm POLYURETHANE

SPECIFICATION OF CONCRETE
CONCRETE LAYER TO BE REFRIGERANT SEALANT
CONFIRMED BY
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER SOLID FILL OR BASEMENT OR MEZZANINE
CONCRETE SLAB RECESSED BY OTHERS TO
150 MICRON ACCOMMODATE INSULATION
VAPOUR 150 MICRON MEMBRANE TO
MEMBRANE RETAIN CONCRETE
FREEZER ROOM WITH

RECESSED INSULATED FLOOR
RECESSED FREEZER ROOM FLOOR

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R05 21

SEE DETAIL R02 FOR
JOINTS
100mm POLYURETHANE
150mm POLYSTYRENE
INTERNAL EXTERNAL
CLEAR INTERNAL HEIGHT
TAPE MEMBRANE TO WALL FOR POURING

CONCRETE. TRIM MEMBRANE FLUSH AFTER
3000
VAPOUR SEAL TO BE CUT-OFF FLUSH WITH TOP OF POURING CONCRETE AND SEAL WITH
CONCRETE POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT ALL ROUND
ALUMINIUM COVING (AS PER DETAIL ALUMINIUM CHECKER PLATE
R22) SEALED TOP & BOTTOM WITH SILICONE SEALANT
GREY SILICONE SEALANT
0,8mm BENT WHITE CHROMODEK CHANNEL
ALUMINIUM COVING (AS PER DETAIL R22)
6mm THICK POLYSCREED BY BUILDER SEALED TOP & BOTTOM WITH GREY
SILICONE SEALANT
CONCRETE BY BUILDER
TILE FLOOR OR 6mm THICK POLYSCREED BY
190
INSULATION 100mm POLYURETHANE BUILDER

150 MICRON MEMBRANE TO RETAIN CONCRETE
THICKNESS AND CONCRETE

SPECIFICATION OF REFRIGERANT SEALANT
CONCRETE LAYER TO BE BASEMENT SLAB, MEZZANINE OR SOLID FILL
CONFIRMED BY
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER
150 MICRON VAPOUR MEMBRANE
FREEZER ROOM WITH

RAISED INSULATED FLOOR
RAISED FREEZER ROOM FLOOR

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R06 21

SEE DETAIL R02 FOR
JOINTS
80mm POLYURETHANE 100mm
POLYSTYRENE
INTERNAL EXTERNAL
CLEAR INTERNAL HEIGHT
ALUMINIUM CHECKER PLATE

3000
ALUMINIUM COVING (AS PER DETAIL SILICONE SEALANT

R22) SEALED TOP & BOTTOM WITH
GREY SILICONE SEALANT 0,8mm BENT WHITE
CHROMODEK CHANNEL
6mm THICK POLYSCREED BY TILE FLOOR OR 6mm THICK
BUILDER POLYSCREED BY BUILDER
CONCRETE REFRIGERANT SEALANT

SOLID FILL
COLD ROOM ERECTED ON SOLID FILL
UNINSULATED COLD ROOM FLOOR

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R07 21

80mm POLYURETHANE
100mm POLYSTYRENE
EXTERNAL
INTERNAL TAPE MEMBRANE TO WALL FOR POURING
VAPOUR SEAL TO BE CUT-OFF FLUSH WITH POURING CONCRETE AND SEAL WITH
TOP OF CONCRETE POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT ALL ROUND
3000
ALUMINIUM COVING (AS PER DETAIL R22) SEALED ALUMINIUM CHECKER PLATE
TOP & BOTTOM WITH GREY SILICONE SEALANT
SILICONE SEALANT
THICKNESS AND SILICONE SEALANT
SPECIFICATION OF 0,8mm BENT WHITE CHROMADEK CHANNEL
CONCRETE LAYER TO CONCRETE BY OTHERS
170

BE CONFIRMED BY INSULATION 80mm POLYURETHANE 28kg/m³ BUILDER
STRUCTURAL
ENGINEER
150 MICRON MEMBRANE TO RETAIN

BASEMENT SLAB OR MEZZANINE
150 MICRON
CONCRETE
VAPOUR
MEMBRANE
COLD ROOM WITH RAISED INSULATED FLOOR
RAISED COLD ROOM FLOOR

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R08 21

80mm POLYURETHANE
100mm POLYSTYRENE
EXTERNAL
INTERNAL TAPE MEMBRANE TO WALL FOR POURING
VAPOUR SEAL TO BE CUT-OFF FLUSH WITH POURING CONCRETE AND SEAL WITH
TOP OF CONCRETE POLYSULPHIDE SEALANT ALL ROUND
3000
ALUMINIUM COVING (AS PER DETAIL R22) SEALED ALUMINIUM CHECKER PLATE
TOP & BOTTOM WITH GREY SILICONE SEALANT
SILICONE SEALANT
THICKNESS AND SILICONE SEALANT
SPECIFICATION OF 0,8mm BENT WHITE CHROMADEK CHANNEL
CONCRETE LAYER TO CONCRETE BY OTHERS
170

BE CONFIRMED BY INSULATION 80mm POLYURETHANE 28kg/m³ BUILDER
STRUCTURAL
ENGINEER
150 MICRON MEMBRANE TO RETAIN

BASEMENT SLAB OR MEZZANINE
150 MICRON
CONCRETE
VAPOUR
MEMBRANE
COLD ROOM WITH RAISED INSULATED FLOOR
RAISED COLD ROOM FLOOR

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R09 21

AIR PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE FOR FREEZER
R10 APPLICATION ONLY (TO BE FERMOD™ OR
APPROVED ALTERNATIVE)
SECTION DETAIL
RISING HINGE HEATER TERMINAL BOX FOR FREEZER APPLICATION ONLY.

R10
ALUMINIUM
CHECKER PLATE
1200
RISING HINGE
NOTE:
1. NETT DOOR OPENING SIZE AS PER SCHEDULE
2. FREEZER DOOR ONLY TO HAVE HEATER TAPE INSTALLED ALL
ELEVATION ROUND TO THE DOOR FRAME. REFER INSULATION DETAIL R10.
3. FREEZER & COLD ROOM TO HAVE EMERGENCY EXIT HANDLE
4. DOOR FURNITURE TO BE FERMOD OR APPROVED ALTERNATIVE.
INSIDE EMERGENCY EXIT HANDLE 5. OPERATING TEMPERATURE, THICKNESS & USAGE SAME AS
INSULATED WALL PANELS
6. FREEZER ROOM TO HAVE AIR PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE &
HEATER TERMINAL BOX
OUTSIDE
PLAN VIEW OF DOOR HANDLE
STANDARD SWING DOOR

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R10 21

INSULATION
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
0,8mm CHROMADEK WALL PANEL
AROUND PERIMETER OF THE
DOOR OPENING
SILICONE GASKET HEATER TAPE ALL ROUND FOR
HEATER TAPE FREEZER APPLICATION
±60
1,8mm CHROMADEK
AROUND PERIMETER OF
THE DOOR OPENING
REFRIGERANT SEALANT
1,5mm ALUMINIUM CHECKER PLATE
END CAP
WOOL AROUND HEATER TAPE

DOOR
WOOD WITH SELF-LIMITING HEATER TAPE IN
GROOVE @ 19 w/m.
CLEAR DOOR HEIGHT 2100
REMOVABLE COVER
INSULATION
HEATER TAPE - FREEZER APPLICATION ONLY

1. SELF LIMITING HEATING TAPE @19w/m.
2. ACCESS TO HEATER TAPE FOR MAINTENANCE, TO BE
MAINTAINED WITH REMOVABLE COVERS.
3. HEATER TAPE TO TERMINATE IN ELECTRICAL BOX ADJACENT TO
DOOR. POWER & CONNECTION WILL BE BY REFRIGERATION
CONTRACTOR
TYPICAL SWING DOOR FRAME SECTION(TOP)

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R11 21

A
200 NETT DOOR OPENING DOOR OPENING PLUS 480mm
DOORSTOP DOORSTOP
OPENING DOOR
DIRECTION OF SLIDE
LOCK TO HAVE HANDLE

EMERGENCY EXIT
FACILITY
ALUMINIUM CHECKER
ALUMINIUM CHECKER PLATE TO MATCH
ALUMINIUM CHECKER DOOR
PLATE TO MATCH PLATE
DOOR
1200
GROUNDSTOP
DOOR GUIDE
A
ELEVATION
NOTE:
2. FREEZER DOOR ONLY TO HAVE HEATER TAPE INSTALLED ALL ROUND TO THE DOOR FRAME.
REFER INSULATION DETAIL R10.
3. FREEZER & COLD ROOM TO HAVE EMERGENCY EXIT HANDLE
5. OPERATING TEMPERATURE, THICKNESS & USAGE SAME AS INSULATED WALL PANELS
TOP VIEW 6. FREEZER ROOM TO HAVE AIR PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE & HEATER TERMINAL BOX
INSIDE
GASKET 2100 CANOPY

SECTION A-A OUTSIDE
STANDARD SLIDING DOOR

THERMO PANE WALK-IN DOORS
MATT BLACK ALUMINIUM CUTOUT THROUGH INSULATED WALL
DOOR FRAMES PANEL TO MATCH DOOR FRAME SIZES
OUTSIDE
THERMO PANE REACH IN THERMO PANE REACH IN
INSIDE
DOORS DOORS DOOR IN OPEN
SEE DETAIL 2 FOR JOINT OF INSULATED SEE DETAIL 2 FOR JOINT OF POSITION
WALL TO INSULATED CEILING INSULATED WALL TO
INSULATED CEILING
REFRIG. DETAILS
BLACK POWDERCOATED KICKPLATE THRESHOLD
BLACK POWDERCOATED STRIP
KICKPLATE STRIP
SEE DETAIL 5 FOR JOINT OF INSULATED WALL TO BLACK D-SHAPED BOTTOM WALK IN
SECTION A - A UNINSULATED FLOOR OR DETAIL 7 FOR JOINT OF HANDLE
DOOR FRAME
DETAILS - C
SCALE: NTS INSULATED WALL TO RAISED INSULATED FLOOR SCALE 1:10

OR DETAIL 6 FOR JOINT OF INSULATED WALL TO
RECESSED INSULATED FLOOR
TOP OF WALK IN & TOP OF WALK IN &

REACH IN DOOR REACH IN DOOR
REFRIGERATION
FRAMES TO LINE UP FRAMES TO LINE UP
DOOR ANODIZED BLACK DOOR FRAME ALUMINIUM COVING WITH 38mm ALUMINIUM
SCALE: NTS
CHECKER PLATE 150 ANGLE SEALED TOP & BOTTOM BOTH ANGLE & DOOR IN OPEN
RAMP 40x70mm WOODEN BLOCK
FOAMED IN PLACE & ANCHORED COVING WITH SILICONE SEALANT (COLOUR TO POSITION
WALK IN DOOR FRAME TO @ 600mm CENTRES MATCH FLOOR) & REFRIGERANT SEALANT (NON- INSIDE OUTSIDE
BE FLUSH WITH FINISHED ANODIZED BLACK AMUMINIUM HARDENING MASTIC)
FLOOR 40x40mm ANGLE BLACK
DETAIL 1 OF WALK IN DOOR DETAIL 2 OF REACH IN DOOR
SECTION B - B POWDERCOATED
SCALE 1:50 KICKPLATE STRIP
scale: NTS scale: NTS
38
ALUMINIUM CHECKER PLATE

1,2m HIGH TO DOOR AND WALL
REFRIGERANT SEALANT
REV DATE:
WALK-IN COLD BOTTOM REACH IN
WALK-IN COLD ROOM
ROOM
DOOR FRAME
SHELVES SHELVES SCALE 1:10
SHELVES SHELVES
800
2 LOOPS OF UNDER FLOOR ELECTRIC
HEATER ELEMENTS 10w/m TO BE REACH-IN SWING DOORS (OPENING DOOR SCHEDULE:
REACH-IN SWING INSTALLED BEFORE CONCRETE OUTWARDS RIGHT TO LEFT)
OPENING
10.04.2019
SIZE W x H
DOORS (OPENING
OUTWARDS RIGHT WALK-IN SWING DOORS (OPENING WALK-IN SWING DOORS (OPENING OUTWARDS AWAY A 2 OFF DOUBLE THERMOPANE WALK-IN DOOR (2045x800) SWING DOOR
TO LEFT) OUTWARDS AWAY FROM EACH OTHER FOR FROM EACH OTHER FOR DOUBLE DOORS OUTWARDS
B 6 OFF DOUBLE THERMOPANE REACH-IN DOORS (1935x760) SWING DOOR
DOUBLE DOORS OUTWARDS RIGHT TO LEFT RIGHT TO LEFT FOR SINGLE DOORS)
PLAN LAYOUT ON RAISED FLOOR FOR SINGLE DOORS) PLAN LAYOUT ON SOLID FILL
R12
REV -
TYPICAL CROSS-SECTION OF PANELS FOR COLD/FREEZER ROOMS
21

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R13 21

CEILING
DOOR DOOR SWING DOOR OR SLIDING DOOR

FRAME
INTERNAL
CLEAR INTERNAL DIMENSION
TAPE MEMBRANE TO WALL FOR POURING EXTERNAL

POURING CONCRETE AND POLYSULPHIDE
3000mm
SEALANT ALL ROUND
2mm ALUMINIUM CHECKER PLATE WITH SILICONE GASKET

REFRIGERANT SEALANT HEATER TAPE IN SUITABLE CHANNEL
COUNTER SUNK FIXING
CHROMODEK CORNER CAPPING
6mm THICK POLYSCREED BY COUNTERSUNK FIXING
OTHERS
REFRIGERANT SEALANT
170-COLDROOM
190-FREEZER
CONCRETE BY OTHERS RAMP TO

80 / 100
FF L
FFL
INSULATION POLYURETHANE 28 kg/m2
THICKNESS AND
SPECIFICATION OF 80mm - COLD ROOM REFRIGERANT SEALANT CONCRETE RAMP BY OTHERS
CONCRETE LAYER TO BE
CONFIRMED BY 100mm - FREEZER ROOM 150 MICRON MEMBRANE TO RETAIN CONCRETE
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER
150 MICRON MEMBRANE VAPOUR
COLD / FREEZER ROOM ERECTED WITH

RAMP UP TO RAISED INSULATED FLOOR
1. SELF LIMITING HEATER TAPE @ 19w/m.
2. ACCESS TO HEATER TAPE FOR MAINTENANCE TO BE MAINTAINED WITH REMOVABLE COVERS.
3. HEATER TAPE TO TERMINATE IN ELECTRICAL BOX ADJACENT TO DOOR. POWER CONNECTION
WILL BE BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
NOTE:
2. FREEZER DOOR ONLY TO HAVE HEATER TAPE INSTALLED ALL ROUND TO THE DOOR FRAME. REFER
INSULATION DETAIL R10 FREEZER & COLD ROOM TO HAVE EMERGENCY EXIT HANDLE
4. OPERATING TEMPERATURE, THICKNESS & USAGE SAME AS INSULATED WALL PANELS
5. FREEZER ROOM TO HAVE AIR PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE & HEATER TERMINAL BOX
STANDARD DOOR SECTION (BOTTOM) WITH RAMP

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R14 21

INSULATED WALL PANEL
FREEZER
OUTSIDE INSIDE
HEATER TAPE
TILE/POLYSCREED
SEE INSULATION DETAIL
BUILDERS WORK BY OTHERS

(THRESHOLD / SILL c/w HEATER TAPE
TO BE FLUSH WITH RAISED OR
RECESSED INSULATED FLOOR) POSITION OFL C ON OUTSIDE FACE OF
CL EXTERNAL WALL
200 100
300 SLOTFULL WIDTH OF DOORWAY

1. SELF LIMITING HEATER TAPE @ 19w/m.
2. ACCESS TO HEATER TAPE FOR MAINTENANCE TO BE MAINTAINED WITH REMOVABLE COVERS.
3. HEATER TAPE TO TERMINATE IN ELECTRICAL BOX ADJACENT TO DOOR. POWER CONNECTION
WILL BE BY REFRIGERATION CONTRACTOR
STILL/THRESHOLD DETAIL FOR FREEZER ROOMS (PART 1 OF 2)

160 75
30 SIZE TO BE DETERMINED(130) 25 50
60
10 x 10mm FLAT PLATE C/O +
COUNTER SUNK INTO TOP PLATE TO BE LARGE 150mm EACH ENDS OFF DOOR
M6 x 25 HEX. HEADBOLT TAP INTO ENOUGH TO TAKE SOCKET FOR M6 BOLTS.
BOTTOM ANGLE CENTERS INTO OPENINGS
TOP PLATE.
M6 x 35mm COUNTER SUNK BOLTS AND
NUTS M6 WASHER ON UNDERSIDE
REFRIG. DETAILS
M30 x 10 FLAT WELDED OF 75 x 50 x FITTED INTO M8 SLOT PUNCHED IN 50 x
6mm ANGLE HEATER TAPE 50mm ANGLE
DETAILS - C
OUTSIDE
INSIDE
50 x 6mm FLAT WELDED ONTO 10mm
75 x 50 x 6mm ANGLE C/O OFF DOOR PLUS FLAT TO T-SECTION
REFRIGERATION
150mm EACH ENDS
100
M6 x 75mm BOLTS AND NUTS AT 450mm SPLIT AND FLANGED RAGS
SCALE: NTS
CENTERS WELDED ON AT 450mm
CENTERS
POSITION OF
DOOR FRAME
SPLIT AND FLANGED RAGS WELDED ON AT 450mm
CENTERS.
50 x 50 x 100mm LONG BLOCK OF POLYURETHANE - TO
REV DATE:
SPACE THE FRAME M10 x 90 BOLTS ARE USED TO BOLT
PIPE SPACERS M8 I/D x M120 1/D x 50mm LONG AT FRAME TO SILL
450mm CENTERS
50 x 50mm POLYURETHANE POSITION WITH C ON THE

OUTSIDE FACE OF THE WALL PANEL AT THE BASE OF THE
10.04.2019
DOOR OPENING. PLUS 10mm EACH SIDE WRAPPED IN 375
MICRON VAPOUR BARRIER CL
R15
ENLARGED VIEW OF THRESHOLD / SILL DETAIL
REV -
STILL/THRESHOLD DETAIL FOR FREEZER ROOMS (PART 2 OF 2)
21

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R16 21
SUSPENDED OR OTHER NON-

INSULATED CEILING
PANEL JOINING A CEILING
2mm ALUMINIUM 'T' PIECE FIXED

WITH BLIND RIVETS AT 200 CENTRES
SEALED WITH SILICONE SEALANT
SILICONE
SEALANT
50 x 50 x 2L ALUMINIUM ANGLE FIXED WITH
BLIND RIVETS AT 200 CENTRES SEALED WITH
SILICONE SEALANT
±3500
±3400
CEILING
REFRIGERAN
3000
T SEALANT WALL
SILICONE
SEALANT
EXTERNAL 50 x 50 x 2L ALUMINIUM ANGLE FIXED WITH
BLIND RIVETS AT 200 CENTRES SEALED WITH
SILICONE SEALANT
INTERNAL
FFL
SEE DETAIL No. 5
EXTERIOR WALL HEIGHT AT JOINT WITH NON-INSULATED CEILING

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R17 21

500
TYPICALLY 750
M20 READY BAR

SUPPORT CAST IN WALL
PANEL SUPPORT BEAM
PANEL THICKNESS TO
BE INCREASED TO ENSURE
SUFFICIENT THERMAL BREAK
SUPPORT BRACKET
GALVANISED STEEL
SECTION LAMINATED INTO
3000
PANEL WALL
2100
FFL
INTEGRATED BUTCHERY COLD ROOM MEAT RAILS

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R18 21

500
TYPICALLY 750
SUPPORT BEAM
FULL HEIGHT
HANGING RAIL
3000
50 X 100 CHANNEL
1 x MID HEIGHT
2100
HANGING RAIL
MIN. 150 1000mm AFFL
ALL STEELWORK TO BE HOT-DIPPED

GALVANISED AFTER ALL WELDING HAS BEEN
COMPLETED.
STRUCTURE TO BE DESIGNED FOR MINIMUM
LOAD OF 1000kg/m PER HANGING RAIL.
FEET ANCHORED
TO FLOOR FFL
STAND-ALONE BUTCHERY COLD ROOM MEAT RAILS

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R19 21

ALUMINIUM CHECKER PLATE 1200mm HIGH
DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC
INTERNAL INTERNAL
ALUMINIUM CHECKER PLATE 1200mm HIGH
PLAN VIEW
INTERNAL CHEQUERED PLATE INSTALLATION

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R20 21
REAR POST
SHELVING TO BE SECURELY FIXED TO

COLD ROOM WALL PANEL WITH
ALUMINIUM BRACKETS NOTE:
SELF CAN FEEDING SHELVES TO COMPLIMENT REACH-IN
SHELF DOOR SIZES
FRONT POST
REACH-IN DOOR FRAME HEIGHT
ALUMINIUM
SUPPORT
BRACKET
A A
FLAT SHELF
ALUMINIUM
50
SUPPORT
BRACKET
SECTION A - A PLAN VIEW

SCALE NTS SHELVING FULLY SCALE NTS
NOTE: ADJUSTABLE ON FRONT AND
REAR POSTS
1. SHELVES TO COMPLIMENT REACH-IN DOOR SIZES.
2. SHELVING TO FIT BEHIND STANDARD LIQUORSHOP
COLD ROOM REACH IN DOORS.
3. SHELVING TO BE POWDER COATED BLACK.
LIQUORSHOP COLD ROOM SHELVING

REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R21 21

FACE OF WALL
TOP SECTION OF THRESHOLD
FIXED MOUNTING BRACKET
CEILING FIXING FACE FIXING
FIXED MOUNTING BRACKET
REMOVABLE STRIP CURTAIN
PVC STRIP CURTAIN 200mm WIDE x 2mm THICK

(LENGTH TO MATCH DOOR HEIGHT)
SLIP MOUNTING BRACKETS
20% OVERLAP ON EACH SIDE
OVERLAPPING
CONFIGURATION
STRIP CURTAINS
REFRIGERATION
DETAILS - C R22 21

COVING
OVERALL HEIGHT +- 65mm
COVING FIXING ANGLE
CORNER CLIP-ON COVING - INTERNAL & EXTERNAL OF COLD &

FREEZER ROOMS
COMPRESSOR AREA
MAIN ELECTRICAL SUPPLY (ON EMERGENCY PLANT ROOM LIGHTING
BACK-UP POWER) BY THE ELECTRICAL WITH A DESIGN LIGHT
CONTRACTOR. SIZE TO BE ADVISED BY THE LEVEL OF 200 LUX BY THE
REFRIG. DETAILS
SHOPRITE CHECKERS PROFESSIONAL TEAM ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
16A DOUBLE PLUG POINT BY
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
FLOOR TO BE PAINTED
DETAILS - C
BATTLESHIP GREY WITH

CHEMICAL RESISTANT
PENETRATION THROUGH EPOXY PAINT BY THE
WALL AT HIGH LEVEL BY BUILDER
BUILDER
REFRIGERATION
LOCKABLE DOUBLE DOOR
SCALE: NTS
TO PLANT ROOM
ACCORDING TO THE
STANDARD DETAIL IN THE
DOOR SCHEDULE
16A DOUBLE PLUG

POINT BY ELECTRICAL
CONTRACTOR MTA MTB
CHECKERS
PENETRATION THROUGH
WALL AT HIGH LEVEL BY
REV DATE:
BUILDER
SIMPLEX
REFRIGERATION COMPRESSOR PLANT 1 OF 2

ROOF INSULATION BY THE
PENETRATION THROUGH BUILDER TO BE FACTORYLITE
INDICATIVE MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

WALL TO STORE AT HIGH OR EQUAL APPROVED ROOF
LEVEL BY BUILDER INSULATION. (SEE FINISHING
10.04.2019
SCHEDULE)
R23
REV -
21

CONDENSER AREA TO BE MADE SECURE BY
COMPRESSOR AREA
THE BUILDER. AT LEAST TWO ADJACENT
SIDES ARE TO ALLOW UNIMPEDED FLOW OF
AIR TO THE CONDENSERS. THE SHOPRITE
CHECKERS PROFESSIONAL TEAM TO ADVISE
REFRIG. DETAILS
ON FINAL REQUIREMENTS
DETAILS - C
BAY LIGHTS (150 LUX DESIGN

REFRIGERATION
LIGHT LEVEL) FOR MAINTENANCE

PURPOSES BY ELECTRICAL
CONTRACTOR
SCALE: NTS
60m²
WATER TAP ACCORDING TO THE
SHOPRITE CHECKERS STANDARD
DETAIL FOR SERVICING OF
CONDENSERS
CHECKERS
REV DATE:
DN
REFRIGERATION COMPRESSOR PLANT 2 OF 2

LOCKABLE AND SECURE
ENTRANCE TO THE PLANT ROOM
BY THE BUILDER
INDICATIVE MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS

STAIRCASE TO THE CONDENSER
BY THE BUILDER ACCORDING TO
10.04.2019
THE SHOPRITE CHECKERS
STANDARD STAIRCASE DETAIL
R24
REV -
21

TYPICAL LAYOUTS INDEX 22
FRESH X CONCEPT CHECKERS AND HYPER STORES
SECTION 22 TYPICAL LAYOUTS

DETAIL No. LOCATION
T01 MONEY MARKET
T02 KIOSK
T03 MANAGERS AND ADMIN OFFICE
T04 CUSTOMER SERVICES
T05 SCANNING OFFICE
T06 CASH OFFICE
T07 SAFE
T08 CAFE
T09 COLD ISLAND DELI
T10 HOT DELI AND CHEESE
T11 BACK DELI PREP
T12 WINESHOP
T13 BAKERY AREA
T14 FISH AREA
T15 BUTCHERY AREA AND OFFICE / STORE
T16 TECH X
T17 PERSONAL CARE AND BABY
T18 DISPENSARY
T19 DISABLED TOILET
T20 STAFF FACILITIES
T21 TRAINING ROOM
T22 CLEANING ROOM
T23 CAMERA ROOM
T24 RETURNS
T25 RECEIVING OFFICE
T26 FRUIT AND VEG PREP
T27 REFUSE ROOM
T28 RECEIVING YARD
T29 SECURITY BOOTH, YARD TOILET AND SHOWER
T30 TROLLEY WASH BAY
T31 GENERATOR ROOM
01. Back wall painted and tiled to spec
02. A1 and A4 Slimline charcoal snapper frames
03. 2x Screens for 4 bays or more
04. Chase in 25mm Upvc conduit for power
Bulkhead line 05. Chase in 50mm Upvc conduit for data and VGA
500 6,200 06. Aluminium and glass panel
14 - 07. Counter
1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 1,400
500 475 08. Dividing Panel
- 14 09. Lotto
12 - - 08
2,200
10. Refer to details for all equipment, cable managements
2,100
2,100
- 11
475
1,922 60 218 cut outs and power points
11. Freestanding cellphone display unit and cellphone lockable
975
08 -
1,000
10 01 -
3,200
cupboard
500
07 10 -
- 12 I 12. Bumper rail
2,200
13. Signage on frame
14. Frame
09
1,200
1,100
12
850 100
- 06 I Please refer to all relevant drawings for manufacturing details,
01 07 -
TYPICAL LAYOUTS
I Back wall FFL equipment, cable managements cut outs and power points
SCALE: NTS
150
Plan Side Elevation
6,700
3,100 3,100
Bulkhead line
14 - - 13 14 -
- 06
MONEY MARKET 05 - - 04
6,200
1,700
300 300 02
1,200 1,200 1,200 1,200 500 682 218
02 03
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER MONEY MARKET

- 08
3,200
07 01 09 - 08 - 10 07
10 I I
REV DATE: JAN 2019

11
11
1,500
1,100
12 12
I I
FFL FFL
Rear Elevation Front Elevation

T01
REV A
22

TYPICAL LAYOUTS T02 22

3,350
Back wall
I
635
04 01
05 - 03 03. Aluminium and glass panel
04. BAT unit with shelves
05. Coke fridge
2,200
650
06
I
06. Counter with till and stepped sweet display
07. Bumper rail
08. Frame
500
800
300
Please refer to all relevant drawings for manufacturing details,

07 - equipment, cable managements cut outs and power points
- 08
Front Elevation
3,350
3,350 2,553
Bulkhead line Bulkhead line
KIOSK
I
01 - 08 08
- 02
04 05 - 03
3,200
06 -
06 -
Printer
CPU
07 - FFL FFL
Front Elevation Rear Elevation
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER KIOSK

SCALE: NTS REV DATE: JAN 2019 REV A
6,491
2,646 3,845
SITE SPECIFIC 860 1,800 900 220
150
Bulkhead line
- 18
01. Office internal walls painted full height to match FOH
MANAGER general wall colour
I
23 - 19 02. Floor to match service department tile spec

01 - 03. Aluminium doors finished anthracite grey with smokey grey
- 01 glazing
04. Aluminium windows finished anthracite grey with smokey
05 04 03 grey glazing
3,200
1,140
17 05. Front and side walls painted and tiled to spec
05 I
06. Store light switches
2,400
2,100
07. Alarm keypad if entrance doors used as primary entrance &
exit by manager
1,100
08. Provisional AC control switch
1,000
FFL 09. Provisional Refrigeration monitoring system
340
170
10. Fire Alarm box
11. Admin desk to seat 2 people
Managers Office - Front Elevation Admin Office - Front Elevation 12. Admin PC
13. On request Admin PC
6,380
14. Shelves for file storage
220 3,355 110 2,500
15. Aluminium and glass panel
150 770 16. Raised platform, steps and treads all tiled to match service
SITE SPECIFIC 754 department tile spec
04 05 - 23
I I 17. Managers office counter
16
16
300 66
19. Line of Ceiling height inside Office
TYPICAL LAYOUTS
- 03 - 12 11 14 -
SCALE: NTS
880
- 17 20. Camera system
01 - 21. AC
- 06 15 - 22. 100mm High floor tile to form tile skirting
02
2,200
2,200
- 07 23. Frame
Client
- 08 Chair
1,270
- 09 - 05 Please refer to all relevant drawings for manufacturing details,
Client equipment, cable managements cut outs and power points
01 05 Chair
- 10 I 13 - I Entrance into manager's office is always on the same side as the
Kiosk due to different counter heights.
Admin Office - Plan Managers Office - Plan

6,380
220 3,355 110
150
Bulkhead line
I
2,200 21 2,200
Ceiling line Ceiling line A B 23 Ceiling line
I
I I I
21 21 21
- 04 04 -
REV DATE: JAN 2019

01
14
- 01 01 - 05 15- 01 20 -
10 09 03 04
I I
1,700
08 07 06 14
I I I
3,200
17 01 -
C/L
I
2,700
2,700
2,700
180
11 - 12 11 05 - - 12 11
I 01 - - 05 I I
1,800
750
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER MANAGERS AND ADMIN OFFICE

1,425
16
I
1,000
1,000
T03
- 01
750
22 22 22
I I I
FFL FFL FFL
340
REV A
Admin Office - Side Elevation A Admin Office - Rear Elevation Managers Office - Rear Elevation Admin Office - Side Elevation B
22


2,346
600 SITE SPECIFIC
Bulkhead line
INFO - 02
- 09
3,200
01 04
I
1,500
1,100
06 FFL
I
I
05
Front Elevation CHECKERS HYPER ONLY
2,346
600 SITE SPECIFIC 03. Aluminium and glass panel
04. Customer service counter
05. Bumper rail
I
01
06. Floor to match FOH general floor finish
07. AC
08 - 08. Site determined, aluminium and glass panel or side wall
1,320
06 painted and tiled to spec

09. Frame
2,200
04
I
- 03
Please refer to all relevant drawings for manufacturing
details, equipment, cable managements cut outs and power
581
points
300
Entrance into customer service is always on the same side as

05 - - 09 the adjacent counter due to different counter heights
Plan
2,346
SITE SPECIFIC 600
Bulkhead line
I
07
09
- 08 03 -
3,200
04
I
1,100
930
06 FFL
I
Rear Elevation
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS HYPER CUSTOMER SERVICES

6.440
0.220 2.631 0.220 3.149 0.220
2.031 0.600 0.940 2.209
Ceiling line
- 12
03 -
- 03
03 19 03 01. Office external walls painted and tiled to spec
02. Aluminium windows finished anthracite grey with smokey
grey glazing
20 03. Office internal walls painted full height to match FOH
2.700
13 general wall colour
16 15 11
21 18 04. Floor to match service department tile spec
I
05. 100mm High floor tile to form tile skirting
22
06. Internal door with air grill
05 05
0.750
I I 07. High level AC
FFL
08. AC
Scanning Office - Elevation A Dark Room - Elevation A 09. UPS 200mm from wall
10. Main DB
6.440
11. Communication cabinet - data
2.631 0.220 3.149
12. Server cupboard shelves on sliding mechanism
0.200 13. Label printer
18 14. Zebra printer
I
I I 15. MFS 1 (2x for all Hyper stores)
I
03 14 0.900 03 16. Workforce management PC / Kronos PC
16 15 18
11 17. Scanning office desk
900
TYPICAL LAYOUTS
SCALE: NTS
13 - 12 18. Power Trunking
17 19. Amp / Ref. server
- 03 10 - A
20. Screen / Label server
1.980
2.200
04 - 07 04 21. OBS server
03 - B 22. Retail Radio server
- 02 09
03 - 06 03
I I
I
equipment, cable managements cut outs and power points
0.220
01 D C
Scanning Office - Plan Dark Room - Plan
6.440
1.980 0.220 0.220 3.149 0.220 2.631 0.220 0.220 2.200
Ceiling line Ceiling line Ceiling line
I
- 07 07 - 08
- 03 03 - 03 -
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER SCANNING OFFICE

03 - 06 03 03 - - 18 03 03 - - 03 03 02 03 06
REV DATE: JAN 2019

12
2.700
2.700
2.700
13 15 13
2.100
2.100
2.100
- 16
I I
09
17 17
I I I I
05 18 18 05 18 05 18 05
0.750
0.750
I I I I
FFL FFL FFL
T05
Dark Room - Elevation C Dark Room - Elevation B Scanning Office - Elevation B Scanning Office - Elevation D
REV A
22

01. All doors to open outwards
02. Save door
03. Office internal walls painted full height to match FOH general wall colour
04. Floor to spec, with 100mm high floor tile to form tile skirting
05. Concrete ceiling over entire cash office
06. Window
07. Worktop
08. Movable drawer and shelving unit
09. Division panels
Please refer to all relevant drawings for manufacturing details, equipment, cable managements cut outs and
power points
17,005
9,315 110 6,010 110 1,000 230
1,215 3,000 3,000
- 01
TYPICAL LAYOUTS
SCALE: NTS
- 05
07 - 09
07 06
750
04
I
08 03 -
2,200
- 02
04 04
- 01
- 01
03 03
I I
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER CASH OFFICE

230
Save Cash Office - Plan Cash Up - Plan ID - Plan
REV DATE: JAN 2019

T06
REV A
22


2,530
115 115 115 115 115 115
1,840
115
345
115
115
3,450
2,760
2,760
115 115 115
345
Plan
Notes:
Save to receive 115mm 30MPA concrete fill between 115mm skin
walls and reinforced with 12Y reinforcing bars on 200 x 200mm
grid to eng details
Concrete ceiling over entire cash office
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER SAFE

SCALE: 1:50 REV DATE: JAN 2019 REV A

01. IMS unit with till, condiments and chilled
cold drinks, available in 2500 and 1875mm
02. Coffee machine
03. Pendants u/s @ 1900mm affl
04. IMS corner unit
05. IMS unit ref cake w/glass shelves
06. WHB
07. Coffee back wall unit with sink, 360x360x300mm. PRX-10-UB 10L Kwikkot
undercounter geyser in cupboard, panini press, bin and under bar fridge
08. Ice cream machine
09. Coffee retail display unit with sliding menu board
10. Frame and department signage
11. Lollipop sign
12. Cafe tables & chairs
13. Barstools and ledge @ 1150mm affl
11 -
09
I
I
I
05 07 06 -
08
02
10 - 04 - 03
01
12 13
PLAN
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER CAFE


7,216
01 06 07 08
I
12
09
WHB
6,036
UB
I
14
13
05 10
12 12
I I
03 02
01 11
I
15 I
02
Plan Entrance facing
01. Ice slab corner

02. Cross merchandiser
03. Salad
04. Deli cut Fruit
05. H/Meat
06. Sit down sushi
07. Sushi combi
08. Sushi corner
09. Cold meat, Gourmet sandwich
10. Cold meat, W/hanging bar
11. Mezze ice slab corner
12. Scale
13. Hanging cold meat
14. 1300mm low wall, tiled to spec
15. Frame and Deli department signage on all four sides
Please refer to all relevant drawings for manufacturing details, equipment, power
and finishes specs
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER COLD ISLAND DELI

I
29

17
26
- 27
25
16
25 - 15
RAMP
21 20 24
04
28 -
20 01. S/S chicken

22 02. Pizza 1250
03. Dry heat 1875
*
04. Scale
05. AMB corner
23 06. Hot buffet 1875
07. ref bm 1875
Cheese - Plan 14 08. Canopy
15
I
09. Convec oven
10. Pizza oven
18 - 11. Deep fryer
I 12. Chicken grill
*
15 - 08 13. Stove
09 14. Ice machine
13 15. Flycatcher
07 I
15 16. Cold room ideal min size 5sqm
17. Freezer room ideal min size 5sqm
10
11 18. Lollipop sign for Deli and Cheese
DB
12 All walls finished to spec

19. Frame and Deli department signage
20. Cheese S/O 2500
19 - 04 21. AMB corner
I I
08 08 22. Worktop
06 23. IMS Cheese upright
24. Refr pipe riser
25. Cheese upright 8ft
04 - 15 26. Cheese upright 12ft
27. Cheese 3 tier island
01 28. Cheese department signage
29. Wine shop
05 03 02
details, equipment, power and finishes
Hot Deli - Plan
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER HOT DELI AND CHEESE


01
I
06 05
clean
cab. 04
I
- 07 Entrance from
trading floor
E 01
01 I
I
4X
1X 01. Floor drain
- 07 02. Pot deep sink
03. Fat trap
04. Clean cab
02 05. Cold room ideal min size 5sqm
03 I 06. Freezer room ideal min size 5sqm
C H I
01 07. Flycatcher
I
C
C

details, equipment, power and finishes specs
Plan
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER BACK DELI PREP


8,310
09
10
|
- 08
11
8,715
- 07 01. Arch over with signage on fanlight u/s at

2400mm
02. Window
03. Outrigger wall bands - special
04. Outrigger wall bands
04 05. Outrigger wall bands - site specific
06. Wine pigeon hole display
12 07. Wine gondola end
- 06 08. Wine gondola
- 02
09. 2 Door fridge and focal unit
10. Internal curved ceiling
05 11. Wine tasting focal
12. Wine tasting table
Please refer to all relevant drawings for
03 manufacturing
details, equipment, power and plumbing
I
Wine tasting included if wine shop size permits
01
Plan
8,310
8,310
10
|
WINE
route I
01
Bulkhead line
4,150
4,000
3,200
2,400
FFL
Front Elevation
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER WINE SHOP


20 19
FHR
- 17
- 13 12 -
- 16
18 26
DB
I
01. 8ft Cake ref.
07 02. Cake ref 2500
WHB 12 03. Dry cake 2500
04. Pies 1250
05. Bakery line-up
06 - 06. Scale
22 - 07. Bakery line-up
08. Bakery back wall
10 - 09. Pie unit
- 08 10. Pot sink
05 11. Power pole
12. Flycatcher
- 09 13. Canopy
14. MC Slimline
23 - 15. MC Proover
16. Deep fryer
17. Hotplate
- 15 18. Flour store
04 19. Freezer room ideal min size 5sqm
20. Cold room ideal min size 5sqm
21. Bakery freestanding unit
11 21 - 22. Panini Stand
I 23. Bulkhead line
25. Lollipop sign
- 13 03 26. Wineshop
- 14
details, equipment, power and finishes
06 -
- 11
- 14
02
- 24
11
I
12 - - 25 21 -
01
Plan
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER BAKERY AREA


05
I
MACHINE
ICE
11 -
14 13
10 -
01. Fish upright 6ft

09 02. Fish ice slab 1875
03. Dry food 1875
06 08 04. Scale
05. Flycatcher
06. Overspray unit
07. WHB
08. Saw
09. Canopy
10. Prep sink
07 11. Pot sink
I
04 12. Ice machine
I 13. Cold room ideal min size 5sqm
- 05 14. Freezer room ideal min size 5sqm
15. Bulkhead line
05 - 16. Frame and Fish department signage
17. Lollipop sign for Deli and Cheese
18 All walls finished to spec
I 18. Pendants
01 02 03
Please refer to all relevant
15 drawings for manufacturing details,
I
equipment, power and finishes
I
16
- 17
Plan
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER FISH AREA


I
05 I LP - 26
DB 19
06
I
20
- 06
16
WHB
18
I
13 13 - 04
17
23
- 15
12 12
- 09 - 09 03
05
I
11 11
1830
S/S TABLE
14
02
10 10 01. 12ft Chicken
- 21 02. 12ft Gourmet
03. 12ft High-low
04. Biltong display
I - 09 I - 09 05. Scale
30 22 - 27 05 05 06. Flycatcher
28 - 07. Vacuum machine
08. S/S Table
06 - 25 09. Power pole
07 08 I 24 -
29 29 - 10. Wrap
- 26 11. S/S table
12. Saw
A
Butchery Office / Store - Plan 13. Cutting table

14. Biltong dryer
15. Marinade
ceiling @ 3 250mm AFFL 16. 8ft T/D meat
01 17. 1300mm low wall
18. Mincer
19. Racking
20. Pot sink
30 27 29 21. Window
I I I
22. Office/ Store
23. Cold room ideal min size 30sqm
24. Bulkhead line
01 26. Lollipop sign
28
I
27. Aluminium door & window frame finished
anthracite grey with clear glazing
28. Office desk and power skirting on wall below table top
FFL 29. Wallbands with adjustable shelving for files
30. Wallbands with adjustable shelving for packaging

Butchery Office / Store - Sectional Elevation Butchery - Plan details, equipment, power and finishes specs
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER BUTCHERY AREA AND OFFICE / STORE

- 01 - 01
02 - 03
04
I 05
- 12
08 -
I I
06 07
08 -
09 -
09 -
09 -
- 13
09 -
- 14
09 -
10 - CHECKERS HYPER ONLY

01. Gondolas adjacent to Tech X
02. Blue vinyl flooring
09 - 03. Barstools
04. Arch over from goal post
05. Cellphone contracts counter
06. Checkout counter
09 - 07. Pendants over counter
08. Peg wall display for sim cards and gift cards
09. Brand wall display
10. Focal with screen
09 - 11. Goal post with department signage
12. Gondolas adjacent to department on the back
13. Brochure stand
14. Demonstration tables
09 -
- 11 equipment, cable managements cut outs and power points
Plan
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS HYPER TECH X


I
01
01 03 -
I
02 -
I
01
01
I
02 -
I
01
05 - 01
04 I
I
07 -
I
04
D/B
06 -
HWB
04
I
I
04
04
I
I
04
04
I
I
04
04
I
Plan
01. Baby wall and floor gondolas

02. Baby display plinth - Only for Hypers
03. Baby focal - Only for Hypers
04. Personal Care wall and floor gondolas
05. Suspended LED extrusions
06. Suspended Personal Care department signage
07. Dispensary / Medirite

LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER PERSONAL CARE AND BABY

14.160
0.540 0.220 2.200 0.220 6.859 0.220 0.900 0.110 2.671 0.220 01. Dispensary queuing area tiled and
0.183 0.966 0.418 0.964 0.418 0.964 0.418 0.964 0.418 0.964 0.183 0.900 0.5900.130 2.060
painted to spec
02. Steel railing
0.220
03. Bench
D/B 04. Pegboard
- 16 17 - 05. Focus wall with glasses display in
alcove, "Cross" signage
- 14 13 06. Counter with equipment, shelves and
2.180
privacy screens
2.210
12 -
07. ID tiled and painted to spec,
aluminium door finished anthracite grey
- 11 with smokey grey glazing
- 08 15 08. Dispensary shelves with pelmet to
4.240
4.350
09 follow shelf layout
09. Kitchen / Compound / Office
0.800
tiled and painted to spec
1.370
6.170
10. Fridge
Bulkhead line 11. Compounding area
06 07
FE I 12. Lockable pedestal for S6 drugs
10
I
1.339
13. WC
18 14. Hand dryer plug @ 1300mm AFFL
0.800
15. Consultation area tiled and painted to spec
16. Shelving above
0.110
05 -
17. Fold down bed
TYPICAL LAYOUTS
0.400
SCALE: NTS
18. Private area tiled and painted to spec
03 - 19. Department signage
1.221
1.380
1.600
- 02 01 Please refer to all relevant drawings for
manufacturing details,equipment, cable
0.220
04 - managements cut outs and power points

0.220 2.441 0.220
0.379
Plan
14.160
0.355 0.300 1.870 0.300 0.355 6.839 1.140 0.120 2.880
0.300
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER DISPENSARY

0.785 0.300 0.785 0.355 6.839 0.238
Store bulkhead line
- 19 Dispensary ceiling line

Medirite bulkhead line
REV DATE: JAN 2019

PRESCRIPTIONS OVER THE COUNTER
- 05
GLASSES DISPLAY
07
- 08
3.200
3.000
04
06
I
2.400
2.100
2.100
- 02
T18
FFL
I
REV A
01
0.300
Front Elevation
22


1,800
500
B
08
|
07 09 01. Door to open outwards

02. Hand dryer
- 06 03. Vanity shelf
1,800
04. WHB
- 05 A 05. Mirror
06. Grab rail
- 04 07. WC
08. Flush
- 02 09. Space for wheelchair
- 03
details,equipment, power and plumbing
01 -
Plan
1,800 1,800
500
CEILING 450 494 115 CEILING
- 05 02 05
2,700
770
I
- 06 - 06
1,750
- 08
I
04 04
160
03
1,000
820
09
740
740
820
07 07
480
480
FFL FFL
Elevation A Elevation B
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER DISABLED TOILET

10,759
230 900 115 900 115 900 115 900 115 6,239 230
230

I
06
I
05
1,800
2,700
04 02
03
550 230 900
I I
230
01 01
I
06
700
05 -
03
700
- 07 Female WC & Lockers - Plan

590
03
5,585
1,130
04
- 20 19
02
900
1,245
03 20
I
Male WC & Lockers - Plan
I
230
16
15
I
1,500
1,800
1,600
13
I 600 300
17
12 - 11 08
4,730
I
- 14
09 -
03
3,000
I
10
18
Canteen - Plan
230
01. WC walls tiled full height to spec 11. Barstools to spec

02. WC floors tiled to spec 12. Pendants to brand colour u/s at 2100mm AFFL
03. Lockers 13. Fixed table and bench with loose chairs to spec
04. WC cubicle 14. Countertop with overhead and below shelving
05. WHB 15. Stainless steel sink
06. Hand dryer 16. Canteen walls tiled up to 1400mm and painted above to
07. Urinals spec
08. Canteen floors tiled to approved tile spec and pattern 17. Boiling water dispenser
09. 1400mm high wall tilled full height and on top with power and usb points 18. Fridge
10. Dining ledge top at 1100mm AFFL 19. Passage tiled to spec and flows into canteen and WC's
20. Passage walls tiled up to 1400mm and painted above to
Symbol indicates change in wall finish spec
Please refer to all relevant drawings for manufacturing details, equipment, drainage and power
NB - Canteen layout and design is still in the approval process
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER STAFF FACILITIES


5,300
5,300
100 1,400 1,400 1,400 1,000
10
LOCKERS
1,264
11
01 - 01. Walls painted to spec
600
02. Floor tiled to spec

03. Power skirting
04. Lockable metal box acting as marker housing
4,350
02
05. Lesson desk TV box fixed to the wall using a wall mounting bracket
1,000
06. 16A double dedicated plug socket & network point behind TV
07. Chase in 25mm Upvc conduit for power
08. Chase in 50mm Upvc conduit for data and VGA
09. Storage cupboard 1200 L x 450 D x 750mm H
600
10. Lockers
- 03 09 11. Table and chairs
I
A 12. White board
886
05 - 12
- 04 03 I
I
06 details, equipment and power
B
Plan
230 Layout specific 230

Bulkhead line Bulkhead line
- 08
600
07 - 01 01
- 05
- 06 - 05
793
793
2,700
2,700
- 12 04 -
2,100
- 04
1,850
09 - - 09
1,307
1,307
03
I
FFL - 03 02 FFL
I
Elevation A Elevation B
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER TRAINING ROOM


2,500
I
04 06
03 -
01
05
05 - 02
3,000
08 -
06 08 -
07
Plan
01. Floors tiled to spec

02. Drainage point 100mm dia.
03. Walls painted and tiled up to 1500mm to spec
04. Drip Sink 640 x 460mm
05. Sleush 560 x 460mm
06. Floor polish machine 1317 x 830 x 1110mm H
07. 3-4 tier shelving for chemicals
08. Toolplex aluminum mount brackets
09. Mop drying rack
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER CLEANING ROOM

3,440

I
06 05
2,440
07
02
01 03
I
Plan
Ceiling line
I
07 08
I
09
01
2,700
10 10
400
06 11
200
I
750
I
04
05 I
FFL
Elevation
01. Office internal walls painted full height to match FOH general wall colour
02. Floor to match service department tile spec
03. Aluminium door finished anthracite grey with smokey grey glazing
04. 100mm High floor tile to form tile skirting
05. Power trunking
06. Work top
07. Wallbands with steel adjustable shelving
08. LED light
09. 9U Swinframe network box
10. 32" Wall mounted LED monitor
11. 19" Desktop LED monitor

LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER CAMERA ROOM

7,170

220 3,000 220 3,500 230
Ceiling line
I
14
05 04
07
I
01 02
I I
3,500
02 -
2,100
- 08
- 01
I
I
12
13
FFL
Sorting Room - Elevation A Holding Room - Elevation A
7,170
I
10 -
230
I
12 I
07 04
11
I
13
- 01 06 - 01 A
S/S TABLE
2,650
2,190
1830
09 02 - - 03 02 -
- 08
05 07
I
I
01
230
I
03
Sorting Room - Plan Holding Room - Plan
01. Strip curtain 08. Stainless steel sorting and packing table
02. Lockable expanded metal sliding gate 09. Floor tiled to spec and sloped as shown
03. Refer to detail 12 in specifications for transition 10. Gully drain "Pollution Solution"
between typical porcelain tiles and concrete floors 11. 150mm Floor gully laid to falls
04. All 4 walls painted to spec 12. Tap point
05. All 4 walls tiled to spec 13. Single drip sink
06. No floor tiles in holding area 14. Gypsum Rhinoboard ceiling
07. Wallband racking
Please refer to all relevant drawings for manufacturing details, equipment, power and
plumbing
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER RETURNS

4,372
230 750 3,162 230
Ceiling line
- 10
470
01
2,700
11
I
1,900
I
05
750
06 I
FFL
Elevation A
4,372
230 750 3,162 230
12 01. Office internal walls painted full height to match FOH general wall colour
02. Floor to match service department tile spec
10 - 03. Aluminium doors finished anthracite grey with smokey grey glazing
04. Aluminium windows finished anthracite grey with smokey grey glazing
750 230
3,960
230 750 2,000 750 230 - 04 05. 100mm High floor tile to form tile skirting
Ceiling line 06. Power trunking
07. Photocopier
TYPICAL LAYOUTS
SCALE: NTS
08. High level steel adjustable shelving
- 08 10 - 09. High level AC
470
- 03
01 02
3,960
2,000
10. Communication cabinet for data
11. Receiving clerk admin desk with drawers and lockable cupboards
12. Charging area for scanners plug points, to be above worktop level for ease
2,700
11 of connecting charger
I - 04
11 A
2,157
I
1,900
- 07
750
I
B - 06 Please refer to all relevant drawings for manufacturing details,
05 I
750
06 I - 08 equipment, cable managements cut outs and power points
FFL 09
Please note this is a generic drawing and must be adapted to site
230
C D
Elevation C Plan
3,960
230 400 900 900 900 400 230 4,372
750 2,000 750 230 1,866 1,296 750 230
Ceiling line Ceiling line
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER RECEIVING OFFICE

I
01
09
REV DATE: JAN 2019

10 -
470
08 - - 08
03
01
04 04
2,700
2,700
12 11
2,157
2,157
2,100
I I
1,900
11 -
- 06
I
05 05
750
750
T25
I 06 I
FFL FFL
REV A
Elevation D Elevation B
22


5,000
2,770
10
11
I
1,200
3,310
09 04 -
9,893
02
I
230
1,500
04 - 01. Sliding door
02. Strip curtain
01 - 03. Refer to Detail 12 in specification regarding the transition
07 between typical porcelain tiles and concrete floors.
04. Walls tiled full height to match floor tile spec
1,500
08 05. Double Pot sink for veg prep

06. Paper towel holder above sink
3,583
07. 1830 S/S Table

- 03
08. Fruit & Veg prep, ideal min size 13sqm (Ambient)
05 09. Fruit & Veg holding, ideal min size 15sqm (Drop temp)
I 10. Cold room, ideal min size 10sqm
06
07
I 11. Insulated sliding door
Double Pot sink
Please refer to all relevant drawings for manufacturing details
and equipment
Plan
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER FRUIT & VEG PREP


3,460
230 900 1,200 900 230
230
- 02
700
950
- 01
7,800
- 03
5,690
- 01
230
Plan
01. Gate
02. Roller shutter 1200mm w x 2400mm h
03. Floor drain
Please refer to all relevant documents for finishes specs
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER DRY REFUSE ROOM

1,960
230 1,500 230

2,570 1,800 230
4,830
230
16
10
I
18
15 13
17
14
12 12
- 09
11
07
I
08
I
19
05 06
I I
11 01 02 02 02 02
1,200
I I I I I I
I - 03 I - 03 I - 03 I - 03
04 04 04 04
Plan
01. Roller shutter 1200mm w x 2700mm h 07. Line of canopy over 13. Trolley storage
02. Roller shutter 2400mm w x 2700mm h 08. Stairs 14. Trolley wash
03. Sliding / folding gate 09. Ramp 15. Wet refuse
04. Air curtain 10. Steel sliding gate 16. Staff entrance
05. Loading dock 11. Generator room 17. Security booth
06. Bumper railings fixed vertically in front of loading dock 12. Staff parking 18. WC
Please refer to all relevant drawings for manufacturing details and equipment 19. Crate store
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER RECEIVING YARD


02
01
- 03
04 -
05
01. Security booth
02. Security ledge and cupboards to be confirmed
03. WC
04. WHB, with 600mm high splashback tiles
05. Shower
Plan Please note approval on the security booth, wc and shower

are pending
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER SECURITY BOOTH,

YARD TOILET AND SHOWER

2,000
- 04
- 03
- 01
2,000
- 02
- 04
Plan
01. Trolley wash bay 4m2

02. Floor drain
03. Trap
04. Kerb
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER TROLLEY WASH BAY


04
05
05
06 -
02 -
03
01
Plan
01. 1800mm Gate with padlock

02. 2400mm High palisade fence
03. Containerised generator units to be sized and confirmed by WSP
04. Palisade gate with padlock
05. 23000L Horizontal diesel tank
enclosed in bunded area
06. Palisade fence on 900mm high bund wall
07. Floor to Bunded, area to be raised above yard +-400mm to allow for oil/diesel separator or draw-off pit
If generators are not containerised units, generators should sit in fully closed off rooms with a roof and
four brick walls.
Please refer to all relevant drawings for manufacturing details and equipment.
LOCATION: FRESH X CHECKERS AND HYPER GENERATOR ROOM


Fresh X - CH CH Hyper Supermarkets Specification - May 2019-Cvm

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fresh X - CH CH Hyper Supermarkets Specification - May 2019-Cvm

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CHECKERS HYPER

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

6 TILER & PAVER 47 - 62

9 FOUNDER & SMITH 68 - 70

10 PLUMBER & DRAINLAYER 71 - 78

15 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 89 - 171

16 MECHANICAL 172 - 181

17 REFRIGERATION & INSULATION 182 - 187

18 FIRE 188 - 190

20 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES 192 - 218

21 GENERAL DETAILS DET01 - R24

22 TYPICAL LAYOUTS T01 - T31

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

2.2.4 Trolley Bay 6

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

2.11 STAINLESS STEEL BUMPER RAIL 19

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

3.3.10 Polyethylene Film 27

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

5.1.7.4 Adhesion of the Screed to Base Concrete 42

SECTION 6: TILER & PAVER

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

6.5 BACKGROUND PREPARATION (PORCELAIN TILES) 50

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

7.3 JOINERY PRIMING 63

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

8.15 LOCK TO STRONG ROOMS 67

SECTION 9: FOUNDER & SMITH

SECTION 10: PLUMBER & DRAINLAYER

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

10.11 POLYETHYLENE AND UPVC PIPES 71

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

10.41 SUSPENDED PIPING IN TENANTED AREAS 76

SECTION 11: PAINTER

SECTION 12: GLAZIER

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

SECTION 13: WATERPROOFER

SECTION 14: SITE WORKS

SECTION 15: ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

15.1.2.2 New Mains Power Supply System 89

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION

15.1.6.9 Cash-Up Room 106

© Copyright of this document vests with SHOPRITE CHECKERS (PTY) LTD.

FRESH “X” CHECKERS & CHECKERS HYPER SUPERMARKETS DETAIL SPECIFICATION